PROJECT MANUAL / SPECIFICATIONS

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

for

DAVITA

PULSE PROJECT NO. 12102

SET NO.

Pulse Design Group, Inc. ARCHITECTURE/INTERIORS/ MEDICAL EQUIPMENT (913) 438-9095 PROJECT MANUAL/SPECIFICATIONS

For

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

for

DAVITA

Pulse Design Group, Inc. ARCHITECTURE/INTERIORS/ MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 8207 Melrose Drive, Suite 145 Lenexa, Kansas 66214 (913) 438-9095 (913) 438-2660 FAX

Malone Finkle Eckhardt & Collins, Inc. MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS 8700 Indian Creek Parkway, Ste 180 Overland Park, KS 66210 (913) 322-1400 (913) 825-6697 FAX

______

Specification Date: July 1, 2013

______

This Project will not be constructed with Federal assistance

Architect's Project No 12102

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

For

DAVITA

PULSE Project No. 12102

INDEX

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Form of Bid Bond (AIA Document A310-1970) Form of Agreement (AIA Document A101-2007) Performance Bond and Payment Bond (AIA Document A312-1984) General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document A201-2007) Supplementary General Conditions 01000 - Summary of Work 01027 - Applications for Payment 01035 - Modification Procedures 01040 - Coordination 01045 - Cutting & Patching 01050 - Field Engineering 01095 - Reference Regulations, Guidelines & Definitions 01100 - Enumeration of Contract Documents 01200 - Project Meetings 01300 - Submittal Procedures 01400 - Quality Control & Inspections 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 01500 - Temporary Facilities & Controls Interim Life Safety Measures Checklist 01600 - Materials & Equipment 01700 - Project Closeout 01740 - Warranties & Bonds 01900 - Owner Furnished Materials and Equipment

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

02050 - Demolition & Sequence of Construction 02070 - Selective Demolition 02160 - Excavation, Grading, Cutting, Fill & Backfill

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03100 - Concrete Work

12102

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY WORK

04200 – Unit Masonry 04703 - Manufactured Masonry

DIVISION 5 - METALS

No Work in this Division

DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY

06100 - Rough Carpentry 06200 - Carpentry & Millwork

DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100 - Waterproof and Dampproofing 07210 - Building Insulation 07552 - Existing Roofing System 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 07840 - Fire Stopping 07900 - Joint Sealers

DIVISION 8 - DOORS, ETC.

08100 – Steel Doors & Frames 08111 - Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames 08211 - Flush Wood Doors 08310 - Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door 08400 - Aluminum Entrance Doors, Frames and Storefront 08700 - Hardware 08800 - Glass & Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09060 - Finish Schedule 09060 - Clinic Planning Guidelines-Finish Schedule 09250 - Drywall 09500 - Mineral Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09650 - Resilient Floor Tile 09680 - Carpeting 09700 - Seamless Flooring 09900 - Painting

12102

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10050 - Toilet Accessories 10100 - Miscellaneous Construction Specialties 10260 - Wall & Corner Guards 10426 - Signage and Graphics 10500 - Metal Lockers 10520 - Fire Extinguisher Cabinets & Fire Extinguishers

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11010 - Movable Equipment 11760 - Water Treatment Equipment

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12300 - Plastic Laminate Casework 12492 - Blinds, Shades & Interior Shutters 12552 - Manual Chain & Motorized Operated Shades

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

No Work in this Division

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

No Work in this Division

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL WORK

Section 15A-General Requirements Section 15B-Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Section 15C-Fire Sprinkler System

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Section 16A-General Requirements Section 16B-General Power and Lighting

END OF INDEX

12102 INVITATION TO BID Gentlemen: The name of your firm has been placed on a pre-selected list of bidders and you are invited to submit a bid for construction of the DAVITA DIALYSIS; CLINTON, MO; 604 Kansas Avenue; Clinton, MO 64735 for DAVITA; furnishing all labor and materials for the:

General Construction - Including Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Electrical Work Contract drawings and specifications, not to exceed four (4) sets for the General Contractor and two (2) sets each for Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical, will be held for you at this office, or you may send a request for the drawings and specifications together with payment of $100.00 per set to the offices of the Architect; bidding materials will be forwarded accordingly. Any Prime Contractor (including Mechanical and Electrical) submitting a Bona Fide Bid upon returning such set in good condition within twenty (20) days after contract award, will be refunded his deposit. Any Prime Contractor, Subcontractor, and material supplier not submitting a Bid, will not be refunded the $100.00 deposit. Examination of the building site and all conditions thereon is required, since the proposal must take into consideration all such conditions as they may affect the work. Should you find any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among the Contract Documents or be in doubt as to their meaning, bring questions to our attention not later than ten (10) days prior to date for receipt of bids. The Architect will review questions and when the information sought is not clearly indicated or specified will issue a clarifying Addendum which will become a part of the Contract Documents. Bid Bonds will be required to accompany bids in the amount of 5% of the bid amount. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days. A pre-bid conference will be held at time and place to be announced. All bids shall be hand delivered to PATRICK NOBLE: 7123 Reeds Road Overland Park, KS 66204 Phone: (816) 518-4316 Or Emailed to: [email protected]

AND emailed to [email protected] Sealed bids in duplicate shall be due July 22, 2013 at 2:00 p.m. (cdt) General Construction including Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Electrical Work

The bids will be privately opened and reviewed and selected jointly by DaVita and the Developer. The Contract will be awarded to the responsible bidder complying with the conditions of the contract documents, providing the bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the Owner to accept same. Similar healthcare work completed, client references, bidders’ financial statement, proposed Subcontractors, and completion time will be carefully considered. The Owner specifically reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive minor formalities. The Owner will award one (1) contract for General Construction, including the Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Electrical Work. The bidder to whom an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. Two (2) contracts will be signed: one, with DaVita for TI and one with the Developer for MBBI. Also, please see the Developer’s Addendum to the AIA. Sincerely, Pulse Design Group, Inc. ARCHITECTURE/INTERIORS/MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

Richard L. Embers, AIA, ACHA 12102 Missouri Licensed Architect #ART 2004016306

12023

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

I. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BID PROPOSALS:

Pulse Design Group, Inc., acting on behalf of DaVita; DAVITA DIALYSIS; DAVITA DIALYSIS; CLINTON, MO; 604 Kansas Avenue; Clinton, MO 64735 for DAVITA for DAVITA for DAVITA, on the forms attached hereto, all blanks of which must be appropriately filled in, Bid Proposals will be received by Owner and then privately opened. The envelopes containing the Bid Proposals must be sealed and marked as follows. No Bid Proposal will be received after July 22, 2013, 2:00 (cst).

BID FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

for DAVITA

ADDRESS TO:

PATRICK NOBLE 7123 Reeds Road Overland Park, KS 66204 Phone: (816) 518-4316

DELIVER TO:

PATRICK NOBLE 7123 Reeds Road Overland Park, KS 66204 Phone: (816) 518-4316

II. METHOD OF BIDDING:

All Bids shall be hand delivered to PATRICK NOBLE (DO NOT MAIL) PATRICK NOBLE 7123 Reeds Road Overland Park, KS 66204 Phone: (816) 518-4316 Or emailed to: [email protected]

AND emailed to [email protected]

12102 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2

Bids shall be received on forms, attached herein, for a lump sum amount for General Construction including Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical.

III. QUALIFICATION:

Each Contractor shall be qualified in order to bid the project. As a condition precedent to the Contract award, similar healthcare work completed, client references, bidders’ financial statement, proposed Subcontractors, and completion time will be carefully considered. The Owner shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, an the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as he may request. The right is reserved to reject any Contractor where investigation or consideration of the information submitted by such Contractor does not satisfy the Owner that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract documents. The Owner specifically reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive minor formalities.

IV. BID SECURITY

Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by cash, certified check of the bidder, or a bid bond, duly executed by the bidder as principal and having as surety thereon, a company authorized to execute such in the State of Missouri, in the amount of 5% of the bid. Bid Security will be returned to successful bidders after the contract, performance, and payment bonds are executed and filed with the Owner, and to each unsuccessful bidder after the award is made. An attorney-in-fact who signs a bid bond must file with the bond a certified and effectively dated copy of his power of attorney. The Bid Security shall be made in the favor of the Owner.

V. WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF BID PROPOSALS:

Any Bid Proposal may be withdrawn or revised in writing prior to the scheduled time for opening of Bid Proposals.

VI. ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF BID PROPOSALS:

The bids will be privately opened and selected jointly by DaVita and the Developer. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bid Proposals and waive all informalities or irregularities provided such rejections or waiver of informalities or irregularities is acceptable to any local or federal parties having jurisdiction. The Contract will be awarded to the responsible bidder complying with the conditions of the contract documents, providing the bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the Owner to accept same. As a condition precedent to the Contract award, the type of work completed, bidders' financial status, proposed Subcontractors, and completion time will be carefully considered. The bidder to whom an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date.

VII. CONTRACT AGREEMENT FORM:

The form that will be used for all contract agreements is the form attached herein. Two (2) contracts will be signed: one, with DaVita for TI and one with the Developer for MBBI. Also, please see the Developer’s Addendum to the AIA.

12102 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 VIII. AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Contract Documents are available and may be inspected at the following locations:

1. Pulse Design Group, Inc. 8207 Melrose Drive, Suite 145 Lenexa, Kansas 66214 Phone: (913) 438-9095 Fax: (913) 438-2660 Sean Handley

2. Malone Finkle Eckhardt & Collins, Inc. MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS 8700 Indian Creek Parkway, Ste 180 Overland Park, KS 66210 Phone: (913) 322-1400 Fax: (913) 825-6697

Contract Documents may be checked out from the office of the Architect, Pulse Design Group, Inc., Architects/Planners, 8207 Melrose Drive, Suite 145, Lenexa, Kansas, upon deposit of $100.00 per set. Any Contractor not submitting a Bid will not be refunded the deposit. Checks shall be payable to Pulse Design Group, Inc., Architects/Planners. This deposit will be returned to the bidder upon the return of the Contract Documents in good condition. The deposit will not be returned if Contract Documents are mutilated or so marked that they are not reusable; or if not returned within twenty (20) days after the receipt of bids.

IX. EXAMINE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND VISIT SITE:

Before submitting a Bid Proposal, bidders shall carefully examine the Contract Documents; visit the site of work; fully inform themselves of all existing conditions and limitations, including those of labor; and shall include in the Bid Proposal a sum sufficient to cover the cost of all items contemplated by the Contract Documents. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the material, article, or piece of equipment to be furnished or work to be done; it being understood that the tender of a Bid Proposal carries with it the agreement to furnish and install all items and conditions referred to herein or indicated in the Contract Documents.

X. DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS:

Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the Architect, who will, time permitting, issue a written instruction in the form of an addendum to all bidders of record. Neither the Owner, nor the Architect will be responsible for any oral explanations or the interpretations of the Contract Documents.

12102 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4

XI. BID FORM:

Each bid shall be made in the form of the Bid Form bound in the Specifications. All blank spaces in the form shall be filled in. Give unit prices where applicable. Incomplete Bid Form may be cause for rejection. The time of completion is considered as a part of the bid and must be filled in by the bidder.

XII. ADDENDA:

All Addenda issued during the time of bidding shall become a part of the Contract Documents and shall be listed in the Bid Proposals.

XIII. CONTRACT SECURITY:

Each Contractor will be required to provide Contract Security in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.

XIV. SUBSTITUTIONS:

Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified in the Contract Documents by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalog numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable, provided the material, article, or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance and function. It shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect's written approval.

Approvals may be requested as follows:

Prior to receipt of Bid Proposals: Bidders may submit to the Architect, written requests for approval of material, article, or piece of equipment which they guarantee as equal or superior to that specified.

1. Submission of such items for consideration by the Architect shall be made allowing sufficient time for due consideration to be given before bid opening. Submissions shall include fully detailed specifications and a listing of uses in similar projects. Samples shall be submitted if requested.

2. If, in the judgment of the Architect, the material, article, or piece of equipment is acceptable, approval will be given in an addendum issued to all bidders on record.

After signing the contracts: In the event that an alternate or substitution of materials, article, or piece of equipment is requested during the progress of construction by either the Contractor, Owner or the Architect, the Contractor shall submit data, drawings or cuts necessary, together with a written quotation stating the amount of the addition to or deduction from the contract price for the proposed alternate or substitution.

12102 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 Any modifications necessary as a result of the use of an approved substitute shall be paid by the Contractor proposing the substitution.

If the substitution is not approved, the Contractor shall use the specified material, article, or piece of equipment.

END OF SECTION

12102 BID FORM, Page 1

Contractor ______

Address ______

______BID FORM

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

for DAVITA

TO: DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

for DAVITA

In compliance with the Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and equipment and perform all work as set forth for the construction DAVITA DIALYSIS; CLINTON, MO; 604 Kansas Avenue; Clinton, MO 64735 for DAVITA, in strict accordance with the Specifications dated July 1, 2013, and the drawings mentioned therein for the consideration of the amount following:

BUILDING SHELL PORTION OF WORK FIRST & SECOND TIER COSTS SUBCONTRACTORS Division 01 – General Requirements General Conditions Work OH & P Permit Allowance Division 02 – Demolition Division 03 – Concrete Division 04 – Masonry Division 05 – Metals Not Used ______Division 06 – Wood and Plastics Division 07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection

12102 BID FORM, Page 2

Division 08 – Doors and Windows Doors and Frames Hardware Glass & Glazing Aluminum Entrance Doors Power Operators Division 09 – Finishes Gypsum Wallboard Systems Acoustical Ceilings Ceramic Tile Not Used ______Sheet Vinyl, Resilient Flooring & Base Carpeting Painting & Wall Covering Seamless Flooring Division 10 – Specialties Division 11 – Equipment Division 12 – Furnishings Division 13 – Special Construction Not Used ______Division 14 – Conveying Systems Not Used ______Division 15 – Mechanical/Plumbing Division 15 – Fire Protection Division 16 – Electrical Division 16 - Fire Alarm Systems Division 17 – Low Voltage Systems Not Used ______

TOTAL GMP

12102 BID FORM, Page 3 INTERIOR FINISH

PORTION OF WORK FIRST & SECOND TIER COSTS SUBCONTRACTORS Division 01 – General Requirements General Conditions Work OH & P Permit Allowance Division 02 – Demolition Division 03 – Concrete Division 04 – Masonry Division 05 – Metals Not Used ______Division 06 – Wood and Plastics Division 07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection Division 08 – Doors and Windows Doors and Frames Hardware Glass & Glazing Aluminum Entrance Doors Power Operators Division 09 – Finishes Gypsum Wallboard Systems Acoustical Ceilings Ceramic Tile Not Used ______Sheet Vinyl, Resilient Flooring & Base Carpeting Painting & Wall Covering Seamless Flooring

12102 BID FORM, Page 4 INTERIOR FINISH (Cont’d)

Division 10 – Specialties Division 11 – Equipment Division 12 – Furnishings Division 13 – Special Construction Not Used ______Division 14 – Conveying Systems Not Used ______Division 15 – Mechanical/Plumbing Division 15 – Fire Protection Division 16 – Electrical Division 16 - Fire Alarm Systems Division 17 – Low Voltage Systems Not Used ______

TOTAL GMP

COMPLETION Time for completion shall be in accordance with the Modifications to the General Conditions and shall be completed within ______calendar days.

This bid shall be valid for sixty (60) days following the date for receipt of the bid.

KEY PERSONNEL Name key personnel to be assigned in performing this Contract.

______Vice President

______Project Manager

______Engineer

______Superintendent

12102 BID FORM, Page 5

PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A copy of the preliminary project schedule shall be submitted with this Bid.

ADDENDUM RECEIPT - The receipt of the following Addenda to the Specifications is acknowledged.

Addendum No. ______Date ______

Addendum No. ______Date ______

Addendum No. ______Date ______

BID ACCEPTANCE: If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) days after the date of opening of the bids, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned, will within ten (10) days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing, or delivering of such Notices, execute and deliver a Contract in the Form of Agreement attached to the Specifications and Bid as accepted.

The Bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the scheduled time for the opening of the Bids or any authorized postponement thereof.

The undersigned hereby designates as his office to which such Notice of Acceptance may be mailed, telegraphed, or delivered:

Dated ______, 2013 Company ______

By ______

______

______Business Address

______License No.

NOTE: If Bidder is a Corporation, write State of Incorporation under signature and if a Partnership, give full name of all Partners.

DIRECTIONS FOR MAILING PROPOSAL

Envelopes containing Proposals, Qualification Statements, Affidavits, must be sealed, marked and addressed as follows: (Mark in lower left hand corner)

Proposal for Construction of: DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64735

Address to: PATRICK NOBLE 7123 Reeds Road Overland Park, KS 66204 Phone: (913) 518-4316 [email protected]

12102

SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

The following modifications change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions/Modifications and Additions to General Conditions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.2 The Contract:

"By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and the Project constructed, has informed himself as to the possible problems inherent to the Work and the Project, and correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents."

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 1.2.1:

"and they shall be deemed to be a part of the executed Owner-Contractor Agreement as though signed by both the Owner and Contractor."

1.4 INTERPRETATION

a. Add the following Subparagraph 1.4.1:

"1.4.1 Where 'as shown', 'as indicated', 'as detailed' or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specifications is made unless otherwise stated. Where 'as directed', 'as required', 'as authorized', 'as reviewed', 'as accepted' or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirements, permission, authorization, review, or acceptance of the Architect is intended, unless otherwise stated."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 1.4.2:

"1.4.2 As used in the Contract Documents, 'provide' shall be understood to mean 'provide complete in place'

2.1 GENERAL (OWNER)

a. Add the following Subparagraph 2.1.1:

"Wherever the term Owner is used in the Contract Documents, it refers to DAVITA DIALYSIS; CLINTON, MO; 604 Kansas Avenue; Clinton, MO 64735 for DAVITA”

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-2

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

a. Delete Subparagraph 3.3.1 in its entirety and insert the following in lieu thereof:

"3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract."

b. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.3.2:

"or furnishing any materials under a contract with the Contractor or his Subcontractors."

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.4.2:

"3.4.2.1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifica- tions)."

b. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.4.2:

"3.4.2.2 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above, the Contractor:

.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.

.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified.

.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitutions which subsequently become apparent; and

.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects."

c. Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.4:

"3.4.4 The reference standards referred to in the Specifications shall be the edition current at the time of the bid opening."

3.5 WARRANTY

a. Substitute the following fourth sentence in Subparagraph 3.5:

"The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear under normal usage, caused by or attributable to Owner, and modifications not executed by the 12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-3

Contractor."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 3.5.1:

"3.5.1 The General Contractor, and/or any Contractor, the Subcontractor, and/or any Subcontractor shall warrant all Work or any portions of the Work as case may be against defects resulting from the use of any inferior materials, equipment or workmanship for one (1) year from the date of final completion of the Agreement or from beneficial occupancy of the building by the Owner, whichever is earlier."

c. Add the following Subparagraph 3.5.2:

"3.5.2 Wherever work, repairs, or changes are required, after date of formal acceptance of the Work, under the Warranty contained in this paragraph 3.5, and pursuant to this Agreement, the Contractor whenever notified by the Architect, whose decision in all cases shall be final, shall immediately:

.1 Place in satisfactory condition in every particular such warranted work.

.2 Make good all damage to the building or grounds, or the equipment or contents thereof, if such unsatisfactory condition or damage develops within the period stipulated by the Warranty and is due to the use of material or workmanship which is inferior, defective, or not in accordance with this Contract, and must make good any work or materials of the equipment and contents of said building or grounds which is disturbed in fulfilling any such Warranty."

d. Add the following Subparagraph 3.5.3:

"3.5.3 Upon the Contractor's failure to so proceed promptly to comply with the terms of any Warranty under this Contract, or still running upon such Work originally executed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors, the Owner, acting through its duly authorized representative may either:

.1 Have such Work performed as the Architect deems necessary to fulfill such Warranty at the expense of the Contractor, who shall fulfill such Warranty, or the Owner may;

.2 Allow such damaged or defective Work or portion of the building or grounds or contents or equipment of the building, or Work disturbed in fulfilling Warranty, or Warranted Work which shows such a condition as to make any such Warranty operative, to remain in such unsatisfactory condition and the Contractor pay to the Owner, such sums of monies as it would have been necessary to expend to fulfill such Warranty."

3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.7.1:

"And necessary for the occupancy and use, by the Owner, of the completed Work."

b. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.7.2:

"or in connection with the Work and the Project site."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-4

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT

a. Add the following Clause 3.9.3.1:

"3.9.3.1 The Superintendent shall not be changed without the Owner's consent transmitted through the Architect, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Owner or ceases to be in the Contractor's employ."

3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

a. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 3.10.1:

"3.10.1 The Contractor, within ten (10) days after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information, an estimated Construction Schedule for the Work. The Schedule shall include, but not be limited to, a starting date and completion date for each Area of the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents. The Schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practica- ble execution of the Work. The Construction Schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents and shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by conditions of the Work and Project."

b. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 3.10.2:

"3.10.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, within 14 days after being awarded the Contract, a complete itemized list of all products, equipment, material layouts, etc., for which Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples are required, indicating for each the name of the Subcontractor or supplier and the approximate date of planned submission. In advance of the submittals required by Subparagraph 3.12.5, the Contractor shall submit a complete schedule establishing all dates that will have to be followed for the start of the Work for the various trades. The Schedule shall be kept current and allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals."

c. Add the following Subparagraph 3.10.4:

"3.10.4 The Contractor shall submit copies of a monthly Construction Schedule/Sequence of Construction, with Application for Payment, in duplicate, marked to show itemized progress to date, and shall indicate degree of completion of each major division and Area of the Work, whether behind or ahead of scheduled time, and shall indicate by line graphs the planned and actual percentage of completion of each Area of the Work and of entire Project."

d. Add the following Subparagraph 3.10.5:

"3.10.5 Similar itemized construction schedules described in 3.10.4 shall be submitted by Subcontractors for Mechanical and Electrical Work, to accompany their substantiating requests for payment."

e. Add the following Subparagraph 3.10.6:

"3.10.6 The Owner shall review and approve the Construction Schedule/Sequence of Construction prior to start of Work."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-5

f. Add the following Subparagraph 3.10.7:

"3.10.7 If the Monthly Construction Schedule/Sequence of Construction indicates that any Area of the Work is behind schedule, the Contractor or appropriate subcontractor, shall specify, in writing, with practicality the reasons for the delay and the measures they will undertake to cure the delay."

3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE

a. Substitute the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.11 as follows:

"The Contractor shall maintain at the site, for the Owner, one (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples which have been reviewed and accepted by the Architect."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 3.11.1:

"3.11.1 As part of the requirement for completion of the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect, Record Drawings consisting of a complete set of sepias, purchased by the Contractor for that purpose, upon which the Contractor shall show all changes from the original plans made during construction. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the inclusion of marked sepias from Mechanical and Electrical Contractors or Subcontractors and to insure that they indicate the correct location of piping, major conduit, equipment and the location of all values, switches, panels, etc.; and any other information of a pertinent or useful nature to the Owner. All notations shall be made in ink in a neat and legible manner, with any additional explanatory drawings or sketches necessary."

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.12.5:

"Shop Drawings, Erection Drawings and Setting Drawings shall be submitted as one copy of legible and reproducible ozalid (sepia), with positive side up, and three prints for each drawing (other than printed brochures or catalogs, which shall be submitted in (7) copies). The sepias and prints shall be submitted rolled within a mailing tube, fully protected for shipment. After review by the Architect, the sepia shall be returned to the Contractor and he shall print the required number of copies for his own records.

Shop Drawings shall be marked with the name of the Project, numbered consecutively and bear the stamp of approval of the Contractor as evidence that the Drawings have been check by the Contractor. Without this stamp of approval, the Shop Drawings will not be considered acceptable and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. Shop Drawings shall include the Architect/Engineer's drawing numbers, room numbers, schedule numbers or other identification for coordinating Shop Drawings with the Architect/Engineer's Drawings. The Architect shall review the Contractor's submittals in accordance with Sub- paragraph 4.2.7, after which the Contractor shall make any revisions required by the Archi- tect and resubmit prints of the corrected sepias to the Architect for final review."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-6

b. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 3.12.7:

"3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work, which have been reviewed and accepted for design concept conformance by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with the accepted submittals."

3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

a. Add the following Subparagraph 3.14.3:

"3.14.3 All cutting shall be carefully done, to minimize repair. Core drill concrete for holes 6" in diameter and smaller; use of star drill or jackhammer is not permitted. For larger openings, sawcut outline and break out; take care to prevent excessive spilling on reverse side. Cutting of structural components shall not be permitted without written approval from the Architect."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 3.14.4:

"3.14.4 All patching shall be done in neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics of the trade involved, with material and finish to match adjacent surfaces, and repairing and restoring the Work to original condition."

c. Add the following Subparagraph 3.14.5:

"3.14.5 The Contractor, when requiring cutting and patching of existing floors, walls, roof, etc., shall make necessary arrangements and be responsible for the costs thereof."

d. Add the following Subparagraph 3.14.6:

"3.14.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to walks, street curbs or grounds through operations under this contract. Whenever public property is damaged, it shall be restored to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction of local authority having jurisdiction."

3.15 CLEANING UP

a. Add the following Subparagraph 3.15.3:

"3.15.3 The Contractor shall:

.1 Oversee cleaning and insure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and debris.

.2 Provide and maintain a rubbish chute from the upper floor to the ground level for the removal of waste materials, rubbish and debris.

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-7

.3 Designate locations for Contractors to take rubbish, provide containers for rubbish to be stored and make provisions for hauling rubbish from site, all of which will be included in the General Conditions."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 3.15.4:

"3.15.4 Each Subcontractor shall:

.1 Clean up all waste materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from the subcontractor's own operations at such frequencies as required by the Contractor.

.2 Place waste materials, rubbish, and debris (except from demolition operations) in a place designated by the Contractor.

.3 Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces of fixtures, hardware, and equipment furnished as a part of the subcontractor's agreement.

.4 Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes damaged by each subcontractors own operations. .5 Leave the Work clean."

3.19 ACCESS TO BOOKS AND RECORDS

a. Add the following Subparagraph 3.19.1:

"3.19.1 Upon written request, the Contractor and the Architect shall make available for a period of four years after furnishing of services under this Agreement, to the Secretary of the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services, or upon request to the Comptroller General of any of their duly authorized representatives, this Agreement, and any of the Contractor's, and the Architect's books, documents and records that are necessary to certify the nature and extent of costs incurred by the Owner pursuant to this Agreement and which are required to be made available under the Omnibus Reconciliation Act of 1980, Public Law 96-499, Section 952, or any regulations promulgated thereunder. Further, if the Contractor or the Architect carries out any of its duties under this Agreement, through a subcontract with a value or cost of $10,000 or more over a twelve month period with a related organization, such contract must contain a clause to the effect that the related organization shall furnish its books, documents, and records upon request as described above to verify the nature and extent of costs."

4.1 GENERAL (ARCHITECT)

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.1.1:

"or such representative as he may have designated who is employed by him."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-8

b. Add the following Subparagraph 4.1.4:

"4.1.4 Wherever the term "Architect" is used in the Contract Documents, it refers to Pulse Design Group, Inc., 8207 Melrose Drive, Suite 145, Lenexa, Kansas 66214, who by contract with the Owner, are authorized to prepare all Drawings and Specifications and Details for this Work and observe the construction after award of contract."

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK

a. Add the following Clause 5.2.1.1:

"5.2.1.1 Not later than 14 days after the date of commencement, the Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner, through the Architect, the names of persons or entities proposed as manufacturers for each of the products identified in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications) and where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor."

5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS

a. Add the following to the first sentence of Subparagraph 5.3:

"and to give the Contractor the same power as regards to terminating any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Docu- ments."

5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS

a. Add the following new Paragraph 5.4.3:

"5.4.3.1 Subcontractors shall examine all drawings and read the specifications for all Work, whether for their specific Work or for Work of others."

"5.4.3.2 Subcontractors shall cooperate with each other, correcting and coordinating their Work in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with Work of others."

"5.4.3.3 Each Subcontractor shall report to the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Architect, all delays or difficulties encountered in the installation of the Subcontrac- tor's Work which might prevent its prompt and proper installation or make it unsuitable to connect or receive the Subcontractor's Work or the Work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute acceptance of the Work of others as fit for the receipt of the Subcontractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.

6.2. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

a. Add the following Subparagraph 6.2.6:

"6.2.6 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damaged to the Work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and court costs which the Owner has incurred." 12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-9

6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP

A. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 6.3.1:

"6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible therefor."

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

a. Add the following to Sub-subparagraph 7.3.7.

"When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, unit prices shall be applied to net increase or decrease only."

b. Delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" from the second sentence of Subparagraph 7.3.7 and substitute the following:

"an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set forth in Sub- paragraph 7.3.7.1 below."

c. Add the following Sub-paragraph Paragraph 7.3.7.1:

"7.3.7.1 The allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule:

.1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15% of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor, for work performed by his Subcontractors, 5% of the amount due the Subcontractor.

.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15% of the cost.

.4 For each Subcontractor, for work performed by his Sub-subcontractors, 5% of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.

.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.7.

.6 The Contractor's Proposal for a change in the Work shall include a complete itemization, indicating separately: (a) quantities of material; (b) unit cost of materials; (c) total hours for each classification of labor; (d) hourly rates applicable for all labor classifications: (e) Social Security, Old Age and Unemployment Insurance; (f) Contractors' Allowance for overhead and profit; and (g) number of calendar days (if any) required to complete the additional work. If the proposal includes the work of Subcontractors, sub- proposals similarly itemized shall be included."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-10

d. Add the following Subparagraph to Paragraph 7.3.8:

"7.3.8 Change orders reflecting a decrease in the contract amount shall also include the credit for overhead and profit in the percentages stated in 7.3.7.1."

7.5 CONCEALED CONDITIONS:

a. Add the following new Article 7.5 Concealed Conditions; and Paragraph 7.5.1:

"7.5.1 Should concealed conditions encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this Contract, be encountered, the Contract sum shall be equitably adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within twenty days after the first observance of the conditions."

8.1 TIME (DEFINITIONS)

a. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 8.1.1:

"8.1.1 The Contract Time, for completion of the Contract shall be as stated on the Bid Form and shall be the number of calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed issued by the Architect to Substantial Completion of the Work, as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.3, including authorized adjustments thereto."

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 8.3.1:

"If an extension of time is granted to the Contractor under the provisions of the Contract Documents, which is not attributable to an act or right of the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall absorb all costs for General Conditions items during the time extension."

b. Add the following to Subparagraph 8.3.3:

"The Contractor shall have no claim for damages against either the Owner or the Architect by reason of delay if the date of Substantial Completion of the Work is within the Contract Time as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.1. See Paragraph 3.18 of the Modifications to the General Conditions, Subparagraph 3.18.1 for the Contractor's obligation to indemnify and hold the Owner and Architect harmless."

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

a. Delete the first six words of Subparagraph 9.2 and add the following:

"9.2 Within 15 days after award of the Contract . . . "

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-11

b. Add the following Subparagraph 9.2.1:

"9.2.1 The Contractor shall also submit itemized schedules of values of the various portions of the Work of his Subcontractors for mechanical and electrical work. All schedules of values shall show the major divisions or items of work and each division or item shall be further divided to indicate separately the values apportioned to labor and to material."

9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

a. Add the following Clause 9.6.1.1:

"9.6.1.1 Until the Work is one hundred percent complete, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.

b. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 9.6.6:

"9.6.6 No Certificate for progress payment, nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of the Work or materials or be construed or relied upon as any indication that the Work or materials are in accordance with the Contract Documents, or that the amounts paid or certified therefore represent the correct cost or value of the Work or materials or that such amounts are in fact of law due the Contractor."

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 9.8.3:

"The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total payments to ninety percent (90%) percent of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for all incomplete Work and unsettled claims."

9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

a. Add the following Clause 9.9.1.1:

"9.9.1.1 In the event the Owner desires to exercise such right of occupancy, the Contractor shall cooperate in making available for the Owner's use such building services as heating, ventilating, cooling, water, lighting and telephone and shall complete as soon as practical any equipment required to furnish such services which are not ready for operation and use."

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

a. Add the following Clause 10.2.4.1:

"10.2.4.1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials, equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-12

b. Add the following clause 10.2.7.1:

"10.2.7.1 The Contractor shall be liable for any fines, penalties or charges by any regulatory body by reason of any violation by Contractor or by any Subcontractor of safety or health regulations."

11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

a. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 11.1.1:

"11.1.1 The Contractor agrees to hold the Davita harmless for liability in connection with the project. The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Owner, Architect and Contractor from the claims set forth in Clauses 11.1.1.1 through 11.1.1.8 which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:"

b. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 11.1.2:

"11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be furnished by the Contractor, with the premium thereof included in the Proposal Sum. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment and shall be written to a minimum of the following limits:

.1 Workmen's Compensation:

Workmen's Comprehensive Insurance to the statutory limits required by State Law, and Employer's liability insurance of not less than $1,000,000 covering liability under the common law for injuries or death to any such employee or employees that, for whatsoever reasons, are not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death of employees in any one accident.

Depending on the individual project, U. S. longshoremen and harbor workers coverage or some other policy extensions may be required. The Contracto- r's workers' compensation policy should also include a waiver of subrogation against Davita.

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-13

.2 Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):

Comprehensive General Liability Insurance Providing for a limit of not less than $1,000,000 for damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death in any one occurrence, and $2,000,000 General Aggregate and not less than $2,000,000 for damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property in any one occurrence. Said insurance policy shall contain no exclusions whatever relative to blasting, demolition, injury to any building or structure due to excavation, pile driving, shoring or underpinning (sometimes known as X, C and U Exclusions).

The contractor's general liability program should include contractual liability, waiver of subrogation against Davita., independent contractors, and products/completed operations beyond 2-3 years of project coverage. It should also cover personal injury; explosion, collapse and underground property damage hazards; and incidental medical malpractice.

.3 Contractual Liability:

(a) Bodily Injury:

$ 500,000 Each Person $1,000,000 Each Occurrence

(b) Property Damage:

$ 500,000 Each Person

(c) or combined $500,000 single limit coverage

.4 Personal Injury (Delete Exclusion C):

(a) $ 500,000 Each Person $1,000,000 General Aggregate

(b) or combined $500,000 single limit coverage

.5 Comprehensive Automobile Liability:

Automobile Public Liability (Bodily Injury) and Property Damage Liability Insurance to include coverage of all vehicles leased/hired by Contractor, owned by the Contractor's employees and used in his business, and/or owned by the Contractor, providing for a limit of not less than $1,000,000 (preferably $5,000,000) for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death of one person (and subject to that limit for each person), not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death of two or more persons in any one occurrence, and not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property in any one occurrence.

Davita shall be named as additional insureds under the contractor's automobile liability policy with respect to operations performed for the Owner by the contractor. 12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-14

.6 Aircraft Liability (owned and non-owned)

(a) Bodily Injury:

$2,000,000 Each Person $2,000,000 Each Occurrence

(b) Property Damage:

$2,000,000 Each Occurrence

.7 Umbrella Liability:

$2,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate

This excess liability coverage shall apply to all Contractors and Subcontractors including the General Contractor and Subcontractors for Fire Protection; Plumbing; Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning; and Electrical Work. Subcontractors whose contract is less than $100,000 need only provide $1,000,000 Umbrella excess Liability."

c. Add the following to Subparagraph 11.1.3:

"The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraphs 11.1.1 and 11.1.2. The form of Certificate shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance, ACORD or similar standard insurance company form. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. These Certificates shall also contain a provision that no endorsements, amendments or cancellations shall become effective under the policies until thirty (30) days after the Owner has received written notice from the insurer of such endorsements, amendments or cancellations." Also, the original of the Owners protective policy should be given to the Owner. If the project takes more than a year, the Owner's Protective policy should be renewed until the project is complete.

d. Add the following Subparagraphs to Paragraph 11.1:

"11.1.5 All Contractor's Insurance policies shall name the Owner and the Architect, and their representatives, as additional insureds."

"11.1.6 The required insurance must be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of Missouri at the time the policy is issued. Insurance companies writing coverage shall be A or better, Class X or better, per A. M. Best rating."

"11.1.7 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained, and had approved, all insurance required for this project. Nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until the insurance required has been obtained and approved."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-15

"11.1.8 If the General Liability Coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2."

11.1.5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 11.1:

"11.1.5 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain during the life of the Contract, Owner's and Architect's Protective Public Liability (Bodily Injury) and Protective Property Damage Liability Insurance, naming Davita, and Architect, and their representatives as additional named insureds, providing for a limit of not less than $500,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death of one person and subject to that limit for each person, not less than $2,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or the death of two or more persons in any one occurrence, and not less than $500,000 for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property in any one occurrence."

"The Owner and Architect's Protective Liability Insurance shall be provided as a rider to the General Liability Insurance requirements stated in 11.1.2; and shall name the Owner and Architect as additional insureds."

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

a. Substitute the following for Clause 11.3.1.3:

"11.3.1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of the insurance deductible, in the amount of $1,000 per claim, for any loss to new and/or existing property, through negligence, for which the Contractor has care, custody and control."

b. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 11.3.2:

"11.3.2 The Mechanical Subcontractor shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance, extended to cover installation, testing and temporary use of the permanent systems by the Contractor during construction. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors, in the Work."

c. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.4 in its entirety.

d. Revise the third sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.9 as follows:

"The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach or in accordance with a court judgment."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-16

e. Substitute the following for Subparagraph 11.3.10:

"11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, the issue shall be resolved by the judicial system. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with the directions of such court. If distribution of insurance proceeds by judicial proceedings is required, the court will direct such distribution."

11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

a. Delete Paragraph 11.4.1 and 11.4.2 and substitute the following:

"11.4.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be included in this Contract."

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

a. Add the following to Subparagraph 12.2.1.1:

"Including expenses."

b. Add the following to Subparagraph 12.2.2.1

"Including expenses."

14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

a. Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 14.2.1:

"14.2.1.5 is adjudged as bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of insolvency."

b. Add the following Subparagraph 14.2.5:

"14.2.5 Notwithstanding any other provision contained in this Contract, if the Owner, for serious demonstrable financial reasons caused by changes in governmental regulation or due to any revocation of or failure by the Owner to obtain other governmental approvals relating to such Project, decides to terminate the Project, the Owner shall have the absolute right, upon seven (7) days written notice to the Contractor and its surety, to terminate this Contract. In such event, the Owner will consent to immediate termination of all bonds filed by the Contractor. Furthermore, in such event, the Owner shall pay the Contractor, in full and complete satisfaction of the liability of Owner for a termination pursuant to Subparagraph 14.2.5, the following sum, less the total of all payments previously made to the Contractor:

.1 shall proven costs and expenses incurred in connection with the Work carried out through the date of termination;

.2 any additional proven loss sustained in good faith upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery;

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-17

.3 any payments made by the Contractor for obligations, commitments, and unsettled claims that the Contractor undertook or incurred reasonably and in good faith in connection with the Work before receiving the notice of termination from the Owner; and

.4 to the extent that a reasonable profit is not included in the above, a reasonable profit on all of the above.

c. Add the following Subparagraph 14.2.6:

"14.2.6 Such amount will be paid by the Owner promptly upon the Owner's receipt of satisfactory proof of claim. At the election of the Owner, the Owner may participate in Contractor's negotiations to settle the obligations, commitments, and unsettled claims referred to in .3 above. Also at the election of the Owner, if the Contractor insists that payments by the Contractor to those parties previously covered by such bonds shall be made by joint checks out of a joint escrow account established for the purpose of paying the amounts arising under .2 and .3 above, and amounts deposited by the Owner in such escrow account shall constitute payment to the Contractor. In such event, the Owner may require the Contractor to undertake such work as is appropriate to make the construction site and improvements thereon safe, secure and protected against deterioration, and Owner will promptly pay the Contractor's costs, plus a reasonable profit, for carrying out such work."

14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

a. Add the following to paragraph 14.3.2.

"14.3.2.3 No adjustment shall be made when the Owner suspends, delays or interrupts the work when such work is affecting adjoining operations patient care to the extent of noise, vibration, system interruptions or air quality."

15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST:

a. Add the following to Paragraph 15.14:

"15.1.4.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Architect written notice thereof within twenty days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3 No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order."

"15.1.4.1 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is involved because of, but not limited to (1) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Paragraph 2.3 where the Contractor was not a fault, (2) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 7.4, or (3) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 15.1."

12102 SUPPLEMENTARY / GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC-18

15.3 MEDIATION

a. Add the following paragraph 15.3.3.4:

"15.3.4 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Subparagraphs 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall be resolved by the judicial system in the State of Missouri."

"15.3.4.1 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any court proceedings, and the Owner shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents."

15.4 ARBITRATION

a. Delete entire Article 15.4

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01000, Page 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

01000 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 PROJECT SCOPE: This Project consists of tenant finish and renovation of approximately 6,069 square feet area on DAVITA DIALYSIS; CLINTON, MO; 604 Kansas Avenue; Clinton, MO 64735 for DAVITA.

Complete general mechanical, piping, fire protection, electrical lighting and electrical power systems are included as part of the Work.

Project Location: DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINTON, MO 64735 604 Kansas Avenue Clinton, MO 64024 for

Owner: DAVITA

The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.03 EXISTING CONDITIONS: Existing conditions may vary from those shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine the site and all conditions affecting the Work prior to submitting a bid. No claim for additional cost or time will be accepted for work related to variations in existing condition, which can be determined by examination.

1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS:

A. Separate Contract: The Owner intends to award a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Trailers and stored materials shall be relocated as necessary to permit work under separate contracts to be performed without interference or delay.

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES:

A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have limited use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site.

12102 Section 01000, Page 2 SUMMARY OF WORK

B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated.

Driveways and Streets: Keep driveways and streets serving the premises clear and available to the public, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

1.06 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Existing Occupancy: The existing building occupies the adjacent spaces of the existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Building Management during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Building Management usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the tenant’s operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy.

Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy.

Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building.

Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building.

1.07 OWNER-FURNISHED RELOCATED EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS:

A. The Owner will furnished selected existing equipment cabinets, and furnishings as indicted on the drawings and in schedules for relocation by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for dismantling, loading, transporting, receiving, unloading, inspecting, handling, installing and connecting all Owner-furnished items, including support systems such as piping, mechanical and electrical connections.

12102 Section 01000, Page 3 SUMMARY OF WORK

The Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Such dates shall be mutually acceptable to the Owner.

The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations.

1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES:

A. Building Permit and Building Plan Review Fees to City of Clinton, MO. will be required to be paid by the Contractor.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all other work permits, governmental fees, licenses, inspections and proper notification forms necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

1.09 TIME FOR COMPLETION:

The Contractor shall complete the work from the date of the Notice to Proceed (Building Permit issued by City) to the date of the Certificate of Occupancy (issued by the City) within the time established in the Construction Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01027, Page 1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submitting Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Sections.

Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1, Section 01300 Submittal Procedures .

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including:

· Contractor's Construction Schedule · Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets · List of Subcontractors · Schedule of alternates · List of products · List of principal suppliers and fabricators · Schedule of submittals.

B. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date schedule for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.

C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values.

12102 Section 01027, Page 2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

Project Name and location Name of the Architect Project number Contractor's name and address Date of submittal

D. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

Generic description of Work Name of subcontractor Name of manufacturer or fabricator Name of supplier Change Orders (numbers) that affect value Dollar value - Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent

Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.

Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

Differential between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing.

Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

E. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item.

Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.

12102 Section 01027, Page 3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

F. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT: Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.

The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

A. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Applications for Payment.

B. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

Include amounts of Change Order signed by the Owner prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

C. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

D. Waivers of Mechanics Liens: If requested by the Owner, submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, suppliers and other entities who are lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract for the construction period covered by the previous application.

Submit waivers, when requested, with each Application for Payment.

When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner.

12102 Section 01027, Page 4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

E. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:

· List of subcontractors · List of principal suppliers and fabricators · List of products · Schedule of Values · Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final) · Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final) · List of Contractor's staff assignments and emergency phone numbers · Copies of building permits · Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work · Report of pre-construction meeting

F. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.

This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:

· Occupancy permits and similar approvals · Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements · Test/adjust/balance reports · Maintenance instructions · Meter readings · Startup performance reports · Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance · Final cleaning · Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety · Advice on shifting insurance coverages · List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion

G. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:

· Completion of Project close out requirements · Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion · Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled · Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay · Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner · Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid · Removal of temporary facilities and services · Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements · Change of door locks to Owner's access 12102 Section 01027, Page 5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01035, Page 1 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

Division 1: Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule; for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract

Division 1: Section 01027 Applications for Payment for administrative procedures governing Applications for Payment

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK: The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review.

Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

12102 Section 01035, Page 2 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

Comply with requirements in Section 01300 Submittal Procedures if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES: Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01040, Page 1 COORDINATION

01040 COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but no necessarily limited to, the following:

· General project coordination procedures · Administrative and supervisory personnel · Cleaning and protection

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

· Division 1: Section 01050 Field Engineering specifies procedures for field engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

· Division 1: Section 01200 Project Meetings for progress meetings and pre- installation conferences.

· Division 1: Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

· Division 1: Section 01600 Materials and Equipment for coordinating general installation.

· Division 1: Section 01700 Project Close Out for coordinating contract close out.

1.03 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation.

Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

12102 Section 01040, Page 2 COORDINATION

Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and other entities where coordination of their work is required.

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

· Preparation of schedules · Installation and removal of temporary facilities · Delivery and processing of submittals · Progress meetings · Project close out activities

C. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials.

D. Workmanship throughout the project shall be of the highest quality. Generally accepted standards and recommended practices of the various trade associations shall govern all work under this contract, unless otherwise specified.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.

Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office and each temporary telephone.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS:

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible to check and field verify all dimensions, elevations and conditions prior to fabricating or installing equipment, products and materials. 12102 Section 01040, Page 3 COORDINATION

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

12102 Section 01040, Page 4 COORDINATION

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to the following: · Excessive static or dynamic loading · Excessive internal or external pressures · Excessively high or low temperatures · Thermal shock · Excessively high or low humidity · Air contamination or pollution · Water or ice · Solvents · Chemicals · Light · Radiation · Puncture · Abrasion · Heavy Traffic · Soiling, staining and corrosion · Bacteria · Rodent and insect infestation · Combustion · Electrical current · High speed operation · Improper lubrication · Unusual wear or other misuse · Contact between incompatible materials · Destructive testing · Misalignment · Excessive weathering · Unprotected storage · Improper shipping or handling · Theft · Vandalism

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01045, Page 1 CUTTING & PATCHING

01045 CUTTING & PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY: This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

· Division 1: Section 01040 Coordination for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities.

· Division 2: Section 02050 Demolition and Sequence of Construction for demolition.

Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Quality Assurance:

1. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

No structural member of any nature shall be cut without prior approval of both Architect and Structural Engineer.

2. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

12102 Section 01045, Page 2 CUTTING & PATCHING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION: Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION:

Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

3.03 PERFORMANCE:

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching.

Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction.

In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and back filling.

12102 Section 01045, Page 3 CUTTING & PATCHING

Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.

Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01050, Page 1 FIELD ENGINEERING

01050 FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

· Division 1: Section 01040 Coordination for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of Section 01300 Submittal Procedures and Section 01700 Project Close-Out.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.

Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points ore requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points.

Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

12102 Section 01050, Page 2 FIELD ENGINEERING

C. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.

Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, water service piping, gas service piping, electrical service, telephone service and other utilities.

3.02 PERFORMANCE:

A. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.

Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use.

As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.

Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, utility slopes, and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for completion of the work.

D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01095, Page 1 REFERENCE REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES & DEFINITIONS

01095 REFERENCE REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited.

C. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized selected, approved, required and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.

D. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statues, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

E. Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

F. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

G. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

H. Patch and Match: The term patch and match means that the finish surface referred to shall be altered so the patched or extended surface shall have the same material, texture, finish and color as the surface being changed before alterations commenced. Contractor shall verify conditions at the site.

I. Similar: The term similar means in a general sense and does not mean identical. Construction details and installation of construction materials shall be coordinated relative to their location and connection to adjacent work.

J. Installer: An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

12102 Section 01095, Page 2 REFERENCE REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES & DEFINITIONS

The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

K. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

L. Project Site: is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

M. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.03 INDUSTRY/GUIDELINES:

A. Applicability of Guidelines: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry guidelines have the same force and effect as if bound or copies directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such guidelines are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the guidelines in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more guidelines is specified and where the guidelines may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but appar- ently equal and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level show or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Guidelines: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry guidelines applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable guidelines are not bound with the Contract Documents.

Where copies of guidelines are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

12102 Section 01095, Page 3 REFERENCE REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES & DEFINITIONS

Although copies of guidelines needed for enforcement of requirements may be part of submittals, the Architect reserves the right to require submittal of additional copies for enforcement of requirements.

E. Abbreviations and names: Trade association names and titles of general guidelines are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, guidelines-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations", published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.

1.04 GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES:

A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the required codes and regulations and retain; at the Project Site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.

B. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions for requirements for compliance with governing regulations.

C. In cases where building codes and regulations are at variance, the highest level of compliance shall be in effect. The intent of these Contract Documents is to be in compliance with applicable building codes, laws and regulations in force at the location of the project.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Permits, Licenses and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction with compliance with guidelines and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01100, Page 1 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

01100 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 CORRELATION: Accompanying these Specifications are the following Drawings which jointly with these Specifications are intended to explain each other and describe and coordinate the work to be performed under Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS

2.01 SPECIFICATIONS: Enumeration of Specifications shall be as appears in the Specifications Index.

2.02 DRAWINGS: Enumeration of Drawings shall be as listed on the drawing cover sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 VERIFICATION OF DOCUMENTS: Before submitting his proposal, each bidder shall check his set(s) of Specifications and Drawings and advise the Architect if any sheets are missing.

3.02 DIVISIONS OF RESPONSIBILITY: The Specifications are divided by Division, and the Drawings are numbered, each under headings set forth in the specification Index and in the Enumeration of Drawings herein, such headings indicating the division of responsibility between Divisions of the Work. The General Contract includes all work indicated under the headings ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL. However, the divisions created by the above headings shall not alleviate any subcontractor from work to be performed by him that is specifically indicated by the Drawings or in the divisions of Specifications of other contracts, for each subcontractor shall fully familiarize himself with all of the drawings and specifications for this project before submitting his proposal.

3.03 DOCUMENTS FURNISHED: Upon award of Contract, the General Contractor shall provide the Plumbing, Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor, Fire Protection, and the Electrical Subcontractor with the required number of sets for construction. The Successful General Contractor shall contact Western Blue Print and make arrangements for printing and paying for the cost of print, delivery, etc.

In case of revisions to the drawings during construction, the Architect will furnish the General Contractor one (1) sepia and then (10) prints of the sheet(s) changed.

END OF SECTION 12102 Section 01200, Page 1 PROJECT MEETINGS

01200 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:

Pre-construction conferences Pre-installation conferences Progress meetings

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

Division 1: Section 01040 Coordination for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction activities.

Division 1: Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Division 1: Section 01400 Quality Control and Inspections for submittals and coordination of construction.

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

Schedule a pre-construction conference, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude mattes relating to the Work.

Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

· Tentative construction schedule · Critical work sequencing · Designation of responsible personnel · Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders · Procedures for processing Applications for Payment · Distribution of Contract Documents · Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples · Preparation of record drawings · Use of the premises 12102 Section 01200, Page 2 PROJECT MEETINGS

· Parking availability · Office, work and storage areas · Equipment deliveries and priorities · First aid · Security · Housekeeping · Working hours

1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES:

Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements.

· Contract Documents · Options · Related Change Orders · Purchases · Deliveries · Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality control samples · Coordination Drawings · Review of mockups · Possible conflicts · Compatibility problems · Time schedules · Weather limitations · Manufacturer's recommendations · Warranty requirements · Compatibility of materials · Acceptability of substrates · Temporary facilities · Space and access limitations · Governing regulations · Safety · Inspecting and testing requirements · Required performance results · Recording requirements · Protection

Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect.

Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

12102 Section 01200, Page 3 PROJECT MEETINGS

1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS:

Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at weekly intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, suppliers, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at theses meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

Agenda: Review and correct or approved minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

· Interface requirements · Time · Sequences · Status of submittals · Deliveries · Access · Site utilization · Hours of work · Hazards and risks · Housekeeping · Quality and work standards · Change Orders

Reporting: No later than 7 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01300, Page 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, equipment, tools, plant, transportation, and performing all services and labor required to furnish product data, shop drawings, maintenance manuals, etc. of materials and equipment.

1.03 REFERENCES: References to known standard specifications, codes, etc., mean and intend the latest edition of such specifications, codes, etc., adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS

2.01 All submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions/Modifications and Additions to the General Conditions; and as follows: Submittals may be submitted in digital form to [email protected] or [email protected].

2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit new information, drawn to accurate scale. Indicate deviations from Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Include the following information:

Dimensions. (vertical and horizontal) Identification of products and materials included. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions establish by field measurement.

Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-12" x 11" but no larger than 30" x 42".

2.03 PRODUCT DATA: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element or system. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information:

Manufacturer's printed recommendations. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. Notation of coordination requirements. 12102 Section 01300, Page 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

2.04 SAMPLES: Submit full-size Samples cured and finished as specified and identical to the product proposed. Mount, display, or package Samples to facilitate review. Include the following:

Genetic description. Source Product name or name of manufacturer. Compliance with recognized standards. Availability and delivery time.

Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics, and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the component as delivered and installed. Where variations are inherent in the product, submit multiple units that show limits of the variations.

Refer to other Sections for Samples that illustrate details of assembly, fabrication, techniques, workmanship, connections, operation and similar characteristics.

Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.

2.05 SCHEDULES, RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit the following:

Construction Schedules Building Permits Certificate of Occupancy Record Drawings Record Surveys

2.06 CERTIFICATES, TEST REPORTS: Submit certificates and test reports including the following:

Flame Spread Certificates Certifications Independent Testing Lab Reports

2.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE: The following submittals are required for this project:

Abbreviation Codes: PD Product Data TR Test Reports S Samples SC Schedules SD Shop Drawings CA Calculations MD Maintenance Data M Miscellaneous MC Material Certificates WD Wiring Diagrams RD Record Drawings CC Color Charts CE Certification W Warranty

12102 Section 01300, Page 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section Title Required Submittal

Architectural 02050 Demolition & Sequence of Construction SC, M 02070 Selective Demolition SC, M 02160 Excavation Grading, Cutting, Fill & SC, M Backfill 03100 Concrete Work PD, SD, TR, CA, PD 04200 Unit Masonry 04703 Manufactured Masonry PD, SD, TR, MC 06100 Rough Carpentry PD, SD, CC, CE, S, W, TR 06200 Carpentry & Millwork PD, SD, CC, CE, S, W, TR 07100 Waterproof & Dampproofing 07210 Building Insulation PD, CE, TR 07552 Existing Roofing System 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 07840 Firestopping PD, CE, TR, MC 07900 Joint Sealers PD, CC, W 08100 Steel Doors & Frames SD, PD, CE, TR 08111 Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames SD, PD, CE, TR 08211 Flush Wood Doors SD, PD, CE, W 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door PD,SD,WD 08400 Aluminum Entrance Doors, Frames and PD, SD, CC, W, MD Storefront 08700 Hardware SD, PD, SC 08800 Glass and Glazing PD, SD, CE, W, S, CC 09060 Finish Schedule PD, SD, W, S Clinic Planning Guidelines-Finish Schedule 09250 Drywall PD, SD 09500 Mineral Acoustical Tile Ceilings PD, CE, S, TR, SD 09650 Resilient Floor Tile PD, CE, S, TR, MD 09680 Carpeting PD, SD, CC, S, W, MD 09700 Seamless Flooring PD, SD, CC, CE, S, MD 09900 Painting PD, CE, S, TR, CC, MD 10050 Toilet Accessories PD, SD 10100 Miscellaneous Construction Specialties PD, CC, CE 10260 Wall & Corner Guards PD, SD, CC, S, CE, TR 10426 Signage & Graphics PD, CC, S, SD 10500 Metal Lockers PD, SD, CC, SC 10520 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets & Fire PD, CE, TR Extinguishers 11010 Movable Equipment PD, SD, SC, WD, MD 11760 Water Treatment Equipment SD, PD, MD 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework PD, SD, CC, RD 12492 Blinds, Shades & Interior Shutters PD, SD, SC, CC, MD 12552 Manual Chain & Motorized Operated PD, SD, CC, S, W, TR, MD Shades

12102 Section 01300, Page 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL WORK

Section 15A-General Requirements Section 15B-Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Section 15C-Fire Sprinkler System

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Section 16A-General Requirements Section 16B-General Power and Lighting

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer (latest printed instructions), unless herein specified to the contrary.

3.02 MATERIALS - SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS: Within fourteen (14) days after award of contract, the successful Contractor shall furnish to the Architect a complete list of all materials, material suppliers, and subcontractors he plans to use on this project. This listing shall be in the following manner.

EXAMPLE:

Brand Name Sect. of Work Subcontractor Telephone Schedule Delivery If applicable (Spec. Pages) (Name & Address)

If this is not received by the Architect within the fourteen (14) day period, the Architect will make his own choice from specified materials for preparation of color schedules and the Contractor shall abide by his choice.

3.03 N.I.C. EQUIPMENT: These items are "Not in the Contract". These items are to be furnished by the Owner.

The Owner shall provide new N.I.C. equipment to the job site. The General Contractor shall receive, store, protect, set in place and the respective subcontractors shall make final hookups to provide a complete and operating installation. The General Contractor shall coordinate, with the Owner, all delivery schedules of the Owner furnished N.I.C. equipment with the Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction Schedule.

12102 Section 01300, Page 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

There is existing N.I.C. equipment which the respective subcontractors shall disconnect at the existing, deliver to the new Areas of Work, set into place, and hookup to provide a complete installation.

The General Contractor and subcontractors shall familiarize themselves with all N.I.C. equipment as indicated on the plans and specifications, for which the respective subcontractors must provide, required rough-ins and final connections, and shall verify all N.I.C. equipment with Owner prior to making rough-ins.

3.04 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and Contractor, in such cases, may at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, forms or type of construction which, in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.

B. All requests for approval of substitutions shall be submitted in writing to the Architect no later than two weeks (14 days) prior to bid date. All requests must be complete, with all data, laboratory test reports, catalog cuts, etc., furnished in detail sufficient to provide the Architect with the information needed for this determination. Failure to submit adequate information, in the judgment of the Architect, will result in rejection of the request for approval.

C. Items approved by the Architect will be included in a final addendum which will be issued to all bidders approximately one week before bid date.

D. Requests for substitutions after opening of bids will not be considered with out a corresponding cost savings to the Owner.

E. When a substituted equipment, material, product, etc. requires a change in the assembly, connection, hookup, etc. of another trade, the Contractor and/or subcontractor shall be responsible for the entire cost of all other changes required to make the substituted equipment, material, product, etc. a complete and operable system.

F. Substituted equipment, materials, products, etc., shall be rejected, if upon the review of the shop drawings, are found to be in non-compliance with the specifications of the work.

3.05 MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

Upon completion of the work and before final payment, the Mechanical, Electrical and Prime Equipment Contractors shall provide the Owner with a complete Maintenance Manual, indexed and neatly bound, on all items of equipment installed under their contract. (Submit to the Architect for inspection and approval.) Manual shall consist of manufacturer's printed sheets and details of equipment, wiring diagrams, parts lists, complete with operating instructions and a list of phone numbers for emergency service.

12102 Section 01300, Page 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

This manual shall include typed instructions for starting, stopping and operation of equipment. Also included shall be a schedule of every item of equipment requiring periodic service stating what service is required, and at what intervals, and a list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of persons to be notified in case of emergency.

The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of the maintenance manuals.

The Contractor shall thoroughly instruct the Owner in the operation of equipment using this manual as a guide, and upon satisfactory completion of this instruction, obtain a written certification from the Owner stating that this has been done. A copy of the Certificate shall be given to the Architect for his files.

3.06 REFERENCES:

References to known standard specifications, codes, etc., mean and intend the latest edition of such specifications, codes, etc., adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.

3.07 RECEIVING AND STORING MATERIALS:

A. On receipt of materials, Contractor shall check for in transit damage in ample time to replace any damaged materials prior to installation time.

B. Wherever possible, deliver materials and equipment to project site in manufacturer's original packages, keeping labels intact until final cleaning. When items are to be job assembled, label, tag, mark or otherwise properly identify each component part until incorporated in building.

C. Contractor shall store materials in a manner to prevent deterioration, staining, soiling, and intrusion of foreign materials. Provide waterproof, well ventilated enclosures for materials subject to deterioration by dampness. Adequately protect those materials subject to damage by freezing and frost.

D. Contractor shall remove from premises and replace with new, any materials showing deterioration or damage.

3.08 PREPARATION: Properly prepare all work to receive subsequent work or finish. Notify Architect if any work is unsatisfactory to receive such subsequent work or finish and receive his instructions before proceeding.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01400, Page 1 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

01400 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, equipment, tools, plant, transportation, and performing all services and labor required to furnish and erect all temporary utilities, barriers, enclosures, etc., and incidental items required for a complete installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor is responsible for the quality of the work performed by his work force and subcontractors as well as the quality of the material, equipment and supplies furnished by the Contractor to be incorporated into the work. The Contractor will designate a quality control representative who will be on site at all times when work is in progress.

The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all inspections and tests specified as the Contractor's responsibility in the various sections of the Specifications; inspections and tests required by codes, ordinances or the plan approval authority; and inspections and tests performed for the Contractor's convenience. These tests shall be made by an independent testing agency approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall advise and schedule the testing agency.

The Contractor shall advise the contractor on site field superintendent of all scheduled tests. The Contractor's quality control representative will review his drawings, procurement documents and contracts to ensure that the technical information provided and all work performed is in accordance with the latest revision of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall maintain a complete set of original contract documents, including contract drawings and specifications, on site for the work performed under his contract. These documents shall be updated to reflect all changes made through Addenda, Change Orders and Requests for Information.

The Contractor's quality control representative will perform an inspection upon receipt at the site, of all materials, equipment and supplies including those furnished him by the Owner. Items which are damaged or not in conformance with the respective submittals, quality standards, contract documents, contract drawings and specifications will be identified and segregated from accepted items. Items thus identified will not be incorporated into the work until corrective action, acceptable to the Owner and Architect, is completed.

1.05 COORDINATION SHOP DRAWINGS: The Construction Drawings are schematic in nature; therefore, the Contractor shall provide and submit coordination Shop Drawings depicting all architectural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical fixtures, fittings, devices, etc. as may penetrate the ceiling; and indicate all necessary modifications for review and approval. All above ceiling systems and ceiling device layouts shall be coordinated using the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. The coordination Shop Drawings shall be coordinated between all trades before submitting to the Architect.

12102 Section 01400, Page 2 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

This Contractor shall schedule his work so that no other Contractor or Subcontractor is delayed in the execution of his work. Complete cooperation of all trades is expected.

Examine fully the drawings and specifications for other contractors for other trades, and coordinate the installation of this work with the work of the other contractors. Consult and cooperate with other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment, and the building. The Owner's representative reserves the right to determine space priority in the event of interference between structure, piping, conduit, ducts, lighting and equipment of the various contractors.

Conflicts between the drawings and the specification shall be called to the attention of the Owner's representative and Architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the Contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Architect and his decision will be final.

Coordinate the installation of all architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical system components with all other trades. Allocate space in the different areas to allow for the installation of structural, ductwork, piping, sprinklers, waste and vents, and mechanical equipment, light fixtures, conduit above ceilings and in equipment spaces. Recommend re-routing, re-sizing or relocation of components, if necessary, so all trades can install their systems in the space allotted. Any proposed changes from the systems layout, on the drawings, shall be done in accordance with the design criteria specified in the applicable codes and shall be subject to the review and acceptance of the Architect.

Provide coordination shop drawings indicating all trades, including structural components, and electrical items for all congested areas. The coordination drawings shall demonstrate how the components will be installed and how the service area is to be maintained to such items as valves, dampers, coils necessary for the overall system installation and coordination. The scale of the coordination shop drawings shall be large enough to identify all elements, but not less than 1/4" = 1'- 0". The coordination drawings shall be on CAD, AutoCAD Version 14, minimum or later version, produced as vellums or sepias. Drawings shall be submitted in color with each trade a separate color.

All mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.

All duct, pipes, and electrical conduit shafts. Drawings to show each floor elevation level of the duct and/or pipe shaft.

All corridors in the project area.

Subcontractors responsible for the following items of work located in or above ceilings and in equipment rooms shall participate in preparing coordination drawings.

Recessed light fixtures and access above light fixtures required for maintenance.

Space design for future utility placement.

Gravity flow plumbing waste and roof drainage, and steam condensate return, and any other system that relies on gravity for flow.

Ductwork and appurtenances.

12102 Section 01400, Page 3 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

Cable tray.

Electrical conduit over two inches in diameter.

HVAC piping except for gravity flow steam condensate and pressurized domestic water piping.

Medical gas piping.

Fire sprinkler piping.

Plumbing vents.

Finished room ceiling heights.

Finished room dimensions.

The above list, in descending order, is the precedence assigned the work items for space priority. Recessed light fixtures and space for their installation has first priority, future utility space has second priority, etc.

After award of the Contract, and prior to start of construction, the General Contractor shall schedule a meeting with all subcontractors responsible of the work items listed above. The purpose of the meeting is to introduce the coordination program and to determine its implementation in relation to the progress schedule.

At the initial coordination meeting, the Contractor shall provide to the sheet metal subcontractor, mylar outline drawings showing column center lines, interior partition locations, and ceiling heights. The sheet metal subcontractor, with reference and consideration to the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, plumbing and reflected ceiling plans, shall draw, to scale, his proposed ductwork installation showing duct sizes, equipment layouts, sleeves and dimensions from column lines and from finished floors to bottom of ducts. Ductwork shall be maintained as tight as possible to the underside of the floor slab and/or beams. In congested areas, the sheet metal subcontractor shall prepare both plan drawings and drawings in section view. During this phase of the coordination program, it shall be the electrical subcontractor's responsibility to furnish the electrical requirements. This information shall be outlined on the drawings by the sheet metal subcontractor.

The ductwork layouts and coordination drawings shall be produced in sequence as mandated by the project schedule. The earliest area indicated in the schedule will receive the first effort, etc.

When the ductwork drawings for the earliest schedules area have been completed (time limitation as determined at the initial coordination meeting), the sheet metal subcontractor shall provide the general contractor with one (1) set of sepias for each participant in the effort. The general contractor shall distribute the vellums or sepias to the participating contractors. These contractors shall indicate on the sepias their proposed installation using the general scheme shown on the Contract drawings as a guide.

12102 Section 01400, Page 4 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

The major components to be indicated on the system layout vellums or sepias include (but are not limited to):

Roof drain leaders, and sleeve requirements. Coordinate with roof drainage areas.

Waste piping and vent piping.

Fire Sprinkler piping 1" in diameter and larger.

Heating hot water piping 1" in diameter and larger.

Chilled water piping.

Conveying systems, including pneumatic tube, chutes, elevators.

Conduit runs of 1" or larger.

Cable trays.

Access points for equipment, valves and control devices.

Fire wall penetrations, including sleeve requirements for fire/smoke dampers.

Steam and condensate piping.

Medical gas piping.

Ductwork, including insulation and fire/smoke dampers.

Domestic water piping 1" in diameter and larger.

Indicated room ceiling height.

Information delineated shall include a distance from column center lines, pipe/equipment size and distance from finished floor to bottom of pipe/ equipment and hangers. The information shall include sleeve size requirements for all penetrations thru floors and walls.

Information delineated shall be a distance from column center lines, pipe, equipment size and distance from finished floor to bottom of pipe/ equipment and hangers. The information shall include sleeve size requirements for all penetrations through floors and walls.

Within a period of not to exceed two (2) weeks after distribution of the vellums or sepias, the general contractor shall schedule a meeting with the Owner's representative, Architect, and participating contractors and subcontractors at which time areas of conflict shall be resolved. The vellums or sepias shall be overlayed on a light table to identify areas of conflict. All parties shall then cooperate in resolving the conflicts. Records of the agreements shall be entered on the sheet metal subcontractor's mylars, acknowledge by all participants by signature in a space provided for this purpose, and two blueline copies distributed to all involved parties. All drawings reproduction costs shall be borne by the sheet metal contractor. The above drawings, review and coordination process shall be repeated until all areas of the project have been coordinated.

12102 Section 01400, Page 5 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

When a change order request is issued, the affected subcontractors shall review the coordination drawings and bring to the attention of the general contractor and the Owner's representative any revisions necessary to the work of others not directly affected by the change order.

Coordination drawings shall be of a scale sufficient to illustrate each element in the coordination drawings.

All contractors and subcontractors shall participate in the coordination drawing process. Participation is mandatory. If a contractor or subcontractor fails to participate in the coordination drawing process, the Owner reserves the right to do the following:

Stop any and all construction progress payments for any work performed by the contractor. Such payments will be reinstated only after the contractor or subcontractor resumes participation in the coordination drawing process.

Relocate and resize contractor's work components as necessary to ensure all components will be installed as intended. In the event the contractor did not participate in the coordination process, he will not be entitled to any contract cost increases or time extension due to Owner initiated changes in the work.

The contractor shall also be held responsible for any unnecessary rework by other trade contractors that are attributable to his failure to participate in the coordination process.

The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each utility because of the scale of the drawings. Each contractor shall have included in his bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustment in routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process. The contractor will not be allowed any contract cost extra or time extension for changes dictated by the coordination process.

The coordination drawings shall be submitted to the Contractor, Architect and Owner's representative for review. The submitted coordination drawings shall indicate which contractors participated in the process and where conflicts appear to occur even after the priority ranking of utility routing has been utilized. In the event that conflicts must be resolved, recommended solutions will be provided on the coordination drawings by the Architect and returned to the contractors for implementation. All contractors shall agree to the final coordinated layout by signing off on the coordination drawings before any construction can begin.

Utility installation in congested areas is dependent on the sequence of utility installation as much as it is dependent on the physical size of the utilities. The contractors shall use the coordination process to properly sequence the installation of utilities as appropriate to ensure the above ceiling and congest area utility installation is satisfactory.

The contractor shall not submit shop drawings for equipment that may be affected by final resolution of its coordination. For example, the fire and smoke damper shop drawing submittal shall reflect the final coordination drawing status and shall not be submitted until the completion of drawing coordination.

The installation of uncoordinated work shall be cause for rejection. All costs associate with removal, materials and reinstallation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or subcontractor(s).

12102 Section 01400, Page 6 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

1.06 INSPECTIONS

A four point inspection plan for each of the bid package work areas to be performed under contract will be utilized.

A. Pre-construction coordination - Prior to commencing work, the contractor's quality control representative will meet with the Contractor's representative. Items to be reviewed are as follows:

1. Approval of shop drawings and submittals.

2. Approval of inspection and test reports on materials and equipment to be utilized.

3. Completion and acceptance of previous operations.

4. Availability of materials and equipment required.

5. Any other preparatory steps dependent upon the particular operation.

6. Safety or environmental precautions to be observed.

B. Initial inspection - Upon completion of a representative sample of a given work, the contractor's quality control representative will schedule an inspection with the Contractor and Architect's representatives to review, at a minimum, the following items:

1. Workmanship to establish quality standards.

2. Configuration to Contract Documents including contract drawings and specifications.

3. Construction methods, equipment and tools utilized.

4. Materials and articles utilized.

5. Testing methods required.

6. Approved shop drawings required.

7. Safety or environmental precautions required.

C. Follow-up inspections - The contractor's quality control representative will inspect the work daily to ensure the continuing conformance of the work to the workmanship standards established during the pre-construction and initial inspections. Follow-up inspections will be on a daily basis and recorded in the contractor's daily log.

D. Completion inspection - Upon completion of a given area of work, the contractor's quality control representative will schedule an inspection with the Contractor's representative. Non-conforming items will be identified and corrected.

12102 Section 01400, Page 7 QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTIONS

1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

The contractor shall provide and maintain on-site the full sheet size of the coordination drawings.

1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

Pre-installation meetings will be held prior to commencement of selected Scopes of Work or as specified in individual sections to discuss conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures and coordination with other work. These meetings will be chaired by the General Contractor.

1.09 MOCK-UPS

Exceptional work quality will be expected on this project. Subcontractors are responsible for coordinating with the Contractor all mock-ups required for this project. The Architect's approval must be given in writing before the contractor can continue the work.

1.10 ROOM MOCK-UP

Prior to beginning construction of the room, the Contractor shall construct a full scale mock-up in an area designated. Rooms will require device location review and approval before completing rough- ins.

All architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical items and systems as referenced by the construction documents shall be installed and deemed to be in an operating and acceptable condition by the architect prior to proceeding with the finish of the room.

1.11 OWNER PURCHASED SUPPLIES, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

The contractor's representative will be responsible for verification of supplies, materials and/or equipment purchased direct by the Owner.

Proof of delivery shall be required for all Owner purchased supplies, materials and/or equipment.

The Contractor will require the following for all Owner purchased supplies, materials and/or equipment stored off site.

1. Proof of delivery to site stored.

2. Segregated storage areas and identified materials.

3. Insured facilities (i.e., bonded warehouse).

The contractor will be responsible to coordinate all Owner furnished items assigned to his contract.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 1 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections apply to work specified in this Section.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. The following Standards are listed in this specification:

ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A416 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A568 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High- Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C25 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime, and Hydrated Lime ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C40 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens) ASTM C117 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ASTM C127 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate ASTM C128 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate ASTM C131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small- Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C138 Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete ASTM C140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 2 ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C157 Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement, Mortar and Concrete ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method ASTM C330 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete ASTM C332 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete ASTM C495 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete ASTM C1064 Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms ASTM D75 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregate ASTM D422 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort ASTM D1143 Standard Test Method for Piles under Static Axial Compressive Load ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil by the Sand Cone Method ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort ASTM D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D2937 Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive- Cylinder Method ASTM D4253 Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table ASTM D4254 Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density ASTM D4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction ASTM E605 Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring ASTM E736 Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire- Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 3

1.03 SCOPE OF WORK – TESTING:

A. Testing Services provided by the Contractor for the Owner: An independent Testing Laboratory will sample and test materials that are components of the work product of the Contractor and provide certification that the materials meet the required specifications. The laboratory shall review the certification process of supplier personnel to ensure their qualifications to perform the specified duties. The presence of a Testing Laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying the Testing Laboratory for these services.

B. Special inspections provided by the Owner: An independent Testing Laboratory shall provide special inspections for designated work, as specified herein.

1.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. The Testing Laboratory providing services by the Owner shall include Special Inspection services for the items listed below. The scope of such services for each item shall be as defined in 2003 International Building Code, or as defined in the local building code of the jurisdiction wherein the project is located. These inspections are mandatory for conformance to the legal requirements of the building code and shall be in addition to the inspections and tests otherwise defined in this specification.

1. Reinforcing Steel Placement

2. Bolts Installed in Concrete

3. Concrete Work

4. Formwork

5. Inspection of Structural Steel, Bolting, and Welding Material

6. Welding of Structural Steel

7. Prepared Earth Fill

8. Masonry Work

B. Qualifications of Special Inspector: The special inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the Building Official, for inspection of the particular type of construction or operation being inspected. The Special Inspector shall meet all the legal qualifications of the building code having jurisdiction.

C. Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector:

1. The special inspector shall observe the work assigned for conformance to the approved design drawings and specifications.

2. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official, the Architect/Engineer, and the Owner. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect/Engineer, Contractor, and Owner. A report

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 4 that the corrected work has been inspected shall be sent to the Building Official, the Architect/Engineer, and the Owner.

3. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector’s knowledge, in conformance to the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the building code.

D. See attached 2000 IBC-Section 1704 Special Instructions Check List.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING LABORATORY

A. The Testing Laboratory selected for either or both scopes of work noted above shall meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329, and shall submit to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer evidence of current accreditation from the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation, the AASHTO Accreditation Program or the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

B. The Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the Building Official of the City wherein the project is located to perform Special Inspections as outlined in the applicable building code.

C. The Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the Building Official of the City to perform special inspection and certification services as an approved inspector of prefabricated construction.

D. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field.

1.06 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY

A. Attending Preconstruction Conferences: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor; and the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall obtain and review the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer as soon as possible prior to the start of construction. All Laboratories shall attend preconstruction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, Project Manager, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers as required to coordinate materials inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project.

B. Outline Testing Program: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing and inspection program conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. The testing and inspection program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing program shall be submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer two weeks in advance of the start of construction so as not to delay the start of construction. It shall be the Testing Laboratory's responsibility that such program conforms to the requirements of the Specifications and falls within the Owner's budget for Testing Laboratory services. If the allocated budget is not sufficient to cover the services as outlined in the Specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Laboratory to notify the Architect, Engineer, and Owner so that the Laboratory services can be modified accordingly prior to the start of construction. Furthermore, the Testing

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 5 Laboratory shall monitor its expenditures throughout the course of the job and notify immediately the Owner, Architect, and Engineer, of any significant deviation from the planned testing program and budget.

C. Cost Proposal: The Testing Laboratory's proposal to the Owner shall contain the outlined testing and inspection program based on a unit price basis for tests and inspections and on an hourly basis for personnel. A total estimated price shall also be submitted.

D. Cooperation with Design Team: The Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice.

E. The Laboratory shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Inspections Required by Government Agencies: The Testing Laboratory shall perform all inspections and submit all reports and certifications as required by all government agencies.

G. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: The Laboratory shall notify the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor within 24 hours of discovery by telephone or e-mail, and then in writing of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Reports:

1. Information on Reports: The Laboratory shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and tests promptly and directly to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information:

a. Project Name b. Date report issued c. Testing Laboratory name and address d. Name and signature of inspector e. Date of inspection and sampling f. Date of test g. Identification of product and Specification section h. Location in the project i. Identification of inspection or test j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable) k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents

2. Copies: The Laboratory shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties:

a. 2 copies to the Owner or his representative b. 2 copies to the General Contractor c. 1 copy to the Architect d. 1 copy to the Engineer of responsibility e. 1 copy to the Supplier of the material tested

3. Certification: Upon completion of the job, the Testing Laboratory providing services to the Owner shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer of Record, a statement signed by a licensed professional engineer that, to the best

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 6 of their knowledge, all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

I. Accounting: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for separating and billing costs attributed to the Owner and costs attributed to the Contractor.

J. Obtaining Product and Material Certifications: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for obtaining all product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications.

K. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors.

1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Cooperation with Design Team: The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to the work, and to manufacturer's operations.

B. Furnishing Samples: The Contractor shall provide to the laboratory representative, samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified.

C. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the laboratory and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests.

D. Advance Notice: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

E. Payment for Substitution Testing: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Contractor for his convenience in performing the work.

F. Payment for Retesting: The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the cost for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and retesting done by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner as required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. Payment by Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish and pay for the following items:

1. Soil survey of the location of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor.

2. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor.

3. Concrete mix designs as prepared by his concrete supplier or by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 7 4. Concrete coring, tests of below strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer.

5. Certification of reinforcing steel and prestressing steel mill order.

6. Certification of structural steel mill order.

7. Certification of Portland cement, lime, fly ash.

8. Certification of welders and preparation of Welding Procedure Specifications.

9. Tests, samples, and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner, Architect or Engineer to establish equality with specified items.

10. Concrete cylinders for the purpose of evaluating strength at time of form stripping or for post-tensioning.

11. Any other tests when such costs are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Contractor.

H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made.

I. Tests for Suspected Deficient Work: If in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer any of the work of the Contractor is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall make all tests that the Owner, Architect, or Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The Owner shall pay all costs if the tests prove the questioned work to be satisfactory.

1.08 PAYMENT OF TESTING LABORATORY

A. The Owner will pay for the initial Laboratory services for testing of materials for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will be liable to the Owner for the cost for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall furnish and pay for the testing and inspection of all other items as specified in these Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and as determined in meetings with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 8 3.02 EARTHWORK

A. Tests of Proposed Fill Material: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor shall conduct a survey of the Contractor's proposed location of borrow soil materials and shall establish the suitability of any proposed fill material by determining the required engineering properties. Soil tests shall include soil classification by the Atterberg Limit Tests ASTM D4318, and grain size determination by ASTM D422. Soil shall be tested, in accordance with Standard Proctor Test ASTM D698.

B. Moisture - Density Relationship for Natural and Fill Materials: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor shall provide one moisture - density curve for each type of soil, natural, imported fill, or on-site fill, encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs and paved areas. Curves shall be generated in accordance with (i) ASTM D698 (ii) ASTM D1557 for cohesive soils and ASTM 4253 plus ASTM 4254 for cohesionless soils.

C. Quality Control Testing Required During Construction:

1. Inspection of Sub grade and Fill: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall inspect and approve the following subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon:

a. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of the natural subgrade for every 2500 square feet of paved area or building slab but in no case less than three tests. In each compacted fill layer or lift, make one field density test for every 2500 square feet of building slab or paved area but in no case less than three tests. b. Foundation Wall Backfill: Make at least one field density test for each 200 lineal feet of wall with a minimum of 4 tests for the basement walls around the perimeter of each building and a minimum of one test for every other type of foundation wall on the site. Tests shall be at random locations and elevations for each wall. c. Bearing Sub grade: Bearing material at Column and Wall Footings: Make at least one field density test for each column footing and one for each twenty-five lineal feet of wall or fraction thereof.

2. Field Density Tests: Field Density Tests shall be run according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2937, or ASTM D2922 as applicable.

3. Acceptance Criteria: The results of field density tests by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner will be considered satisfactory if the moisture contents 0 to 4 percent above the standard Proctor optimum moisture content with minimum 95% compaction of the standard Proctor maximum dry density

4. Report Copies: All moisture-density curves and results of field density tests shall be submitted to the parties specified earlier in this section.

5. Additional Testing: If reports by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner indicate field densities lower than specified, additional tests will be run by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner with at least the frequencies scheduled above on re-compacted fill and/or natural subgrade. Fill represented by failing test can be re-worked and re-tested. The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Contractor on a timely basis for any required retesting

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 9 so as not to delay the work. The costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. Foundation Inspection by the Testing Laboratory:

1. Material Testing: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall provide testing and inspection of materials used in foundation elements as described below.

2. Spread (Dug) Footings

a. Concrete Cylinders: Make and test concrete cylinders as specified for Poured-in-Place Concrete. b. Reinforcing Steel: Inspect reinforcing steel size, number of bars, and placement and confirm dowel or anchor bolt placement into footing.

3. Mat Footings

a. Concrete Cylinders: Make and test concrete cylinders as specified for Poured-in-Place Concrete. b. Reinforcing Steel: Inspect reinforcing steel size, number of bars, and placement and confirm dowel or anchor bolt placement into footing.

E. Foundation Inspection by the Geotechnical Engineer: The Geotechnical Engineer of Record shall provide inspection service for the following items before and during foundation installation as appropriate for the foundation type. The Geotechnical Engineer shall submit written field inspection reports promptly after inspection to all parties listed above and report his findings after each inspection by telephone or e-mail to the Engineer.

1. Spread (Dug) Footing:

a. Subgrade: Verify that foundation bearing conditions are consistent with soil report tests and that the footing is being installed in the proper soil strata at the proper elevation. Make recommendations regarding adjustment to subgrade or bearing elevation if subgrade is not adequate to support footing.

2. Mat Footing:

a. Subgrade: Verify that foundation bearing conditions are consistent with soil report tests and that the footing is being installed in the proper soil strata at the proper elevation. Make recommendations regarding adjustment to subgrade or bearing elevation if subgrade is not adequate to support footing.

3.03 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Visual Inspection: When the Contractor or reinforcing steel Fabricator notifies the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor that a shipment of reinforcing steel is in the final stages of fabrication and ready for shipment, the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor shall inspect the shipment to determine the following:

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 10 1. The bars should be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman-like finish.

2. Deformations shall be of the proper sizes, shapes, and spacing as detailed in ASTM A615.

3. The bars shall not have excessive rust and/or pelting.

4. The bars shall not have any unusual twists or bends.

B. Identified Stock: Where job material is taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, is properly identified as to heat number and is accompanied by mill and analysis test reports, such material shall be used without further local tests provided an affidavit is given from the Supplier to the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor that the materials conform with the requirements of the ASTM specification as listed on the structural drawings. In case of controversy, the procedure as stipulated below for unidentified stock shall be followed.

C. Unidentified Stock: For all unidentified stock, the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor shall review samples of the reinforcing steel bars at the time of inspection. If tags are removed from bundled bars, bar markings, shipping slips, or other means can be used to identify bar stock.

The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor shall tag each of the steel bundles with the Laboratory identification tag and appropriately mark the samples corresponding to the steel being inspected and shipped. The fabricator will supply shipping lists showing the weight of each bar size in the shipment.

Bar stock not meeting the specification shall be not used; and replaced with the correct material.

D. Tension Butt Splices: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall conduct tension tests of tension butt splices of the type as specified on the structural drawings. It is not necessary that the specimens to be tested are production splices, however, the specimens to be tested shall have been made by the Contractor's personnel under field conditions. The rate of testing shall be as follows:

1. Two specimens for the first 50 splices (or fraction thereof for small jobs) at the beginning of the job. Splices not meeting tension requirements shall be retested at Contractor's expense until all splices meet the tension requirements.

2. One specimen for every 100 (or fraction thereof) additional splices occurring on the job. Any splices not meeting tension requirements shall be retested at Contractors expense until all splices have passed the test.

3. A minimum of one test specimen shall also be selected from transition splices (splices of one bar size to another bar size), if any.

The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall provide 100% visual inspection of all mechanical tension splices on the project. Inspection shall verify conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for installation after consulting with the manufacturer, who is to be present for the first installation of the splice on the project.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 11 E. Compression Butt Splices: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall provide 100% visual inspection of all compression butt splices on the job. Inspection shall verify splice conformance with the requirements for end bearing splices as set forth in ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete as well as the manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Reinforcing Steel Field Inspection: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall inspect all reinforcement before each concrete pour to verify the information noted below. All inspection reports shall be prepared and distributed in accordance with the local building code and as specified in this specification.

1. Primary and secondary, longitudinal reinforcement has correct size and number in proper layers.

2. Longitudinal reinforcement has correct length and lap.

3. Ties and stirrups are of correct size, spacing, and number and have the proper termination-hook geometry.

4. Unscheduled face reinforcement in beams are provided and are of correct size, number and spacing and have the proper end terminations.

5. Proper hooks are provided at bar ends as detailed.

6. Reinforcement is properly supported and braced to formwork to prevent movement during concreting operation.

7. Reinforcement has proper cover.

8. Sufficient spacing between reinforcement for concrete placement.

9. Dowel reinforcement is of proper size, at proper spacing, and has proper lap length and embedment length.

10. Welded wire reinforcement is composed of flat sheets, has proper wire gage and spacing, is properly supported, and is properly lapped with a length of one square plus two inches.

11. Proper Construction/Control/Expansion joint spacing and reinforcement.

12. Reinforcement around embedded items is erected according to details.

13. Welded reinforcement has been done according to AWS requirements.

3.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND POURED IN PLACE CONCRETE

A. Tests of Portland cement: Portland cement shall be tested by a Testing Laboratory for the Concrete Supplier providing material for the Contractor, for compliance with the requirements of ASTM C150.

1. Mill Certificates: Mill certificates certifying that the cement has been tested and meets the requirements of the Specifications will be acceptable as test results, provided the cement proposed for use can be identified with test lots. Mill

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 12 certificates shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to use of any such material.

2. Retesting: Retesting of cement will be required if:

a. In the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, the cement has been damaged in storage or transit or is in any way defective. b. The cement has been in storage at the mixing site for over 30 days.

3. Cube Tests: Compressive strength cube specimens shall be made by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Concrete Supplier at the start of the job and at a frequency of one set per 250 tons of cement or whenever the source or brand of cement changes so that the quality of cement can be observed throughout the project. Each set of 2 inch cubes shall consist of three cubes for each test age as specified in ASTM C150 for the type of cement being tested. The cubes shall be tested according to ASTM C109.

B. Tests of Aggregates:

1. The Concrete Supplier providing services for the Contractor shall verify that concrete aggregates proposed for use conform to one of the following specifications:

a. ASTM C33 b. ASTM C330

2. Tests of aggregates by the Concrete Supplier providing material for the Contractor shall be made before the concrete mix is established and thereafter as the character of the aggregate changes and whenever the source of materials is changed. The following tests will be required:

a. Sampling: The Concrete Supplier providing services for the Contractor shall secure samples of aggregate in accordance with ASTM D75 from the Concrete Supplier. The proposed aggregate shall not be used until the Laboratory has approved the pit source and the plant capacity and ability to produce uniform products has been verified. b. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136 c. Organic impurities: ASTM C40 d. Soundness: ASTM C88 e. Abrasion of Concrete Aggregate: ASTM C131 f. Specific gravity: ASTM C127 (coarse aggregate), ASTM C128 (fine aggregate) g. Deleterious materials: ASTM C33 h. Materials Passing No. 200 Sieve: ASTM C117

Supplier’s record of such tests run on the proposed material will be adequate provided a written affidavit is furnished as a shop drawing submittal.

C. Concrete Mix Designs:

1. The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Concrete Supplier, acting in conjunction with the Contractor and his Concrete Supplier shall provide mix designs as required to assist the Contractor in submitting mix designs in accordance with the Specifications for each class of concrete indicated on the

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 13 structural drawings. Refer to the Section 03100 Concrete Work Specifications for mix design requirements.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 14 2. The concrete supplier providing material for the Owner shall review the submitted mix designs for conformance to the specifications and for suitability for use in the project. The Testing Laboratory shall attend the Mix Design Conference and the Pre-Concrete Conference as noted in the Section 03100 Concrete Work Specification.

D. Concrete Test Cylinders by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner:

1. Molding and Testing: Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and Laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39.

2. Field Samples: Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172.

3. Frequency of Testing: Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four standard test cylinders. A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following minimum frequency guidelines:

a. One set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day. b. Mat Foundation: One set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. c. Piers: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. d. Underreamed Footings: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. e. Piles: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each pile group under each column or wall. f. Basement Walls: One set for each 150 cubic yards. g. Spread Footings and Pile Caps: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. h. Floors: One set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each 5000 square foot of floor area. i. Columns: One set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof with a minimum of 2 sets per floor. j. Shear Walls: One set for each 50 cubic yards but not less than 2 sets per floor. k. All Other Concrete: A minimum of one set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. l. No more than one set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck. m. If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used. n. The above frequencies assume that one batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used.

The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded.

For concrete specified on the drawings to reach the required strength at 28 days, break one of the four cylinders of the set at seven days, two at 28 days.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 15 4. Additional Cylinder for Floor Form Stripping: One additional cylinder per set will be required for formed slab and pan joist floors for the purpose of evaluating the concrete strength at the time of form stripping. This cylinder shall be stored on the floor where form removal is to occur under the same exposure conditions as the floor concrete. The cylinder shall be cured under field conditions in accordance with ASTM C31. Field cured test cylinders shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples as Laboratory cured test specimens. The cylinder shall be broken at the time of form removal as directed by the Contractor.

5. Additional Cylinder for Post-Tensioned Concrete: One additional cylinder per set will be required for post-tensioned concrete floors or walls for the purpose of evaluating concrete strength at the time of stressing. This cylinder shall be subject to the same requirements for curing as stated for the stripping cylinder above. The cylinder shall be tested at the time of stressing as directed by the Contractor.

6. Cylinder Storage Box: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the job site mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory. The box shall be equipped to maintain the internal temperature of the box to between 60°F and 80°F while storing the cylinders.

7. Transporting Cylinders: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders including loss of moisture, freezing temperatures or jarring.

8. Information on Concrete Test Reports: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information:

a. Truck number and ticket number b. Concrete Batch Plant c. Mix design number d. Accurate location of pour in the structure e. Strength requirement f. Date cylinders made and broken g. Technician making cylinders h. Concrete temperature at placing i. Air temperature at point of placement in the structure j. Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at the site and whether it exceeds the amount allowed by the mix design k. Slump l. Unit weight m. Air content n. Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete do not meet Specification requirements. Seven day breaks are to be flagged if they are less than 60% of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be flagged if either cylinder fails to meet Specification requirements.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 16 E. Other Required Tests of Concrete by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner (unless noted otherwise):

1. Slump Tests: Slump Tests (ASTM C143) shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made, or whenever compliance of the concrete slump with the project specification/mix design is in question. The slump test shall be made from concrete taken from the concrete (from the “in-place” concrete (after it is pumped, bucketed, or conveyed into place). The concrete shall be considered acceptable if the slump is within plus or minus 1 inch of the slump noted on the mix design submittal form for that class of concrete.

2. Air Entrainment: Air entrainment tests (ASTM C231 or C173, C173 only for lightweight concrete) shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above.

3. Concrete Temperature: Concrete temperature at placement shall be measured (ASTM C1064) at the same time slump tests are made as cited above.

4. Shrinkage Tests: Three 4" x 4" x 11 1/4" samples shall be made and tested according to ASTM C157 for each proposed mix design for each class of concrete.

5. Chloride Ions: The Contractor shall have the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Contractor verify in a written submittal with the mix designs that the chloride ion concentration will not exceed the limits specified.

Tests shall be run for each class of concrete according to AASHTO Designation T 260-82 Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials to determine that the maximum chloride ion content does not exceed the limits stated in the concrete section of the specifications. One test shall be run for each mix design for each class of concrete at the start of the project and each time a change is made to the mix design (such as a change in aggregate type or source).

F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete:

1. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two linder breaks from each set of cylinders tested at the time indicated above.

2. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports:

a. Number of strength tests made to date. b. Strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to date, the high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation. c. Number of tests under specified strength. d. A histogram plotting the number of strength test cylinders versus compressive strength. e. Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for each test.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 17 f. Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each point plotted is the average strength of three previous test results. g. Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each point plotted is the average of 10 previous ranges.

3. Acceptance Criteria: The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met:

a. The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required f'c. b. No individual strength test falls below the required f'c by more than 500 PSI.

If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests.

G. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results:

1. Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete, as defined by any individual strength test falling more the 500 psi below the required f’c, shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. Scope of Investigations: See Specification Section 3300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for the investigations that may be required by the Engineer. The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner will conduct these investigations.

H. Concrete Batch Plant Quality Assurance: Quality Assurance shall be provided by the Testing Laboratory providing services for the concrete supplier for the classes of concrete described in each type of inspection below:

1. Continuous Concrete Inspection. Continuous concrete inspection at the batch plant and point of discharge at the job site shall be followed for the following classes of concrete:

a. Multi-Column Foundation Support. Mat Foundations or any other foundation types such as core mats, continuous strip footings, or pile caps where more than two columns are supported on a common foundation unit. b. Columns and Shear walls. Columns and shear walls containing 5,000 PSI or greater strength concrete. c. Lightweight Concrete. All structural lightweight concrete. d. Architectural Concrete. All architectural concrete.

The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall assign the required number of technicians with the necessary equipment for each scheduled concrete placement to provide continuous concrete inspection at both the batch plant and the point of discharge at the job site.

2. Initial Concrete Inspection at the Batch Plant: Initial concrete inspection at the batch plant for each pour and travel to the jobsite with the first truck loadings to inspect concrete placement at the point of discharge shall be followed for all structural concrete not specified above.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 18 The Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner will assign a technician with the necessary equipment to each scheduled concrete placement. The technician will initiate concrete mix inspection at the batch plant, and then will proceed to the project site with the first truck loadings to continue to inspect the mix at the point of discharge. He will remain at the jobsite to inspect the mix for the required consistency for the duration of the concrete placement.

I. Job Site Inspection: The scope of the work to be performed by the inspector on the jobsite shall be as follows:

1. Prior to Concrete Placing

a. Spread Footings (1) Verify footing dimension. (2) Verify top of footing elevation. (3) Verify that forms are plumb and straight, braced against movement, and lubricated for removal. (4) Inspect reinforcement per REINFORCING STEEL section. b. Grade Beams (1) Verify width, depth and elevation of grade beams. (2) Verify that forms are plumb and straight, braced against movement, and lubricated for removal. (3) Verify that carton forms below grade beam are dry. (4) Verify that carton forms are neatly formed around piers. (5) Inspect reinforcement per REINFORCING STEEL section. c. Slab-on-Grade (1) Verify that moisture retarder is provided, is lapped properly, and is not torn or punctured. (2) Verify formwork at turndowns and slab edges is plumb and straight, braced against movement and lubricated for removal. (3) Inspect reinforcement per REINFORCING STEEL section. (4) Verify there is no standing water or debris in pour area.

2. On-Site Concrete Material Testing and Inspection

a. Verify that the Contractor is following appropriate concreting practices consistent with any extreme environmental conditions at the point of placement in the structure as defined below. b. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location. c. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to achieve target slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the job site shall rest only with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. d. Obtain concrete test cylinders. e. Perform tests to determine slump, concrete temperature, and air entrainment. The slump tests shall be made on concrete taken from the same location from which the concrete for the test cylinders is obtained. f. Record information for concrete test reports.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 19 g. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not meeting the specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Architect, Engineer, and Owner. h. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day.

3. During Concrete Placing

a. Verify that the concrete is not over 90 minutes old at the time of placement. b. Verify that Hot-Weather or Cold-Weather techniques are being applied as required. c. Verify that concrete deposited is uniform and that vertical drop does not exceed six feet and is not permitted to drop freely over reinforcement causing segregation. d. Verify that there are no cold joints. e. Verify that the concrete is properly vibrated. f. Verify that the finishing of the concrete surface is done according to specifications. g. Verify that the curing process is according to specifications and that any curing compound used is applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. h. Verify that sawcut control joints on slab-on-grades are cut within 12 hours of placement. i. Verify that the formwork has remained stable during the concreting operation.

4. The job site inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the job site or test results to the Contractor, Architect, Owner, and Engineer.

J. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons:

1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number).

2. Environmental Conditions: Environmental condition limits shall be as follows unless appropriate provisions in concreting practices have been made for cold or hot weather:

a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F and rising or the average daily temperature cannot have been lower than 40°F for 3 consecutive days unless the temperature rose above 50°F for at least one-half of any of those 24 hour periods. b. Hot Weather: Environmental conditions must be such that cause an evaporation rate from the concrete surface of 0.2 lb./sq. ft./hr. or less as determined by Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R-91.

Concrete may be placed at other environmental condition ranges only with approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner or other duly appointed representative.

3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F shall not be placed in the structure.

4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs.

5. Slumps outside the limits specified.

12102 Section 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Page 20 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative.

The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents.

K. Testing of Concrete Floor Slabs for Acceptability to Receive an Adhesive-Applied, Low- Permeable Floor Covering

1. The following tests shall be made prior to installing adhesive-applied, low- permeability floor coverings such as vinyl composition tile (VCT), linoleum, sheet vinyl, vinyl-backed carpet, rubber, athletic flooring, synthetic turf, wood, acrylic terrazzo, thin-set tile, epoxy overlays and adhesives, et.al.

2. Moisture Vapor Emission Rate: Perform testing according to ASTM F 1869 to determine if the moisture emission rate from the floor is below the flooring manufacturer’s maximum recommended value but not greater than 5lbs/1000sq.ft./24hours.

3. Alkalinity Testing: Perform testing in accordance with ASTM F 710-98, paragraph 5.3, to determine if the pH level of the concrete slab surface is below the flooring manufacturer’s maximum recommended value but not greater than 10. Perform three tests per 1000 sq. ft.

L. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Contractor and Testing Laboratory providing services for the Owner shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and each other of tickets not meeting the criteria specified.

END OF SECTION 01410

12102 Section 01500, Page 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, equipment, tools, plant, transportation, and performing all services and labor required to furnish and erect all temporary utilities, barriers, enclosures, etc., and incidental items required for a complete installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS

2.01 OFFICE, STORAGE SHEDS AND TELEPHONE:

A. The General Contractor shall maintain, until final completion of the work, an office area within the project limits of adequate size in which to carry on the work. The Architect and Owner’s representatives shall have access to and use of this office as required in connection with the observation and handling of his work.

B. There shall be suitable shelves and racks for the convenient storage of Drawings, and suitable plan table. The office shall be kept clean by the General Contractor.

C. The General Contractor shall maintain the office telephone service for the legitimate use of those connected with the work. No pay device will be allowed.

D. The Architect and his representative shall have full use of the telephone for all calls deemed necessary for project coordination and progress by the Architect or his representative to the Architect's office in Lenexa, Kansas.

E. Suitable storage space shall also be provided by each Contractor at approved locations within the project limits for the safe storage of their materials.

2.02 TELEPHONE SERVICE:

The General Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, temporary telephone services to building during construction for the legitimate use of those connected with the work. No pay devices will be allowed. The Contractor shall provide the field superintendent with a digital pager during the construction period.

12102 Section 01500, Page 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

2.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:

A. The following Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall provide for all necessary temporary sewer/vent, storm drain, medical gases, water, lighting and electric power hookups or service connections required for construction of this project. The Contractor shall coordinate connection to existing utilities with the Owner.

1. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for temporary services and shall pay all materials, labor, charges and fees for installation and removal of this service; and at his own expense shall run all lines reasonably required for distribution throughout the project.

2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide for temporary electrical services to the project, and shall pay all materials, labor, charges and fees for installation and removal of this service; and at his own expense shall provide temporary power distribution throughout the building for use of construction tools, to be maintained and kept in service until permanent power is available.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall also provide temporary lighting in all areas as required for proper execution of the work of all trades; provide one 100-watt bulb with wire guard for each 500 square feet of area, to be maintained and kept in service until permanent lighting is available.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for replacing all lamps used during construction as required.

B. The Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall be responsible for the removal of temporary utility distribution when directed to do so by the General Contractor or when all permanent systems have been accepted for use.

2.04 UTILITIES: Cost of consumed electrical power and water will be furnished and paid for by the Owner for all contractor and subcontractor use.

2.05 SANITARY UNITS: The General Contractor shall use facilities designated by the Owner for use of workmen during construction; and shall maintain same in sanitary conditions during the project.

2.06 HOISTING AND SCAFFOLDING: Each Contractor shall furnish hoisting and scaffolding pertaining to his work within the project limits.

2.07 FENCES: Construction barrier fence will be required.

2.08 PROJECT SIGN:

No project signs shall be erected without approval of the Owner or Architect.

12102 Section 01500, Page 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

2.09 CONCRETE PADS, CURBS AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS: All concrete pads, curbs and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment detailed on Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be furnished by the General Contractor, unless otherwise indicated. The mechanical and/or electrical contractors shall be responsible for furnishing to the General Contractor, complete information, including size, weight and location of equipment and location of any foundation bolts, inserts, steel plates, etc., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Equipment data shall be furnished promptly and with sufficient detail so as to avoid delay in the work.

Pads and supports not detailed on the Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be provided by the respective contractors.

The General Contractor shall provide necessary flashing for curbs and openings in roof.

2.10 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN: The Contractor shall submit Coordination Shop Drawings of the reflected ceiling layout depicting all mechanical, plumbing and electrical fixtures, fittings, devices, etc. as may penetrate the ceiling; and indicate all necessary modifications for review and approval. (See Section 01400, Quality Control and Inspections.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: The General Contractor and each subcontractor shall be responsible for his own storage of materials and equipment. Storage shall be adequate to prevent damage by wind or weather. Damaged materials or equipment shall not be used in the construction of the project.

3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND "DOWNTIME": The General Contractor shall make for all necessary, temporary relocation and maintenance of all existing utilities which are currently in use, and which must remain in service during construction of the new facility.

The Contractor shall visit the site prior to the bid date for the purpose of verifying the actual location of the utilities to be relocated with the information shown on the Drawings. If the Contractor is of the opinion a discrepancy exists between the Drawings and actual conditions, he shall notify the Architect's office at once.

No extra charges will be permitted for any utility temporary relocation problems the Contractor might encounter which are not reflected on the Drawings, without prior notification of the Architect's evaluation of the problem at hand.

The General Contractor, coordinating all trades, shall give a ten (10) day written notice for utility shut-down; and shall coordinate with the Owner’s representative.

Any work which requires temporary relocation or making access temporarily unsafe shall be coordinated with the Owner at least 48 hours in advance.

12102 Section 01500, Page 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

3.03 HEATING:

A. The General Contractor shall provide heat for specific operations as follows:

1. At all times during placing, setting, and curing of concrete, provide sufficient heat to insure heating of spaces involved to not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. The building shall be heated to temperature in the range of 55 to 70 degrees Fahrenheit (if the outdoor temperature at the building site is less than 55 degrees F) for 24 hours prior to, during and after application of drywall system until the permanent heating system is in operation.

3. From beginning of application of plaster and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in spaces involved of not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

4. For a period of ten (10) days previous to placing of interior wood finish and throughout placing of this and other interior finishing, varnishing, painting, etc., and until final acceptance of work or until full occupancy by Owner, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

5. For a period of forty-eight (48) hours prior to installation of resilient floor coverings, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F.; maintain this temperature during installation. Maintain 55 degree temperature for 48 hours after installation.

6. Maintain such heat as practicable to provide satisfactory working conditions for all trades.

B. General Contractor shall provide heat, fuel and services necessary to protect all work and materials against injury from dampness and cold until final acceptance of all work and materials in the contract, unless the building is occupied by Owner prior to such acceptances. Refer to special provisions pertaining to such early occupancy, as stipulated herein under "PARTIAL OCCUPANCY".

C. The General Contractor shall provide heat as required to maintain a coordinated Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction for all trades.

D. The Contractor shall not be permitted to use the new permanent heating systems, constructed within new areas, for temporary heating, unless the piping and electrical services of the system is complete, tested and approved for connection to the existing permanent systems. The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for damage or undue wear to system; and that the one-year warranty shall not begin until final acceptance of project by Owner.

E. Use of open salamanders, temporary heating devices which may smoke and damage the finished walls, etc., are not allowed. Fuel, equipment, and method of heating shall be reviewed by the Architect and approved by the Owner.

12102 Section 01500, Page 5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

3.04 TEMPORARY ROADS AND ACCESS: The General Contractor shall provide, protect and maintain the existing system of roads and accesses.

A. Route shall, in general, follow the line of finished roadways as approved by the Architect.

B. Contractors shall maintain the streets and roadways adjacent to the building clean and unobstructed for traffic, and comply in all respects with the applicable city, state and county laws.

C. Existing pavements, curbs, fences, etc., shall be protected and repaired if damaged. Mud shall be removed from public streets and sidewalks.

D. The Contractor shall consult governing agencies for anti-truck ordinances and restrictions shall be governed by same.

3.05 TEMPORARY PARKING: The General Contractor shall not allow any employee or subcontractor to park in existing drives and/or parking lot areas, except for temporary loading and unloading. Parking will be permitted in areas designated by the Building Owner.

3.06 EXISTING ROADS AND PARKING: Contractor shall maintain the streets and roads adjacent to the building clean and unobstructed for traffic. Existing pavements, curbs, fences, etc., shall be protected and repaired, if damaged. Mud shall be removed from streets and sidewalks.

3.07 SECURITY: The General Contractor shall provide for such necessary services to guard and protect the buildings, materials and work. The contents of the buildings shall be protected against vandalism and theft during the construction period.

A. When openings are made, the General Contractor shall provide suitable security for such openings and shall replace or repair any loss or damage to the building or its contents when entry has been gained through openings secured and protected by this Contractor.

B. The General Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to secure the site and premises during nights, holidays, weekend periods, and at such times as deemed necessary by the General Contractor for protection of building, materials, equipment, and all appurtenances thereto and the public.

3.08 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS: The General Contractor shall lay out the main lines and establish wall layout of the floors, etc. Each Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the above to the Architect in a timely manner before commencing work.

All work shall be plumb and level in accordance with accepted industry guidelines. Exceptions include sloped shower floors, ramps and roof surfaces where noted on the drawings.

12102 Section 01500, Page 6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

3.09 LAYOUT OF WORK:

A. As soon as possible after completion of floor slab, and prior to any partition work being done, the General Contractor shall lay out the entire full-scale floor plan for each floor area.

B. Layout shall be made by snapping distinct and readable chalk lines or by painting lines, indicating the accurate thickness of walls and partitions, locations and swings of doors, and similar physical features. Appropriate subcontractors shall add locations of switches, outlets, film illuminators, sinks, etc. Lines shall then be covered with a heavy coat of clear varnish and maintained to be readable by all trades until completion of area.

C. After floor layouts have been made, Contractor and/or appropriate Subcontractor shall be responsible for field-checking room dimensions, wall thickness, switch locations, accuracy of rough-ins, locations and dimensions of built-in equipment, and similar items of critical nature.

D. As soon as door frames have been erected, the General Contractor shall attach to the head of each frame, a typewritten card indicating room name and number, floor, base, wall and ceiling finishes, and ceiling height.

3.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY: In the event the Architect is caused extra trips to the project due to the Contractor's inability to understand the Drawings, details, or contract documents, lack of cooperation or coordination on the part of the Contractor, or because of Contractor's errors or ill-timed work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Architect actual expenses for such trips plus $75.00 per hour per person.

3.11 USE OF OWNER'S FACILITIES: The Contractor SHALL NOT use Owner facilities, such as toilets, phones, vending machine, water coolers, parking, etc. Employees will not be allowed to enter other existing building areas unless it is required to accomplish legitimate contractual work and Contractor has notified and secured approval of Owner. Other existing building spaces are not to be used for storage. Abuse of the facilities or rules shall be cause to terminate use of same.

Use of elevators shall be limited to movement of personnel, gang boxes, Owner’s medical equipment and very small amount of waste (in covered “Georgia Buggies”) at the end of the Project. Larger materials such as sheet rock, casework, ductwork, pipes, metal studs or other large equipment may not utilize the elevators and must be hoisted from the exterior.

3.12 WORK HOURS: The normal on-site work week will consist of eight (8) hours per day, Monday through Friday (7:30 A.M. to 4:00 P.M.). On-site work outside of these normal hours/days may be required for the completion of the work in certain instances at no extra cost to the Owner, and will require the approval of the schedule by the Owner.

Work required to take place within the facilities and occur during late nights, weekends, shall be only with the Owner's approval (See Section 01500, Paragraph 3.2).

12102 Section 01500, Page 7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

3.13 PHASING OF CONSTRUCTION: Construction and remodeling of the facilities shall be coordinated so as to minimize interruptions to normal day-to-day operations. Adequate dust/sound partitions shall be provided.

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining required fire and/or emergency exits during construction. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary exit ways from existing emergency exits through areas of new construction in accordance with applicable codes. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequately protected access through areas of new construction.

B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain smoke, dust, noise, air quality and RF interference controls, safety barricades and safety lighting to satisfy requirements of governing authorities and as required to maintain hospital environment and the safety of the occupants.

C. The Contractor shall advise the Owner and the Architect, in writing, ten (10) days prior to the substantial completion of the Area of Work.

D. The Contractor shall suspend, delay or interrupt the work when such work is affecting patient care to the extent of noise, vibration, system interruptions or air quality, without cost to the Owner.

3.14 ACCESS BY APPROVING AGENCIES:

A. Representatives of the Approving Agencies shall have access at all reasonable times to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection.

B. Owner's authorized Representative shall have access at all times to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection.

3.15 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY:

A. The Contractor shall agree that the Owner, upon advance notification to the Contractor, in writing, will be permitted to occupy and use any completed or partially completed portions of project when such occupancy and use is to Owner's best interest, notwithstanding time for completion of entire job.

B. Such occupancy shall be upon the following terms:

1. The one-year warranty called for by the General Conditions shall begin for any given area or space of the Project, upon approval of that area or space by the Architect and acceptance by the Owner for beneficial use and occupancy.

2. Occupancy or use of any space in the project shall not constitute an acceptance of work not performed in accordance with the Contract, nor relieve the Contractor of liability to perform any work required by the contract but not completed at the time of said occupancy.

12102 Section 01500, Page 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

3. Contractor shall not be held responsible for fair wear and tear, or damage resulting from said occupancy.

3.16 SPECIAL CONTROLS:

A. The Construction area shall be posted as a "No Smoking Area." No smoking is permitted within the Building. Smoking permitted only in designated areas outside.

B. No radios ("boom boxes", personal radios with earphones, cellular phones, digital phones, etc.) will be permitted. Pagers may be permitted by the Owner for construction communications. Coordinate with facilities management.

C. Hard hats shall be worn at all times while in the project limits.

3.17 TRASH REMOVAL: The Contractor shall provide trash removal and separate trash dumpsters for removal of demolition materials, at location designated by Owner. The existing trash compactor and dumpster are to remain in their existing locations and safe access to said compactor and dumpster shall be provided by the Contractor for use by the Owner.

3.18 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS/ENCLOSURES: This Contractor shall provide temporary, smoke stop partitions of non-combustible materials which shall include:

A. Metal Studs

B. Fire Code “C” gypsum board from floor to ceiling on outside face of studs.

C. Tape seal gypsum wallboard to floor and ceiling.

D. Gypsum board joints need not be taped if all joints are vertical and placed over metal stud backing.

3.19 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY: The Contractor shall protect the existing equipment, etc.

3.20 INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES: The attached documents entitled “INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES CHECK LIST” and ”INTERIM LIFE SAFETY PLAN CORRECTION”, are attached to this Section and are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

12102 INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES CHECKLIST Page 1

INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES CHECKLIST

Inspector:______Date: ______Job Name: ______

MEASURES YES NO na EXITS 1. Are all exits free and unobstructed? 2. Have exits been modified? a. Have the staff been trained on the new path of egress? b. Has modified exit signage been placed? ESCAPE FACILITIES (Construction workers) 1. Are escape facilities maintained at all times? ACCESS TO EMERGENCY DEPARTMENTS & SERVICES 1. Is ambulance access to Emergency clear & unobstructed? 2. Is public access to Emergency clear and unobstructed? 3. Is employee access to Emergency clear and unobstructed? FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1. Have the fire/smoke detection systems been impaired? 2. If YES, has an alternate system been implemented? Please describe alternate system______3. If YES, were required approvals received before shutdown? FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 1. Have the fire suppression systems been impaired? 2. If YES, has an alternate system been implemented? Please describe alternate system______

TEMPORARY PARTITIONS 1. Are temporary partitions smoke tight? 2. Are they built of non-combustible materials that will not contribute to the development or contribute to the development or spread of fire? 3. Do barriers have clean, smooth surfaces? FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT 1. Are appropriate types of portable fire extinguishers present and accessible at all times? 2. As appropriate to the hazard potential associated with the job site, have the contractors personnel and hospital personnel who work in the area been provided with training in the use of portable fire extinguishers? If NO, conduct the training and document date here ______

12102 AREA INTEGRITY 1. Are all penetrations of fire and smoke walls properly sealed at the end of the shift? 2. Are all ceiling tiles in the surrounding areas in place at the end of the shift? FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS & GASES 1. Are you being notified before flammable liquids are being used on the site? 2. Are flammable liquids on the job site being limited to a one-day supply? 3. Are all flammable compressed cylinders on the job site limited to a one supply or removed from the job site at the end of the shift? 4. Are all compressed gas cylinders chained to a wall or stored in an approved cart? WELDING & BRAZING 1. Are you giving approval to those welding or brazing before it is done on the job site? SMOKING 1. Have temporary “NO SMOKING” signs been posted throughout the area? 2. Has “NO SMOKING” in the area been maintained? ON-SITE DEBRIS 1. Was combustible debris removed at the end of the shift? INSPECTORS NOTES: · Inspector to correct each non-compliant measure as quickly as possible and document each item on the Interim Life Safety Plan of Correction form. · Complete this form daily after surveying the job site, then submit to the Plant Services Director. COMMENTS OR SUGGESTIONS ______

______

12102 INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES PLAN OF CORRECTION Page 3

Project:______Page ____ of _____

IDENTIFIED DEFICIENCIES DELEGATED TO DATE DEFICIENCY DATE Whom? PLAN OF ACTION Monitoring Evaluation

Submit a copy of this to the Owner each week during the project.

______Superintendent/Supervisor

12102 Section 01600, Page 1 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

01600 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the project.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

A. Division 1, Section 01095 Reference Regulations, Guidelines & Definitions specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified.

B. Division 1 Section 01300 Submittal Procedures specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.

1.03 DEFINITION:

Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry.

"Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material", "equipment", "system", and terms of similar intent

"Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

"Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

"Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.

Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals.

12102 Section 01600, Page 2 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings:

· Related Specification Section number · Generic name used in Contract Documents · Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations · Manufacturer's name and address · Supplier's name and address · Installer's name and address · Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period

B. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of an initial product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements.

At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract requirements.

C. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements.

D. Architect's Action: No response constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Source limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same king from a single source.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data:

· Name of product and manufacturer · Model and serial number · Capacity · Speed · Ratings

12102 Section 01600, Page 3 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver, store and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

Delivery products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.

Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a watertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

Damaged or deteriorated products, materials and equipment shall not be used and shall be replaced with new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION:

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:

Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name two or more products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated. 12102 Section 01600, Page 4 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.

C. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.

D. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

E. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.

All products, materials, and equipment supplied shall be installed, applied, and erected in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with manufacturer's trade association requirements unless the specifications exceed those requirements.

Methods or procedures set forth in the manufacturer's recommendations which the Contractor finds unacceptable shall be submitted to the Architect in writing for clarification.

B. Prepare all work to receive subsequent work or finish as needed and described in specifications for both substrate and subsequent products.

C. Furnish, apply, install, connect, erect, clean and condition manufacturer articles, materials, and equipment per manufacturer's printed directions. If otherwise indicated or specified, notify Architect well in advance of installation and prerequisite construction.

D. Manufacturer's printed directions must be on job prior to and during installation of materials and equipment.

E. Provide all attachment devices and materials necessary to secure materials together and to secure work of other trades.

12102 Section 01600, Page 5 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

F. Make allowance for ample expansion and contraction for all building components subject to movement.

G. Make field check of actual building dimensions before fabricating products and constructing partitions. Verify room layouts with Architect.

Where proper fit of work depends upon close tolerances of manufactured products, furnish necessary templates to ensure proper fit of all components.

H. Install material only when conditions of adjacent building components are conducive of achieving best installation results.

I. Construct job assemblies accurately and as necessary for other trades having adjunct work. Correct errors in cutting, shop fabrication and installation. Where necessary to cut into other building components, do so only in a manner not to damage building structurally or aesthetically, then repair adjoining parts and materials thoroughly and neatly.

J. Erect, install and secure building components in a structurally sound and appropriate manner. Where necessary, temporarily brace, shore, or otherwise support members until final connection or installation. Brace walls and other structural elements to prevent damage by wind and construction operations. Leave temporary bracing, shoring or other structural supports in place as long as necessary for safety and until structure is strong enough to withstand all loads involved.

Where construction consists of a series of courses of units, assemble units in best acceptable manner to provide structurally sound installation, waterproof where exposed to exterior. Accurately plumb and level all courses and verify levels of frequent courses with instrument.

K. Handle materials in manner to prevent scratching, abrading, distortion, chipping, breaking or other disfigurement to those materials as well as to materials and construction already existing.

L. Fabricate and install materials true to line, plumb and level. Leave finished surfaces smooth and flat or of smooth contour where indicated, free from wrinkles warps, scratches, dents, and other imperfections.

M. Quality of workmanship shall be not less than the commercially accepted standards of that trade.

N. Furnish materials in longest practical lengths and largest practical sizes to avoid unnecessary jointing. Make all joints secure.

O. Where sheet materials join in same plane, make seams tight, secure, flush, inconspicuous and weatherproof.

P. Scribe and neatly fit materials to adjoining materials.

Q. Consult Architect for mounting height or position of any unit not specifically located.

12102 Section 01600, Page 6 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

R. Mix no more materials than can be used before materials being to "set". Clean tools and appliances prior to mixing materials that can be contaminated. Do not remix materials which have begun to "set".

S. Conduct work in a manner to avoid damage to previously placed work.

T. Do not disturb materials requiring curing time until appropriate curing time has transpired.

U. All work shall be in compliance with applicable building codes, laws and regulations in force at the location of the project.

Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01700, Page 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY: This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following:

· Substantial Completion procedures · Project record document submittal · Operation and maintenance manual submittal · Submittal of warranties · Final cleaning

Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are include in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Before requesting Substantial Completion, complete the following, listing exceptions in the request:

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete, less value of punch list items.

2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

3. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

4. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements and evidence of continuing insurance coverage.

5. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

6. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

7. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, property surveys, and similar final record information.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.

9. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 12102 Section 01700, Page 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

10. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools and similar elements.

11. Submit copies of air system and water system testing and balancing reports.

12. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, appliances, motors, valves, controls, dampers and other equipment and devices for proper operation.

13. Seal all exterior joints in and around building to form weatherproof enclosures.

14. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.

15. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.

16. Submit copy of Punch List identifying a detailed list of incomplete work. The list shall be prepared by the Contractor.

B. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES On receipt of a request for Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Architect will either proceed or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

C. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work is the date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, that the Owner may utilize the project.

1.04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS:

A. GENERAL Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference.

B. RECORD DRAWINGS AND UTILITY LOCATIONS Each contractor shall maintain one record copy of all contract drawings, shop drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders and other modifications marked to record all changes made during construction. All underground piping shall be located, by dimension, from column line. At time of substantial completion, contractor shall organize record documents and bind into manageable sets. General, Electrical, Fire Protection, and Mechanical record drawings shall be CAD drawing files (AutoCAD, Version 14 minimum or later version). All fire dampers and above ceiling valves shall be located and identified on the record drawings. Valves shall be identified by number and a tag list prepared.

12102 Section 01700, Page 3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work.

Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. Include changes made by Addenda, Change Orders, and other Modifications to the Contract.

Note related change-order numbers where applicable.

Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.

Upon completion of the Work, submit record drawings to the Architect.

C. RECORD SPECIFICATIONS Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual/Specifications, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual/Specifications one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction.

Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.

Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

Note related record drawing information and Product Data.

Upon completion of the Work, submit record specifications to the Architect.

D. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Before Contractor's request for final inspection, the required operating and maintenance manuals must be submitted to the Contractor. These manuals should include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring diagrams, inspection procedures, shop drawings, and product data. Each manual should be bound in a three ring binder, identifying title on both front and spine of each binder. Submit one (1) copy of each for approval. Six (6) copies of each operating and maintenance manual will be required after approval. Refer to the specification for particular O & M Manual requirements.

Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information.

12102 Section 01700, Page 4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

1. Emergency instructions 2. Spare parts list 3. Copies of warranties 4. Wiring diagrams 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles 6. Inspection procedures 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data 8. Fixture lamping schedule 9. Valve Schedule

E. START-UP OF SYSTEMS Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, mechanical and electrical contractors shall start-up and test all systems and repair or replace any work found to be defective.

F. BENEFICIAL USE OF EQUIPMENT No equipment will be turned over to the Owner prior to Date of Substantial Completion without the written authorization of the Contractor. If the Contractor approves Owner's use of equipment before the Date of Substantial Completion, the warranty for such equipment shall be extended to cover the specified period commencing at Date of Substantial Completion.

G. IN-SERVICE TRAINING Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items:

A. Maintenance manuals B. Record documents C. Spare parts and materials D. Tools E. Lubricants F. Fuels G. Identification systems H. Control sequences I. Hazards J. Cleaning K. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments L. Filter and belt replacement procedures

As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:

A. Startup B. Shutdown C. Emergency operations D. Noise and vibration adjustments E. Safety procedures F. Economy and efficiency adjustments G. Effective energy utilization

12102 Section 01700, Page 5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

H. STOCK MATERIALS All stock materials must be turned over to the Owner prior to final acceptance. Provide inventory list and written acceptance of receipt by the Owner.

I. WARRANTY All written warranties and guarantees must be submitted to the Contractor prior to final acceptance. All warranties shall commence from the Date of Substantial Completion unless Owner is receiving beneficial use of warranted equipment prior to this date as defined above and agreed to by the Owner. Contractors shall arrange for installer of any work requiring continuing maintenance to meet with Owner’s representatives to provide basic instruction needed for proper operation and maintenance of work.

1.05 FINAL COMPLETION

A. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Before requesting final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

B. CLOSEOUT CHECK LIST Contractor must provide the following prior to the Architect and Owner’s Representative approving the release of final payment:

1. Submit a copy of the Contractor’s final punch list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The copy shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect and Owner. Written verification that final punch list is complete, shall be initialed punch list by each trade for each respective item for which the trade is responsible.

2. Final Affidavit of Release of Debts and Claims: Submit Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706 and Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A.

3. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

4. Final Lien Waiver of Contractor and each subcontractor: Submit final lien waivers from subcontractors, suppliers and other entities who are lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract.

5. Evidence of Continuing Insurance Certificate: Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required.

6. Submit all Record Drawings for all areas of the project. Include above ceiling work.

12102 Section 01700, Page 6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

7. Submit all Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists (for General Construction Equipment, Mechanical and Plumbing Equipment, and Electrical Equipment, Elevators, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Infant Security).

8. Submit Operating Instructions for all equipment.

9. Submit Wiring Diagrams for all systems.

10. Submit Flame Spread Certificates for all wall coverings (vinyl fabrics, papers and woven fabrics).

11. Submit Manufacturer's Certificate, including independent laboratory test report, Flame Spread rating of carpeting.

12. Submit Certificate of Flame Spread for Resilient Floor Coverings, Vinyl Composition Tile, Sheet Vinyl Flooring and Seamless Quartz Flooring.

13. Submit all Equipment and Product Warranties and Guarantees. One (1) year warranty on each product or division of work; and certificates of extended warranties for roofing, metal flashing, insulated glass, caulking, aluminum windows.

14. Fire Alarm Test Report and Certification.

15. Reports of Building Systems (General, Mechanical and Electrical), In-service training of Hospital Staff with signed off attendance records and dates.

16. Report and findings of mechanical system (heating/cooling), domestic hot water system; and electrical systems (nurse call, and security system)

17. Special Systems Test Reports and Certifications

18. Written verification of stock materials delivered to Owner.

19. Factory written verification of installation and equipment start up.

20. Submit information and other data required by governing or other authorities.

C. ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT Failure of the completed facility or any component thereof to pass tests or to comply with drawings and specification requirements shall be cause for initial rejection of the facility or component.

Acceptance of the Project, and related portions of the Work, shall not be granted until rejected portions are corrected, re-tested and accepted by both Architect and Owner.

Costs of re-testing and design services required to observe re-testing and verify results shall be borne by the Contractor.

12102 Section 01700, Page 7 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

Subsequent failure of the Project, portions of Work, or related component to pass testing or comply with drawing and specifications may result in final rejection or in acceptance with assessment of damages for such failure.

D. ACCESS TO SITE AFTER OWNER OCCUPANCY If, after substantial completion and occupancy of the facility by the Owner, the Contractor(s) needs access to the facility, prior arrangements must be made with the Owner. All work and access shall be coordinated through the Owner. This procedure is required for safety and security of building occupants and equipment during all punch list and warranty repair operations. Provide a written report of the activity performed to the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING:

A. GENERAL The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. CLEANING Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting certification of Substantial Completion:

1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

12102 Section 01700, Page 8 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

C. PEST CONTROL Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects and other pests.

D. REMOVAL OF PROTECTION Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.

E. COMPLIANCE Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waster materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.

Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01740, Page 1 WARRANTIES & BONDS

01740 WARRANTIES & BONDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.

Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.

General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 Project Closeout.

Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitation on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefit from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 12102 Section 01740, Page 2 WARRANTIES & BONDS

The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the Date of Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.

When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.

Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.

B. Form of Submittal: Submit two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" x 11" paper.

Provide heavy paper dividers with tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a type description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

Identify each bind on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.

When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 01900, Page 1 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

01900 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section consists of installation of Owner furnished materials, accessories, equipment, tools, plant, transportation, and performing all services and labor required to furnish product data maintenance manuals, etc., of materials and equipment.

References to know standard specifications, codes, etc., mean and intend the latest edition of such specifications, codes, etc., adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.

Owner shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

These items at "Not in the Contract" (N.I.C.). These items are to be furnished by the Owner and installed by this contractor.

1.03 EXECUTION: All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer (latest printed instructions), unless herein specified to the contrary.

The Owner shall provide new N.I.C. equipment to the job site as required for the Contractor to receive and set into place; and the respective subcontractors shall make final hookup to provide a complete installation. The Contractor shall coordinate, with the Owner, all delivery schedules of Owner furnished N.I.C. equipment. All Owner furnished equipment shall be received, stored, protected, set in place and installed by the respective contractors responsible to make the final hookup to provide a complete installation.

The Contractor and subcontractors shall familiarize themselves with all N.I.C. equipment as indicated on the plans and specifications, for which the respective Contractors must provide, required rough-ins and final connections, and shall verify all N.I.C. equipment with Owner prior to making rough-ins.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS

Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Refer to all applicable provisions of Division 2 through 16 for specific requirements.

END OF SECTION 12102 Section 02050, Page 1 DEMOLITION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

02050 DEMOLITION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work covered by this section consists of the following: A. Coordination of work with Owner and Architect. B. Demolition. C. Sequence of Construction.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

None

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK:

A. This Contractor shall coordinate all Work and submit to the Owner and Architect in writing his construction Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction for Owner approval. This Contractor shall use the construction sequence as specified as a guide for his outline of construction.

B. During the construction all functions in existing buildings shall be kept in operation until completion of the Work, including personnel traffic between all buildings, mechanical and electrical services, communication lines and food service.

C. This Contractor shall so arrange and conduct all phases of the work in such a manner and at such times as to in no way interfere with, interrupt, or cause inconvenience to the normal operation of the occupant or any adjacent building or premises, or to any of his employees or customers. If, for any reason, temporary interruption or inconvenience to same is necessary, in order to facilitate the work, this Contractor shall notify Building Owner representatives in writing two weeks in advance, describing the nature of the interruption and the length of time, and shall proceed with same only upon receipt of written approval. This Contractor shall supply Architect with copies of above noted written approval from each occupant before proceeding with the construction.

12102 Section 02050, Page 2 DEMOLITION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

D. The Contractor shall suspend, delay or interrupt the work when such work is affecting patient care to the extent of noise, vibration, system interruptions or air quality, without cost to the Owner.

3.02 DEMOLITION:

A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform all work required in the removal of the existing buildings, foundation, utilities, etc., which is in conflict with the installation of new work.

This Contractor shall have inspected the entire project area prior to bid, including above accessible ceiling systems and chases; and include all demolition work as necessary and include in bid.

This also includes partial removal of existing building walls, floors, ceilings, doors, windows, accessories, etc., facilities; and certain structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and systems which may be in conflict with the installation of new work.

B. Methods used in wrecking shall be in accordance with all ordinances and requirements of the local authorities, and in all cases assure the safety of persons, adjoining properties and buildings.

C. During demolition protect the existing building from intrusion of dust or other debris by the use of temporary partitions across corridors etc. Debris shall be removed immediately and passageways kept clean at all times. Where temporary partitions deface or otherwise damage any part of building, this Contractor shall restore such parts to their original condition.

D. Debris shall be removed from site avoiding excessive accumulation. No debris will be allowed to be stored or accumulated on the job site.

E. Before any portion of the demolition is attempted, this Contractor shall acquire approval from the Owner and the Architect and arrangements shall be made by all concerned to keep the existing facilities open and functioning smoothly.

F. This Contractor shall be responsible for repair and/or reconstruction of all surrounding existing construction, materials and surfaces to match existing materials required because of demolition and/or the relocation of existing construction, and to match new construction.

G. This Contractor shall be responsible for the field verification of all existing above grade utilities and below grade utilities with each respective utility Company and with the Owner's Representative prior to any site demolition and/or new construction. This Contractor shall be responsible for the incurred repair costs caused by damage to the said utility.

H. Provide temporary wiring, piping, etc. as required to maintain continued facility operation during demolition and construction through the Subcontractors.

I. It is the intent of the demolition to remove all existing construction which will conflict with the intent of the new construction.

12102 Section 02050, Page 3 DEMOLITION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

J. All walls, partitions, etc. indicated by dotted lines (=====) shall be removed. Coordinate all necessary work before starting demolition.

K. At dissimilar floor elevations, feather epoxy grout topping to each floor elevation and grind smooth. At dissimilar floor materials, and/or at junctions between new and existing floors, provide the appropriate edge/transition strip.

L. Where existing doors, door frames, equipment, portions of walls and partitions are indicated to be removed, exercise caution to avoid disrupting surrounding materials. Salvage existing materials as much as possible for reuse in patching to match surrounding finishes.

M. Where the removal of existing walls, partitions, equipment, etc. disrupts existing electrical, mechanical, and plumbing services, the appropriate Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall make permanent (or if necessary, proper temporary) connections to restore affected services to areas not scheduled for demolition.

N. After removal of the existing floor finish, the concrete floor shall be ground and leveled.

O. Removal of demolition from the site shall be by an approved method to minimize dust.

3.03 SHORING:

A. This Contractor shall properly shore up all existing work requiring temporary support caused by removal of existing construction work. Such shoring shall be of a character and strength as to properly support the work during construction operations.

B. Full responsibility for the successful shoring and removal shall be upon this Contractor; and any damage resulting from these operations shall be repaired, without additional compensation, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

3.04 SALVAGE AND RUBBISH:

A. This Contractor shall remove and salvage all pipe, wire, conduit, valves, fixtures, fittings and equipment for the Owner as required and relocate to a storage location designated by the Owner before the start of construction, except that material and equipment which is necessary to remain in location and/or service temporarily during the course of construction:

Doors, Hollow Metal Frames, Hardware Fire Extinguisher Cabinets & Fire Extinguishers Ceiling Tile & Grid Fixtures Plumbing Light Fixtures

B. The remainder of all salvage and rubbish materials shall become the property of this Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the site.

12102 Section 02050, Page 4 DEMOLITION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

3.05 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION:

A. The sequence of construction is intended for guidance of the order of work in a manner which provides the imperative continuous operation of the facility throughout construction, except that:

B. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor and Subcontractor shall have the opportunity to request a variance from the Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction which shall be subject to review by the Architect and approval by the Owner in writing.

C. This Contractor shall therefore observe the approved, Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction in order to cause minimum hardship to the Owner.

D. Adjustments to the sequence of construction during construction must be approved in writing by the Owner prior to proceeding with further work.

E. Ordering Equipment and Materials for delivery dates which coincide with the Progress Schedule/Sequence of Construction shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and/or appropriate Subcontractors.

F. This Contractor shall isolate, mechanical, plumbing and electrical services to project area before beginning removal of existing fixtures and equipment.

G. This Contractor shall verify all existing services passing through project area which may not specifically be noted on plans. This Contractor shall have inspected the entire project area prior to bid, including above accessible ceiling systems and chases; and include all demolition work as necessary and include in bid.

H. This Contractor shall notify the Architects prior to removal of any services.

I. All existing mechanical, plumbing and electrical services which pass through the project area; and which must remain in service for the continued operation of existing systems, services or equipment, shall be capped, rerouted, reworked and tested prior to the closing in by new construction.

J. Failure of this Contractor to field verify these utilities and services shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of or the cost associated with the capping, rerouting, reworking and testing of existing services as may be required by new construction.

K. This Contractor shall complete all required demolition of each Area of Work prior to beginning new work.

L. This Contractor shall be responsible to remove, protect, store and reinstall all existing ceiling tile necessary for the access to existing ceiling spaces for performing the Work. This Contractor shall replace all damaged ceiling tile with tile matching existing.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 02070, Page 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY: This Section includes the following:

A. Protection of selected site elements including landscaping, trees, pavements, curb and gutter, sidewalks, light poles, parking meters, signs.

B. Demolition and removal of exterior above and below grade site improvements and landscaping trees to accommodate new construction.

C. Patching and repairing. (See Division 1)

D. Partial demolition and removal of interior floor slab and interior wall construction and ceilings on each designated floor level.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

A. Division 1 Section 01045 Cutting and Patching for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations.

B. Division 1 Section 01500 Temporary Facilities & Controls for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations.

1. Renovation work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction.

2. Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions.

C. Division 2, Section 02050 Sequence of Construction.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner’s property.

B. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.

12102 Section 02070, Page 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

1.05 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor’s option.

1.06 SUBMITTALS: General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

A. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.

B. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure maximum practical use of Owner’s parking areas.

C. Coordinate with Owner’s continuing occupation of existing building and parking areas.

Video record of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. (See Section 02051 Remodeling Work)

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.08 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Occupancy: Owner occupies the building immediately adjacent, including above and below, to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner’s normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner’s normal operations.

B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations may occur by Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.

C. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

D. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner’s personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.

Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner’s personnel and general public to occupied portions of building and site.

Provide access to the existing generator between the buildings for testing.

12102 Section 02070, Page 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Conduct operations to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and to prevent injury or damage to persons or property.

Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain.

Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.

Remove protections at completion of work.

Protect existing air intakes from dust and dirt infiltration.

E. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work.

F. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, parking areas, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

G. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

H. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

None

12102 Section 02070, Page 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.

3.02 UTILITY SERVICES:

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.

C. Provide notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover, in accordance with Section 01500 Temporary Facilities & Controls.

D. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving site.

E. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

3.03 PREPARATION:

General

A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

B. Cease operations and notify Owner’s Representative and Architect immediately if a safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations.

C. Cover and protect equipment and fixtures from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed.

D. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.

E. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover, in accordance with Section 01500 Temporary Facilities & Controls.

F. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

12102 Section 02070, Page 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

G. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

H. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.

I. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences or covered walkways as indicated or where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as needed for protection of public.

J. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

3.04 DEMOLITION:

General

A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.

B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.

C. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering or chopping.

D. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited.

E. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations.

F. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

G. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter.

I. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner’s Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner’s Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay.

12102 Section 02070, Page 6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:

A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site.

B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.

C. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.

3.06 PATCHING AND REPAIRING:

A. Patching is specified in Division 1, Section 01045 Cutting and Patching. . B. Promptly patch and repair damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations.

C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 02160, Page 1 EXCAVATION, GRADING, CUTTING, FILL AND BACKFILL

02160 EXCAVATION, GRADING, CUTTING, FILL AND BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform all excavation, cutting, backfill, fill and graded rock base, which is required to the lines and levels indicated on the Drawings.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS The following sections contain requirements that relate to the section: A. Division 15 – Mechanical B. Division 16 – Electrical

1.04 TESTING: A soils testing company shall be employed by the Owner to perform the following inspection services. The following is a listing of work for which the soils testing company shall be employed.

See Specification section indicated herewith for detailed account of work required.

1.05 UNIT PRICES: As required on the Bid Form, unit prices shall be used to compute the extra or credit to be established for authorized excavation higher or lower than the elevations shown on the Drawings. Excavation to the elevations shown shall be included in the Base Bid.

1.06 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS: Materials for the fill shall consist of materials as outlined by the Geotechnical Report and approved by the Soils Engineer from the site or other local source. The materials used shall be free from vegetable matter and other deleterious substances and shall not contain rocks or lumps having a diameter of more than 6".

2.02 UNDER SLAB GRADED ROCK BASE Materials shall be a free draining rock or gravel placed over the compacted sub-grade to depths indicated on the drawings.

12102 Section 02160, Page 2 EXCAVATION, GRADING, CUTTING, FILL AND BACKFILL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CUTTING: Cutting of the building site to the finished grades, as indicated on the Drawings, shall be completed before building operations are started, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect.

All grading shall be even, the fill firmly compacted and all finished surfaces smoothed to give a gentle slope as indicated on the Drawings. All areas which have been filled shall be leveled and made ready for seeding, as outlined above.

3.02 GRADING: The Contractor shall do all rough and finish grading which may be necessary to arrive at the finished levels and grades indicated. The Contractor shall remove and store present top soil on the site before grading operations start. After grading to levels indicated, the top soil which has been stored shall be spread out (a minimum of 4" deep) over the area to facilitate seeding. No additional top soil over the amount which can be salvaged by the Contractor's operation need be supplied.

All grading shall be even, the fill firmly compacted and all finished surfaces smoothed to give a gentle slope as indicated on the Drawings. All areas which have been filled shall be leveled and made ready for seeding, as outlined above.

3.03 EXCAVATION: No classifications of excavated materials will be made. Excavation work shall include the removal and subsequent handling of all earth, clay, weathered or unweathered shale, debris, or any other materials encountered within the limits of the work required by the Drawings and Specifications, to the lines and elevations indicated. No extra shall be allowed for rock excavation, to elevations shown on the Drawings.

Native highly plastic clays exposed at subgrade shall be carefully inspected by the Soils Engineer, and if unsuitable due to high potential volume changes, shall be removed as directed by the Soils Engineer and replaced with a more stable material as recommended by the Soils Engineer.

Bidders shall determine for themselves the character and quantities of the unclassified materials to be removed, and Base Bid proposals shall include all costs of the required excavation.

If earth excavation in quantity exceeds that shown as fill by grade elevations and contour lines, the remaining earth shall be placed on the site as directed by the Architect.

Dewatering - The Contractor shall do necessary construction in the immediate vicinity of the excavation as may be necessary to prevent surface water from running into excavated areas. Any water, including ground water, which accumulates in the excavation, shall be removed promptly and the excavation maintained as dry as possible.

12102 Section 02160, Page 3 EXCAVATION, GRADING, CUTTING, FILL AND BACKFILL

3.04 UNSUITABLE FOUNDATIONS: In case material encountered at any point is not suitable for foundations in the opinion of the Soils Engineer, the excavation shall be carried to such additional depths as he may order. In case the excavation at any point is carried below the grade or beyond the lines given, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, refill such unauthorized depth with concrete in an approved manner. In case the bottom of the excavation on which the concrete foundations are to be placed is loosened or cut in any manner, the Contractor shall remove all such loose material and rebuild to the elevation of the bottom of the foundation shown on the Drawings with concrete or approved material and at his own expense. The last 3" of excavation shall be dug just before pouring operations are to be done, or if rock, it shall be broom cleaned.

Where rock occurs below the surface and in the way of footings or recessed floors, the same shall be removed by the Contractor as necessary and as shown on the plans.

3.05 CONTROLLED FILL:

A. DEPTH AND MIXING OF FILL LAYERS: The selected fill material shall be placed in layers when compacted shall not exceed 8". Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughly blade mixed during the spreading to insure uniformity of material in each layer.

B. MOISTURE CONTENT: The fill material shall be compacted at the optimum moisture content specified for the soils being used as shown in laboratory reports, which have previously been accepted by the Engineer.

The soils may require dewatering, or the addition of water to provide optimum moisture content.

C. COMPACTION: When the moisture content and condition of each spread layer is satisfactory, it shall be compacted to at least 95% of Standard Proctor density (ASTM 698-64T). A standard proctor test should be performed on each typical fill material and frequent density tests of the fill must be taken. The equipment used and method of compaction shall be approved by the Soils Engineer.

3.06 BACKFILLING AND FILL (INTERIOR) Shall be the same as Controlled Fill except the final 4” of fine grading under slabs on grade shall be clean granular fill (from on-site) or gravel approved by Geo-technical Engineer. In areas which do not require fill, the top 6” beneath the 4” of granular fill or gravel shall be scarified, moistened to near optimum moisture content, and compacted as specified under compaction above.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 03100, Page 1 CONCRETE WORK

03100 CONCRETE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all necessary materials, labor and equipment, forms and the mixing, placing and finishing of all plain, reinforced and architectural concrete as indicated on the Drawings or required to complete the work. The work also includes patching holes in floor slabs, and leveling floors.

1.03 STANDARDS: Any applicable items not covered in this section shall conform to ACI Specification (latest edition to ACI Publication) for Structural Concrete for Building (ACI 318 and ACI 315) and specifications quoted therein.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 for all materials, test reports and certificates.

A. Concrete Mix Design B. Test Reports C. Shop Drawings

See individual paragraphs in this section, for requirements.

1.05 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 1, Section 01045 Cutting & Patching B. Division 2, Section 02160 Excavation Grading, Cutting, Fill & Backfill C. Division 5, Section 05100 Miscellaneous Steel D. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry E. Division 7, Section 07100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing for vapor retarders and drainage systems. F. Division 9, Section 09650 Resilient Floor Tile G. Division 9, Section 09675 Sheet Vinyl Floorcovering H. Division 9, Section 09680 Carpeting I. Division 9, Section 09700 Seamless Flooring

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT: All cement used shall be an approved brand of Portland cement. Only one brand of cement shall be allowed for the work. It shall conform to ASTM C-150 Type I.

12102 Section 03100, Page 2 CONCRETE WORK

Lumpy or partially set cement shall not be used and shall be removed from the building site.

12102 Section 03100, Page 3 CONCRETE WORK

2.02 AGGREGATES: Shall conform to the guideline specifications for concrete aggregates (ASTM Designation C-33) with all subsequent amendments thereto.

A. Coarse Aggregate: Clean hard durable uncoated, crushed limestone conforming to the quality and gradation requirements of ASTM Specification C-33. Maximum size aggregate allowed is 1/5 of narrowest dimension between forms of the concrete members of 3/4 of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, with a limiting size of 1-1/2 inches for construction of 6 inches or greater in thickness and 3/4 inch for construction less than 6 inches in thickness.

B. Aggregates: Conforming to the Guidelines of Structures of the State Highway Department or Commission of the State where concreting will be done will be acceptable.

C. Course Aggregate: For lightweight concrete shall conform to ASTM C-330.

D. Fine Aggregate: Shall conform to ASTM C-33.

2.03 WATER: To be used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from deleterious substances, acids, alkalis or organic materials.

2.04 ADMIXTURES:

A. Calcium Chloride, which accelerates the hardening or setting of concrete, shall not be used without the written permission of the Architect.

B. Air entraining admixture for concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C-260.

2.05 REINFORCING:

A. All bars shall be A-615, grade 60 steel. Stirrups and ties shall be grade 60 steel.

B. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specifications A-185.

2.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter.

2.07 ANCHORS, BOLTS, INSERTS, TIES, ETC.

Shall be provided to secure the work of the other trades, mechanical inserts, etc., shall be provided the respective Contractors and installed by this Contractor. However, anchors and other items necessary to properly bond concrete with other materials shall be provided.

2.08 SELF LEVELING FLOOR FILL: Shall be “Con-flow”, self-finishing and leveling polymer modified Portland Cement underlayment floor fill as manufactured by Conspec; Kansas City, Kansas. Self-leveling underlayment shall be 12102 Section 03100, Page 4 CONCRETE WORK

4,000 psi.

12102 Section 03100, Page 5 CONCRETE WORK

2.09 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES:

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Owner for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.

2. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job condition, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

B. Design mixes to provide air entrained normal weight concrete for all exterior concrete work as indicated on drawings and schedules with the following water cement ratio.

WATER/CEMENT RATIO DESCRIPTION NO WATER REDUCER

4000 PSI 0.42

C. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.

2.10 CURING: Only water cure or PVC poly sheet shall be permitted. All other curing compounds or liquids are strictly prohibited.

2.11 VAPOR RETARDER See Section 07100 Waterproofing & Damproofing.

A. General: Place vapor retarder sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. The vapor retarder shall be placed between the concrete slab and the drainage layer. Care shall be taken to prevent punctures or tears in the vapor barrier during the placement of slab reinforcing.

2.12 GRADED ROCK BASE (DRAINAGE LAYER): (See Section 02160 Excavation Grading, Cutting, Fill & Backfill.)

2.13 CONCRETE SEALER

A. WATER BASED ACRYLIC: Concrete floor areas, scheduled to be sealed, shall receive a water based acrylic sealer as manufactured by Sherwin-Williams Company. The acrylic sealer shall be ArmorSeal®, Tread-Plex™ Water Based Acrylic floor coating (B90 Series). Application of the number of coats shall be in accordance with the manufacturers printed specifications. The floor preparation, protection and application shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. 12102 Section 03100, Page 6 CONCRETE WORK

PART 3 - WORKMANSHIP

3.01 CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING:

A. Provide (coring), cutting, and patching of the existing concrete floor slabs for the installation of underfloor plumbing lines and piping, electrical floor boxes, conduits, etc.

B. All concrete for floor patching shall be 4,000 psi test strength at 28 days.

C. All concrete floor patching shall be steel troweled smooth to match the existing floor surface.

D. Provide floor fill (self-leveling) as required for a smooth and level floor surface. The existing concrete slab shall be cleaned prior to installation of floor fill. All floor fill shall be installed per manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.02 NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE:

A. Normal weight concrete shall be used throughout the project (structural and nonstructural).

B. The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such as to be accurately controlled.

C. The seven day test used as an indicator of quality control shall be at least 2/3 of the average 28 day strength required.

D. Shall develop strength of 4,000 PSI using not less than 500 pounds of cement per cubic yard of concrete regardless of strengths obtained. The slump when placed shall not exceed 4 inches.

E. Exterior concrete shall be air entrained

3.03 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX: Prior to placing any concrete, the Contractor shall submit for approval of the Architect, a mix design for each type of concrete proposed for use by each concrete supplier, substantiated by a laboratory report attesting to the concrete properties, including compressive strength and splitting strength for the proposed sand-lightweight concrete mix. Upon approval, the Contractor shall not change suppliers except upon written authorization by the Architect. The supplier will be held to maintain the approved mix design throughout the project unless directed otherwise in writing by the Architect.

3.04 MIXING CONCRETE:

A. The concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.

B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements as set forth in the "Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTM Serial Designation C94-69 with all subsequent amendments thereto).

C. Maximum Slump: 4".

12102 Section 03100, Page 7 CONCRETE WORK

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE:

A. Placing in Forms:

1. Shall be planned well in advance so that all sections of a particular area may be placed in one continuous operation. Any bulk heading required shall be done only with the expressed permission and in accordance with the requirements of the Architect.

2. Care shall be exercised so that when placing concrete in contact with the ground, earth does not spill off into fresh concrete.

B. Before Concrete is placed, all debris and foreign material shall be removed from the inner surface of the forms. All reinforcing and any special metal parts such as steel plates or shapes or copper baffle strips designated on the plans, shall be properly set into position.

Where fresh concrete is placed directly against set concrete, the work already set shall have its surface roughened and shall be drenched with water then given a slush coat of neat grout.

Placing of any given section shall be done in a continuous operation.

C. Transporting: Concrete shall be handled from carts, buckets, buggies, or conveyors. Every possible precaution shall be taken to prevent separation or loss of the ingredients while transporting the concrete. Delivery carts or buggies shall be kept on temporary runways built over the floor system and runway supports shall not bear upon reinforcing steel or fresh concrete. Fresh concrete may be transported by pneumatic means (pumped) at the Contractor's option provided the approved mix design is certified by a laboratory report as a suitable pump mix design.

D. Placing Troughs, Pipes and Chutes:

1. Where it is necessary to drop concrete a distance of more than five feet (5'), troughs, pipes, and/or chutes shall be used as aids in placing the concrete and shall be arranged and used in such a manner that the ingredients of the concrete are not separated.

Where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or short lengths that reverse the direction of the movement.

2. All chutes, troughs, pipes and reinforcing steel shall be kept clean and free from coating or hardened concrete. Open troughs and chutes shall be either metal or metal lined and shall extend as nearly as possible to the point of deposit. Depositing in large quantity at any point and running or working it along the forms in a manner which will cause segregation or separation will not be permitted.

3. Concrete shall not be dropped freely a distance of more than five feet (5') nor be dropped through the reinforcing steel in the walls.

12102 Section 03100, Page 8 CONCRETE WORK

E. Vibrating: All concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated by a suitable means during the operation of placing and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcing embedded fixtures and into the corners of forms. Two (2) operable vibrators are required to be on the job at all times during concrete placement construction.

F. Cold Weather Concreting: Comply with requirements and recommendations of ACI-306.

G. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with requirements and recommendations of ACI-305.

H. Test of Concrete: During the progress of the work, compression tests shall be made of the concrete mix. One test shall be made by the Contractor for every 50 cubic yards of concrete and/or at the beginning of each major pour. Test shall be made in accordance with ASTM C-39.

Test shall be made in laboratory controlled cylinders taken from any batch as may be requested by the Architect or his representative. The standard age of tests shall be 7 and 28 days. Each of these 7 day tests must show strength of not less than two-thirds of the 28 day strength required. All expenses for test shall be borne by this Contractor.

Three cylinders shall make one test. The Contractor shall assign all of the cylinders to a laboratory approved by the Architect; one shall be tested at 7 days and one at 28 days. The laboratory shall send copies of all tests directly to the Architect in duplicate. The third cylinder shall be held in reserve to be tested, should the second cylinder to attain specification strength.

The cylinder, immediately after being filled, shall be consigned to a designated testing laboratory for making the tests. As outlined above, the Architect must approve the laboratory to which the concrete is assigned.

Should the Architect or the Owner desire additional cylinder tests to be made, then the Contractor must provide for same to be made and he will be compensated for this at the rate of $22.00 per test.

It is hereby agreed by the Contractor and the Owner that the results of the laboratory tests as shown by the laboratory report will be deemed conclusive as to the strength and quality of the concrete and that any conclusion or decision which needs to be made regarding quality and the strength of the concrete may be based solely and entirely on the laboratory report.

Should the concrete tests indicate the strength of the cylinders or any portion of the structure fails to meet the specific strength, the Architect will have the right to require tests in accordance with "Standard Methods of Securing, Preparing and Testing Specimens of Hardened Concrete for Compressive and Flexural Strength" (ASTM Designation C-42) and/or tests to be conducted in accordance with Section 4.8 of the ACI Code. (ACI 318)

Where tests indicate that any portion of the structure will not support loads for which it is designed, the Contractor shall tear out such portion and replace same as directed by Architect. The entire cost will be borne by the Contractor.

Slump Tests - The Contractor shall perform slump tests corresponding to each set of 12102 Section 03100, Page 9 CONCRETE WORK

cylinders and shall have a slump cone and rod available at the job site at all times during concrete work. Results of slump test shall be reported on laboratory test reports.

Air Tests - All exterior concrete specified to be air entrained shall be tested for air content along with strength and slump test. Results shall be incorporated with laboratory test reports.

3.06 BENDING AND PLACING REINFORCING STEEL:

A. Drawings: Placing Drawings, bending diagrams and bar lists shall be prepared and submitted to the Architect for approval; the cost of same to be included in the Base Bid. Drawings shall be detailed in accordance with ACI Manual 315 and shall include all standard accessories required.

The placing Drawings plans for the floor and roof shall be drawn at a scale of 1/4" = 1'- 0", however, if the bottom layer of reinforcing bars and the top layer reinforcing bars are shown on separate plans a scale of 1/8" = 1'-0" may be used.

B. Cleaning and Bending Reinforcement: Metal reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free from excess rust, scale or other coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond. Bends for stirrups and ties shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than four times the minimum thickness of the bar.

Bends for other bars shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than six times the minimum thickness of the bar except that for bars larger than one inch (1"), the pin shall be not less than eight times the minimum thickness of the bar. All bars shall be bent cold.

C. Placing Reinforcement: Metal reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with the placing plans and shall be adequately secured in position by concrete or metal chairs and spacers, or other suitable accessories.

D. Splices and Offsets in Reinforcement: In slab and grade beams, splices of reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall generally be avoided. Splices shall provide sufficient lap to transfer the stress between bars by bond and shear, and shall be 30 bar diameters minimum.

3.07 FORMS:

A. Description: All forms shall be in good condition with not more than 1/8" variation in horizontal or vertical alignment.

They shall conform to the shape and dimensions of the concrete as shown on the Plans and shall be set true to line and grade. They shall be tight, properly braced and tied together so as to maintain the desired position and shape during and after the placing of concrete. They shall be designed and constructed so as to permit their removal without damage to the concrete.

12102 Section 03100, Page 10 CONCRETE WORK

All wall forms exposed shall be lined with plywood or amazonite. Edges of plywood sheet shall be tightly butted.

Forms of square or rectangular columns or piers shall have chamfered corners where exposed.

Where masonry is to abut concrete walls, beams, or columns, provide continuous vertical dovetail slots at 24" o.k. in face of walls and beams or at center line of columns.

Use cardboard or fiberboard void forms when required.

B. Oiling Forms: The inside of all forms shall be oiled with light clear paraffin base oil which will not discolor or otherwise injure the concrete.

C. Form Ties: Bolts or rods shall be of such design that the body of the tie will be removed or embedded with the ends of the embedded portions not closer than one inch (1") from the concrete face.

D. Removal of Forms: Forms shall be removed in such a manner as to insure the complete safety of the structure. Vertical forms may be removed after 24 hours, providing the concrete is suffi- ciently hard not to be injured thereby and provisions are made to properly cure the concrete.

Supporting forms or shorings shall not be removed until the members have acquired sufficient strength (3000 psi minimum) to support safely their weight and the load thereon.

3.08 FINISHING CONCRETE STRUCTURE

A. PATCHING:

1. Any concrete which is not formed as shown on the Plans, or for any reason is out of alignment or level or shows a defective surface shall be removed from the job by the Contractor at his expense and replaced unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective area which shall be done in accordance with the following procedure. Permission to patch any such area shall not be considered a waiver of the Architect's right to require complete removal of the defective work if the patching does not, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface.

Immediately after removing forms, all defective areas shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than one inch (1"), with the edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut to provide a key at the edge of the patch. The area to be patched and a space at least six inches (6") wide entirely surrounding it shall be wetted to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A grout of equal parts Portland cement and sand with sufficient water to produce a brushing consistency shall then be well brushed into the surface followed immediately by the patching mortar. The patch shall be made of the same material and shall also be made of the same proportions as that used for the concrete, except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted and white Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray Portland cement to match the color of the 12102 Section 03100, Page 11 CONCRETE WORK

surrounding concrete. The amount of mixing water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and placing. The mortar shall be re-tempered without the addition of water by allowing it to stand for a period of one hour during which time it shall be mixed with a trowel to prevent setting.

12102 Section 03100, Page 12 CONCRETE WORK

The mortar shall be thoroughly compacted into place and screeded off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. It shall then be left undisturbed for a period of one to two hours to permit initial shrinkage before being finally finished. The patch shall be finished in such a manner as to match the adjoining surface. On exposed surfaces where unlined forms have been used, the final finish shall be obtained by striking off the surface with a straight edge spanning the patch and held parallel to the direction of the form marks. All patches shall be cured as specified herein.

2. The holes left by withdrawal of rods and the holes left by removal of ends of ties shall be filled solid with mortar after first being thoroughly wetted. For holes passing entirely through the walls, a plunger type gun or other device shall be used to force the mortar through the wall starting at the back face. A piece of burlap or canvas shall be held over the hole in the outside and when the hole is completely filled, the excess mortar shall be struck off the cloth flush with the surface.

B. FINISHING:

1. All exposed poured in place concrete shall receive a smooth finish. The finish shall consist of using the best form materials, etc., to insure a smooth finish on all exposed areas.

Remove fins, projections, level off sets, repair damaged areas. All 0oncrete at form joints shall be clean and stoned or troweled smooth.

C. CURING: Floor slab and partial slabs shall be cured by one of the methods in Paragraph 2.10 of this section.

3.09 FLOOR SLABS MONOLITHIC

A. Concrete for floor slabs shall be placed directly over the vapor retarder.

B. Monolithic floor slabs occur throughout the existing building. The concrete shall be of the driest consistency possible to work with a sawing motion of a strike off board of the proportion of fine and coarse aggregate within the limit specified. Floating for monolithic slabs shall be followed by steel troweling after it has hardened sufficiently to prevent fine material working to the surface.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the placement of control joints in the areas to receive seamless flooring with the flooring applicator and shall submit layout for approval.

D. Coordinate finish, recess required, acceptable curing methods, etc., with the specific recommendations for the flooring furnished.

E. Leveling finished floors - Floors shall be level to within a tolerance of 1/8" in 10 feet, unless stated otherwise.

F. Wet slab areas shall slope uniformly to the floor drain from corner of room to the drain. Slope shall be 1/8" per foot fall, unless otherwise specified. Contractor shall consult with Architect prior to setting top of drain and slab pour.

12102 Section 03100, Page 13 CONCRETE WORK

G. If, in the opinion of the Architect, any of the finished floors or walls (especially at construction joints) are not in condition to receive floor covering and finish, this Contractor shall grind or apply an approved underlayment over all areas required to obtain a smooth, level surface.

3.10 NOTIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall advise the Architect of the approximate time he intends to pour floor slabs and shall not pour slabs until the Architect has given his approval to do so. This Contractor shall be responsible for the placement of construction joints, reinforcing pipe sleeves, etc., and shall work with other trades to insure work is in before slab is poured.

3.11 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS & CURBS

Shall be provided and installed by this Contractor for all equipment shown on the Drawings. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary bolts, sleeve, etc., to this Contractor for properly incorporating such items into equipment bases; and curbs.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 04200, Page 1 UNIT MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: A. This Section includes the following:

1. Lightweight concrete masonry units reinforced, as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Masonry reinforcing, flashing, cleaner, sealer, etc. 3. Repair and clean existing brick.

B. The work under this section shall include furnishing and erection of all masonry together with all labor, materials, runways, scaffolding, ladders, tools, transportation, etc., required for proper and rapid erection of the work.

C. The Contractor shall erect and take down all scaffolding, runways, etc., necessary for the work in conformity with all Laws and Ordinances governing same.

D. The Contractor's Masons shall work in conjunction with the mechanics of all other branches of the work, wherever necessary or required. Where other items are walled into the masonry, the Mason shall assist the mechanics of the various trades, or shall properly build such work into the walls as required, or shall follow instructions of the Architect as to location, method of setting, bedding, etc. The Mason shall furnish all mortar required for setting bearing plates, lintels, etc.

E. Patch & tooth brick in wall bonding pattern to match existing.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section.

A. Division 1, Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services for independent testing.

B. Division 3, Section 03100 Concrete Work for block core and bond beam concrete.

C. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

Samples for verification purposes of the following:

A. Full size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of exposed color, texture and dimensions to be expected in completed construction.

B. Product data for all miscellaneous related products.

C. Sample panel: A sample pattern of brick and block work is required.

12102 Section 04200, Page 2 UNIT MASONRY

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 “Specifications for Masonry Structures.”

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

Brace all walls during erection and provide protection against damage from wind and weather.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately and grout, mortar, and soil that comes in contact with such masonry.

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surfaces.

Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

12102 Section 04200, Page 3 UNIT MASONRY

Protect surfaces of window and doorframes, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings.

C. Cold-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold-weather construction and the following:

1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen.

2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.

3. All nature of material shall be heated to a temperature such that they will remain above 35 degrees F. until they have been placed and suitably protected. The uses of “antifreeze” admixtures are not permitted.

4. Masonry shall be protected against freezing for at least 48 hours after placing. Unless such precautions are taken against freezing, no masonry shall be laid until temperature is above 40 degrees F., on rising temperature or above 40 degrees F., on lowering temperature. Masonry shall not be laid on walls that are frozen or contain frost. Frozen masonry shall be removed and replaced.

D. Hot-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:

A. Concrete Masonry (Block) Units: Shall be light weight concrete masonry (block) units (100 lb/cu. ft.); and shall be cured in a moisture controlled atmosphere in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C-90-90 Type 1. All concrete masonry units shall conform to physical requirements of current applicable ASTM Specifications applying to the particular use of construction in which units are employed. Units shall be UL listed.

All concrete masonry units shall be protected against soiling or wetting prior to laying in the walls.

All outside corners shall be bullnose block.

1. Standard Concrete Block Units Shall be 8” x 16” x 8”, 8” x 16” x 6”, or 8” x 16” x 4” for work indicated.

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., listed producers. Documentation shall cover width, height and length of block, shell and web thicknesses, minimum equivalent thickness, compressive strength and type of aggregate.

12102 Section 04200, Page 4 UNIT MASONRY

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:

A. Factory blended mortar and grout shall meet ASTM C 270 97 proportion specifications standards using the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150 Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color cement.

2. Masonry Cement: Masonry cement shall NOT be used.

3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-207, Type S

4. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C-144, except for joins less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.

5. Water: Clean and potable.

B. Preparation: Lime shall be mixed without soaking or slacking.

1. Mortar Mix - Mortar for all exterior masonry and interior load bearing walls shall be ASTM C-270 Proportion Specification for Type S.

2. Mortar for backup work and interior nonbearing masonry shall be ASTM C-270 Proportion Specification for Type N. 2.04 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerator, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless other wise indicated.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C-270, Type S Proportion Specification for exterior masonry and interior non-load bearing masonry for job-mixed mortar and ASTM C-1142 for ready- mixed mortar, of types indicated below:

1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement lime.

2. Type S: One part lime per one part of Portland cement and 4-1/2 to 6 parts sand.

12102 Section 04200, Page 5 UNIT MASONRY 3. All mortar at face brick in exterior walls shall be Type S.

4. Mortar color shall match existing mortar.

2.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT: General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following:

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A-153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per square foot of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after prefabrication into units.)

B. Application: Use for exterior and interior masonry walls.

C. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below.

1. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2” less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required providing mortar coverage of not less than 5/8” joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2” elsewhere.

2. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gauge)

3. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gauge)

For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:

1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one of the following: a) AA Wire Products Co. b) Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c) Heckman Building Products, Inc. d) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. e) National Wire Products Industries f) Keystone Steel and Wire Co.

12102 Section 04200, Page 6 UNIT MASONRY

2.06 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS:

A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics:

1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in either tension or compression without deforming over, or developing play in excess of, 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements:

a. Wire Tie Length:

b. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend into masonry wythe of veneer face.

c. Anchor Section: Sheet-metal plate with screw holes top and bottom and with raised, rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie; of overall size indicated below:

d. Plate and Strap Size: 1-1/4 inches side fro plate, 5/8 inch wide for strap by lengths indicated below, slot clearance formed between face of plate and back of strap at maximum rib projection: 1/32 inch plus diameter of wire tie.

e. Plate and Strap Lengths: 6 inches and 3-5/8 inches, with both sides of plate stiffened by ribs.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a) Pos-I-Tie; Heckman Building Products, Inc. b) DW-10; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2.07 MASONRY REINFORCING:

See Section 03100 Concrete Work for bond beams and vertical reinforcing to be furnished and supplied by this Contractor.

2.08 EMBEDDED FLEXIBLE FLASHING:

A. Flexible Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard flashing of type indicated below:

12102 Section 04200, Page 7 UNIT MASONRY B. Flashing Material: EPDM sheet of thickness indicated below.

1. Thickness: nominal 60 mil minimum thickness.

2. Application: Use where flashing is concealed in masonry.

C. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide one of the following:

a) Nervastral, Inc. #600, Highload Adhesive b) Firestone, Flash Guard c) Youk, Wascoseal

E. Installation: The heads of all exterior doors and the heads and sills in masonry of all exterior windows and through wall flashing at the brick ledge, top of concrete walls, or shelf angles, where indicated shall be flashed with flexible through wall flashing. Only those adhesives and solvents recommended by the flashing material manufacturers are accepted. All work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, copies kept on job for use of installer and inspectors.

On solid masonry walls, or veneers, flashing shall be exposed 1/2 inch outside to the face of the wall and then through the wall and turned up onto the sheathing 8”; and the top edge sealed to the sheathing with a compatible sealant. Head flashing shall be carried 6 inches beyond both ends of the lintel. Head and sill flashing shall be turned up at the sides and ends 8”, forming a pan. Continuous wall flashing shall be lapped a minimum of 8”. After the masonry unit joints have been tooled, the excess through wall flashing shall be trimmed flush with the face of the masonry. Seal the through wall flashing to the sheathing with a continuous bead of compatible sealant at the top edge of the flashing membrane, or secured with a metal termination bar.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:

A. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D-226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

B. Weep Holes: Provide the following:

1. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce ½ inch exposure of exterior, 12 inches into cavity between wythes, and horizontal spacing of 32” o.c.

a) Cotton sash cord b) Trim cotton card flush with wall following final cleaning.

C. Miscellaneous Imbeds: This contractor shall install all miscellaneous imbeds in masonry work, as provided by others.

12102 Section 04200, Page 8 UNIT MASONRY

D. Joint Sealants Refer to Section 07900 Joint Sealers for caulking of all control joints.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS:

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer’s standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

Acidic cleaner shall be used only if approved by face brick manufacturer.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a) Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION: Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry.

Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project.

A. Wetting Brick: Wet brick made from shale which has ASTM C-67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 square inches per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated by surface dry when layed.

B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing.

C. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.

12102 Section 04200, Page 9 UNIT MASONRY Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-six units without cutting where possible.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES: Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry.

3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS: Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than half size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.

Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction.

A. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

Running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.

B. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces for set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

C. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Pipe Spaces: Walls enclosing pipe and duct spaces shall not be built until pipes and ducts are in place and tested, or permission received from Architect.

E. Grout Frames: All hollow metal door frames installed in masonry walls shall be filled solid with Portland cement grout.

F. Bond Beam Lintels: Shall be made from the same materials and to the same general Specifications as concrete blocks and shall be as designed and not be less than 7-1/2” high. Lintels shall have a minimum of 8” bearing at ends. Provide square bottom edges. Reinforcing shall be as specified in the structural drawings.

G. Hollow Metal Frames: Do not grout hollow metal frame installed in drywall assemblies.

3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS: Lay solid brick size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.

Mix mortar pigments in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

12102 Section 04200, Page 10 UNIT MASONRY

Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8” joints.

Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicted. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of sealants where shown or specified.

Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners of jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.

Piers, columns and wall ends shall be laid with regular joint widths regardless of nominal dimensions shown on the Drawings. Fat joint will not be permitted.

3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT: General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.

Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement.

Space continuous horizontal reinforcement to comply with referenced unit masonry standard and as follows:

For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16” o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated.

Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1’0” wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8” apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2’0” beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.

In addition to wall reinforcement, provide not less than 1-inch air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3.07 FLASHING/WEEP HOLES: General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicted.

Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar.

12102 Section 04200, Page 11 UNIT MASONRY Install flashings to comply with manufacturer’s instructions and as follows:

A. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wither to within 1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wither and turn up approximately 2 inches, unless other wise indicated.

B. At heads and sills, extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up ends not less than 3 inches to form a pan.

C. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashings and as follows:

D. Form weep holes with wicking material product specified in Part 2 of this Section.

E. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.

3.08 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING: Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

A. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Proprietary acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of acidic leaner manufacturer. Acidic cleaner shall be used only if approved by face brick manufacturer.

12102 Section 04200, Page 12 UNIT MASONRY

C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 04703, Page 1 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

04703 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer and application materials.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section specifying sealant materials.

1.03 REFERENCES

A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 5. ASTM C 270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C 482, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

C. Building Materials Evaluation Commission.

D. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. Listing in Material Approval Guide. 2. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A Reference Section 01300 Submittal Procedures; submit following items: 1. Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and weather resistant barrier. 2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of installer qualifications. b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report. c. Test Reports for physical properties. d. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

12102 Section 04703, Page 2 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01700 Project Closeout; submit following items: 1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Member of following organizations: 1) MSJC. 2) ACI. 3) ASTM. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project.

B. Certifications: 1. Current ICC-ES Report. 2. UL: Listing in Material Approval Guide. 3. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. 4. HUD: Material Release Number. 5. City of Los Angeles: Research Report. 6. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation. 7. Florida Product Approval Number.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of [Substantial Completion] [Final Acceptance].

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone.

12102 Section 04703, Page 3 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Design Materials: Legerstone

B. Contact: Bob Willey, Design Material 303-256-2800 [email protected]

C. Substitutions: None permitted.

2.02 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Weather Resistant Barrier: No. 15, Type I, asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226.

B. Metal Lath: [2.5 lb (1.4 kg/m2) galvanized expanded metal lath] [18 (1.3 mm) gauge woven wire mesh] [3.4 lb (1.8 kg/m2) galvanized expanded rib lath].

C. Fasteners: 1. Into Metal Studs: Minimum 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) head diameter, corrosion- resistant , self-drilling, self tapping, pancake head screws of sufficient length to penetrate 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum into the stud.

D. Mortar: Premixed Type N or mortar mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270. 1. Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured masonry is applied during and for 48 hours following installation of the manufactured masonry.

B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate type of manufactured masonry and substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install/Apply Stone and Related Materials specified above in accordance with type of substrate and manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions.

12102 Section 04703, Page 4 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation.

B. Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 06100, Page 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY: This Section includes the following:

A. Fire-retardant Treated Interior Wood grounds, nailers and blocking.

B. Fire-retardant Treated Interior Plywood panels

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 3, Section 03100 Concrete Work

B. Division 6, Section 06200 Carpentry & Millwork

C. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall

D. Division 10, Section 10100 Miscellaneous Construction Specialties

E. Division 12, Section 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework

1.04 DEFINITIONS

Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated.

12102 Section 06100, Page 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material.

C. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.

D. For Water-borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.

C. For fire-retardant treatment include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standards and other requirements.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITONS:

A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 “American Softwood Lumber Standard” and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee’s (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill.

12102 Section 06100, Page 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY

C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specifie4d for each use.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide kiln-dried lumber with 15 percent (15%) maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2” or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. For light framing (2” to 4” thick, 2” to 10” wide nominal dimensions) provide the following grade and species:

1. Construction grade, fir or yellow pine.

2.03 BOARDS

A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:

1. Moisture content: 15 percent maximum, “MC-15”

2. Where transparent or natural finish or no finish is indicated, provide Redwood, Select Heart Grade (RIS).

3. Where painted finish is indicated, provide No. 1 Boards per SPIB rules, Select Merchantable Boards per WCLIB rules, or No. 2 Common Boards and Better per WWPA rules.

B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 15 percent maximum moisture content and of following species and grade:

1. Redwood Construction Common per RIS rules, Southern Pine No. 2 Boards per SPIB rules, or any species graded Construction Boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules.

C. Board sizes: Provide sizes as indicated and/or required.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including curbs, support bases, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:

Provide same grade and species as dimension lumber.

12102 Section 06100, Page 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 “U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood” for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Association (APA) “Performance Standard and Pollicies for Structural Use Panels.”

B. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements.

C. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: APA C-D Plugged Exterior, thickness as indicated but not less than 3/4 inch nominal.

D. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA B-C PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, it not otherwise indicated, not less than 3/4”.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.

Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip- zinc coating (ASTM A 153).

2.07 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as “TRT-WD” or “Treated,” or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards U1 (and Categories UC1 thru UC4B) and T1. Mark each treated item with AWPA Quality Mark Requirements.

1. Pressure treat with water borne preservatives: ACQ (Alkaline Copper Quaternary) to comply with AWPA Standard P5 with an above ground water retention of 0.25 p/cf min. to 40 p/cf. After treatment, kiln dry lumber and plywood to have maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent (19%) and 15 percent (15%). Treat indicated items and the following:

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, and gravel stop and wood bucks at window jambs and similar locations in exterior walls.

2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA Standard M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

12102 Section 06100, Page 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.08 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS.

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify “fire-retardant- treated wood” with appropriate Classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U. S. Testing, Timber Products Inspections, Inc., or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire retardant –treated wood products shall have a legible fire-retardant “marking” on each piece.

B. Interior Type A: For interior locations use fire-retardant chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation. 1. No reduction shall take place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions.

2. No other form of degradation shall occur due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture and treatment.

3. No corrosion of metal fasteners shall result from their contact with treated wood.

4. Fire retardant-treated wood products which are painted shall leave the fire retardant “marking” exposed.

C. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

D. All lumber and plywood used on the interior of the building for nailers, blocking, and furring of any nature shall be fire-retardant treated.

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

Interior Type A Fire-Retardant Treated Wood:

“Dricon”, Hickson Corporation “Pyro-Guard”, Hoover Treated Wood Products “Flameproof LHC-HTT”, Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Inc.

E. Limitation: Fire treated wood shall be limited to walls only. Fire treated wood shall not be permitted above ceilings.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS:

A. Isolation Barrier shall be 15 lb asphalt impregnated building paper.

12102 Section 06100, Page 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joins or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.

C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and required by recognized standards.

E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

F. Use common wire nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

G. Rough Lumber and Blocking: All blocking shall be accurately located so that finish pieces can be fastened without shaving or small fillers.

3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS

A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Bolted Wood Plates: Provide bolts and place wood plates in conjunction with steel work and masonry wherever required.

D. Ground and Nailing Strips: Provide nailing strips and ground wherever necessary for fastening finish work thereto, including plastic laminated casework, cabinets, soap dishes, grab bars, shower curtains, hand rails, crash rails, etc. (unless detailed otherwise).

E. Comply with recommendations of “Manual for House Framing” of National Forest Products Association (N.F.P.A.).

D. Anchor and nail as indicated and to comply with “Recommended Nailing Schedule” of “Manual for House Framing” and “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” published by N.F.P.A.

12102 Section 06100, Page 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY

E. ACQ pressure treated wood grounds, nailers, blocking, sleepers or plates shall be provided with an isolation barrier of 15 lb asphalt impregnated building felt when attached directly to metal framing. The isolation barrier shall completely cover all contact surfaces between the pressure treated wood and the metal.

3.03 SCRIBE MOLDS:

A. Provide scribe molds wherever it may be necessary to assure tight fitting work.

3.04 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Comply with recommendations of “Manual for House Framing” of National Forest Products Association (N.F.P.A.).

B. Anchor and nail as indicated and to comply with “Recommended Nailing Schedule” of “Manual for House Framing” and “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” published by N.F.P.A..

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 06200, Page 1 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

06200 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions (SC/MGC) and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Provide and erect all items of Carpentry and Millwork, indicated on the Drawings, and that are required for the completion of the project in a first class manner.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for blocking

B. Division 12, Section 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework for related millwork and laminate tops.

1.04 REFERENCES:

A. The following references shall apply:

1. AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, current edition 2. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows 3. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests for Door Assemblies 4. ASTM E152 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 5. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 6. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 7. UL 1784 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 8. UL 263 -- Fire Test Ratings 9. ASTM D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

1.05 COORDINATION: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks.

1.07 PROTECT INSTALLED CARPENTRY WORK: Protect installed carpentry work from damage by work of other trades until Owner's acceptance of the work.

This Contractor shall provide any temporary protection to finished millwork, floors, etc., that, in the opinion of the Architect, requires protection during the progress of the work. Protection shall be accomplished in an effective manner using materials and methods that will cause no injury.

12102 Section 06200, Page 2 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

1.08 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 for all materials. Contractor shall submit certificates of fire retardant treatment of all wood blocking used inside the facility for this project.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 All wood shall be thoroughly seasoned and kiln dried. Rough lumber shall be construction grade Douglas Fir for structural use and utility grade for blocking.

The grades of lumber shall be as defined by the rules of the recognized Association of Lumber Manufacturer's producing the materials specified, and the maximum defects and blemishes permissible in any specified grade shall not exceed the limitations of the American Lumber Standard. Lumber, unless otherwise specified, shall be surfaced four sides and shall bear the grade and trademark of the Association, under whose rules it is produced, and shall contain a mark of mill identification.

All lumber shall be live, sound stock, thoroughly seasoned and kiln dried. Unseasoned or "Green" lumber will not be acceptable.

Interior Blocking: Fire retardant wood shall be used on the interior for blocking. Also see Division 15 and Division 16 for approved blocking or anchors. Fire retardant wood shall be stamped, indicating fire retardant treatment. Contractor shall submit certificates of the retardant treatment. Provide blocking for all wall hand rails, toilet accessories, etc.

2.02 MILLWORK:

A. Millwork Defined to include (in addition to items so designated on the Drawings) all miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly known as Finish Carpentry or Millwork, unless such items are specified under another section of these Specifications, or are noted "NIC" on the Drawings.

Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provision of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for Premium Quality work.

Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions and any Shop Drawing details as required for accurate fit.

B. Optimum Moisture Content - Kiln-dry interior woodwork to an average moisture content of 6% to 11%.

1. Exposed Finish Wood: Select plain red oak.

a) Bull nose edges b) Solid edge banding c) Crown molding base, casing and trim d) All exposed finish wood shall be of size and profiles indicated

2. Exposed Plywood: Grade A, plain birch.

12102 Section 06200, Page 3 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

3. Particle Board: Shall be matte formed, type I, density C, Class I per CS23666.

4. Laminated Plastic Countertops & Faces: Refer to Section 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework.

5. Millwork, Built-Up Wood Counters, Etc.: As indicated and detailed on the Drawings, shall be first quality workmanship with mortised and tenoned or dovetail joints. All woodwork shall be built of plain slice red oak, Architectural grade Plywood, using first quality clean lumber for all facings and trim. Shelving and miscellaneous items where shown, unless otherwise specified, shall be White Pine.

All wood casework shall be shop assembled, except that cases too large for entrance into the use area, shall be made in attachable sections with provisions made for job reconnection in the using space.

All face plates, paneled ends, and paneled doors shall be of mortise and tenon, or doweled construction, glued under pressure. Body web frames may be of stile-plowed and stub tenon construction.

Wherever nails are allowed on exposed surfaces, they may be either narrow- line staples or narrowhead T nails, as used with air hammers, or regular finishing nails. They must be properly set for filling.

Fixed case body members shall be joined by dado joints. Stop dadoes are required for all fully exposed edges. Such dadoes shall be stopped approximately 1/2 inch from the show edge of such members, that is, the joint shall appear as square shoulder joint in the face edge. Stop dadoes are not required when the show edges are concealed by face plates or similar covers at point of connections. Stop dadoes cannot be used for removable partitions.

Visible edges shall be banded with lumber edgings, except where noted, filled, sanded and painted, glued under pressure with no nails allowed. Species shall match the face veneers of plywood. Visible edges shall be eased by sanding.

6. Wood Moldings: As indicated and detailed on the drawings, provide wood moldings, base, and crowns. See drawings for size and profile characteristics.

C. Exposed members for transparent finish - Lumber shall be Premium Grade, and in addition, shall be matched for compatibility of grain and color between adjoining members. Hardwood plywood shall be custom grade and Softwood Plywood shall be Premium Grade. Hardwood plywood shall be Premium Grade only when the case design required flush faces between panels uninterrupted by other members such as stiles and rails.

D. Exposed members for paint finish - Lumber shall be Premium Grade, but matching for compatibility is not required. All softwood plywood shall be Custom Grade and hardwood plywood shall be Economy Grade.

12102 Section 06200, Page 4 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

E. Semi-exposed members for any finish - Unless otherwise specified, any species of the following grades may be used:

Lumber shall be Premium Grade Softwood shall be Custom Grade Hardwood plywood shall be Economy Grade Paintable particle board may be used if for paint

There shall be no visible cross scratches in any exposed surfaces which receive a transparent finish.

Miscellaneous hardware: Hardware shall be as follows, or approved for use:

Shelf Standards: K.V. 80 Anachrome finish Shelf Brackets: K.V. 180 Anachrome finish Shelf Standards: K.V. 255 Clothes Carrier: K.V. 1-10

Furnish all other hardware required to complete millwork.

2.03 COAT ROD Coat rod shall be KV #660 closet pole, 1” diameter.

PART 3 - WORKMANSHIP

3.01 JOB MEASUREMENTS: Wherever required to insure perfect fitting work, the Contractor shall take measurements at the job before beginning finished woodwork.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joins or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.

C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and required by recognized standards.

D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

E. Use common wire nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

12102 Section 06200, Page 5 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

3.03 MISCELLANEOUS: Furnish and erect all miscellaneous items for Carpentry and Millwork shown, or reasonably implied, as required on the Drawings and Specifications. Assist other trades, provide all centering, furring, ground blocks, etc., required by any trade. Do all cutting and fitting of Carpentry & Millwork that may be required. Furnish scaffolding not done by other trades.

3.04 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS

A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ground and Nailing Strips: Provide nailing strips and ground wherever necessary for fastening finish work thereto, including plastic laminated casework, cabinets, soap dishes, grab bars, shower curtains, hand rails, crash rails, etc. (unless detailed otherwise).

3.05 SCRIBE MOLDS: Provide scribe molds wherever it may be necessary to assure tight fitting work.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07100, Page 1 WATERPROOFING & DAMPPROOFING

07100 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and apply all wall and floor waterproofing and damp proofing indicated:

A. Vapor retarder directly under all "On Grade" interior concrete floor slabs.

B. Joint filler in expansion joints between concrete slab sections.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 2, Section 02160 Excavation Grading, Cutting, Fill & Backfill.

B. Division 3, Section 03100 Concrete Work

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 VAPOR RETARDER: All "On Grade" interior concrete floor slab vapor retarder shall comply with ASTM E 1745 (Latest Edition) Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarder Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. The vapor retarder shall not exceed a maximum perm rating of 0.3 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 (Latest Edition)

The vapor retarder shall be, not less than, 10 mil thick, polyethylene sheet.

The installation of the vapor retarder shall be in accordance with ASTM E 1643 (Latest Edition), Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth of Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

The under slab drainage base for concrete slab shall be level and compacted before installing the vapor retarder sheet on top of the drainage base. The concrete slab shall be placed directly on the vapor retarder. All joints shall be lapped no less than 6 inches. Seal all lap joints together and sealed with adhesive, tape or both as recommended by the vapor retarder manufacturer. Provide protection to prevent puncture of the vapor retarder. All penetrations or punctures in the vapor retarder shall be sealed. Turn up wall 4 or 6 inches matching the slab thickness and seal. Seal edges to masonry and/or the perimeter concrete foundation wall with a bonding adhesive.

12102 Section 07100, Page 2 WATERPROOFING & DAMPPROOFING

2.02 JOINT FILLER: All wall expansion joints and floor expansion joints in Ground Floor Mechanical Rooms, foundation walls and exterior concrete paving, etc., shall receive Pre-molded Joint Filler as manufactured by W.R. Meadows; A.C. Horn Company; or an approved equal for specific condition and application.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

3.01 All materials specified herein shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07210, Page 1 BUILDING INSULATION

07210 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and install all thermal, sound, and perimeter insulation as specified herein.

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building insulation – Thermal (exterior and interior wall) 2. Building Sound Attenuation Insulation

B. Repair of existing building insulation

C. Repair of existing vapor retarder

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements for insulation provided in other Sections:

A. Division 7: Section 07552 Existing Roofing System indicated below for roof insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

B. Division 7: Section 07840 Firestopping for fire safing.

C. Division 9: Section 09250 Drywall for thermal insulation and sound attenuation insulation installed as part of metal framed wall and partition assemblies.

1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. Thermal Resistance: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products is designated by “R-values”, they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistance values are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: Add Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all material.

B. Product Data: Provide Product Data, R-values, etc. for all insulation materials.

C. Fire Rating:

1. All exposed fiberglass insulation shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and bear the U.L. label.

12102 Section 07210, Page 2 BUILDING INSULATION

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119 Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136

B. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following:

1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:

CertainTeed Corporation Gustin Bacon Company Manville: Building Insulation Div., Manville Sales Corporation National Gypsum Company Owens/Corning Fiberglass Company

2. Manufacturers of Polystyrene Board Insulation:

Dow Chemical Owens/Corning Fiberglass Company Plasti-Fab R-Control

2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer’s standard thickness, widths, and lengths.

12102 Section 07210, Page 3 BUILDING INSULATION

B. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket / Batt Insulation (for Interior Walls): Insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows:

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively.

3. Pressure fit Batts for metal stud walls.

C. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation (for Exterior Walls): Thermal insulation produced by combing mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor- retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); Foil faced scrim Kraft vapor retarder membrane on one face, and as follows:

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50 respectively. 3. Flanged Units: Provide blankets/batts fabricated with facing incorporating flanges along their edges for attachment to framing members. 4. Pressure fit batt for metal stud walls. 5. Foil Faced Scrim Kraft vapor retarder. 6. R-value: as indicated on the drawings

D. Safing Insulation And Accessories:

1. Safing Insulation: Provided by Section 07840 Firestopping.

E. Roof Insulation: Furnished and installed by Section 07552 Existing Roofing System.

2.03 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS:

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates.

B. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Foil Faced Tape for taping joints in vapor retarder

D. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (for Interior Face of Masonry Walls): Rigid cellular thermal, insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated; with 5-year, degrees aged r-values 5 at 75 degrees F (23.9 degrees C), and as follows:

1. Type X: 1.6 pounds/cubic foot minimum density, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 165, respectively.

12102 Section 07210, Page 4 BUILDING INSULATION

3. R-value: as indicated on the drawings. 4. Thickness: as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates and conditions with installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION: . A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders.

B. Where existing drywall on the exterior wall is removed for other trades work, replace damages insulation and tape seal all joints to maintain the vapor retarder.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer’s technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.

B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION:

A. Apply insulation units to substrate, complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. Bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except as otherwise indicated.

Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

12102 Section 07210, Page 5 BUILDING INSULATION

D. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf).

E. Batt insulation joints shall be continuously taped across studs when installed in metal studs to maintain the vapor retarder. Support the batt insulation in metal studs with metal frames.

F. Sound Retarder Blanket: Soundproofing blanket shall be 1-1/2” fiberglass unfaced flexible type fiberglass sound blanket. The sound blanket shall be placed in office walls; and on top of the suspended ceiling tile.

1. Toilet Rooms: In walls and over entire ceiling of room 2. Offices: In walls and over entire ceiling of room 3. Other Areas: Around room or designated space perimeter

(See Section 09250 Drywall for other requirements)

3.05 PROTECTION:

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION ON INTERIOR WALLS:

A. All extruded polystyrene board existing or new used on interior shall be covered by a thermal retarder of 1/2” gypsum wallboard or equivalent thermal retarder material which will limit the average temperature rise of the unexposed surface to not more than 250 degrees F. (121 degrees C) after 15 minutes of fire exposure complying with the standard time temperature curve of ASTM E 119. The thermal retarder shall be installed in such a manner that assures the thermal retarder will stay in place for a minimum of 15 minutes under the same test conditions. See Section 09250 Drywall.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07552, Page 1 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM

07552 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work required under this heading includes all labor, materials, and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the proper protection and patching of all existing roofing work as required by the project and herein SPECIFIED. Furnish and install all work necessary to keep all existing roof surfaces, flashings and cap flashing absolutely watertight.

The Contractor shall examine the surfaces against which the work under this heading is to be applied and shall correct any defects detrimental to the installation of the materials. He shall see to it that all roof surfaces are clean and dry before installing roofing.

The Contractor shall protect the existing roof during the performance of work under this project, and shall repair all damaged areas as a result of the work.

Provide partial removal and flashing the existing roof at parapet edge in order to install new work.

Remove existing roofing systems and insulation from designated areas for new work.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 7, Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

B. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers

1.04 PROTECTION: Protect the building and site from damage and defacing from work operations. Use tarps or other suitable material at hoisting points to protect building walls. Do NOT use bituminous roofing for this purpose.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 for all materials.

A. Submit Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for all materials; and Certificate of Compliance of the work.

1.06 EXISTING ROOF PATCHING: The work required under this heading includes all labor, materials, and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to install new roof mounted equipment and cut, patch and repair all the existing roofing and existing flashing as indicated on the Drawings, required by new work through passing through the existing roofing area, and herein specified. Furnish and install all work necessary to make all roof surfaces, flashings and cap flashings absolutely watertight.

12102 Section 07552, Page 2 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM

A. The Contractor shall examine the existing surfaces against which the work under this heading is to be applied and shall correct any defects detrimental to the installation of the materials. He shall see to it that all existing roof surfaces are clean and dry before installing roofing patching.

B. The Contractor shall protect the existing roof during the performance of the work under this project and shall repair all damaged areas as a result of the work.

1.07 WARRANTY: In addition to providing written confirmation compliance from the existing roofing system manufacturer that the existing warranty is maintained, the roofing contractor shall furnish the Owner at the completion of work a written manufacturer's warranty on his own letterhead that the roofing and flashing as installed will be watertight for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the building by the Architect. A statement shall be included in the warranty that the roofing contractor will make any repairs that are necessary during the two year period to make the roof watertight without cost to the Owner and that each year during the two year period the roofing contractor will, with a representative of the Manufacturer, the Owner and Architect, make an inspection of the roof and any blisters, bubbles, and bare spots, or any other defects will be repaired by the Roofing Contractor at his own expense and to the satis- faction of the Owner.

The warranty shall also state the that Owner has the right, in the case of any emergency at any time during the two-year period, to make any temporary repairs that are required to protect the building and/or the contents of the building from damage due to the roof leaking. The cost of such repairs shall be borne by the Roofing Contractor and such action by the Owner will not invalidate the warranty.

Roof bond will not be furnished. The Owner and the roof bonding company shall be notified in writing prior to making any new penetration through the roof in order to maintain the existing roof warranty.

This Contractor shall obtain permission from the roof bonding company for all cutting and patching. All work shall comply with roof bonding company requirements and shall maintain the existing roofing system warranty. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of inspections by the roof bonding company.

All work shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 ROOFING SYSTEM: Roofing Systems for patch and repair work shall meet the criteria. The following roofing system for patching and flashing is required. Match roof. All materials used in the roofing system shall be of the same manufacturer for roofing system compliance. Products not of the same manufacture shall be listed for use in the approved roofing system assembly.

A. Roofing Systems shall be UL Class A; and shall be constructed in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's printed instructions for the existing roofing.

12102 Section 07552, Page 3 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM

B. Deliver all materials to site in original containers bearing manufacturer's name and type of material. All materials used in roof membrane must have appropriate Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., labels.

2.02 ROOF INSULATION General: Foam Board insulation of the types listed herein:

A. Foam Board Insulation The Contractor use Polystryrene to meet required R-value. Total thickness of insulation shall have an R-value of not less than R-LTTR 18.5 (3”).

1. Expanded Polystyrene Foam Board Insulation: The rigid foam board core shall be expanded polystyrene, permanently bonded to organic facer sheets. This insulation shall provide a minimum aged k-value of 0.18 and an R value of 5.6 per 1" of material. The insulation board shall be compatible with the approved for use with the roofing system. The insulation shall have a UL Class A rating and FM Class 1 rating.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Apache Products Co. 2. Rmax, Inc. 3. Atlas Roofing Company

C. Board Insulation The roofing insulation shall consist of both constant thickness (base layer) and tapered layers (tapered) for standard slopes and crickets.

1. The roof insulation shall have a minimum thickness of 3 inches, except at roof drain sumps, which shall not be less than 2 inches at the drain.

2. The insulation shall have a minimum taper of 1/4 inch per foot on flat roof decks. Insulation on sloped roof decks shall have constant thickness insulation provided a minimum slope of 1/4 inches is achieved.

3. Tapered insulation shall have a minimum slope of 1/4 inch.

4. Crickets shall have a taper of 1/2 inch per foot, but not less than 1/4 inch per foot to meet warranty requirements for roof slope. Crickets shall be provided on the high side of all equipment or other barriers for drainage.

D. Insulation Attachment: The insulation shall be attached to the roof deck by mechanical or approved adhesive means as required to meet the requirements of the existing Roofing System.

2.03 METAL FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING: See Section 07620, Sheet Metal Flashing.

2.04 CAULKING & SEALING: All caulking and sealing of the sheet metal shall be by this Contractor. (See Section 07900, Joint Sealers, for caulking type.)

12102 Section 07552, Page 4 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM

2.05 PIPING, CONDUIT, VENTS, CURBS, ETC.: Shall be pipe curb assemblies with boots, cap seals, and clamps. Materials shall be compatible and be coordinated with the materials in the specific roof system. Similar to cap seals by Portals Plus and pipe curb assemblies by the Pate Company.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 Inspection: Before work under this section is started, the Roofing Contractor shall inspect deck and surfaces with the Owner, Architect and roofing manufacturer. A record of the roof condition will be made. Corrections necessary to make them acceptable shall be made prior to start of work. Work found to be in violation of Specifications or not in accordance with established workmanship practices and standards of the manufacturer's warranty, shall be subject to complete removal and proper replacement with new materials at Contractor's expense.

3.02 Inspect all surfaces to receive work specified herein. Application of materials constitutes agreement that substrate is satisfactory.

3.03 Do not proceed with roofing in any area until all vents, drains, curbs, cants, blocking, nailing strips and projections through the roof deck have been installed in that area.

3.04 Do not apply materials on wet or damp surfaces, over dust, dirt, or other foreign matter.

3.05 Accomplish application of roofing so that the area will be complete and water tight except for top surfacing and flashings at the end of each day of work. Protect edges and incomplete flashings against water entry at all times. Remove cut-offs and temporary protection prior to resumption of work.

3.06 If in-place roofing systems are to be left without final surfacing longer than the day following application or if precipitation is likely, glaze the top of the felts with a light coating of steep grade asphalt.

3.07 Asphalt materials shall not be used.

3.08 Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work area where aggregate/debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing membrane. Contractor shall instruct and police workmen to ensure that aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workmen's shoes or equipment wheels. Discovery of entrapped aggregate/debris within new membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection.

3.09 No material shall be stored on existing roof areas, unless set on clean plywood to protect the existing roof area.

3.10 Provide partial removal and flashing the existing roof at parapet edge to install new work.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07620, Page 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work required under this section includes all labor, materials, and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the proper completion of all sheet metal flashing as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified. Furnish and install all work necessary to make all roof surfaces, flashings and cap flashing absolutely watertight. This includes all equipment, roof penetrations, etc. which is existing but are not specifically indicated on the drawings.

A. Metal Flashing and Counter Flashing: Expansion joints, cap flashing, gravel stops, parapet wall coping, scuppers, gutters, downspouts, etc., shall be as follows:

B. Provide expansion joints with covers at approximately 8’-0” O.C. over continuous cleats.

The Contractor shall examine the surfaces against which the work under this section is to be applied and shall correct any defects detrimental to the installation of the materials. The Contractor shall see to it that all roof surfaces are clean and dry before installing roofing.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for blocking B. Division 7, Section 07552 Existing Roofing System for roofing and flashing.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, Specification Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

Product Data, including manufacturer’s material and finish data, and installation instructions; and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.

Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details.

A. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected.

B. 12-inch long samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide Warranty complete with specified factory finish.

C. Provide Sheet Metal Contractor’s two (2) Year Warranty.

12102 Section 07620, Page 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITION: Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of work, and protection of materials and finishes.

1.07 QUALITY CONTROL: Comply with details and recommendations of SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, Sixth Edition, September 2003, methods of joining and provisions of expansion, etc.

1.08 PROTECTION: Protect the building and site from damage and defacing from work operations. Use tarps or other suitable material at hoist points to protect building walls. DO NOT use bituminous roofing for this purpose.

1.09 WARRANTY:

A. SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY

1 The roofing contractor shall furnish on his own letterhead to the Owner a two (2) year written warranty from the date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

2. A statement shall be included in the Sheet Metal Contractors warranty that the Sheet Metal contractor will make any repairs that are necessary during the first two (2) year period to make the roof watertight without cost to the Owner.

3. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide an emergency repair kit for the Owner’s use.

4. The warranty shall also state that the Owner has the right, in the case of any emergency at any time during this two (2) year period, to make any temporary repairs that are required to protect the building and/or the contents of the building from damage due to the roof leaking. Such repairs shall not invalidate this two (2) year warranty, or the sheet metal manufacturer warranty. The Owner shall notify the Sheet Metal Contractor of the roof leaks.

5. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall make warranty repairs within 48 hours of notice from the Owner during the first two (2) years.

12102 Section 07620, Page 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Pre-finished aluminum with Fluropon Finish containing 70% “Kynar 500” fluoropolymer resin, coated aluminum sheet .080, with 1.0 mil thickness coating “Fluropon” by Valspar, or approved equal. Color shall be selected by Owner's representative from the manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Brushed aluminum, .080 thick, as recommended by SMACNA, except as otherwise indicated.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

B. Asphalt Mastic: Compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

E. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather- resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal and compatible with the Roofing System.

F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed; non-corrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

G. Vapor Sheet: A vapor retarder of .045” E.P.D.M. sheet shall be installed continuously under all metal flashings.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL:

A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

12102 Section 07620, Page 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Form exposed sheet metal work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

C. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpanding, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”.

Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.

Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.04 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS: General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.

A. Cap Flashings: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluoropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

12102 Section 07620, Page 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

E. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

Fluropolymer (Kynar) coated, aluminum, .080 thick

2.05 FINISHES:

A. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent Kynar 500, Elf-Atochem, Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. Valspar Fluropon, Hylar 5000, or equal.

B. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of choices for color and gloss.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

3.01 EXAMINATION: Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION: General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

Install exposed sheet metal work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

A. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

12102 Section 07620, Page 6 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

B. Sealed Joints Form nonexpanding, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA Manual. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant.

Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.

C. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

D. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashing in bar termination strips receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant.

F. Roof-Drainage System: Install items as recommended by SMACNA’s Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation.

G. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

Provide final protection and maintain a condition that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07840, Page 1 FIRESTOPPING

07840 FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contractor for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fire stopping, fire resistant joint sealers, safing and draft stopping for fire related construction, including wall assemblies, floor assemblies, roof assemblies, headwalls (vertical and horizontal) at junctures between rated assemblies and the penetrations thereof. This includes, but not limited to:

A. All openings in fire resistance rated wall assemblies including both empty openings and around all penetrations by structural members, cable, conduits, pipes, ducts, and other penetrating items, etc.

B. All openings in fire resistance rated floor and roof assemblies, both empty openings and those openings containing items such as structural members, cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc.

C. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

D. Openings at each floor level in all fire resistance rated stairwells.

E. Firestopping or wrapping of boxes in excess of 16 square inches face area or within 24” horizontally of another box.

F. Headwall (vertical and horizontal) firestopping of all rated walls and their junctures with other rated floor or roof assemblies.

G. Draft stopping of all other openings or penetrations thru non-rated walls, ceilings or floors.

H. Fire stop: all column, beam, joist, and miscellaneous structure steel members, which intersect, or penetrate a rated assembly.

I. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.

J. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

K. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:

This Contractor shall perform all work of the following Sections to properly execute the work in order to maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and floors where firestopping, safing and smoke seals are required.

12102 Section 07840, Page 2 FIRESTOPPING

The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers for non-fire resistive joint sealant. B. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall for non-fire resistive joint sealants. C. Division 15: Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, duct and piping penetrations D. Division 16: Electrical for cable and conduit penetrations

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops"

B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”

C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Firestop Devices (XHJI) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Joint Systems (XHBN) g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)

2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).

E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”

F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus”

G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” to be inspected by third party inspection agency.

H. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”

I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments

J. Major Building Codes: ICBO, and IBC

K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

L. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

12102 Section 07840, Page 3 FIRESTOPPING

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.

B. Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame(F) and Temperature(T) ratings as required by local building and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 fire tests. The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.

1. F-Rated Through Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire resistance rating of the construction penetrated.

2. T-Rated Through Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E814, where required by code and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies as required where the following conditions exist:

a) Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.

b) Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures.

c) Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required having a temperature-rise rating.

d) Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4” diameter nominal pipe or 16-sq. in. in overall cross sectional area.

e) Where fire stopping systems protect headwalls (vertical or horizontal) of rated assemblies and their juncture with other rated assemblies.

3. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.

4. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.

a) For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through penetration firestop systems.

b) For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4” or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.

12102 Section 07840, Page 4 FIRESTOPPING

c. Fire penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

5. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.

C. Firestopping material shall be asbestos free, free of PCBs, and lead free.

D. Do not use any product containing solvents or that require hazardous waste disposal.

E. Firestopping shall be performed by a contractor trained, or approved by firestop manufacturer.

F. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions.

F. All firestopping products and UL Systems designs indicated shall comply with the UL “Fire Resistance Directory”, latest Edition.

H. Firestopping of UL listed fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, smoke dampers; or other listed devices shall be in accordance with the damper, or device manufacturer-listed test results for compliance.

I. All work shall be performed in accordance with the Owner’s fire stop policy and procedures.

J. For those firestop applications that exist for which no specific design or UL system has been pre-selected, the Owner and Architect will work with the Contractor and the Authorities Having Jurisdiction on developing an approved engineering judgement.

1.06 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1: Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

B. Submit manufacturer's product literature and data for each type of firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria, and test data.

C Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC’S) and are nontoxic to building occupants.

D. Shop drawings detailing fire stopping materials, installation methods, and firestopping relationships between adjoining construction, each through penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency (i.e.: UL, WH, FM) evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

Submit specific product documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency (i.e. UL, WH, FM) that is applicable to each through penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items; and for headwall (vertical and horizontal) fire stopping.

12102 Section 07840, Page 5 FIRESTOPPING

E. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product.

F. Installer documentation: Each Contract Bid Package shall submit all firestopping document from firestop manufacturer wherein manufacturer recognizes, i.e. approves installer for said manufacturer's firestop products.

G. Prepare job mock-up of the material proposed for use in the project for each situation. Approved mock-ups may be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the standard for remaining work.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the “System Performance Requirements” article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01” of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78” below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

Through penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their UL “Fire Resistance Directory”, latest Edition, by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Fire resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01” of water, as measured 0.78” from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements:

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their “Fire Resistance Directory” or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from the single manufacturer specified.

Obtain all firestop materials from a single source under the existing sales contract with the Owner. Additional pricing, shipping, or related information may be provided by the firestop vendor’s regional sales representative.

D. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Sub-part F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized Light Microscopy”.

12102 Section 07840, Page 6 FIRESTOPPING

E. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.

1.08 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. The firestopping Contractor or Installer shall be certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements.

B. All firestopping installers, field supervisors with oversight responsibility and inspectors shall undergo a minimum four-hour training session in the manufacturer’s firestop program. The Contractor shall hence be responsible for implementation of firestop tracking requirements. Firestop systems for each type application will be designated by the Architect. Additional information regarding technical implementation requirements may be provided by the firestop vendor’s field engineer.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:

A. Deliver material in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with manufacturer's name, product identification, date of manufacture, lot numbers, UL- labels, shelf life, curing time, mixing instructions for components and installation instruction.

B. Store materials in the original unopened containers or packages and under conditions recommended by manufacturers to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contamination or other causes.

C. All Firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life.

D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in material safety data sheets, as applicable.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are we due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers’ instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.

C. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

1.11 WARRANTY:

A. Firestop Contractor shall warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements as herein specified.

12102 Section 07840, Page 7 FIRESTOPPING

1.12 SEQUENCING:

A. Coordinate this work as required with work of other trades.

B. Firestopping of penetrations above ceiling shall follow construction of walls.

C. Firestopping of penetrations shall precede masonry wall, or gypsum board finishing in finished spaces.

1.13 PROTECTION:

A. Where firestopping is installed at locations, which will remain exposed in the completed work. Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finished, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities.

B. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from damaging adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components, for each firestopping system, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated system.

C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems (XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory; provide products of the manufacturer as identified below: The Contractor shall use one manufacturer for all firestopping products for continuity of UL assembly compatibility.

1. Metacaulk® 2. Hilti 3. Bio Fireshield 4. 3M 5. STI Specified Technologies, Inc. 6. Tremco

12102 Section 07840, Page 8 FIRESTOPPING

2.03 FIRESTOPPING PRODUCTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. RectorSeal Metacaulk® 2. Bio Fireshield 3. 3M 4. STI Specified Technologies, Inc. 5. Tremco 6. Hilti

B. Firestop Mortars:

1. Metacaulk® Mortar 2. K-2 Firestop Mortar 3. K-20 Firestop Mortar 4. Tremstop M 5. Hilti 6. STI Series SSM

C. Firestop Sealants and Caulks:

1. Metacaulk® 950, 835, 880, 1000, 1100 Intumescent Firestop Caulks 2. Bio Fireshield BIOSTOP 500 + Intumescent Firestop Caulk 3. Bio Fireshield Biotherm 100 and Biotherm 200 Firestop Sealants 4. 3M CP25WB 5. Tremstop 1a, WBM, A 6. Hilti 7. STI Series LC, PEN300, ORES

D. Firestop Putty:

1. Metacaulk Putty & Putty Pads 2. Bio Fireshield BIOSTOP Moldable Putty & Putty Pads 3. 3M MMP-4S Moldable Putty Pads 4. 3M MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix 5. Spec Seal, Series SSP Putty Pads 6. Tremstop FP, Putty Pads 7. Hilti 8. STI Series SSP or EP

E. Firestop Collars:

1. Metacaulk Plastic Pipe Collar 2. BIOSTOP Plastic Pipe Collar 3. 3M PPD 4. Tremstop Fyre Can, Fyre Can Sleeve, MCR, Tremstop D 5. Hilti 6. STI Series SSC

12102 Section 07840, Page 9 FIRESTOPPING

F. Firestop Mastic:

1. Metacaulk® 1100 Firestop Mastic 2. Bio Fireshield 700 Firestop Mastic 3. Tremstop WBM 4. Hilti

G. Wrap Strips:

1. Metacaulk Intumescent Wrap Strips 2. Bio Fireshield BIOSTOP Intumescent Wrap Strips 3. 3M FS-195 Wrap Strip 4. Tremstop WS 5. Hilti 6. STI Series FW

H. Firestop Pillows:

1. STI SSB Series 2. Tremstop PS 3. Hilti

I. Accessories:

1. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type recommended by manufacturer.

2. Primer, Sealant and Solvent Cleaner: As recommended by manufacturer.

3. Wound 20 Ga. Galv. Steel, 1’ Diamond Mesh

2.04 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM E 814 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.

B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:

Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors for products of type indicated.

C. Multi-component, Non-sag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure- related use NT, and joint-substrate-related uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.

2.05 MIXING: For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer’s directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

12102 Section 07840, Page 10 FIRESTOPPING

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Examine the substrates and conditions where Firestops are to be installed and notify the architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the architect.

B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop product(s).

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

Identification of rated assembly conditions will be provided by other sections of this Specification.

3.03 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING:

A. General:

1. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise.

2. Insulation types specified in other SECTIONS shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein.

B. Building Exterior Perimeters:

1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous past a structural floor, and a space would otherwise remain open between the inner face of the wall construction and the outer perimeter edge of the structural floor, provide firestopping to equal the fire resistance of the floor assembly. Mineral wool by itself is not an acceptable firestop, neither is mineral wool used with beads of caulking applied along length of mineral wool/curtain walls or mineral wool/floor slab junctures. If mineral wool is part of firestop system, the mineral wool must be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL listed Firestop Sealant. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data for product to be used. Example: UL FW-S-1002.

2. Curtain wall fire-containment applications, use safing insulation (Type SAF as listed in UL designs), to fill the void between the slab edge and the curtain wall insulation to contain fire. Foil-faced insulation impedes the passage of smoke and noxious gases. Install Safing Insulation, of proper width (2” to 8” max. opening), compression fit in safe-off area (foil side up, if required) between Curtain Wall Insulation and floor slabs, on safing “Z” clips spaced as required in the design (24” or 12” o.c. maximum), leaving no voids. Compression fitting the safing insulation is critical to assuring a tight seal. Refer to specific test description for proper installation details. Install proper smoke sealant material, such as other approved smoke sealants, as indicated in the specific test description. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for the product to be used. Example: UL FW–S–0002.

12102 Section 07840, Page 11 FIRESTOPPING

3. Firestopping shall be provided whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the facing and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous.

4. Where an exterior wall of composite type construction passes a perimeter structural member, such as a girder, beam or strut, and the finish on the interior wall face does not continue up too close with the underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fire-resistive integrity of the wall system, and a space would otherwise remain open between the interior face of the wall and lower edge of the structural member, provide firestopping to continuously fill such open spaces.

C. Interior Walls and Partitions:

1. Where a wall or partition is continuous past a structural floor, such as stairwells and vertical shafts, and a space would otherwise remain open between the wall face and perimeter edge of the adjoining structural floor, provide firestopping.

2. Provide firestopping whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the wall and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous.

3. Where the top edge (headwall) of the fire-rated wall or partition abuts and is parallel, or at right angles to fluted-type metal decking and the construction is such that would otherwise leave the flute spaces open, provide firestopping. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for product to be used. Example: UL HW-D-0003 (Gypsum), or UL HW-D-0008 (Masonry).

4. Where the vertical edge (headwall) of a fire rated wall, or partition abuts, and is at an angle to an adjoining rated assembly, provide firestopping. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for product to be used. Example: UL HW- D-0003 (Gypsum), or UL HW-D-0008 (Masonry).

5. Firestop where structural member (steel or concrete) penetrates a fire rated wall or partition. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for product to be used. Example: UL HW-D-0066 (Gypsum), or UL HW-D-1013 (Masonry/Concrete).

6. Fire stop around all structural members where beams, purlins, joists, angles, etc. penetrate a fire-rated wall. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for product to be used. Example: UL HW-D-0066 (Gypsum), or UL HW-D-1013 (Masonry/Concrete).

D. Floors/Roofs:

1. Except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and edge of the adjoins structural floor or roof, provide firestopping to fill such spaces in accordance with ASTM E-814 and UL 2079 for dynamic movement. Contractor shall submit UL assembly data sheet for product to be used. Example: UL CAJ 1226 (Conc), or CAJ 5090 (Conc).

12102 Section 07840, Page 12 FIRESTOPPING

E. Penetrations:

1. Penetrations include structural members, conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, boxes, or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall or partition.

2. Where penetration occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of solid-type construction, provide fire-stopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration, in accordance with ASTM E-814.

3. Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of hollow-type construction, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration on each side of the wall or partition, in accordance with ASTM E- 814.

4. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved, firestop annular space - if any - between sleeve and wall of opening.

5. Firestopping or wrapping electrical boxes in excess of 16 square inches face area or within 24” horizontally of another box.

F. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire-rated construction in a manner essentially the same as specified herein before.

3.04 PREPARATION:

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.

2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to product clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping’s seal with substrates.

12102 Section 07840, Page 13 FIRESTOPPING

3.05 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by specialty contractor specializing in Firestop application, with experience in similar applications and project with installers qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures.

2. Apply Firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Coordinate with electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, boxes, cable and other items which penetrate fire related construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of Firestops. Schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction, which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of Firestops.

B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross- sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by prove techniques to produces the following results:

1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.06 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS:

A. General: Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produced the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire- resistance rating require.

C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. 12102 Section 07840, Page 14 FIRESTOPPING

D. Tool non-sag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing beings. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.

B. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets.

C. Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the completed Work to a uniform and level condition.

D. All areas of Work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code authorities.

E. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost.

F. Manufacturers' representative must make periodic visits to verify proper materials.

3.08 CLEANING:

A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur.

B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produces firestopping complying with specified requirements.

3.09 INSPECTION

A. Firestopping installation shall be inspected in accordance with ASTM E 2174 “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 07900, Page 1 JOINT SEALERS

07900 JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. Furnish all materials and equipment and perform all work required for the completion of all caulking and sealant work as required by the Drawings and herein specified.

B. This includes the sealing of all exterior window and door frames, against masonry or concrete and all other openings in exterior walls, control joints, and elsewhere as shown, specified, or normally necessary for a completely weather and watertight building. Generally caulking material is used on the interior of the building; and the sealant material is for exterior application and for interior wet areas.

C. This Section includes, but is not limited to, joint sealers for the following locations:

1. Interior Control joints in horizontal concrete slabs

2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:

Control and expansion joints on exposed interior walls. Perimeter joints of exterior openings as indicated. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures at wall and floor. Perimeter joints between different products, materials or surfaces.

12102 Section 07900, Page 2 JOINT SEALERS

1.03. RELATED SECTIONS The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 7, Section 07840 Firestopping for fire rated joint sealers

B. Division 8, Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Doors

C. Division 8, Section 08311 Manual Operated Sliding Doors

D. Division 8, Section 08400 Aluminum Entrance Doors, Frames and Storefronts

E. Division 8, Section 08800 Glass and Glazing sealant for glazing purposes

F. Division 9, Section 09900 Painting for painters caulking.

G. Division 10, Section 10050 Toilet Accessories for caulking fixtures

H. Division 10, Section 10100 Miscellaneous Construction Specialties,

I. Division 10, Section 10260 Wall & Corner Guards

J. Division 12, Section 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework for caulking back splashes

1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES

A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and air tight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

B. A subcontractor experienced in this type of work shall perform all sealant work. Contractor labor is NOT acceptable.

1.05 SUBMITTALS Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer applications.

B. Joint Sealer Manual: Prepare and submit a joint sealer manual which shall describe in detail all sealant systems proposed for use, with specific project locations and conditions noted for each system. Include product data as part of the manual.

C. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer’s standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.

D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers.

12102 Section 07900, Page 3 JOINT SEALERS

E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealant. Include sealant manufacturer’s interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

G. Product test reports for each type of joint sealer indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified.

1.06 WARRANTY: All caulking shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

C. Field-Construction Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealers, apply elastomeric sealants to selected building joints as directed for further verification of colors selected from sample submittals and to represent completed work for qualities of appearance, materials, and application.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery Materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with label informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers’ recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions:

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturer or below 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C).

When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.

12102 Section 07900, Page 4 JOINT SEALERS

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C-920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.

B. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperatures extremes.

C. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for uses:

Uses NT, M, A, G, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. One-Part Silicone Sealant: Paintable

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) One-Part Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant:

Dow Corning ”786”: Dow Corning Corporation “SCS 1702 Sanitary”; General Electric Company “898” White”; Pecora Corporation “Proglaze”; Tremco Corporation

2) Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant:

“Dynatrol II”; Pecora Corporation “Dymeric”; Tremco Corporation

3) Silicone Sealant:

Dow Corning “888”, Dow Corning Corporation Dow Corning “790”, Dow Corning Corporation

4) One-Part Paintable Silicone Sealant: 12102 Section 07900, Page 5 JOINT SEALERS

Dow Corning “880”, Dow Corning Corporation

2.03 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer’s standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

Acoustical Sealant for concealed joints:

“BA-98”; Pecora Corporation “Tremco Acoustical Sealant”, Tremco, Inc.

2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealant, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non- extruding strips of flexible, non-gassing plastic foam of material indicated below; non- absorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Exterior Joints: Non-gassing closed-cell (Type C) polyethylene foam backer rod or non-gassing closed-cell polyolefin foam backer rod, with outer skin, subject to the approval of the sealant manufacturer. Manufacturer: ITP or approved equal.

2. Interior Joints: Open cell (Type O) polyurethane foam backer rod, subject to the approval of the sealant manufacturer. Manufacturer: Denver Foam®, Backer Rod Mfg.

C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre-construction joint sealer-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealant and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent non-porous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in- service performance.

C. Masking Tapes: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint 12102 Section 07900, Page 6 JOINT SEALERS

sealant and to surfaces adjacent to joints.

12102 Section 07900, Page 7 JOINT SEALERS

D. Accessory Materials for Fire-Stopping Sealant: Provide forming, joint fillers, packing and other accessory materials required for installation of fire-stopping sealant as applicable to installation conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements.

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt; and frost.

Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of de4veloping optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other non- porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on pre-construction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer’s recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: comply with joint sealer manufacturers’ printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 12102 Section 07900, Page 8 JOINT SEALERS

B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:

1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.

b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.

c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.

2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint filler5s, compression seals, or back of joints would result in sealant failure.

E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealant or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joint s as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to product joint sealer installation with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 12102 Section 08100, Page 1 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings.

1. Exterior Doors and Frames: non-rated and rated

1.03 RELATED WORK: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 4, Section 04200 Unit Masonry Building in of anchors of exterior frames in masonry construction

B. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers for caulking between adjacent materials

C. Division 8, Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors for door preparation for hardware requirements and frame preparation door hardware

D. Division 8, Section 08700 Hardware for hardware requirements

E. Division 8, Section 08800 Glass and Glazing for Glass and glazing

F. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall for setting door and window frames

G. Division 9, Section 09900 Painting for field applied finishes.

H. Division 16, Electrical for electrical rough in requirements

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E-119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials B. ASTM E-152 - Methods for Fire Test of Door Assemblies C. ASTM E-163 – Methods for Fire Test of Window Assemblies D. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows E. NFPA 251 – Fire Test for Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials F. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies G. NFPA 257 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies H. UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies I. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies J. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies K. UL 263 – Fire Resistance Ratings

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified.

12102 Section 08100, Page 2 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

1.06 SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements, in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.

Coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver hollow metal work or crated during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory-finished doors.

Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to a new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

Keep and store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, (GENERAL): Steel doors and frames shall be fabricated in accordance with the following:

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:

Amweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co. Ceco Corporation Curries Mfg., Inc. Fenestra Corporation Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Company Southwestern Hollow Metal Company Republic Builders Products Corporation/Subs. Republic Steel.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM 568.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM 568.

12102 Section 08100, Page 3 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage galvanized sheet steel.

E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

F. Shop Applied Paint: Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.

2.03 DOOR FABRICATION: Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with requirements as follows:

Fabricate fire-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards; and to Factory Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Warnock-Hersey (WH) requirements.

Fire rated doors shall bear an approved metal label per approved independent testing laboratory Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock-Hersey (WH), Factory Mutual (FM), indicating rating, followed by name of manufacturer and name of the third party independent testing laboratory performing material inspections. Fire doors in exit enclosures and exit passages shall have fire rating, and where required, with the maximum transmitted temperature end point. Smoke and draft control doors complying with UL 1784 shall have a letter “S” on the fire rating label.

Attach metal fire-rating label to door on hinge side. Stick-on adhesive backed foil labels are not approved for use. When full length hinges are used the label shall be placed on the top rail of door. The label shall be applied at the factory or location of where the fabrication and assembly are performed.

A. Exterior Doors:

1. Face Construction Grade III, extra heavy duty. Model 3, seamless hollow steel construction. No seams are allowed on the door face or vertical edge.

Close the top and bottom of the door with a flush end closure treatment.

Top and bottom door edge closures: Flush, spot welded and filled. U-shaped or screw fastened metal closures are not acceptable. Internally reinforced.

16-gage galvanized sheet steel faces. Bituminous coated on all interior surfaces.

2. Exterior Door Internal Core Construction: A polyurethane core shall be foamed-in-place or laminated to each panel. Compressive strength of the polyurethane shall be a minimum of 20 psi. The strength of the bond between the polyurethane and the steel face sheets shall exceed the strength of the polyurethane and the steel face sheets shall exceed the strength of the polyurethane, so that delamination does not occur under any operating condition. Voids in foam shall not exceed 1/2" in any direction. Foam density shall not be less than 1.8 pounds per cubic foot.

12102 Section 08100, Page 4 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

3. Exterior Frames: 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel for all door openings scheduled to receive doors. Fabricate frames with (full or seam style) welds, filled and ground smooth. Knock down (KD) frames are not permitted.

a) Bituminous coated back.

4. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips head for exposed screws and bolts.

5. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors, which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of 0.24 Btu/hr per ft2F, or better.

6. Door Undercuts: Door undercuts shall not be greater than those permitted by NFPA-80 “Standard for Fire Doors and Windows”.

2.04 STEEL FRAMES: Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights and other openings of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners.

1. General: Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights and other openings of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners (full or seam style).

2. Exterior Frames: 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel for all door openings scheduled to receive doors. Fabricate with (full or seam style) welds, filled and ground smooth. Bituminous coated back.

3. Borrowed Light Frames: As indicated on the Drawings shall be 16-gauge steel.

2.05 BORROWED LIGHT FRAMES: As indicated on the Drawings shall be 16-gauge steel. Frames in 1-hour walls shall be provided with 3/4” deep applied stops for 3/4 hour, “C” label rating.

2.06 VISION PANELS: All door, vision panels, etc., shall be framed with an approved steel frame and shall comply with rating of scheduled door. Door window kits shall be for fire rated installation with thru bolts for 1/4” ;thick glass.

12102 Section 08100, Page 5 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

2.07 HARDWARE:

A. See Section 08700 – Hardware

Doors and frames shall be reinforced, in accordance with the approved finish hardware. Hinge/strike locations shall correspond to hinge/strike locations on wood doors with proper clearance on top and sides of door. Reinforce both sides of door head for door closers.

B. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Coordinate preparation with configuration of Acrovyn door and frame protection.

Provide electrical junction box secured to frame to accommodate electric strike at the schedule door openings. Box shall be prepared for top-fed conduit.

Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and taping surface- applied finish hardware may be done at project site. Reinforce both faces of doors for closers.

Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated in accordance with “Recommended Locations for Builder’s hardware”, published by Door and Hardware Institute.

2.08 SHOP PAINTING: Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.

Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before application of paint.

Bonderize and clean shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.

PART 3-EXECUTION

3.01 FRAME INSTALLATION: General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.

B. Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.

12102 Section 08100, Page 6 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

2. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.

C. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

3.02 DOOR INSTALLATION: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances as specified in SDI-100 and NFPA-80.

A. Place Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from doors.

C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08111, Page 1 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM DOOR & FRAMES

08111- FIRE RATED ALUMINUM DOOR & FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire-rated aluminum door system including pre-finished frame.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors for door hardware preparation requirements. B. Section 08700 Hardware.for door frame hardware preparation requirements.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials. 3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

C. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1. UBC-7-2: Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

E. Standard Council of Canada: 1. ULC Standard CAN4-S104: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

G. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Safety Standard for Glazing Materials.

12102 Section 08111, Page 2 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM DOOR & FRAMES

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Fire Rating: 45 minutes (Minimum). 2. Certification: Doors and frames shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2074, NFPA 252, UBC 7-2, UL 10C, CAN4-S104. 3. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall be conducted by an approved independent testing laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedure Section. 1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts, profiles and product components. 2. Samples: Submit samples for finishes, colors and textures. 3. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product description, technical data and installation instructions.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Listings and Labels: Fire rated framing and glazing shall be under current follow-up services by an approved independent agency and maintain a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be labeled in accordance with limits of listings.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer’s packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions.

C. Storage and Protection: Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather, direct sunlight, construction activities and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer, +10°F to +110°F.

D. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements for openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

12102 Section 08111, Page 3 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM DOOR & FRAMES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Manufacturer: 1. Wilson Partitions, Series 2400: www.wilsonpart.com 2. Versatrac, Series 400: www.versatracframes.com

2.02 MATERIALS – ALUMINUM FRAMING

A. Frame construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and thermally broken aluminum profiles, with steel backing.

B. Dimensions: 1. Door framing face dimension: 2 inch 2. Depth of Wall framing: 4 7/8 inches

C. Assembly: Frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter joints.

D. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side.

E. Fire rating shall be 45-minute minimum; Provide fire-rated label on frame.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Door frames shall be furnished pre-assembled.

B. Door frame assemblies shall be factory prepared for field mounting of hardware.

C. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to approved dimensions. The general contractor shall guarantee dimensions within required tolerance (+ - 1/8”). Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Framing shall be chemically cleaned and pretreated, then finished on all exposed areas with: Clear Anodized finish.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Slight variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

12102 Section 08111, Page 4 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM DOOR & FRAMES

2.07 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Hardware shall be supplied under Section 08700 Hardware.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive doors. Openings shall be plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Door installation shall be by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience qualifications; and in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

3.03 CLEANING

A.Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Glass and frame should be cleaned using soft clean cloth, chamois leathers, sponges or soft paper. Use clean warm water with a mild detergent. Do not use detergent that contains either alkaline, acids or fluoride! Abrasive cleaning methods can damage surfaces! Clean prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08211, Page 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated doors. B. Flush wood doors; lead lined

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Section 08111 Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames for door and frame preparation. B. Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door for door preparation requirements. C. Section 08700 Hardware for door hardware preparation requirements. D. Section 08800 Glass & Glazing for glass and glazing. E. Section 09900 Painting for field applied finishes.

1.04 REFERENCES:

A. The following references shall apply:

1. AWI, AWMAC, WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), current edition 2. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows 3. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests for Door Assemblies 4. ASTM E152 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 5. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 6. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 7. UL 1784 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 8. UL 263 -- Fire Test Ratings 9. ASTM D523, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Submit the required number of copies necessary. Reviewed shop drawings will be returned with review notations prior to commencement of work under this section.

2. Indicate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, standard beveling, special blocking for hardware, and cutouts for glazing and hardware.

3. Indicate plans and elevations, materials, profiles, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessories, hardware, and schedule of finishes.

12102 Section 08211, Page 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

4. Indicate door core materials(s) and AWI construction type; (veneer species,) and finishing criteria.

C. Samples:

1. Submit one or more 200 x 250 mm (8 x 10") samples of door construction cut from top corner, illustrating construction.

2. Submit one or more 200 x 250 mm (8 x 10") samples illustrating expected range of veneer color and/or grain.

D. Certification:

1. Submit Certificate of Compliance for all materials. 2. Submit Certificate of Compliance for fire rated flush wood doors.

E. Warranty:

1. Submit lifetime warranty for doors.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Perform work in accordance with AWS Custom Grade quality.

B Work in this Section shall comply with the specified Grade(s) or Work and Section (s) of the current edition of the AWS Quality Standards.

C. Woodwork manufactures shall be certified by the AWS Quality Certification Program as competent to perform the work specified.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified.

B. As documentation, manufacturer shall submit neutral Prequalification Form found in the Appendix in the AWS, current edition.

C. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to (NFPA 252).

B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to (NFPA 80) for fire-rated class (as scheduled).

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE:

A. The General Contractors shall hold a pre-installations meeting prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01400 Quality Control & Inspections.

12102 Section 08211, Page 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of AWS, Materials and Equipment.

B. Protect units from moisture damage according to AWS, Materials & Equipment.

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging (sealed with heat shrunk plastic). Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges upon receipt. Break seals on-site to permit ventilation.

1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS:

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.13 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400 Quality Control & Inspections.

B. Coordinate work with applicable mechanical trades and rough in.

1.14 WARRANTY: Doors shall carry a lifetime warranty against warping and veneer de-lamination for the life of the installation. Furnish Architect a copy of lifetime warranty of the original installation of the door and shop drawing submittal.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURES: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

A. Marshfield B. Algoma C. Eggers D. VT Industries E. Graham

2.02 DOOR TYPES:

A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick; solid bonded core construction, AWI type construction, non-rated and fire rated as indicated.

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION:

A. Particleboard Core for the door shall be manufactured to the ANSI Standard A208.1, Grade 1-LD-1.

1. Solid Bonded Particle Core, Non-Rated: AWI, 5-Ply, Type PC-5. 2. Solid Bonded Particle Core, Fire-Rated: AWI, 5-Ply, Type (FD 1/3). (FD 3/4), (FD 1)

12102 Section 08211, Page 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

2.04 VENEER FACE:

A. Veneer shall be custom grade “A”.

1. Veneer Facing: Select white birch (sapwood of yellow birch), species wood veneer, plain slice.

2.05 VERTICAL EDGES:

A. Vertical edges shall be of the same specie as the face veneer.

2.06 ADHESIVE:

A. Type l (water resistant) for Interior Doors.

2.07 GLAZING STOPS:

A. Rolled steel shape; mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws .

2.08 VISION PANEL GLAZING STOPS-WOOD DOOR WINDOW KITS (NON RATED DOORS) Non-rated door window kits shall be a hardwood “L” shape profile of same species as the door.

2.09 FABRICATION:

A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWSQuality Standards.

B. Fabricate fire-rated doors in accordance with AWS Quality Standards; and to Factory Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Warnock-Hersey (WH) requirements.

Fire rated doors shall bear an approved metal label per approved independent testing laboratory Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock-Hersey (WH), Factory Mutual (FM), indicating rating, followed by name of manufacturer and name of the third party independent testing laboratory performing material inspections. Fire doors in exit enclosures and exit passages shall have fire rating, and where required, with the maximum transmitted temperature end point. Smoke and draft control doors complying with UL 1784 shall have a letter “S” on the fire rating label.

Attach metal fire-rating label to door on hinge side. Stick-on adhesive backed foil labels are not approved for use. When full length hinges are used the label shall be placed on the top rail of door. The label shall be applied at the factory or location of where the fabrication and assembly are performed.

C. All doors shall be 5-ply consisting of hot glue rail and stile to the solid particle core, sanded face of assembly core and frame and hot pressed face plys.

12102 Section 08211, Page 5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

D. Astragals for (fire-rated) double doors: Steel, shaped and overlapping (at face edge), specifically for double doors.

E. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.

F. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with approved hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. All cut outs shall allow a 6” minimum distance to the stile or rail edges of the door.

G. Factory pre-fit doors for frame openings and dimensions identified on shop drawings and schedules.

H. Both vertical edges shall be beveled 1/8” in 2”.

I. Top and bottom edges shall be sealed with an approved wood preservative to prevent mildew, decay and fungus growth.

J. Doors shall be pre-finished. The Architect shall approve finish prior to its application.

K. Doors shall be machined to fit within the frame with not more than 1/8” clearance on top and both sides. The door under cut shall be 5/8”, but clearance above the floor shall not be more than 3/4” above the floor at the maximum point.

2.11 FACTORY FINISHING:

A. Finish work in the factory in accordance with AWS.

B. Finish work to meet AWS(Custom) standards

C. The Architect shall select both the name and the number of the AWI, AWMAC, WI Finish System (topcoats) to be used from the AWI Quality Standards.

D. The sheen desired shall be from the AWS Quality Standards.

E. The desired effect shall be selected from the AWS Quality Standards.

F. Top and bottom edges shall be sealed.

G. The color shall be selected from samples to match specified samples.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to AWS (Custom) standards.

12102 Section 08211, Page 6 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify adequacy of frame opening conditions.

B. Verify frame-opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive this work.

3.02 HARDWARE PREPRATION:

A. All cut out for mortise hardware shall be made at the factory from hardware manufacturer’s templates. Approved shop drawings, hardware and doorframe schedules and hardware manufacturer’s templates shall be furnished by the appropriate subcontractor to the door manufacturer, as required. See Section 08700 Hardware for preparation required.

B. Packaging: Doors shall be individually wrapped or cartoned at the factory for protection in transit, and shall be marked and tagged with tag numbers of the door, per approved shop drawings.

3.03 INSTALLATION:

A. Fittings, Hanging and Trimming of Doors: All doors shall be accurately fitted. Hang and trim doors with hardware as per “Hardware” section requirements, and/or as required. Hardware shall be accurately fitted and adjusted. Where practicable after fitting, hardware shall be taken off and replaced after completion of painting or finishing. Door knobs shall be kept covered with heavy cloth until the building is occupied. Center of door knobs, unless otherwise specified, shall be 36” above floor.

1. Install work in accordance with AWS (Custom) Quality Standard.

2. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

3. Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 and to FM, UL or Warnock-Hersey requirements.

4. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both edges.

5. Trim door height by cutting bottom edge to a maximum floor clearance of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Trim fire door height at bottom edges only, and in accordance with fire rating requirements.

6. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.

7. Machine cut for hardware; core for handsets and cylinders.

8. Coordinate installation of doors, frames, glass and glazing, louvers, accessories.

9. Site glaze glass materials per Section 08800 Glass & Glazing.

12102 Section 08211, Page 7 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

3.04 ADJUSTING:

A. Conform to AWS Standards for fit and clearance tolerance.

B. Conform to AWS Standards and Tests for warp and telegraphing.

3.05 CLEANING:

A. Clean work under provisions of AWS, Materials & Equipment.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08310, Page 1 POWER OPERATED (ELECTRIC) SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS

08310 POWER OPERATED (ELECTRIC) SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish labor and material to provide and install a complete installation of surface mounted electric power operator for swinging doors. The units shall be complete including framing, operators, door controls, key pads, motion detectors, and related accessories, forming a complete system as specified herein. Low voltage wiring shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry: Preparation of the plumb and square opening to receive the automatic single or pair of swinging doors.

B. Division 8, Section 08111 Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames

C. Division 8, Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors for wood doors

D. Division 8, Section 08400 Aluminum Entrance Doors, Frames & Storefront

E. Division 8, Section 08700 Hardware for Hardware as specified.

F. Division 8, Section 08800 Glass & Glazing for Glass and glazing as specified.

G. Division 16, Electrical: 115 volt, 60 Hz, AC, 20 AMPS per operator electrical service hookup by Electrical Contractor. (See Division 16) Electrical Contractor shall provide line voltage and service hookup.

1.04 CODES: Door operators, motion detectors, and push paddles shall be designed and constructed by the manufacturer; and installed to meet all applicable Federal, State and local codes, including ANSI A156.10-latest edition, BHMA Standard 1601.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 for all materials.

A. Submit door operator component and assembly product data.

B. Submit wiring diagrams and maintenance data for doors.

12102 Section 08310, Page 2 POWER OPERATED (ELECTRIC) SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) LCN 2) Horton 3) Keene Monroe 4) Ronan & Kunzl 5) Norton

B. The door leafs shall be equipped with a top-mounted electric operator at the top of the door, including operator, header and track. The unit shall be breakaway feature single egress swing door panels.

C. All equipment must meet the requirements of the American National Standard of Power Operated Pedestrian Doors, ANSI A156.10-1985.

2.02 SECURITY: The door shall be fitted with a set of electro mechanical interlocks installed to ensure against unauthorized entrance through the door unit, when the swinging doors are lock closed, except in emergency exit.

A. Provide a three position rocker (toggle) "Off-On-Hold-Open" switch shall be provided so the unit can be turned "Off" for locking of the door; "On" after the doors are unlocked; and to the "Hold-Open" position so the doors may be continuously open.

B. Provide power transfer units for interconnect to each exit device when used with power door operators to permit emergency exit in the event of power failure, or doors in “locked” position. Furnished under Section 08700 Hardware.

2.03 FINISH: Finish of exposed components shall be clear anodized aluminum, anodized color to match existing frames. The anodized finish shall be given a complete seal per ASTM B136.

2.04 OPERATOR SWITCHES: Operator switches shall be push paddle mounted on wall.

2.05 HARDWARE (See Section 08700 Hardware).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION: The swinging door operator door assemblies shall be installed complete, in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. This Contractor shall provide, install and connect all low voltage wiring for the door operation. The Electrical Contractor shall provide, install and connect all line voltage wiring for the door operation.

12102 Section 08310, Page 3 POWER OPERATED (ELECTRIC) SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS

3.02 WORKMANSHIP: Corners of the operator shall be accurately jointed, reinforced and fitted to flush hairline joints by means of extruded structural assemblies and welded. All cut outs shall be accurately made and reinforced to insure adequate strength.

3.03 OPERATION: Doors shall be activated by push paddle at locations noted. At no time shall exiting be restricted. Coordinate with exit devices operation (See 08700 Hardware).

3.04 TESTS: Thoroughly test and check all items and equipment. Make corrections and adjustments to produce a completely satisfactory operative installation.

3.05 CLEAN UP: All work shall be left clean and free of damage.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08400, Page 1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS, FRAMES AND STOREFRONT

08400 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS, FRAMES AND STOREFRONT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contractor for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and install all storefront entrance door and frame, etc., as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Exterior store front doors and frames shall match existing color. Interior store front and doors shall be of color as scheduled.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

B. Division 8, Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door Operators

C. Division 8, Section 08311 Manual Operated Sliding Doors

D. Division 8, Section 08700 Hardware.

E. Division 8, Section 08800 Glass & Glazing

F. Division 16, Electrical.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOOR & STORE FRONT FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Furnish and install aluminum entrance doors and store front system.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Kawneer 2) Alenco 3) Winvent 4) Amarlite 5) EFCO

12102 Section 08400, Page 2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS FRAMES AND STOREFRONT

2.02 DOORS: Aluminum doors shall meet the same specification requirements as Kawneer “350” Extra Duty Doors in anodized finish matching existing exterior or Permanodic #40 finish in sizes indicated on the drawings. All doors to have pile weatherstripping on all four sides.

A. Door (Single Doors) – Exterior

2 pair Butts BB 5151A 4 ½ x 4 ½ NRP (Lawrence) Panic Device CR-90, Paneline Panic by “Kawneer” Electric Power Door Operator (See Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door Threshold AL 360-48” (Provide interlock with power transfer unit an exit device) Schlage Cylinder (by others). See Section 08700 Hardware.

Finish on all hardware shall match the finish of the doors and frames.

B. All exterior doors shall have cylinders, master keyed to match existing system and supplied by Section 08700 Hardware.

Finish on all hardware shall match the finish of the doors and frames.

2.03 FRAMING SYSTEM: Doors and window walls (storefront) shall be Kawneer 451T (thermal break) Type framing system as detailed. Provide necessary reinforcement as required for size and loading. Components shall be nominal 1-3/4” x 4-1/2” and 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” sizes, or as required to match existing system and profile.

Sections shall be extruded from 5053-T5 aluminum alloy (ASTM B22 1-54T Alloy GS10A-T5).

The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass by the use of neoprene gaskets on both sides of the glass.

2.04 FINISH: All exposed aluminum surfaces shall be clear anodized finish to match existing color.

2.05 HARDWARE: Hardware shall include panic devices, pivots/butts, concealed closures, pulls, weatherstripping, and thresholds. Cylinders shall be furnished under Section 08700 Hardware.

2.06 BREAK METAL CLOSURES Break Metal Closures shall be .040” aluminum, clear anodized to match existing color.

2.07 SUB-SILL FLASHING Sub-sill flashing shall be .040 clear anodized finish aluminum, continuous below the window unit, full width, turned up end dams, turned up on inside face and drip on exterior. Set sub-sill flashing in sealant. (See Section 07900 Joint Sealers).

2.08 GLASS & GLAZING Refer to Section 08800, Glass & Glazing for type, tint, and thickness.

12102 Section 08400, Page 3 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS, FRAMES AND STOREFRONT

2.09 ELECTRIC POWER OPERATED SWINGING DOOR OPERATOR See Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Entrance doors, frames and operating equipment shall be installed in accordance with the entrance manufacturer’s recommendations. Upon completion of the installation, this Contractor shall be responsible for making the necessary final adjustments to attain normal operation of each entrance unit.

3.02 All aluminum frame members are to be installed in their correct locations as indicated on the drawings and shall be level, square, plumb and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work.

3.03 All joints between exterior metal and masonry and between interior metal and masonry shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. All materials shall be screwed in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required.

3.04 Where moldings are jointed, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed joint.

3.05 All screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components shall be of stainless steel or plated or corrosion resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used.

3.06 After erection, this Contractor shall adequately protect all exposed portions of the grid framing metal work from damage by grinding and polishing machines, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds and shall be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning of the aluminum at completion of the project.

3.07 All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent and this Contractor shall be held responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials.

3.08 Keyed cylinder locks and stops shall be provided by Section 08700 Hardware.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08700, Page 1 HARDWARE

08700 HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and install all items of hardware as indicated or specified. The Contractor shall review the Drawings and the Hardware Schedules; and advise the Architect of any discrepancies. Any item of finish hardware not mentioned specifically herein but necessary for proper completion of the work as shown on the Drawings shall be provided. The Hardware Supplier shall be approved by the Architect. All hardware shall meet ADA requirements.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

A. Division 8, Section 08111 Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames for hardware preparation

B. Division 8, Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors for hardware preparation

C. Division 8, Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door

D. Division 8, Section 08800 Glass & Glazing

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

1.05 INSTALLATION AND MISCELLANEOUS PROCEDURES: Generally, all hardware throughout the project shall fit and operate properly. Templates shall be made as required for the proper fabrication of the work. Hardware applied to painted work shall first be fitted, then removed, and then permanently installed after painting is finished. After installation all hardware shall be protected by the Contractor until the entire building is turned over to the Owner.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS: The hardware subcontractor shall be an established firm in contract builder's hardware and having in his employ at least one member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants or its equivalent.

1.07 PACKING AND MARKING: All items of hardware shall be individually packed and labeled showing hardware item numbers, door numbers and openings.

1.08 SCHEDULE: The hardware subcontractor shall submit six (6) copies of a complete finish hardware schedule for approval.

1.09 TEMPLATES: As soon as the hardware schedule has been approved, the hardware subcontractor shall furnish all necessary schedules and templates to such door and frame manufacturer as may require them.

12102 Section 08700, Page 2 HARDWARE

1.10 LABELED DOORS: The hardware subcontractor shall be responsible for furnishing correct hardware on labeled doors that will meet State and Local Building Codes.

1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitution on locks and keyed cylinders will not be considered. All cylinder locks to be keyed to match existing restricted keyway:

Materials are selected from the manufacturers listed herein.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 OUTLINE OF HARDWARE:

A. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect a complete proposed list of finish hardware, name of Supplier, and net purchase price, for his approval. The delivery and installation of the finish hardware then becomes the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Locks to be cylindrical, to match existing cylinder and restricted keyway. Provide lever handles to meet ADA requirements matching existing design or as directed by Owner. All locks to be keyed to sets as directed by Owner.

C. Closers to be surface mounted.

D. All design finishes and product manufacturers shall match existing building standards.

E. Schedule of Components: (Guide Specification – See ‘D’ above) The following product manufacturers and models shall be used without exception, unless substitutions are approved by the Owner

Item Manufacturer Number Finish Hinges Hager BB1279 US26D Stanley

Locks/Latches Schlage AL Series “Neptune” US26D (Cylindrical) Passage AL 10S NO Substitutions Privacy AL 40S Classroom AL70PD Storeroom AL80PD Keyed Cylinder 21-020

Locks/Latches Simplex Series L1000 Model L1011 Heavy US26D (NO substitutions Duty Keyless, Mechanical Push Button Lock

Closers LCN 1460 Series AL

Stop Holder Architectural 3300 Medium Duty US26D Builders Hardware 5500 Heavy Duty US26D

12102 Section 08700, Page 3 HARDWARE

Floor Stops Rockwood 440-443 Series US32D

Wall Stops Rockwood. 406-411 Series US32D

Threshold National Guard 896 AL

Weatherstrip National Guard 129NS AL

Latch Guard McKinney LP04 US32D

Combination Lock Simplex L1021S US26D

Silencers Westlake 650 --- Ives Co. 20

Kick Plates/Armor Rockwood US32D/ Plates Korogard PVC

Exit Devices VonDuprin 99 US26D (Provide coordination power transfer unit and interlock for electrified panic devices when power door operator is used.) See Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Door NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Automatic Flush Bolts Ives FB41P US26D

Automatic Door Bottom National Guard US32D

Pivots Hagar-Double 512 US26D acting

Emergency stop/Strike Hager 455 (5 ¾ Frame) US26D 456 (6 ¾ Frame)

Peep Holes Stanley US26D

Sight Seals National Guard 136P ---

Sliding Door Hafele 1601B --- Track/Stops

Hook Bolt Hafele 3000 ---

Smoke Seals National Guard ------

Electric Strike Von Duprin 6211 FS-24V US32D

Sliding Glass Lock MAG Security 8748 Alum

F. Keying Legend: All locks shall be master keyed to the existing keyway. Keying Schedule to be reviewed and approved by Owner.

G. All finishes to be US26D (Brushed Chrome) inside the suite: All hardware exposed to the building corridor shall be 12102 Section 08700, Page 4 HARDWARE

H. Provide key cabinet. Key cabinet to provide space for 24 keys minimum.

2.02 TEMPLATES: All hardware for metal frames shall be made to template. Templates shall be supplied with necessary machine screws to the miscellaneous iron supplier and metal frame manufacturer, as required, along with complete schedules as soon as hardware has been approved.

2.03 LOCATION OF HARDWARE: All hardware shall be located in accordance with National Builder's Hardware Association standard dimensional recommendations.

2.04 KEYING: All keying may be accomplished locally or at hardware manufacturer's plant where adequate records are maintained in order to avoid duplication of changes. Keying schedule must be approved by the Owner prior to ordering any locks. Furnish two (2) keys per lockset. Furnish two (2) master keys to Owner by registered mail.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

All hardware shall be submitted in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and shall be field adjusted to provide proper operation.

3.01 HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS: Door and Hardware Institute "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames," except as otherwise indicated.

3.02 INSTALL EACH HARDWARE ITEM: All hardware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and shall be field adjusted to provide proper operation.

3.03 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT: Return to project one (1) month after Owner's acceptance of substantial completion, and adjust hardware for proper operation and function. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 08800, Page 1 GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.

B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: Doors Windows Sidelights, borrowed lights and other openings Glass Panels

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Carpentry for opening framing.

B. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers. for joint sealer specified

C. Division 8, Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors for view lites requirements

D. Division 8, Section 08310 Power Operated (Electric) Swinging Doors Operators for view lite requirement.

E. Division 8, Section 08400 Aluminum Entrance Doors, Frames and Storefront.

F. Division 10, Section 10050 Toilet Accessories for framed mirrors.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work.

Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 degrees F (100 degrees C).

12102 Section 08800, Page 2 GLASS AND GLAZING

Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.

B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12” square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12” long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.

C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements.

Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Warranty: Submit warranty for insulated glass assemblies.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) “Glazing Manual” and “Sealant Manual” except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards.

B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials.

C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities have jurisdiction.

D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spaces or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below:

Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI)

12102 Section 08800, Page 3 GLASS AND GLAZING

E. Impact Resistance Glass Classification: To ensure impact resistance, glass products used in exterior window applications shall meet ASTM E 1996, Level E (latest edition); and ICC/NSSA 500-2008.

F. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes of direct exposed to sun, and from other causes.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.

1.09 WARRANTY:

A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer’s Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure of hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 10 years after date of substantial completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:

AFGD, Inc. Ford Glass Division Guardian Industries Corporation LOF Glass, Inc. PPG Industries, Inc. ITI Industries 12102 Section 08800, Page 4 GLASS AND GLAZING

2. Manufacturers of Heat-Treated Glass:

AFGD, Inc. Ford Glass Division Guardian Industries Corporation LOF Glass, Inc. PPG Industries, Inc. ITI Industries

3. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass:

AFGD, Inc. Ford Glass Division Guardian Industries Corporation PPG Industries, Inc. ITI Industries

2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL:

A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern.

B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM C 1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish and pattern.

C. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated.

2.03 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS:

A. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select).

B. Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), and as follows:

Match color of exterior pane of insulating glass.

Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient and visible reflectance.

12102 Section 08800, Page 5 GLASS AND GLAZING

2.04 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS:

A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated glass as follows:

By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller hearth) process, at manufacturer’s option, except provide horizontal process “tongless” or “free of tong marks”.

Glass with visual distortions shall not be used and will not be accepted.

B. Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces) Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below.

Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.

C. Uncoated Tinted Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for 1/4” thick glass matching those indicated for non-heat-treated tinted float glass; kind as indicated below:

Kind FT (fully tempered)

D. Coated Tinted Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (Low ‘E’ coated surface), Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), quality q3 (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for ¼” thick glass matching those indicated for non-heat-treated tinted float glass; kind as indicated below:

Kind FT (fully tempered)

2.05 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS:

A. General: Provide pre-assembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing systems, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant.

1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units, refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of glass products indicated.

2. Provide heat-treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide heat-strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designated or required.

3. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A

4. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4”

5. Air Space Thickness: 1/2”

12102 Section 08800, Page 6 GLASS AND GLAZING

6. Sealing System: Dual seal; primary and secondary sealant; manufacturer’s standard using a silicone based material.

7. Space Material: Aluminum

8. Desiccant: Manufacturer’s standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.

9. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction.

B. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer’s standard units comply with the following:

1. Exterior Pane: Tinted float glass; Color clear.

Kind FT (fully tempered)

2. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass, low ‘E’ coating on #3 face.

Kind FT (fully tempered)

C. Performance Characteristics: Visible light transmittance of 45 percent; summer U- value of .57 at 1/2” air space; winter U-value of .49 at 1/2” air space. Shading coefficient of 0.71 and outdoor reflectance of visible light of 5 percent.

2.06 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES:

A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealant and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealant and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.

3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.

4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants as selected by Architect and manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to uses indicated, O.

12102 Section 08800, Page 7 GLASS AND GLAZING

C. One-part Non-Acid Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, O; and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability.

1. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D 412 after 14 days at 77º F (20º C) and 50 percent relative humidity.

D. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer’s standard solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with non-porous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated.

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. One-Part Acid Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:

“Chem-Calk 1200”; Bostick Construction Products Div. “Dow Corning 999”; Dow Corning Corporation “SCS 1200”; General Electric Corporation “863”; Pecora Corporation “Proglaze”; Tremco, Inc.

2. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Medium-Modulus Silicone Glazing Sealant:

“Dow Corning 795”; Dow Corning Corporation “Silpruf”; General Electric Corporation “Gesil”; General Electric Corporation “Spectrum 2”; Tremco, Inc.

3. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Space Rod: “Chem-Tape 40”; Bostick Construction Products Div. “Extru-Seal”; Pecora Corporation “Tremco 440 Tape”; Tremco, Inc.

4. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape with Space Rod: “Chem-Tape 60”; Bostick Construction Products Division “Shim-Seal”; Pecora Corporation “Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape”; Tremco Inc.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:

A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation:

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, 80 to 90 Short A durometer hardness.

12102 Section 08800, Page 8 GLASS AND GLAZING

D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass.

F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection.

G. Concealed Anchors: Plate mirrors shall be installed with concealed anchors (surface screws are not permitted). Install conceal brackets or anchors level and plumb using only # 8” x 1” truss head screws. Place frame on mounting barackets and set theft-resistant screw.

H. Stainless Steel Retainer Channels: Stainless steel retainer channels shall be of size (depth, height, length) as required for the glass panel supports.

I. Sliding Glass Window Track: Aluminum sliding glass track for 1/4” thick glass or 1/2" thick glass. Install clear silicone, self adhering, button bumpers at each end of the track, top and bottom, to provide sound impact protection to the wall.

J. Sliding Glass Window Lock: Sliding glass window lock shall be Sugatsune XL MT120-H and XL MT120-U (See Section 08700 Hardware.)

K. Window Film Window Film to be applied to designated window areas. Window Film shall be 3M Window Films. Architect shall select film pattern. See Plans for specific applications.

A. Frosted film for surface application. Architect to select pattern

2.08 FROSTED (ETCHED) GLASS

A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated and etched glass as follows:

Glass with visual distortions shall not be used and will not be accepted.

B. Uncoated Guardian Satin Deco Low Iron, Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass; Condition A (uncoated, etch, surfaces) Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 150 14001:2004 Certification.

Kind FT (fully tempered) and etched one face

12102 Section 08800, Page 9 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Glazier shall inspect work of glaze framing for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Glazier shall submit a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Glazing work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.

3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL:

A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.

B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.

C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use3 suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance of appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants.

3.04 GLAZING:

A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6” from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.

B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearance, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8” minimum bit of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

12102 Section 08800, Page 10 GLASS AND GLAZING

C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.

D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.

E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joins back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “setting” or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial “wash” away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.

H. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints and butt joins with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals the presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

12102

Section 09060, Page 1 FINISH SCHEDULE

09060 FINISH SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work required under this section consists of all flooring, ceiling, and wall finishes, and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the Drawings and described in the Speci- fications.

1.03 RELATED PRODUCTS SCHEDULED AND FURNISHED UNDER SEPARATE SECTIONS:

A. Section 09500 Mineral Acoustical Tile

B. Section 09650 Resilient Floor Tile

C. Section 09680 Carpeting

D. Section 09700 Seamless Flooring

E. Section 09900 Painting

F. Section 10260 Wall & Corner Guards

G. Section 10426 Signage & Graphics

H. Section 12300 Plastic Laminate Casework

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.01 Furnish and install floor covering, ceiling tile, painting, wall covering, wall protection, and accessories in accordance with the attached schedules; and as scheduled in the related sections listed in Paragraph 1.03 above.

A. Room Finish Schedule: Davita Clinic Planning Guidelines-Finish Schedule (See Attached and Drawings).

B. Finish Key: (See Drawings)

PART 3 – INSTALLATION

3.01 All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions as specified in the related sections listed in Paragraph 1.03 above.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09250, Page 1 DRYWALL

09250 DRYWALL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. The Scope of Work includes labor, material and accessories necessary to complete the following:

1. Fire rated gypsum board assemblies attached to non-load-bearing steel framing members. . a. Fire rated gypsum board.

2. Repair of existing perimeter walls

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 7: Section 07210 Building Insulation for thermal insulation, sound attenuation blanket and vapor retarder.

2. Division 7: Section 07840 Firestopping for firestopping systems, fire-resistive- rated joint sealants, fire safing and draft stopping.

3. Division 7, Section 07900 Joint Sealers for painters caulking.

4. Division 8, Section 08100 Steel Doors & Frames

5. Division 8, Section 08111 Fire Rated Aluminum Doors & Frames

1.04 REFERENCE: The reference documents are as follows:

A. ASTM C11, Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems. ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA B. ASTM C 840, Standard Specification for Application and Finish of Gypsum Board. ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA. C. GA-216, Application and Finish of Gypsum Panel Products, 2010. Gypsum Association, Hyattsville, MD D. Master Painters Glossary, Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, St. Louis, MO

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C-1396, ASTM C11, Underwriter’s Laboratory, USG Systems Folder SA-923; and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other reference standards.

12102 Section 09250, Page 2 DRYWALL

1.06 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

1.07 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1: Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data for each type of product specified.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 “Fire Resistance Design Manual” or to design designations in UL “Fire Resistance Directory” or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.

2. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer.

3. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations.

12102 Section 09250, Page 3 DRYWALL

B. Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degree F (4 degree C). For Adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less t6han 50 degree F (10 degree C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 degree F (35 degree C) when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements in paragraph 2.04 and 2.05, provide products by one of the following:

A. Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing and Furring:

ClarkDietrich Building Systems Cemco MBA Building Systems

B. Gypsum Board and Related Products:

GP Building Products National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co.

C. Paperless Gypsum Board

Dens Guard, G-P Building Products DurRock, United States Gypsum Co. Permabase, National Gypsum Company

D. Cement Backer Board

Dens Guard, G-P Building Products DurRock, United States Gypsum Co. Permabase, National Gypsum Company

2.02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS:

A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cast-In-Place and Post installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

12102 Section 09250, Page 4 DRYWALL

D. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980” minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16” wide flanges, and as follows:

1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2” deep, 475 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8”, and minimum thickness of base ( uncoated) metal as follows:

1. Thickness: 0.0179”, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 STEEL FRAMING FOR NON-LOAD BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS:

A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:

1. Component Sizes and Spacing: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions:

Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5lbf per sq. ft. up to 14’ high, then limited to L/360 for every stud over 14’ high.

2. Protective Coating: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant coating meeting ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120).

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16” wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated and coated) metal and for depth:

1. Thickness: 20 gauge steel (0.0300” min, 0.0396” coated), unless otherwise indicated. a) Provide double 20-gauge studs at all hollow metal jambs.

2. Stud Depth: 1-5/8”, 2-1/2”, 3-5/8”, 4”, 6” 3. Track Depth: 1-5/8” and 3” flange. 4. Maximum height shall be limited to L/240 for the gauges listed. For studs over 14-feet, the gauge shall be increased and deflection limited to L/360.

C. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:

1. Depth: 7/8”

2. Thickness: 20 gauge steel (0.0300” min., 0.0396” coated), unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.

12102 Section 09250, Page 5 DRYWALL

Fastener types shall be Type S, bugle head, Type S Pan Head, and USG Type S012 Pan Head Screws – lengths as required.

E. Steel Deflection Track ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:

1. Depth: 3” flange

2. Thickness: 20 gauge steel (0.0300 min., 0.0359” coated), unless otherwise indicated.

F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated:

Fastener types shall be Type S, bugle head, Type S Pan Head, and USG Type S012 Pan Head Screws-lengths as required:

Screws: Minimum 8-18 ribbed head, or Grabber Screw, or equal for use with 20 gauge, or heavier steel framing.

2.04 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in 5/8” thickness to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to the requirements, provide one of the following: a. US Gypsum Company b. National Gypsum Corporation c. GP Gypsum

3. Paperless Gypsum Board a. GP Gypsum – Dens Armor Plus

B. Mold, Mildew Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 and ASTM D3273, as follows:

1. Type: Type X Firecode 2. Edges: Tapered 3. Thickness: 5/8” unless otherwise indicated. 4. ASTM D3273 Rating: 10 5. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16”, unless otherwise indicated.

12102 Section 09250, Page 6 DRYWALL

C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi-layer Applications: ASTM C 1396 or where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 1396 and ASTM D3273; as follows:

1. Type: Type X Firecode 2. Edges: Tapered 3. Thickness: 5/8” unless otherwise indicated. 4. ASTM D3273 Rating: 10 5. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16” for walls. Use stud spacing of 24” spacing for STC sound rated walls.

D. Laminated Gypsum Sound Board for Multi-layer Applications: Laminated Gypsum Sound board, ASTM C 1396, ASTM D3273, ASTM C840, GA-214, GA-216; and as follows:

1. Type: Type X 2. Edges: Tapered 3. Thickness: 5/8”. 4. ASTM D3273 Rating: 10 5. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16”

E. Laminated Gypsum Sound Board for Multi-layer Applications: Laminated Gypsum Sound board, ASTM C 1396, ASTM D3273, ASTM C840, GA-214, GA-216; and as follows:

1. Type: Type X 2. Edges: Tapered 3. Thickness: 5/8”. 4. ASTM D3273 Rating: 10 5. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16”

2.05 CEMENT BOARD PRODUCTS:

A. Fire-Rated Cement Backer Board Glass mesh reinforced Portland cement and aggregate tile backer board, ASTM C1325; ANSI A118.9;UL Classified; ASTM CX 1396:

1. Type: Fire Rated 2. Edges: Wrapped 3. Thickness: 5/8”, unless noted otherwise. 4. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16”

B. Non-Rated Cement Backer Board Underlayment 1. Glass mesh reinforced Portland cement and aggregate tile backer board, ASTM C1325 and ANSI A118.9; ASTM C 1396 for non-rated wall assemblies only.

a) Characteristics

1. Type: Non-rated 2. Edges: Wrapped 3. Thickness: 1/2", 5/8”, or combined, as noted. 4. Maximum Stud Spacing: 16”

12102 Section 09250, Page 7 DRYWALL

2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal, complying with the following requirement:

Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes.

2. Shapes: Indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047:

Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

3. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. Equal to USG #200-B metal trim.

4. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.

5. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening.

2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. Joint compounds shall meet the same classification for Mold/Mildew/Moisture resistance as the Gypsum Board (ASTM C1396).

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Fiber reinforced paper tape, unless otherwise indicated. USG sheetrock brand joint tape-heavy.

C. Setting - Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.

1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.

2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose.

3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose.

4. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.

12102 Section 09250, Page 8 DRYWALL

D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.

2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories.

3. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.

E. Cement Backer Board Joint Treatment Manufacturer-approved joint application: The application shall include, but not be limited to:

1. 2” wide, 10 x 10 mesh glass tape

2. Type 1” mastic, or latex modified thin-set

3. Terminate cement backer board 2” below painted surface and apply latex thin set, sanded for painted surface.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

B. Laminating Adhesives: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels.

C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.

D. Steel Drill Screws: complying with ASTM C1002 for the following applications:

1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03” thick.

2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.

E. Steel Drill Screws: complying with ASTM C954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033” to 0.112” thick.

F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by coming mineral fibers with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). See Section 07210 Building Insulation.

Thickness as indicated on drawings.

G. Tie Wire: Galvanized (18 ga).

H. Hanger Wire: Galvanized (8 ga.)

I. Sealant: Sheetrock Brand W/R Sealant for use in all showers and wet areas.

12102 Section 09250, Page 9 DRYWALL

J. Firestopping: Firestopping shall be as specified in Section 07840 Firestopping

K. Vapor Retarder: See Section 07210 Building Insulation

L. Toe Board: Toe board shall be 6” high rigid metal between studs around all three sides of showers.

M. Rigid Board Insulation: See Section 07210 Building Insulation.

N. Paintable Sealant: See Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

O. Notifications: All fire and smoke rated partitions as identified on plans shall be permanently identified on both sides above ceilings and in concealed spaces by red- painted stenciled notices or printed, adhesive backed labels spaced not over 10 feet apart. Lettering shall be not less than one (1) inch high.

Wording at corridors shall be: "CORRIDOR PARTITION - PROTECT OPENINGS".

At smoke compartment boundaries, wording shall be: "SMOKE PARTITION -PROTECT OPENINGS".

At horizontal exit walls, exit enclosures, hazard enclosures and other fire walls wording shall be: “ONE-HOUR FIRE BARRIER - PROTECT OPENINGS" (TWO-HOUR, or FOUR-HOUR as indicated on plan).

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 PARTITION SYSTEMS: All partitions, drops, ceiling, etc., shall be plumb, in correct alignment, and installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and specifications to meet rated wall requirements and associations standards.

A. Sound Partition: Shall be the width and height as indicated on the Drawings of steel studs at 16 inches o.c. with one (1) layer of 5/8 inch Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X”, gypsum wallboard on one side; and 5/8” inch, Type “X”, on other side, attached by screws in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation, and shall be a 1-hour type construction (UL U465). All boards shall be installed vertical. The partition shall extend from floor to underside of structural slab, finish all joints, seal around all penetrations, perimeter caulk, and sound insulate. All joints shall be taped and sanded.

B. Typical Non-rated Partition: All interior walls other than fire-rated & smoke walls. Shall be the width and height as indicated on the Drawings, consisting of steel studs at 16 inches o.c., with one (1) layer 5/8 inch Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X”, gypsum wallboard, attached to each side of studs. All joints shall be taped and sanded.

12102 Section 09250, Page 10 DRYWALL

C. Wall Furring: Shall consist of one (1) layer of 5/8 inch Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X” gypsum wallboard screw attached to 7/8” furring channel or 2-1/2” metal stud spaced 16 inches o.c., on all masonry or concrete walls as shown. Install furring strip over a 15 lb. Asphalt felt paper moisture break. All joints shall be taped and sanded. Rigid insulation specified in Section 07210 Building Insulation.

D. Chase Wall: Shall be full height to underside of structure width as required on the Drawings, consisting of a double row of 1-5/8” metal studs spaced apart across the partition as required for partition width and 16” o.c., along the partition length, with one (1) layer of 5/8”, Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X”, gypsum wallboard screw attached to each outer side. Assembly shall be UL U 420 for one hour assembly. All joints shall be taped and sanded.

E. Ceiling Assembly: Apply 5/8 inch, Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X”, gypsum wallboard of maximum practical length with the long dimension at right angles to the furring channel; fit joints neatly and accurately; stagger end joins from those in adjacent panel rows. Fasten gypsum board to furring channels with Type S Hi-Lo screws spaced 12 inches o.c., in field board and along abutting ends. Use 1-1/4 inch screws length for 5/8 inch thick board. All joins shall be taped and sanded. Assembly shall be 2-Hour rated.

F. Fire Protection of Wall Boxes: All fire hose cabinets, fire extinguisher cabinets, medical gas valve boxes, film viewers, computer terminal boxes, etc., boxes in excess of 16 square inches located in rated walls shall be wrapped with 1/2” fire code sheetrock at top, bottom, sides and back; or protected by other approved fire rated assembly.

G. Control Joints: Shall be installed attached to face-layer wallboard with 9/16 inch “G” staples spaced 6 inches o.c., in each flange, and shall be in single lengths unless application length exceeds standard stock lengths. Continuous walls over 30’-0” in length without any floor to ceiling openings in wall shall receive control joints in face layer at 30’-0”. Control joints shall comply with SH1-651-0318.1 assembly for one (1) or two (2) hour rated wall conditions.

Break gypsum board sheets over each side of door openings, with control joint.

H. "C" Label, Smoke Partitions and Corridor Walls: Shall be the width and height as indicated on the Drawings consisting of steel studs at 16 inches o.c., with one (1) layer of 5/8 inch Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type "X", gypsum wallboard, attached by adhesive or screws to each side of studs. Partition shall extend from floor to underside of structure; finish all joints and seal around penetrations. Perimeter caulk and sound insulate where indicated on Drawings. ; Assembly shall be constructed in accordance with the Latest Building Code or UL U465 non-load bearing assembly; and UL U425 load-bearing assembly and shall be 1- hour construction. All joints shall be taped and sanded full height of wall. (Provide single wall assembly for fire extinguisher cabinets, recessed paper holder, etc.)

12102 Section 09250, Page 11 DRYWALL

I. "B" Label - 2 Hr. Fire Partition: Shall be the width and height as indicated on the drawings consisting of steel studs at 16" o.c., with two (2) layers of 5/8" Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type "X", gypsum wallboards, screw attached and finish layer laminated with adhesive to each side of studs. Assembly shall be constructed in accordance with UL U411 non-load bearing assembly; and UL U425 load-bearing assembly; and shall have a two hour rating. Partition shall extend from floor to underside of structure, finish all joints and seal all penetrations. Perimeter caulk and sound insulate were indicated on drawings. All joints shall be taped and sanded full height of wall. (Provide double wall assembly for fire extinguisher cabinets, recessed paper holder, etc.)

J. Plumbing Wall: Shall be full height to underside of structure as required on the Drawings, consisting of a double row of 1-5/8 inch metal studs spaced apart across the partition as required for one (1) layer of 5/8 inch, Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type "X", gypsum wallboard screw attached to each outer side. Assembly shall be UL U420 or UL U425 for one- hour assembly. All joints shall be taped and sanded. All plumbing walls shall be of sufficient thickness to accommodate plumbing, but in no instance shall be less than 71/4” using a 6” stud depth.

K. Laminated Gypsum Board: Shall consist of one (1) layer of 1/2", Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type "X", gypsum wallboard, glued and nailed to existing substrate with wallboard adhesive recommended by manufacturer. All joints shall be taped and sanded. Laminated gypsum board shall not be applied over existing walls where electrical devices are to be installed.

L. Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant Drywall Partitions: Painted Surfaces Only Shall be the width and height as indicated on the drawings, consisting of steel studs at 16" o.c., with one (1) layer of 5/8" Mold/Mildew/Moisture Resistant, Type “X”, gypsum board (complying with ASTM C630) to one side of studs; other side of wall to be 5/8" Type “X” gypsum board. All joints shall be taped and sanded. Drywall shall extend to underside of Structure. Metal studs to extend to underside of structural slab. Use on all painted walls in kitchens, toilet rooms, and bathrooms.

M. Rated Shaft Wall: Rated shaft wall shall be 2-hour - per UL U438. Extend wall full height to underside of structural slab.

N. Foam Plastic Insulation Cover: Foam plastics or packages of foam plastics, and containers of foam-in-place plastic system ingredients are strictly prohibited.

O. Ceiling Furring Channels: Position Metal Furring Channels at 16" o.c. and at right angles to 1-1/2 main runner channels spaced 24 inches o.c. Attach furring channels securely to main runners with Metal Furring Channel Clips or saddle tie to main runners with two strands of 16 gauge or three strands of 18 gauge galvanized tie wires. Install furring channel clips on alternate sides of main runners. Wire tie furring channels to main runners when clips cannot be alternated. Keep furring channels, from contacting abutting masonry walls. At light troffers or any openings that interrupt the main runner or furring channels reinforce grillage with 3/4 inch channels. Splicing - furring channels must be end- spliced. Nest one channel inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and securely wire-tie together at center of splice. Do not screw or permanently fasten end splices together.

12102 Section 09250, Page 12 DRYWALL

P. Metal Door and Borrowed Light Frames: Provide full height double 20 gauge studs at each jamb of door frames or side lites less than 3'-6". Studs shall be located within 2 inches of all door frame jambs and shall be anchored to the jamb and head anchor clips of each frame by bolt or screw attachment. Over frames, a cut-to-length section of runner shall be installed with the flanges slit and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and shall be securely screw attached to adjacent studs. A cut-to-length stud extending from door frame header to ceiling runner shall be positioned at vertical joints over door frame.

Q. Wall Reinforcement: Provide 12" wide, 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal band continuous across face of studs, on metal studs install horizontally between the vertical studs for backup to mounting grab bars, wall rails, toilet accessories, etc.

R. Cement Backer Board Underlayment: Provide 1/2” or 5/8”, tile backer board in all wall areas designated to receive seamless flooring and coved base..

3.02 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PREPARATION:

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.

Furnish inserts and other devices required to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction.

3.04 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL:

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Furnish and Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with “Gypsum Construction Handbook” published by United States Gypsum Company; or National Gypsum Company “Gypsum Guide”.

12102 Section 09250, Page 13 DRYWALL

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on drawings.

1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling

2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor.

3. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.

3.05 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS:

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperature.

4. Install isolation hangers at locations indicated.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. Maintain minimum 2-inch clearance between hangers or braces and ducts, pipes or conduit.

B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.

12102 Section 09250, Page 14 DRYWALL

C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.

1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620” (8-gage) diameter, 4’ o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2”, 4’ o.c. 3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 12” o.c.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8” in 12’ as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.

3.06 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS:

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

2. Where studs are installed full height to bottom of structure, install deflection track.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8” from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend walls and partitions framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2” short of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. Terminate top to partition and wall with deflection track.

1. Sound and fire-resistive-rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of the floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified.

E. Single-Layer and Double-Layer Construction: Space studs at 16” o.c.

F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

12102 Section 09250, Page 15 DRYWALL

G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

2. Provide doubled 20 gage structural studs at all hollow metal jambs.

H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

I. Walls not extending to the structural deck above shall be provided wall reinforcing by a metal stud laid on a diagonal across the top of wall track when the plan wall length exceeds 10 feet in length. The stud shall be screw attached to the top track of the wall.

3.07 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL:

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216, UL assembly requirements.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.

E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16” of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges; and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of frames openings where possible.

G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

I. Spot grout hollow metal doorframes for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32” wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.

12102 Section 09250, Page 16 DRYWALL

J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and to comply with manufacturer’s recommended spacing, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.

K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally.

1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8-sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels tightly around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joints to install sealant.

L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4” to 1/2” wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

M. Where sound attenuation blankets are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer’s recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.08 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS:

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.

B. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layers and gypsum wallboard for face layers.

1. On ceilings, apply base layer prior to applying base layer on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset face-layer joints at least 10” from parallel base-layer joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members unless otherwise indicated.

12102 Section 09250, Page 17 DRYWALL

2. On partitions/walls, apply base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joins on opposite sides of partitions.

C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:

1. Fasten with screws.

D. Double-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum panels and face layer to base layer as follows:

1. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

E. Laminated Gypsum Board – Direct Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, and furring members of base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has been set.

3.09 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer’s directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi- exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated.

1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

2. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.

3. Install U-bead where indicated.

D. Install control joints at locations indicated to comply with manufacturer’s recommended spacing and according to ASTM C 840, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES:

A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.

12102 Section 09250, Page 18 DRYWALL

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges.

D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per Gypsum Association “Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products, 2010”; GA-214-10e. Related Documents also Include ASTM C11 and ASTM C840, latest editions.

1. Level 0 No taping, finishing, or accessories required. This level of finish may be used whenever the final decoration has not been determined. This level not permitted for temporary construction partitions.

2. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas of non-rated construction. A higher level (Level 3) of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

3. Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels or cement backer board form substrates for tile, and where indicated.

4. Level 3 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive medium or heavy textured finishes before painting; and fire resistive-rated assemblies and sound rated assemblies above ceilings.

5. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive light-textured finishes; wallcoverings, and paints over light textures.

6. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive gloss, semi-gloss or enamel paint or severe lighting on smooth surfaces.

E. For Level 1

All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Used in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the assembly would generally be concealed or in building service corridors, and other areas not normally open to public view. Some degree of sound and smoke control is provided; in some geographic areas this level is referred to as “fire-taping”. Where a fire-resistance rating is required for the gypsum board assembly, details of construction shall be in accordance with reports of fire tests of assemblies that have met the fire-rating requirement. Tape and fastener heads need not be covered with joint compound.

F. For Level 2

All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. Finish cement backer board for forming base for ceramic tile to comply with ASTM C 840 and board manufacturer’s directions for treatment of joints behind wall finish.

12102 Section 09250, Page 19 DRYWALL

G. For Level 3

All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. One additional coat of joint compound shall be applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of final finishes. See paint/wallcovering specification in this regard.

H. For Level 4

All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound.

A thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, applied to the entire surface. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of finish paint. See painting specification in this regard.

I. For Level 5

All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of finish paint. See painting specification in this regard.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Promptly remove and residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

12102 Section 09250, Page 20 DRYWALL

3.12. NOTIFICATIONS: All fire and smoke rated partitions as identified on plans shall be permanently identified on both sides above ceilings and in concealed spaces by red-painted stenciled notices spaced not over 10 feet apart. Lettering shall be not less than one (1) inch high.

A. Wording at corridors walls shall be "CORRIDOR PARTITION - PROTECT OPENINGS".

B. Wording at smoke compartment boundaries walls shall be "SMOKE PARTITION - PROTECT OPENINGS".

C. Wording at horizontal exit walls, exit enclosures, hazard enclosures and other fire walls shall be “ -HOUR FIRE BARRIER - PROTECT OPENINGS" (ONE-HOUR, TWO-HOUR, or FOUR-HOUR as indicated on plan).

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09500, Page 1 MINERAL ACOUSTICAL TILE

09500 MINERAL ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The work under this section includes the furnishing of transportation, tools, materials, labor, equipment and shop required to accomplish the Acoustical Ceilings and Suspension System work as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans, Details and as specified herein.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall for wall attachment.

B. Division 15, Mechanical for grilles, registers diffusers and sprinklers in acoustical ceilings.

C. Division 16, Electrical for lighting fixtures, speakers, and fire alarms in acoustical ceilings.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS: Ceiling Panels shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and shall not begin when the building is excessively cold, damp, hot or dry. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions, which will exist when the building is occupied, shall be maintained before, during and after installation. The materials and workmanship shall be of the quality, quantity and character specified and/or indicated.

1.05 FIRE CLASSIFICATION: All acoustical materials shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-S-00118 (GSA-PPS). Class A, Noncombustible.

1.06 SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Suspension systems shall conform to ASTM 635-69.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS: This Contractor shall provide the Owner with three (3) additional cartons (per pattern) of acoustical materials to be used in maintenance work.

1.08 LAYOUT DRAWINGS: This Contractor shall provide one (1) sepia of the Reflected Ceiling Plan showing all details at walls and partitions prior to the installation of the system for above ceiling coordination. All mechanical outlets, speakers, sprinkler heads, lighting fixtures, etc., shall be located on the Reflected Ceiling Plan. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Control & Inspections.

12102 Section 09500, Page 2 MINERAL ACOUSTICAL TILE

1.09 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

This Contractor shall furnish certification that the materials furnished meet the fire rating requirement. Certifications shall include manufacturer's Letter of Certification and an independent lab test report.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING BOARD: Ceiling board shall be:

A. ACOUSTICAL BOARD TYPE 1 (CLG-1): Ceiling board shall be 24” x 24” x indicated thickness, noncombustible, fissured, square edge, acoustical board, lay-in panel, washable white vinyl latex paint factory finish. (See Finish Schedule and/or Finish Legend)

1. Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Armstrong: CIRRUS 584 Series b. Substitutions are not permitted.

2.02 REGULAR SYSTEM:

A. Acoustical Ceiling Board

1. Type ‘1’ (CLG-1): 24” x 24” x indicated thickness, Ceiling Tile, White Fissured Design, Square Edge, Mineral Fiber, Flame Spread 0-25, ASTM E84-25, Federal Spec. SS-S-118B Class A, 1.04 PSF minimum weight.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Suspension System: Shall be heavy duty, grid, exposed grid system. Components shall be formed from commercial quality cold-rolled steel, electro zinc coated and prepainted. Exposed finish shall be low sheen satin white.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

1. Donn Products, Inc. #DXL 26 (Heavy Duty) 2. Chicago Metallic (Heavy Duty) 3. Armstrong (Heavy Duty) 4. USG (Heavy Duty)

B. The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly shown on the Drawings or specified herein, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span.

The ceiling patterns shall be as shown on the Drawings using the following components:

1. Main Tee shall have a double web design and with a rectangular bulb, with 15/16" exposed flange with a rolled cap: with a minimum allowable load of 12.2 lbs. /L.F. for a 4'-0" spacing. 12102 Section 09500, Page 3 MINERAL ACOUSTICAL TILE

2. Cross Tee shall be double web design with a rectangular bulb and web extending to form a positive interlock with main tee; with the lower flange extended and offset. Cross Tees shall be capable of supporting the minimum of 7.1 lbs. /L.F. for a simple span 4'-0" spacing.

3. Flexible Acoustical Ceiling Trims shall be as manufactured by Kenbeck Company, St. Charles, Missouri; (800) 441-1525. Trims shall be Ultra-Flex or Ultra-Flex I. C. O., 15/16”. Flexible Trim shall be UL classified and listed.

C. Ceiling tile in the entry vestibule shall be clipped into the grid.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 Acoustical material shall be installed under conditions as outlined in current ASTM Requirements and by an approved Acoustical Contractor.

3.02 Suspension systems shall be completed with all incidental accessories and materials and shall be installed in accordance with standard practice and conforming to tile manufacturer's recommendations.

3.03 Coordinate and provide necessary cuts and cutouts, added supports, clips and accessories required by all trades including separate Contracts with the Owner and N.I.C. equipment, for the proper structural support and installation of assemblies (lighting fixtures, speakers, etc.) into the grid system.

3.04 Ceiling tile layout and grain direction as directed by the Architect.

3.05 Provide angle moldings at intersection of all walls and drops.

3.06 Ceiling shall run through above all walls, except as noted.

3.07 Suspended Ceilings - All suspension ceiling systems shall be installed by using 12 gauge galvanized wires, soft annealed and pre-straightened, attached to the steel bar joists. Center to center dimension of wires shall be as recommended by the suspended ceiling manufacturer.

3.08 Matching of ceiling grid shall be in a straight line and installed to the nearest full grid in the existing ceiling.

3.09 Provide stepped ceiling tile for pockets in ceiling. Vertical tile shall be securely anchored to the grid.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09650, Page 1 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

09650 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and install multi color and patterned resilient floor tile and base as required by the Room Finish Schedule and details. The work shall include multiple colors. The Contractor shall provide labor to install multiple patterns and colors of new tile in base bid. The Contractor shall provide labor to remove all existing floor covering, as required, within the project limits.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Section 03100 Concrete Work:

Notice: The surface of the concrete shall not be coated with any type of membranes, waxes, oil, or compounds in order to allow proper bond of floor covering adhesive. Concrete and underlayment must be dry.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the work.

Provide each type of resilient flooring and related accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives and sealants.

1.05 COLORS/PATTERNS: A variety of colors and patterns shall be as selected by the Architect. The Architect will furnish Color Schedule and lay out Drawings indicating patterns and colors in rooms and corridors.

A. Floor Pattern shall be multiple colors used with the field color to create room or corridor rectangular, or triangular patterns using full tile except cuts at room edge border. See Finish Schedule.

1.06 STATIC LOAD Shall meet static load of 75 psi per ASTM E970.

12102 Section 09650, Page 2 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

1.07 FIRE RATING: The resilient floor tile and base shall have a flame spread of Class I Fire Rating – Critical Radiant Flux-0.45 watts/cm2using Test ASTM-E 648; and smoke production of 450 or less using ASTM-E662.

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by US or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648.

C. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662

1.08 STATIC LOAD Shall meet static load of 75 psi per ASTM E970.

1.09 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings & Product Data: Submit shop drawings and manufacturer’s technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory, including leveling compounds, in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer’s standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors and patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples of each type, color and pattern of resilient flooring required, showing full-range of color and pattern variations:

1. Full size tile samples 2. 2-1/2” long samples of resilient flooring accessories 3. Other materials as requested

Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1, Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

D. Submit test report and Certification of Compliance with fire rating classification.

E. Submit test reports for Moisture Vapor Emission & Alkalinity (pH).

1.10 TESTING

A. This Contractor shall provide the following tests:

1. The Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride ASTM F 1869 (latest edition) and the Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes ASTM F2170 (latest edition) be done based on the limits of the flooring manufacturer. This testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

12102 Section 09650, Page 3 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

2. The alkalinity (pH) shall be tested per ASTM F710 (latest edition). This testing shall be done by an independent testing agency.

3. Provide adhesion test.

B. Test reports shall indicate compliance with moisture vapor content and pH is at or below the flooring manufacturer’s requirements before flooring is installed.

C. Provide a minimum of three (3) tests for the first 1000 square feet of area and one (1) additional test for each additional 1000 square feet of area to be tested.

D. Submit results of tests to General Contractor, Architect, and Owner’s representative prior to commencing with this section. Failure to perform the tests and submit to the designated parties prior to installation will result in the rejection of the flooring installation.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

Do not install tiles until leveling compound or concrete slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer’s recommendations and recommended bond and moisture tests.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS: Provide color and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. A variety of colors and patterns shall be as selected by the Architect.

A. Colors: See Finish Schedule and Finish Legend; and lay out Drawings indicating patterns and colors in rooms and corridors.

2.02 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE: Vinyl composition tile shall be 1/8" gauge 12" x 12" vinyl composition tile. Tile shall be resistant to alkali grease and oils.

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product listed on the Finish Schedule and Finish Legend:

B. Substitutions are not permitted.

B. Colors shall be as selected and indicated on the Finish Schedule and/or Finish Legend. The Architect shall select from any one, or all of the manufacturers listed in Paragraph 2.01A to achieve the color concept. Colors, finishes, and textures shall be selected from the manufacturer’s full line of vinyl composition tile products.

12102 Section 09650, Page 4 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

2.03 COVED BASE: Shall be top set cove type of heights as indicated on the Finish Schedule; 4” x 1/8” rubber with coved toe of product listed on the Finish Schedule and Finish Legend. Substitutions are not permitted.

Base shall be supplied and installed from rolled base only, or roll, color as selected by Architect.

A. Base shall be installed even and in alignment. Provide pre-molded base corners on all outside corners. Inside corners shall be terminated at corner to prevent gaps in corners. No back cut “V”, or continuous inside corners permitted. No base pieces of less than 2 foot (2’) long shall be permitted.

2.04 ADHESIVE: Shall be of type as manufactured and recommended by the manufacturers for the tile. (See Paragraph 2.06 herein.) No exceptions.

2.05 REDUCING STRIPS: Provide reducing strips where there is a change in flooring heights. Johnsonite-CTA-XX-D (carpet to resilient floor).

2.06 TRANSITION STRIPS Provide 1/8” thick x 1” (2”) vinyl transition strips in color designated. Provide transition strips between VCT/VCT pattern change, or VCT/sheet vinyl.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES:

This Contractor shall remove all existing floor covering that exists within the project limits, which is in conflict with the new work, prior to the installation of new tile. New tile shall not be laid over existing floor covering.

Prior to installing any tile, the tile subcontractor shall inspect floor surfaces, which are to receive tile covering; he shall notify the Architect, in writing, of any serious defects of condition that will interfere with, or prevent a satisfactory tile installation; he shall not proceed with installation until such defects, or conditions have been corrected. The starting of installation work in a room, or space shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive the tile in that space.

A. Installation of all flooring shall proceed only after the compliance with Paragraph 1.10 – Testing of This Section; and Section 03100 Concrete Work, has been complied with by submitting test reports; and the work of other trades has been completed, especially overhead trades. Areas to receive flooring shall be clean, adequately lighted, fully enclosed, weather-tight, and heated to a minimum of 70 degrees F for 72 hours before, during, and after installation is completed. Installed floor shall not be exposed to heavy traffic or heavy rolling loads or any type of maintenance procedures until the adhesive has cured for a minimum of 72 hours.

12102 Section 09650, Page 5 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

B. Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission Testing (Also see 1.10 Testing in this section.) a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test in accordance with ASTM F-1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have been thoroughly tested to ascertain moisture vapor emission transmission readings of the concrete. b. Perform ASTM F2170 Relative Humidity Test c. Perform ASTM F710 test for alkalinity d. Provide a minimum of three (3) tests for the first 1000 square feet of area and one (1) additional test for each additional 1000 square feet of area to be tested. e. Submit results of tests to General Contractor, Architect, and Owner’s representative prior to commencing with this section.

3.02 SURFACE CONDITION Floors shall be flat and level in accordance with Section 03100 Concrete Work.

This Contractor shall inspect rough floor surfaces before beginning his work, report any major defects or unevenness, which shall be repaired by Section 03100 Concrete Work. The flooring Contractor shall repair minor cracks, chips, and spalls with cement based patching material specified in Section 03100 Concrete Work.

A. Slab Preparation: 1. When using the ph Blocker/Primer 100 as manufactured by Sealflex Industies, Inc. prepared the concrete slab by shot blasting using a small shot profile (230-280) to ensure the porosity of the concrete surface.

2. Fill cracks and depressions with a quality Portland based cementitious underlayment patching compound. DO NOT USE GYPSUM BASED PATCHING COMPOUNDS.

3.03 ADHESIVE APPLICATION:

A. Floors shall be dry, vacuumed, free from paint, varnish, wax and dust before installing adhesive or flooring materials.

Notice: 1. Provide a test panel to confirm adhesion.

B. Slab Preparation: 1. When using the ph Blocker/Primer 100 as manufactured by Sealflex Industies, Inc. prepared the concrete slab by shot blasting using a small shot profile (230-280) to ensure the porosity of the concrete surface.

2. Fill cracks and depressions with a quality Portland based cementitious underlayment patching compound. DO NOT USE GYPSUM BASED PATCHING COMPOUNDS.

C. Tile shall be uniform in thickness, laid tight in proper adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions for the location and conditions involved by mechanics experienced in the trade.

Notice: 1. Adhesive shall be spread using a notched trowel of tooth spacing approved for the type of adhesive approved for the specified resilient tile.

2. Adhesive shall be left to set the required time specified for the product before installing the resilient tile.

12102 Section 09650, Page 6 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

C. Where new tile is to butt to existing tile, this Contractor shall remove or cut the existing tile to provide a smooth, straight and square starting line for the new work. The new tile shall match the direction of grain in the existing tile.

D. All material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction, latest edition.

3.06 CLEANING:

A. Perform the following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:

1. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive. 3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. Any mastic, on the tile or oozing up to between the joints shall be removed and if the mastic continues to come through, the tile shall be re-laid.

B. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes.

C. Use commercially available, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer.

D. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner’s maintenance service.

E. Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.

F. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning.

G. All final disinfecting, cleaning, waxing or polishing shall be done by the (Owner, Contractor).

3.07 PROTECTION;

A. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer.

B. If emergency conditions require the movement of equipment or furniture, the floor covering should be protected with heavy planks or minimum half inch thick plywood to prevent damage to the floor covering.

C. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved.

D. Use dollies to move stationary equipment and furnishings across floors.

12102 Section 09650, Page 7 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

3.08 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Compliance with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, product carton instructions and the required testing shall be followed as directed.

B. All flooring system materials shall be provided by the flooring manufacturer; and shall be installed in accordance with the flooring manufacturer’s printed instruction, latest edition.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09680, Page 1 CARPETING

09680 CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The Contractor shall furnish and install carpet as selected by the Owner as hereinafter specified, together with labor and all accessory items necessary to install carpet in a workmanlike manner. This shall include all labor, material, and services including proper adhesive, seam, cement, binding, sewing, edge strips, carpet attachment strips, etc., sufficient to produce a complete carpet installation.

The Contractor shall provide labor to remove existing floor covering, as required, within the project limits.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 3, Section 03100 Concrete Work for floor preparation.

Notice: The surface of the concrete shall not be coated with any type of membranes, waxes, oil, or compounds in order to allow proper bond of floor covering adhesive. Concrete and underlayment must be dry.

B. Division 9. Section 09650 Resilient Floor Tile for accessories and floor preparation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

A. Submit a letter from the manufacturer stating fire ratings of the product provided; and an independent testing laboratory report that the carpeting meets requirements as follows:

1. “Class A” fire rating, as classified in accordance with NFPA-255. a. ASTM-E84 (latest edition) Stemer Tumel Test Flame Spread 25 or less

2. Class I Interior Floor Finish. Critical radiant flux, minimum of 0.45 watts per square centimeter as determined by tests in accordance with NFPA 253.

B. Shall meet FHA Bulletin UM-44B, Heavy Traffic.

C. The Contractor shall submit a working layout for those areas to be covered, showing the location of all seams, for the Architect's review. This layout shall show the pattern, color, type of trim strips and any other pertinent installation details. No carpet shall be installed until approvals have been received. (See the Finish Legend.)

12102 Section 09680, Page 2 CARPETING

D. Maintenance: The carpet manufacturer shall submit four (4) copies of a complete manual of the manufacturer's maintenance recommendations for this quality carpet.

E. Cleaning Kit: Furnish and leave one "Service Master" Spotting Kit and directions for removing all types of stains.

F. Test Reports

1. Submit test report and Certification of Compliance with fire rating classification. 2. Submit test reports of Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity (ph).

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Carpet shall be select from manufacturer listed. Contractor to submit sample carpet selections. These samples shall be a minimum 3" x 5" and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's specifications covering the construction of the carpet.

B. All carpet shall be delivered to the job site in the original mill wrappings with each roll having its register number properly marked on each bale. The carpet shall be stored under cover in dry, well ventilated spaces upon delivery to the job site, protected from damage, dirt, stains and moisture.

C. All surfaces to receive carpet shall be thoroughly clean and dry and in a condition satisfactory to the Carpet Contractor. The Carpet Contractor shall notify the General Contractor in writing with copies to Owner and Architect of any conditions, which will prevent him from producing satisfactory finished work. The installation of carpet shall be an indication of his acceptance of the substrates and he will automatically assume the responsibility for any unacceptable finished work caused by substrate conditions.

D. Cleanup: Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall remove all waste and excess materials, and all tools and equipment. Carpet shall be vacuumed at completion of installation.

E. Excess Carpet Pieces: All usable pieces of carpet not necessary to complete the work are to be left on the job site and placed in an orderly manner in an area designated by the Owner.

F. Property Damage by Carpet Contractor: Any damage done to paint, walls, woodwork, doors, etc., shall be the responsibility of the Carpet Contractor.

1.06 WARRANTY: The Contractor shall, at his expense, and upon written notice from the Architect, promptly and properly replace any and all improper work that may become apparent within 12 months after final approval as evidenced by the date of the final certificate. Strict adherence of this specification will be required by the Owner, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for loss in replacement of goods disapproved. Contractor shall obtain warranty from manufacturer of product selected.

12102 Section 09680, Page 3 CARPETING

1.07 TESTING:

A. This Contractor shall provide the following tests:

1. The Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride ASTM F 1869 (latest edition) and the Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes ASTM F2170 (latest edition) be done based on the limits of the flooring manufacturer. This testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. The alkalinity (ph) shall be tested per ASTM F710 (latest edition). This testing shall be done by an independent testing agency.

3. Provide adhesion test.

B. Test reports shall indicate compliance with moisture vapor content and pH is at or below the flooring manufacturer’s requirements before flooring is installed.

C. Provide a minimum of three (3) tests for the first 1000 square feet of area and one (1) additional test for each additional 1000 square feet of area to be tested.

D. Submit results of tests to General Contractor, Architect, and Owner’s representative prior to commencing with this section.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 CARPET:

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install carpeting, as selected by the Owner from the types as listed in the drawings Finish Schedule and Finish Legend:

B. All carpet shall be of first quality manufacture. No seconds or imperfects will be accepted. Carpet shall be in colors selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. The Contractor shall furnish and install carpet accessories, adhesive, labor and freight necessary for the installation of the carpeting.

D. All exposed edges of the carpet that abut an adjacent floor surface of a different level shall be trimmed with Roberts Standard Nap-Lok Trim or Roppe Corporation trim.

E. The carpet shall be installed with boarders when shown.

F. Carpet base shall be installed as indicated and trimmed with Roberts Standard NAP-LOK trim.

2.02 TRANSITION STRIPS Provide 1/8” thick x 1” (2”) vinyl transition strips in color designated. Provide transition strips between VCT/VCT pattern change, or VCT/sheet vinyl.

12102 Section 09680, Page 4 CARPETING

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 ALL INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURES PRINTED INSTRUCTIONS.

3.02 FLOOR PREPARATION: This Contractor shall remove all existing floor covering that exists within the project limits, which is in conflict with the new work, prior to the installation of the carpet. New carpet shall not be laid over existing floor covering.

Check floor for moisture content. The floor shall be free of dust, oils, grease or other foreign matter. Building shall be preheated at a minimum of 72 degrees F., for at least 24 hours prior to installation with the relative humidity between 35% and 50%. Keep temperature at the same level night and day during installation.

3.03 FLOOR CONDITION: Cracks 1/8" or more, holes and unevenness shall be filled with a latex base floor filler and the high spots leveled. The floor shall be swept clean. Use a good bristle broom to keep dust from becoming airborne. Wet mop the floor with warm water and sweep again after mopping. The Roberts Adhesive shall be spread using 1/8" wide by 1/8" deep "V" notched trowel. Be sure to maintain trowel notch size throughout the job.

3.04 ADHESIVE APPLICATION: Carpet shall be securely bonded to the substrate with a waterproof adhesive of good quality and all seams shall be trimmed and fitted in a workmanlike manner and shall be bonded at the time of installation with a good quality seam adhesive, per manufacturer recommendation. This adhesive shall be applied to the cut edge of the carpet at the level of the carpet backing.

Notice:

1. Provide a test panel to confirm adhesion.

2. Adhesive shall be spread using a notched trowel of tooth spacing approved for the type of adhesive approved for the carpet.

3. Adhesive shall be left to set the required time specified for the product before installing the carpet.

Allow installation a minimum of 24 hours to cure before subjecting it to any traffic, moving of furniture or other heavy equipment.

3.05 INSTALLATION ON CONCRETE FLOORS: Check the floor for moisture content by sealing an inverted glass tumbler or plate to the floor with putty. Allow at least 24 hours for this test and if moisture condenses on the inside of the glass, too much moisture is present in the floor for a successful installation. Refer to Section 03100 Concrete Work.

Before starting the installation, test an area with the adhesive and the carpet to determine the open-time and bond.

A. Floors shall be dry, vacuumed, free from paint, varnish, wax or oil, and dust before installing adhesive on flooring materials.

Notice: 1. Adhesive shall be spread using a notched trowel of tooth spacing approved for the type of adhesive approved for the specified sheet vinyl. 12102 Section 09680, Page 5 CARPETING

2. Adhesive shall be left to set the required time specified for the product before installing the sheet vinyl floor covering.

3.06 SEAMING: The installation contractor shall submit seaming diagrams to the Architect as follows:

A. All length seams shall be indicated on the drawings and all carpet shall be laid in the same direction unless specifically shown otherwise.

B. All cross seams necessary due to layout of areas shall be at the absolute minimum and shall be indicated on the shop drawings, cross seams necessary due to length of rolls re- ceived shall be placed, to avoid occurrence at conspicuous locations.

C. Trim edges to make pile height level.

3.07 REPAIR: Included in this contract is the provision that the Carpet Contractor shall:

A. Repair seams, joints and edges, if required, once after the original installation is completed. The exact time for this work shall be left to the discretion of the Architect, but shall be within 12 months after final approval of the finished installation. Fourteen (14) day notice for this work shall be given by the Architect, so that the Contractor can make necessary arrangements for same.

B. Further, the Contractor shall provide a one (1) year unconditional warranty against workmanship covering further repair of seams, puckering, and any other defects that might be directly pointed to defect in workmanship.

3.08 CLEANING:

A. Stains shall be promptly removed, prior to vacuuming the floor area.

B. All carpet shall be vacuumed upon completion of all seaming.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09700, Page 1 SEAMLESS FLOORING

09700 SEAMLESS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Seamless resinous flooring – troweled or broadcast 2. Coved seamless wall base – troweled 3. Epoxy Sloping – troweled

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 03100 Concrete Work for substrate testing.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials must be recommended and manufactured by a single supplier to insure compatibility and proper chemical and mechanical bond.

B. Flooring material surfacing shall only be applied by an approved contractor with a minimum of seven (7) years experience installing the brand of surfacing bid is based on in similar size and function projects. A list of ten (10) completed projects using the specified materials must be submitted proving seven (7) years experience by the lead mechanic.

C. Surfacing applicator shall provide to the architect a completed list of jobs including the names of the Architect, General Contractor, Owner, telephone numbers of all concerned, materials used, quantity installed and date completed on similar projects of material on which bid is based.

D. Surfacing applicator must provide a written joint guarantee for materials and workmanship between applicator and surfacing manufacturer for one (1) year.

E. Surfacing applicator or manufacturer seeking approval of products other than what is specified must supply samples, full product information, technical data with specifications, certification from an independent testing laboratory that the product being submitted for approval meets all requirements of the performance properties specified within this specification, installation instructions and comply with the above quality assurances in writing fourteen (14) days before bid letting. Omission of any item will result in an automatic rejection.

F. Bidders will be notified by addendum of substitute surfacing materials, if approved.

12102 Section 09700, Page 2 SEAMLESS FLOORING

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Surfacing applicator shall submit samples of color and textures for Architect's approval, in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Prior to commencing work, the applicator shall install a 10 square foot sample on the job of desired color and texture and when approved, this will serve as the standard for the entire project.

C. Submit Certification of material compliance.

D. Submit test reports and Certification of Compliance with fire rating classification.

E. Submit test reports for Moisture Vapor Emission & Alkalinity (pH).

1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Material temperatures shall be a minimum of 55°F before use.

B. Work on seamless flooring shall not commence until the building can be maintained at a minimum temperature of 55°F for 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after application. Areas shall also be broom clean and reasonably dust free and shall have adequately controlled ventilation with bright, uniform lighting.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Before commencing work, ensure environmental and site conditions are suitable for application and curing.

B. Surfaces shall be acceptable in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Notify Architect and Contractor in writing of unsuitable surfaces and conditions. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and working conditions.

D. Substrate requirements (See Appendix A).

1.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this trade. If necessary, mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, cabinet work, equipment, etc. by suitable means.

1.09 WORK BY OTHERS

Section 03100 Concrete Work: Concrete subfloors shall be steel trowel finished, smooth, and level; and shall be cured for a minimum of 15 to 30 days to 3,000 psi. Level high spots by grinding or sanding. Extensive leveling (over 1/16” thick, or over 10 square feet in one area) shall be done with 4,000 psi Portland cement based underlayment.

12102 Section 09700, Page 3 SEAMLESS FLOORING 1.10 TESTING:

A. This Contractor shall provide the following tests:

1. The Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride ASTM F 1869 (latest edition) and the Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes ASTM F2170 (latest edition) be done based on the limits of the flooring manufacturer. This testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. The alkalinity (ph) shall be tested per ASTM F710 (latest edition). This testing shall be done by an independent testing agency.

3. Provide adhesion test.

B. Test reports shall indicate compliance with moisture vapor content and pH is at or below manufacturer’s requirements before flooring is installed.

C. Provide a minimum of three (3) tests for the first 1000 square feet of area and one (1) additional test for each additional 1000 square feet of area to be tested.

D. Submit results of tests to General Contractor, Architect, and Owner’s representative prior to commencing with this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Seamless Floor Covering shall be a seamless system; except walls, base, slope fill and ramps, which shall be troweled.

Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements of these specifications, provide product indicated in the Finish Schedule and Finish Legend.

1) Sherwin Williams: EPO-Flex 2) Substitutions are not permitted

B. Provide trowel applied, turned-up coved base with 1" radius at toe, and on wall to height AFF, as indicated on the drawings.

12102 Section 09700, Page 4 SEAMLESS FLOORING

E. Minimum Performance Characteristics:

1. VOC (Volatile Organic Content) EPA Method 24 Compliant SCAQUID Method 304 Compliant

Hardness, Shore D 0/40 ASTM D2240

Tensile Strength 1,700 psi ASTM D412

Elongation 80% ASTM D412

Adhesion 300 psi ACI 503R concrete failure

Flammability Self-Extinguishing Over concrete

Thermal Cycling No Cracking ASTM C884 (24 hours, -21°C to 25°C)

2.02 TRANSITION STRIPS Provide 1/8” thick x 1” (2”) vinyl transition strips in color designated. Provide transition strips between VCT/VCT pattern change, or VCT/sheet vinyl.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Sub Floor Test Report: Installation of all flooring shall proceed only after the compliance with Paragraph 1.09. Work by Others: Section 03100 Concrete Work has been complied with; and this Contractor submitting test reports and the work of other trades has been completed, or as directed by the Contractor, especially overhead trades in accordance with paragraph 1.10 Testing.

3.02 Areas to receive flooring shall be clean, adequately lighted, fully enclosed, weather-tight, and heated with a substrate temperature minimum of 60 degrees F – 90 degrees F. for 72 hours before, during, and after installation is completed. Installation shall not be exposed to heavy traffic or heavy rolling loads or any type of maintenance procedures until the adhesive has cured for a minimum of 72 hours.

3.03 FLOORING PREPARATION:

A. Surface must be clean, sound and dry.

B. Effectively remove concrete treatments which may prevent bonding to the concrete on floor surfaces by mechanical shot blast. Other methods of surface preparation are not allowed.

C. This Contractor shall verify level of sub floor and shall fill with approved material, or grind to achieve a level floor.

12102 Section 09700, Page 5 SEAMLESS FLOORING

D. Areas where flooring exists must be cleaned to remove all floor material, grease or any residue that might retard interfacial adhesion between substrate and surfacing. Floor shall be vacuumed dust free prior to installing flooring material.

3.04 FLOORING APPLICATION

A. Application of the flooring system shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions by an approved contractor, employing lead mechanic qualified under the quality assurance portion of this specification, using equipment specifically designed for this purpose.

B. Apply surfacing to a thickness of 1/8" minimum. Surfacing shall be tightly compacted, trowel applied.

C. Install integral cove base to specified height with 1" radius cove, and on wall to height AFF, as indicated on the drawings. Tape wall at top of base before application to ensure straight line.

D. Finished work shall match approved samples; be uniform in thickness, sheen, color, pattern, and texture; and be free from defects detrimental to performance.

E. Install flooring drains over sloped concrete subfloor by others. (See Section 03100 Concrete Work.)

F. Provide floor sloping or ramps, as indicated on the plans, or as required by field conditions.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Floors shall be dry, vacuumed, free from paint, varnish, wax and dust before installing adhesive or flooring materials.

Notice: 1. Provide a test panel to confirm adhesion.

Notice: 1. Adhesive shall be spread using a notched trowel of tooth spacing approved for the type of adhesive approved for the specified sheet vinyl.

2. Adhesive shall be left to set the required time specified for the product before installing the sheet vinyl floor covering.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. After completion of flooring the floor shall be protected from damage by other trades.

B. If emergency conditions require the movement of equipment or furniture, the floor covering should be protected with heavy planks or minimum half-inch thick plywood to prevent damage to the floor covering.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 09700, Page 6 SEAMLESS FLOORING

APPENDIX A

GENERAL SUBFLOOR REQUIREMENTS

CONCRETE -- Section 03100

1. Concrete should have been designed and installed to minimize random cracking and slab deflections; provide sufficient control joints and isolation joints.

2. Variation in plane shall be determined by the specifier and be in accordance with ACI 302, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab, as well as ASTM E 1155 (latest edition), Determining floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F Number System.

3. Proper slope to drain(s) must be maintained.

4. A light steel trowel finish is preferred for best results and to minimize surface preparation.

5. Concrete to be clean, crack free, sound and durable (minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi) and dry (3% maximum moisture content by mass.)

6. Concrete must be free of hydrostatic and/or capillary moisture pressure and should not be in direct contact with the ground. An effective vapor barrier and properly engineered soil are required.

7. Allow concrete to cure 28 days minimum before applying floor system.

8. Moisture Content - destructive: Concrete core(s) and/or chip (remove with a chipping hammer or chopping gun) can be taken, wrapped in vapor retardant plastic, sealed and delivered at once to lab and tested per ASTM D 1864 (latest edition), Standard Test Method for Moisture in Mineral Aggregate.

9. Moisture Content - non-destructive: Securely tape squares of heavy-duty polyethylene film sheeting (10 mil gauge minimum) to the substrate. Place an infrared heat lamp twenty-four (24) inches above the polyethylene film for twenty-four hours (24) in the on position and observe for accumulation of moisture under the film.

10. Concrete after surface preparation is to be free from sealers or membrane curing agents.

11. Light weight and insulating concrete not recommended under flooring system. (See applicator and manufacturer for alternate recommendations.) The recommendation is as follows:

This Contractor shall perform the testing in accordance with paragraph 1.10 Testing to confirm moisture content is below the limits specified in this Section, before applying flooring system over light weight/sand concrete.

12102 Section 09700, Page 7 SEAMLESS FLOORING

APPENDIX A (Continued)

CONTROL JOINTS -- Section 03100

1. Install control and expansion joints in accordance with standard practice per ACI-501.

2. The floor contractor may fill non-moving control joint(s) with approved elastomeric sealant or full depth semi-rigid two-component epoxy joint filler, designed specifically for this purpose (use full depth joint filler when reinforcement of the joint edges is desirable), or two-component epoxy and filler (epoxy to be same material as flooring). Movement may crack surfacing unless proper detailing has been done.

3. Filling of moving isolation joints or expansion joints is not recommended.

4. Filling of non-moving isolation joints with elastomeric caulking and sealants or with a semi-rigid epoxy joint filler or two-component epoxy and filler is acceptable. Movement may crack surfacing unless proper detailing has been done.

5. Joint identified by structural engineer as moving joints shall be treated by terminating flooring on each side of joint. After flooring is completed, joint shall then be filled by sealant contractor.

BACKING FOR COVE BASE

Surface to receive cove and/or base shall be strong, durable and dry. Suitable backings include; concrete, cement plaster, standard lightweight block, clay, sand, lime, cement bricks and drywall with a toe plate. Masonry surface(s) to be free of voids, irregularities and recessed joints (if present, fill with recommended epoxy plaster).

12102 Section 09900, Page 1 PAINTING

09900 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. Under this section, the Contractor shall furnish and install all painting and finishing of all interior and exterior work: poured concrete, concrete masonry, plaster, gypsum board, wood, metal surfaces and as reasonably inferred to require painter's finish within the scope of the work; and specified herein, including all concealed or semi-concealed materials within the finished spaces.

B. The finish of exposed heating and plumbing pipe in finished spaces, as well as mechanical heating unit covers, connector covers and grilles, etc., is included under this contract.

C. Neither anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, or any nonferrous metal shall be painted except as may be specifically called for herein. All galvanized work shall receive painter's finish.

Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections.

Finish coats shall be compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of the Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coating system. Upon request, furnish information on specified finish materials, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required.

D. All materials used on the work shall be exactly as herein specified in brand and quality or shall be an approved equal. No claim of the painting contractor as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or his inability to produce first class work with same, will be entertained unless such claims are made in writing. All paints, varnish, enamels, lacquers, stains, paste fillers and similar materials must be delivered in the original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. Lead content of paint, based on the total solids, shall be 1/2 of 1% or less.

E. The materials named herein indicate the quality required by Benjamin Moore. Alternate brands include Dunn Edwards, Sherwin Williams, Martin Semour Paint, Pratt & Lambert, Pittsburg Paints, DeVoe or Glidden are acceptable provided they are color matched to Benjamin Moore. Alternate brands shall be color matched to the Benjamin Moore colors selected.

Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

F. All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place designated by the Owner. Such storage space shall be kept clean and neat and all damage thereto or its surrounding shall be made good. Any oily rags, waste, etc., shall be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire.

12102 Section 09900, Page 2 PAINTING

G. All material shall be used only as specified by the manufacturer's directions on the label on the container.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. Provide a listing of the materials and application for each coat of each finish sample.

On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until the required sheen, color and texture is achieved.

On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of each natural and stained wood finish as required. Label and identify each as to location and application.

On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted finishes of the prepared samples. On at least 100 sq. ft. of surfaces as directed, provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen, color and texture is obtained, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.

Contractor shall make any samples that may be requested and submit same for approval. All colors, degree of gloss and finish shall be as directed by the Architect and Owner. Standard stock colors will be used insofar as they may be deemed appropriate color by the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make whatever changes he may deem necessary to obtain the effects desired.

1.04 AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED:

A. The following areas shall not receive a painted finish:

Mechanical shafts All areas so scheduled

B. The following categories of work are not included under this section as part of the painter applied finish work.

1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various Sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. Also, for shop fabricated or factory built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.

2. Prefinished Items: Do not include painting when factory finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet partitions, acoustic materials, laminated plastic, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switch- gear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance frames, doors and equipment.

3. Concealed Surfaces: Painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts. For the purpose of this section, the interstitial space is considered a concealed space. Piping, equipment, and other such items in such spaces is specified in the mechanical sections of this specification.

12102 Section 09900, Page 3 PAINTING

4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, and similar finished materials will not require finish painting.

5. Operating Parts and Labels: Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operations, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, unless otherwise indicated.

Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.

PART 2 - MATERIALS:

2.01 The exposed surface of any of the various materials, exterior and interior, shall be finished as listed. Any items which require a painter's finish not included in the lists shall be painted like similar items in the list or as directed by the Architect.

2.02 INTERIOR: All interior plaster, gypsum board, poured concrete, concrete masonry, cement board, metal and woodwork, except aluminum, bronze, chromium, etc., shall be painted as a part of this Contract, unless otherwise noted.

A. All Smooth Plaster or Gypsum Walls, Ceilings and Plaster Soffits shall be given:

1. One (1) Coat - Wall Primer 2. Two (2) Coats – Satin Latex

B. All Interior Metal and Metal Trim, Metal Panels, Metal Heating Unit Covers, Convector Covers, Fire Extinguisher and Fire Hose Cabinets, Metal Doors and Frames, Metal Window Frames, Metal window frames in doors, and Other Metal Surfaces that are shop Coated Shall be given:

1. One (1) Coat - Undercoat

2. One (1) Coat - Enamel Eggshell

NOTE: To all metals not factory primed, add one (1) coat interior trim primer.

C. Wood Surface, Paneling and Millwork:

1. One (1) Coat - Stain 2. One (1) Coat - Clear Finish, Gloss Urethane, Sanded 3. One (1) Coat - Clear Finish, Satin Urethane

D. Other Wood Shelves End Panel Closures, Nailing Strips, and Cleats for tops in concealed or semi-concealed spaces trim shall be given::

1. One (1) Coat – Satin Urethane 2. One (1) Coat – Satin Urethane

12102 Section 09900, Page 4 PAINTING

E. All Poured Concrete shall be given:

1. One (1) Coat - Masonry Paint 2. Two (1) Coats - Masonry Paint

F. All Concrete Masonry shall be given :

1. One (1) Coat - Filler 2. Two (2) Coats - Masonry Paint

G. Epoxy Paint: Shall be two (2) coats Water Borne Epoxy (satin finish) over specified primer.

1. Over drywall, primer shall be one (1) coat Vinyl Acrylic Wall Primer.

2. Over masonry-aggregate block (lightweight and concrete block), primer shall be one (1) coat primer.

3. Over plaster, primer shall be one (1) coat Vinyl Acrylic Wall Primer.

4. Over ferrous iron or steel, primer shall be one (1) coat Latex Metal Primer.

H. Existing Work:

1. Walls: Ceilings and walls in existing areas that are patched, the new surfaces shall be primed and then surfaces shall be painted and shall receive the final coat only of paints scheduled for the type material involved. Such painting on walls shall be full height of wall and extend to closest corners and on ceilings shall include the entire ceiling areas.

Any room in the existing building scheduled to be painted, the entire room will be painted colors as selected by the Architect.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS:

A. Aluminum Surfaces: All aluminum mill finish surfaces, except anodized aluminum, shall be cleaned and primed before applying first coat of paint.

B. Caulk: Install paintable caulk around exterior metal door frames and drywall. (See Section 07900 Joint Sealers)

12102 Section 09900, Page 5 PAINTING

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.

B. Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machines surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for the com- plete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Follow completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved.

C. Clean surface to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants form the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.

D. All surfaces to be painted shall be sanded and checked for surface imperfections prior to painting or applying surface treatment. All surface imperfections shall be filled and resanded.

3.02 CEMENTATIOUS MATERIALS: Prepare cementatious surfaces of concrete to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze.

Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of the paint. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 WOOD: Clean wood surfaces to be painted, of all dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off.

3.04 FERROUS METALS: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shopcoated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

3.05 SUBSTRATE: The Applicator shall examine all surfaces and parts of the structure to which the painting is to be applied, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the performance of this work. Do not proceed with this work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and are acceptable to the Applicator.

Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film.

12102 Section 09900, Page 6 PAINTING

3.06 APPLICATION:

A. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's direction. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.

B. The workmanship shall be of the very best, all material evenly spread and smooth flowed on without runs or sag. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed.

C. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.

D. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

E. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grills, with a flat, nonspecular black paint.

F. All woodwork and metal surfaces calling for enamel or varnish shall be sanded between coats with fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth finish.

G. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop primed and touch up painted, unless otherwise specified.

H. All existing walls, which have blemishes, dents, scratches, etc., shall be filled and sanded before applying paint.

I. The top, bottom and edges of all doors shall be stained and finished to match face.

3.07 RESTRICTIONS:

A. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are below 50° F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Exterior painting shall not be done while surface is damp or during rainy or frosty weather.

3.08 COATING:

A. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils for the entire coating system of prime and finish coats for three-coat work.

B. Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.5 mils for the entire coating system of prime and finish coat for two-coat work.

C. Prime Coats: Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.

D. All suction spots or hot spots in plaster or cement which are noticeable after the application of the first coat shall be touched up before applying this second coat to produce an even result in the finished coat. Priming coat on plaster walls shall be tinted to the approximate shade of the final coat. The Contractor shall secure Color Schedules for rooms before priming walls.

12102 Section 09900, Page 7 PAINTING

E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

F. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections.

G. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

3.09 PROTECTION: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting, as directed by the Architect.

Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required, to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

3.10 CLEANUP: During the progress of the work, removed from the project daily, all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10050, Page 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES

10050 TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Under this section the Contractor shall furnish and erect all toilet accessories and miscellaneous construction items, etc.,

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES: Shall be as manufactured by Bobrick Corporation; ASI, Bradley, McKinney; Scott Tissue Company; or an approved equal. Bobrick and Scott numbers have been designated. Grab bars and folding benches must support a minimum of 250 lbs.

A. At individual Public and Staff Handicapped Accessible Toilet Rooms

1. Each Water Closet One (1) B-667 Paper Holder One (1) B-6806.99 x 36 Grab Bar One (1) B-6806.99 x 42 Grab Bar One (1) B-6806.99 x 18 Grab Bar (vertical) (Set Vertical on side wall at 40” from back wall)

2. Each Sink One (1) B-290-18” x 36” Mirror One (1) Bobrick B-2620 “C” Fold Paper Towel Dispenser One (1) Soap Dispenser (By Owner)

3. Within Room One (1) B-671 Robe Hook (mount on wall)

B. At Staff Sinks:

1. Each Sink One (1) Bobrick B-2620 “C” Fold Paper Towel Dispenser One (1) Soap Dispenser (By Owner)

2. Each Sink (Dialysis Only) (or where space limitation prevents use of B-2620)

One (1) B-2621 “C” Fold 10-3/4” (W) x 7-1/8” (H) Paper Towel Dispenser One (1) Soap Dispenser (By Owner)

12102 Section 10050, Page 2 TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10100, Page 1 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION SPECIALTIES 10100 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Under this section the Contractor shall furnish and erect all miscellaneous and ornamental construction items, etc.,

1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 STAINLESS STEEL TRIM Furnish and install 16-gauge stainless steel sheet, trim and closure strips, as detailed.

2.02 ACCESS PANEL: A. Furnish and install U. L. Industries, Model PW, 24" x 24" with expansion wings at all plumbing chases for access to in-wall plumbing.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. U L Industries 2. Inland-Ryerson Construction Products 3. Karp Industries, Inc. 4. Williams Brothers Corp.

B. Panel shall be provided with a gasket; and caulked to wall or ceiling

C. Access Panels in rated walls shall be provided with UL label meeting the wall rating.

2.03 BUILT IN –ELECTRIC REALISTIC FLAME IMAGE FIREBOX: Furnish and install “Optiflame”, Built-in Purifier Firebox BF33, as manufactured by Dimplex North America Limited. Call: 1-(800) 668-6663, or www.optiflame.com, 120V or 240/208V. Voltage to be coordinated with electrical circuit voltage.

PART 3 – INSTALLATION

3.01 All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10260, Page 1 WALL & CORNER GUARDS

10260 WALL & CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Furnish and install corner guards, handrails, etc., including all related items for installation.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for blocking.

B. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall for blocking.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures, indicating size, finish, and mounting requirements for both masonry and drywall construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS:

2.01 CORNER GUARDS/PVC (CG): Furnish and install where indicated on the plans and as detailed 3” x 3” PVC, surface-mounted corner guards, and meet a flame spread of 25 for a Class 1 rating in accordance with ASTM-E-84. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from full color line, including premium colors.

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with color schedule requirements, provide one of the following products as shown on the Finish Schedule and/or Finish Legend:

1. Korogard 2. Substitutions are not permitted.

B. Furnish a structural support to provide a rigid backup. All corner guards and door frame guards shall be mounted on metal support frame.

C. All corner guards shall run from top of base floor to ceiling, or 4’-0” AFF (See plans for specific requirements.). Provide bottom and top caps.

D. Installation to conform to the manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

E. Provide 90° and 135° corner guards where indicated by wall configuration. Corner guards shall be square corner for drywall.

F. Provide 2” X 2” PVC surface-mounted corner guards when corner guards are required for exposed end of wall.

12102 Section 10260, Page 2 WALL & CORNER GUARDS

2.02 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (FRP):

A. Furnish and install fiberglass reinforced polyester panels. Panel shall be pebble textured surface. Color of panels shall be as selected by Architect. Provide moldings, trim and closure strips; and mechanically attachment devices. Install per manufacturers recommendations. Panels shall be 0.09” minimum thickness. Flame spread and smoke contribution shall meet Class “C” fire rating. Product shall conform to ASTM D-3841-86, Standard for “Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels” and pass the NEMA LD3 – 1991 Stain test.

FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Panels, Pebbled Textured Surface, as scheduled on the drawings.

Manufactures: Subject to the compliance with the color schedule, provide product that meets the foregoing specifications and as scheduled on the Color Schedule and/or Finish Schedule.

1. Marlite 2. Substitutions are not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

3.02 BLOCKING The product installation may require supplemental blocking, in addition to the recommendations of the manufacturer. See Section 06100 Rough Carpentry, or Section 09250 Drywall for wall blocking requirements.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10426, Page 1 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

10426 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Under this section, the Owner shall furnish signage and Contractor shall install all signage and graphics.

Building signage shall meet all requirements of the Americans with Disability Act of 1990 and ANSI A117.1-2006 (latest applicable edition).

1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS Section 09060 Finish Schedule and Davita Clinic Planning Guidelines-Finish Schedule

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

Manufacturer shall submit technical data and specifications including material and color samples for approval. Drawings showing standard sizes and letter styles shall also be submitted. One sample sign, showing letters, pictograms and braille in one piece construction, shall be submitted for approval.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. SIGNAGE

1. Permanent room and space signs shall be provided with raised braille, characters and/or symbols. Raised characters, braille and pictograms will be raised 1/32" from face of sign. Raised characters shall be a minimum of 5/8" (16 MM) high. all signs will include grade 2 braille.

2. All raised letters, symbols or numbers will be of contrasting color to background. All copy and background will have non-glare finish. All letters shall be sans serif type.

3. All elements and spaces of accessibility shall be identified by international symbols of accessibility.

4. Material Specifications: Nominal 1/8" and 1/4" Melamine Laminate with paper core and contrasting surface color. Material shall meet Military Specification LP509, type 1 and LP 387, type NDP. Flammability rating: U.L.94. NEMA RATED: Self-Extinguishing. MOISTURE ABSORPTION at 2.5% or less.

12102 Section 10426, Page 2 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

5. Signage colors and sizes: Reference detail specifications schedule.

12102 Section 10426, Page 3 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

B. Mounting Method: Double sided tape or silastic adhesive.

2.02 RAISED BRAILLE AND CHARACTERS:

A. Letters and Numerals: Shall be raised 1/32" upper case, sans serif type and shall be accompanied by grade 2 braille.

B. Raised Characters: Shall be a minimum of 5/8" (16 MM) high, but no higher than 2" (50 MM).

2.03 PICTOGRAMS: Shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram, and with grade 2 braille.

Raised and braille characters and pictorial symbols signs. Standard dimensions for LITERARY braille are as follows:

Dot Diameter .059" Interdot Spacing .090" Horizontal separation between cells .241" Vertical separation between cells .395"

2.04 FINISH AND CONTRAST: The characters and background shall have an eggshell finish or other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background, either light colored characters with dark background or dark colored characters with light background.

2.05 CHARACTERS

A. Character Proportion: Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width-to-height ration between 3:5 to 1:1 and a stroke width-to-height ration between 1:5 and 1:10.

B. Character Proportion: The legibility of the sign is a function of the viewing distance, character height, the ratio of the stroke width to the height of the character and the contrast of the color between the character and the background. The size of the character must be based on the intended viewing distance.

C. Character Height: Characters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. Lower case characters are permitted.

For suspended or projected overhead signs in halls, corridors, walks, passageways, aisles or other spaces, signs shall have a minimum of 80" (2,030 MM) headroom clearance. If vertical overhead clearance of an area adjoining an accessible route is reduced to less than 80", a barrier to warn blind or visually impaired persons shall be provided. The minimum character or number height is 3" using an upper case X. Lower case characteristics are permitted.

12102 Section 10426, Page 4 SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

2.06 SYMBOLS OF ACCESSIBILITY: Elements and spaces of accessible interior facilities which shall be identified by international symbols of accessibility shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

A. Accessible entrances when not all are accessible. (Inaccessible entrances shall have directional signage to indicate the route to the nearest accessible entrance.)

B. Accessible toilet and bathing facilities when not all are accessible. (Inaccessible toilets and bathing facilities shall have directional signage to indicate the route to the nearest accessible facility.)

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 MOUNTING LOCATION AND HEIGHT: Signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting height shall be 60" (1,525 MM) above the finished floor to the centerline of the sign. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3" (76 MM) of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10500, Page 1 METAL LOCKERS

10500 METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: The Owner shall furnish and install all metal lockers and locker room benches. Relocate existing lockers, including the following related items; such as filler strips, trim, slope tops accessories, hardware, etc., necessary for a complete installation.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for wood bases.

B. Division 9, Section 09650 Resilient Floor Tile for coved base.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings and product literature in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

Submit color chart for color selection.

PART 2 – MATERIAL

2.01 PRODUCTS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Republic Steel Corporation, Youngstown, Ohio 2. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 3. Medart Products, Inc. 4. Penco Products, Inc. 5. Approved substitution per Section 01300 Submittal Procedures

All items called herein are Republic Steel numbers.

2.02 LOCKER TYPES A. Type: 12” x 18” x 36”, Double Tier. See Drawings for quantities, arrangement, and locations.

12102 Section 10500, Page 2 METAL LOCKERS

2.04 DOORS AND FRAMES Doors and frames shall be cold rolled and leveled sheet steel. Other parts shall be mild cold rolled steel. All steel shall be free from imperfections and capable of taking a high grade enamel finish.

2.05 DOORS: Locker doors shall be 16-gauge steel. Formation shall be two right angles at lock side, two right angles at hinge side and one right angle at top and bottom. Multiple tier lockers shall have one right angle formation on all four sides with one additional right angle formation on hinge side.

2.06 LOCKING DEVICE: Shall be a positive automatic relocking type whereby the locker may be locked while door is open, then closed without unlocking and without damage to the locking mechanism. The rubber silencers on the frame hooks shall be securely attached with a rivet that has the head molded into the rubber. Lock bar shall be of channel formation and tamper proof.

All handle parts including fixed case and lifting trigger shall be made from zinc die cast material having a tensile strength of not less than 40,000 PSI according to Federal Test Method Standard #151. The fixed case shall be attached to the door with two round Phillips Head screws with Sem's external washers and one centering stud. The case shall fully shield the lifting trigger from below. The lifting trigger shall have two right angle lugs that insert into the lock bar without use of a fastening device. The lifting trigger shall be equipped with rubber silencers at top and bottom. Padlock attachment with 3/8" diameter hole positioned so that the fixed handle case provides a padlock strike. The handle design shall be free of openings or surfaces that permit leverage to be applied that forces the handle upward when in a locked position. There shall be three locking points on single tier lockers and two locking points on double tier lockers.

2.07 LOCKS: No locks required. (Locks furnished by Owner.)

2.08 HINGES: Shall be at least two (2") inches wide of the full loop, tight pin style, to be securely welded to frame and riveted to door with two rivets to each hinge. Single tier lockers shall have three hinges double tier and box lockers shall have two hinges per door.

2.09 BODY OF LOCKER: The body of the locker consisting of upright sheets, backs, tops, bottoms, and shelves shall be 24 gauge steel. Upright sheets shall be flanged. Tops, bottoms and shelves shall be flanged on all four sides. Backs shall be flanged on two sides.

All bolts showing on outside of locker shall be slotless head type. All bolts and nuts shall be zinc plated.

2.10 FINISH: Before enamel is applied, the surfaces of the steel shall be phosphatized and shall then be finished in a standard neutral color. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from standard colors to match existing lockers.

12102 Section 10500, Page 3 METAL LOCKERS

2.11 EQUIPMENT: Single tier lockers shall have one hat shelf with rolled front, one double prong ceiling hook and one single prong wall hook on each side and back. Double tier lockers shall have one double prong ceiling hook and three single prong wall hooks. All hooks shall have ball points and shall be made of steel. All hooks shall be attached with two rivets.

2.12 NUMBER PLATES: Each locker shall have a new polished aluminum number plate with black numerals not less than 1/2 inch high. Plates shall be attached with split rivets. Numbering as directed by the Architect. Replace number plates to conform to new arrangement.

2.13 VENTILATION: Doors shall be louvered at top and bottom for ventilation. Single tier and double tier lockers shall have six (6) louvers at top and bottom.

2.14 LOCKER SUBBASE: All single and double tier lockers are to be mounted on wood bases provided by others. (See Section 06100 Rough Carpentry and 09650 Resilient Floor Tile.

2.15 SLOPE TOPS: Not required. Vertical laminated plastic cover panel provided by others. (See Section 06100 Rough Provide new metal slope tops matching the locker shall be provided continuously. Provide corners and end closures.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 LOCKERS Lockers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The lockers shall be solidly placed and plumbed.

3.02 Furnish and install end panels, closure panels, as required to cover spaces at columns, vents, ducts, etc., along locker wall. Finish of panels shall match lockers.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 10520, Page 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Work under this section consists of furnishing and installation of all material, labor, equipment, appliances and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the proper installation of Fire Extinguisher and Fire Extinguishers in the locations indicated on the Drawings and herein specified.

1.03 APPROVALS: All equipment furnished under this section shall be Underwriter's approved materials and shall have the Underwriter's Label stamped thereon or attached thereto.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

Cabinets and related items shall be Contractor provided and installed fire extinguisher.

2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHER/CABINET:

FEC Where indicated on the plans, furnish and install semi-recessed, or flat trim, recessed with 18 gauge steel box, steel door and frame. Door shall be full view clear acrylic glazed door. Equip cabinet with #ABC – 5, 5 lb., red enameled multi-purpose extinguisher, UL rating 2A-10BC.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 Top or rough opening to receive cabinet shall be approximately 54" from floor line. Verify with Architect.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 11010, Page 1 MOVABLE EQUIPMENT

11010 MOVABLE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: This section of the Specifications shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary to install the Owner furnished equipment as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

NOTE: Contractor to install Owner furnished equipment where indicated on plans. Contractor to coordinate with Owner location and condition of the equipment.

1.03 WORK BY OTHERS: The General Contractor shall include this work in his Bid and shall be responsible for the proper erection and setting.

A. Items which are referred to in other parts of the Specifications, such as sinks, faucets, strainers, and electrical outlets (unless otherwise noted) shall be as indicated on the Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Plans and Specifications shall not be included in this Contract, but shall be included in the Electrical, Mechanical or other Subcontracts as designated.

B. Fixed Equipment under other Specifications, Fixed Equipment under the Electrical Contract, and Fixed Equipment under the Mechanical Contract, though not a part of this Specification, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor and all work necessary to assist other Contractors to install the equipment such as furring, blocking, setting, etc., shall be a part of this Contract. The General Contractor will cooperate with all other trades to see that all equipment under all headings shall be installed in a neat and attractive way in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet the Architect's approval.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prior to fabrication, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect for review, Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials. These Drawings shall show size and arrangement of all equipment and relation to adjacent work and materials.

1.05 WARRANTY: This Contractor shall warranty all materials and workmanship covered by this Specification for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 KEY: A. Owner-provided / Owner Installed (O/O) B. Owner-provided / Contractor Installed (O/C) C. Contractor-provided / Contractor Installed (C/C) D. Owner-provided/Owner-Installed/Contractor-connected (O/O/C) 12102 Section 11010, Page 2 MOVABLE EQUIPMENT

2.02 REFRIGERATORS (O/C): Owner furnished and Contractor installed upright and under counter types.

2.03 T.V./BRACKETS (O/O): Owner furnished and installed TVs and brackets where indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 MICROWAVE (O/O): Owner furnished and installed.

2.05 ICE MAKER (O/O/C): Owner furnished and installed. Water connection and hook-up by Contractor.

2.06 RECESSED SCALE (O/C): Owner furnished and Contractor installed. SR 463 Series IN-Floor Platform Scale. Shop Drawings to be provided by Owner.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 All work shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and industry standards.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 11760, Page 1 WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

11760 WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: This section of the Specifications describes materials necessary for the Owner furnished and installed equipment as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

NOTE: Contractor to coordinate with Owner, the location of the equipment, furnished by others under separate contract; and provide all mechanical, plumbing and electrical services, devices and connections as required for a complete and operable system.

1.03 WORK BY OTHERS:

A. Items which are referred to in other parts of the Specifications, such as electrical power outlets (unless otherwise noted) shall be as indicated on the Plumbing and Electrical Plans and Specifications shall be included in this Contract.

B. Fixed Equipment under the Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Specifications, though not a part of this Specification, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor and all work necessary to assist other Contractors to install the equipment such as furring, blocking, setting, etc., shall be a part of this Contract. The General Contractor will cooperate with all other trades to see that all equipment under all headings shall be installed in a neat and attractive way in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet the Architect's approval.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prior to fabrication, the Owner’s Water Treatment System Contractor shall prepare and submit for review, Shop Drawings for all materials necessary for this Contractor. These Drawings shall show size and arrangement of all equipment and relation to adjacent work and materials.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 WATER TREATMENT (N.I.C.) See water treatment equipment location plans provided by Owner (OP/OI)

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 All work shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and industry standards.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 12300, Page 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

12300 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Provide and erect all items of plastic laminated casework, nurses stations, countertops, etc., indicated on the Drawings, and that are required for the completion of the project in a first class manner.

A. Casework: Modular, factory-built particleboard casework finished on exterior with high- pressure plastic laminated and on interior with plastic overlay, complete with all hardware, accessories, countertops and bases, in sizes and elevations indicated.

Where an item may be indicated to be a non-standard factory assembled casework component, said component to be furnished and installed under this section.

1. Style: Flush overlay, with square cornered doors and drawer fronts overlapping case front with minimum reveal.

2. Joinery: Use conventional joinery as specified.

B. Laminated plastic sills.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Sinks and Service Fixtures: Furnished and installed under Mechanical and Electrical, Divisions 15 and 16 respectively.

B. Base Molding: Furnished and installed under Finishes, Division 9.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Provide laminate clad casework and countertops furnished by the same supplier for single responsibility and integration with other building trades.

B. Manufacturers shall show evidence of at least five (5) years experience and installations for similar types of projects.

C. Casework must conform to design quality of materials, workmanship and function of casework specified and show on drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION: Fit casework to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.

12102 Section 12300, Page 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, etc. and provide air circulation within stacks.

1.07 PROTECT INSTALLED PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK: Protect installed plastic laminated casework from damage by work of other trades until Owner's acceptance of the work.

This Contractor shall provide any temporary protection to finished casework, floors, etc., that, in the opinion of the Architect, requires protection during the progress of the work. Protection shall be accomplished in an effective manner using materials and methods that will cause no injury.

1.08 BLOCKING: All blocking shall be provided per Section 06100 Rough Carpentry, Paragraph 2.1. This contractor to level and plumb the casework installation.

1.09 SUBMITTALS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures for all materials.

A. Product Data:

In addition to the general conditions as relates to prior approvals, submittals of manufacturer's data, installation instructions and samples are required upon architect's request.

B. Samples:

1. Submit two (2), 2" x 3" samples of casework manufacturer's standard decorative laminates and matching PVC edge, patterns and textures for exposed and semi- exposed materials for architect's selection. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color, texture, and pattern only. Compliance with other specified requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Submit one full-size sample base cabinet unit with hardware, doors and drawers without countertop.

3. Submit one full-size sample wall cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and adjustable shelves.

4. Acceptable samples units will be used for comparison inspections at the project. Unless otherwise directed, acceptable sample units may be incorporated in the work. Notify Architect of their exact locations. If not incorporated in the work, retain acceptable sample units in the building until completion and acceptance of the work.

5. Remove sample units from the premises when directed by the Architect.

12102 Section 12300, Page 3 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for laminate clad casework and countertops showing layout, elevations, ends, cross-sections, service run spaces, and location of services. Show details and location of anchorages.

2. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows and other building components.

3. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.

1.10 DEFINITIONS:

A. Exposed surfaces: All surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, and interior of open cabinet.

1. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges. 2. Exposed ends. 3. Countertops and back splashes and their exposed edges. 4. Front face of cabinet body not covered by doors or drawer fronts. 5. Wall mounted adjustable shelves. 6. Interior of open cabinets. (No exceptions) 7. Bottom of wall cabinets. 8. Interior of glass door cabinets.

B. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation, and:

1. Frames. 2. Dust panels. 3. Cleats

C. Semi-exposed surfaces: All other surfaces not exposed or concealed, and:

1. Interior of closed cabinets. 2. Bottom of tall cases. 3. Top of wall and tall cases. 4. Drawers. 5. Bottom of wall cabinets with skirt for under counter light. 6. Cleats or nailing strips for tops or wall cabinets

D. Finishes:

1. All exposed vertical surfaces: Plastic laminate. 2. All semi-exposed surfaces: Plastic overlay. (Melamine with 1mm PVC edges) 3. Edges of doors and drawer fronts: 3mm PVC 4. Edges of case body members: 2mm PVC 5. Shelves: all exposed surfaces: 1mm PVC 6. All open shelving to be 1mm PVC faced, with exposed and concealed edges to be 1mm PVC faced. 7. All closed cabinet shelving to be 1mm PVC faced, with exposed and concealed edges to 1mm PVC faced.

12102 Section 12300, Page 4 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

8. All open cabinet and glass door cabinet interiors to be plastic laminate faced. 9. All window sills to be laminated plastic faced (top, edge and exposed ends). 10. All closed cabinet interiors to be melamine faced, except shelves. 11. Finish of upper wall cabinet exterior bottoms to be laminated plastic. 12. Finish of upper wall cabinet exterior bottoms with skirts for under counter light to be plastic overlay (melamine with 1 mm PVC edges). 13. Edges of counter tops; 3mm PVC solid surface or laminated plastic, where indicated. 14. Cleats or nailing strips to be melamine faced.

1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Deliver laminated clad casework and countertops only after wet operations in building are completed.

B. Store completed laminate clad casework and countertops in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity range of 20% to 50%.

C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with a protective covering.

1.12 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Humidity and Temperature Controls:

1. Advise Contractor of requirements for maintaining heating, cooling and ventilation in installation areas as required.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 Plastic Laminate Casework shall be conforming to Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Latest Edition.

2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC WINDOW SILLS, COUNTERTOPS & FACES:

A. Where indicated on drawings, horizontal surface shall be NEMA GP-50 as manufactured by Formica. Provide PVC-edging for tops unless otherwise noted. See Finish Legend.

B. All back splashes are 4" high unless noted otherwise. Post formed integral top and back splashes and sanitary edges are not permitted.

C. Laminate adhesive: High pressure decorative laminate shall be bonded to core with liquid polyvinyl acetate at temperatures above 60 degrees F., at a pressure no less than 15 pounds per square inch. Laminate and core is to be laminated and cured in a controlled environment between 40% and -6% relative humidity. Contact adhesives are permitted on tops, splashes and vertical surfaces.

D. All exposed surfaces except countertops and back splashes: Grade GP 28, 0.030 IN (0.7 mm) thick.

12102 Section 12300, Page 5 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

E. Provide backer sheet on each plastic laminated item.

1. Semi-exposed backer sheet: Grade CL20, 0.028 IN (0.5 mm) thick; color to match plastic overlay. 2. Concealed backer sheet: Grade BK20, 0.028 IN (0.5 mm) thick.

F. Colors as selected by Architect, maximum ten (10) colors per project, including accents on edges of tops.

G. Plastic overlay: Resin impregnated paper overlay hot-press-cured onto substrates, with backer/balance sheet.

1. Conform to NEMA requirements for "General Purpose" decorative board (Not "Light Duty" liner type). 2. Satin finish, opaque color. 3. Melamine; must be counter balanced and tested to meet LD-3-1985 NEMA. Color: shall be white or dove gray as selected by Architect. 4. Substrates: As indicated below; see "Fabrication-Case Components" for components requiring plastic overlay finish.

H. Particleboard: Mat-formed, 45 PCF density, exceeding ANSI A208-1-1979.

1. Type 1-M-3 for general use.

I. Fiberboard: Medium density wood fiberboard, 48 PCF density, minimum, at counters with sinks, window sills, pipe enclosures; Medex or approved equal.

J. Hardboard: Tempered, smooth on both sides, exceeding CS-251 standards.

K. Plywood: Softwood plywood, NN Grade. (9 ply)

L. Hardwood: Any hardwood S4S.

M. Exposed Finish Wood: Grade A, rotary sliced birch.

N. Edges shall be square, hot glue applied PVC, 1mm or 3mm, as noted in 1.10.

O. Grommets: The Contractor shall provide an allowance of One Hundred Twenty Five and no/100 dollars ($125.00) for the purchase of eighty (80) casework wire management grommets, as selected and located by the Architect.

P. Glass: Framed glass doors shall be provided with tempered safety glass or laminated safety glass as required by the local code authority.

Q. Plexiglas: Provide 1/4" Plexiglas, textured, splash shields.

12102 Section 12300, Page 6 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

2.03 SOLID SURFACE TOPS

. A. Solid surface tops shall be cast polymer. Provide solid-edging for tops. Unless otherwise noted Architect shall select from colors and patterns of the manufactures full line.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to the compliance with the requirements, provide Wilsonart, in accordance with the Finish Legend.

2. Resistance to Fungal and Bacterial Growth

a. ISO 846-1978 Method A Fungi b. ISO 846-1978 Method B Fungi c. ISO 846-1978 Bacteria

Chemical Resistance BS3202 Part 2, 1991 Appendix E The solid surface material shall conform to the National Sanitation Foundation Standard 51 for use in food service areas; conform to the relevant portions of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, ANSI/NEMA, LD 3-1991.

Kitchen sinks shall conform to ANSI Z124.6. Vanity bowls shall conform to ANSI Z124.3. Sink: Single Sink: Wilsonart BK 1515 (Sink to be of size and color when specified on the drawings)

3. Fire Test Data, ASTM E-84

Solid surfacing sheet stock shall be classified as Class I (A) fire –resistant material for interior finishes.

Design Thickness Supporting Flame Spread Smoke Sheet Index Developed Index Solid Color 1/4" None 15 165 Solid Color 1/2" None 10 25 Solid Color 3/4" None 5 15 Pattern 1/2" None 10 20 Pattern 3/4” None 5 0

B. Back splashes shall be 4" high in counters with sinks; and 1-1/4” high in counters with no sinks. Front edge shall be 1 ½”, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Adhesive: Of type recommended by the solid surface top manufacturer.

D. Provide solid surface sinks of size and color as scheduled on the drawings.

12102 Section 12300, Page 7 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

2.04 HARDWARE:

A. Hinges:

Shall be institutional heavy-duty, five knuckle, fixed pin, hospital type, satin chrome. Each door will have a bumper to prevent laminate-to-laminate contact. Hinge shall have a lifetime warranty as offered by the hinge manufacturer. The number of hinges per door shall be as follows:

Door Height Hinges per Door

0" - 36" 2 37" - 62" 3 63" - 80" 4

B. Pulls:

1. Pulls shall be 4” bent wire (Stanley No 4484, US 26D; Ives 38, PA 28). 2. Pulls shall be Hafele 117.3.1.A36

C. Drawer Slides:

1. Shall be Blum full height sides, bottom mount style Blum Tandem 562H with epoxy finish. Slides will have a 100 pound load rating at full extension; and a built-in, positive stop both directions. Slides shall have a lifetime warranty as offered by the slide manufacturer.

2. File drawer slides shall be Blum Tandem 562H, full extension (100 pound rating) with epoxy finish. Slides shall have a lifetime warranty as offered by the slide manufacturer. Provide parallel hanging bars for letter size "Pendaflex" hanging file folders. Provide stops on the hanging bars for file management. Verify drawer size for letter files.

3. Paper storage drawers shall be equipped with Blum Tandem 562H, full extension (100 lb rating) with epoxy finish. Slides shall have a lifetime warranty as offered by the slide manufacturer.

D. Adjustable Shelf Supports:

Shall be heavy-duty to support two hundred (200); pounds, self-locking nylon, to fit 32mm pre-drilled holes in cabinet ends and vertical partitions. The shelf supports shall have two (2) pins 5mm in diameter, to prevent the shelf support from rotating and tipping. Available for 3/4 inch or 1 inch thick shelves.

E. Locks:

1. For doors and drawers as shown on drawings shall be National Lock #M4- 7054C, fixed pin, five tumbler, master keyed, removable core, cam style lock with strike. Each lock shall be furnished with two (2) keys. Locks for sliding 3/4" doors shall be a disc type plunger lock, sliding door type with strike. Locks for sliding glass doors shall be a ratchet type sliding showcase lock. Provide five (5) extra locks.

12102 Section 12300, Page 8 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

2. Chain bolts shall be 3 inches long, shall have a 18 inch pull and an angle strike to secure inactive door on cabinets over 72 inches in height. Elbow catches shall be used on inactive doors up to and including 72 inches in height.

3. Ratchet locks at sliding glass window shall be KV 965 NP.

F. Index followers:

With steel plate and rod are provided for all file drawers.

G. Miscellaneous Hardware:

Heavy duty standards: K.V. 85-185 double slotted shelf standards and brackets. Shelf Standards: KV 80 anachrome finish Shelf Brackets: KV 280 anachrome finish Shelf Standards: KV 255 (recessed)

H. Grommets:

Furnish and install sizes and shapes series plastic grommet (color as selected) as manufactured by Doug Mockett and Company at backs of counters above knee spaces and at locations of floor mounted electrical data on phone outlets per plan. Provide only one grommet at multiple outlet locations. (See 2.2.O.)

I. Glass top: 1/4’ clear tempered glass

J. Magnetic Latches: Latches shall be magnetic. Plastic roller latches are not approved.

K. “J” Hooks: Provide cast double “J” hooks on underside of coat rack shelf.

L. Magnetic Latches:

Latches shall be magnetic, with the magnet mounted in a metal housing. Furnish and install screws with lock ring shoulders to prevent slippage of the magnetic latch. Plastic roller latches are not approved.

2.05 CASE BODY MEMBERS:

A. Case body members (except backs not exposed): 3/4 In. (18 mm) minimum thick particleboard.

1. Base unit top: Use either full sub-top or web frame. 2. Web frames: Lumber. 3. Provide drawer lock rails at all drawers. 4. Provide back on all cabinets.

12102 Section 12300, Page 9 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

B. Unexposed case back: 1/2 In. minimum thick particleboard, pre-finished with GP 28 laminate and balanced with backer sheet BK20.

C. Sink base units shall have 1 x 1 x 1/8" angle rail in lieu of full sub-top.

D. Shelves: 3/4 In. (18 mm) minimum thick particleboard; 1 In (25mm) thick for over 30 In (91 mm) between supports, 1mm PVC edges.

E. Doors: Particleboard. 1. Up to 26 inch wide or 48 inch high (600 x 1220 mm): 3/4 Inch (18 mm) thick. 2. Up to 36 Inch wide or 66 Inch high (900 x 1680 mm): 1-1/4 Inch (30 mm) thick). 3. Door front corners to be square.

F. Drawers:

1. Fronts: 3/4 Inch (18 mm) thick particleboard. 2. Sub-front (if used), sides and back: 1/2 Inch (12 mm) thick hardwood. 3. Bottom: 1/4 Inch thick, tempered hardboard; over 18 In (45 mm) wide provide intermediate reinforcing rails. 4. Double doors on all cabinets over 24" wide. 5. Drawer fronts to be square corners.

G. Case Base: 4" separate base for each unit.

H. Small compartment dividers and dust panels: 1/4 Inch (6 mm) thick tempered hardboard.

1. Provide dust panels at all open knee spaces and exposed drawers where bottom of drawers is not flush with side.

I. Filler panels and scribe pieces: Particleboard; provide as required to fit standard size units to space.

J. Plastic laminated countertops: 3/4 Inch (18 mm) thick particleboard, built up to 1-1/2 Inch (31 mm) thick on all faces.

K. Metal Parts:

1. Countertop support brackets, legs and miscellaneous metal parts shall be furniture steel, welded, degreased, cleaned, treated and powder painted in light beige, sienna brown, dove grey or black colors.

L. Screw Caps:

1. Provide white plastic cap inserts in all screws exposed on either exterior or on the interior of the cabinet.

M. Label Holders:

1. Provide label holders where designated.

12102 Section 12300, Page 10 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

N. TACK SURFACES: Where detailed and shown provide tack boards, etc. Tack surface / tack board fabric shall be as scheduled (See Finish Legend). Material shall meet Class A; flame spread rating 25 or less.

M. BENCH FABRIC Where detailed at Reception Bench, furnish and install Keyston Bros; TCA008, fabric. See Finish Legend.

2.06 FABRICATION:

A. Case body: All joints glued.

1. Top and bottoms (and fixed horizontals): Dadoed and rabbeted into ends/dividers, and screwed. 2. Back: Dadoed and rabbeted into sides and bottom or top. 3. Fixed small compartment dividers: Dadoed.

B. Drawers (with sub-front): All joints glued.

1. All corners dovetailed or sides Dadoed for front and back and all joints nailed, stapled or screwed. 2. Bottom: Screwed directly to bottom edges of drawer box or Dadoed into all 4 sides. 3. Front: Screwed onto sub-front.

2.07 FABRICATION-COUNTERTOPS:

A. Plastic laminate countertops:

1. Backsplash: Glued and screwed onto top, with scribe edges. 2. Joints in plastic laminated: Not closer than 24 Inches to sinks. 3. Joints in counter length: Factory-Fitted, splined, glued, and mechanically fastened. 4. Laminate front edge applied before top laminate. 5. Post formed backsplash, tops and sanitary edges are not permitted.

B. Fabricated Solid Surface Tops

1. Preconditioning material and adhesives should be 65F (18C) or warmer prior to fabrication.

2. Substrates and Supports sheet for horizontal surfaces such as countertops should be supported every 24” (610 mm) for 3/4" (19 mm) thickness and 18” (457 mm) for 1/2" (13 mm) thickness. Do not use 1/4" (6 mm) thick sheets for horizontal applications.

Do not use a full wood underlayment as a support for horizontal sheets.

Restrict unsupported overhand to 12” (305 mm) for 3/4" (19 mm) thick Surell sheets and to 6” (152 mm) for 1/2" (13 mm) thick sheets.

12102 Section 12300, Page 11 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

3. Adhesives: For seams and drop edges, use manufacturer’s Seaming Compound.

a. Wood and wood veneer inserts (as in some drop edge designs) can be bonded to material with PVC adhesive, clear epoxy adhesive, or clear silicone sealant.

b. When attaching countertops and vanities to cabinets, use dabs of a clear silicone sealant every 10” (508) to 12” (610 mm), then lower the unit into place.

c. When installing vertical panels for shower and bath surrounds, use light colored trowelable mastic or a clear silicone sealant.

d. When installing backsplash sections, use a clear silicone sealant or color-matched silicone sealant. If the backsplash is less than 8” (407 mm) high, it may be bonded to the countertop using a Seaming Compound.

e. For all installation seams, silicone sealant shall be in a clear bond or sixteen colors to match and complement the entire line of the solid surface material. Silicone sealant is appropriate for all non-porous surfaces including Formica brand laminate, tile, wood, and painted surfaces.

4. Assembly: When vanities and countertops are placed between walls, allow 1/8” (3 mm) space per 10’ (6100 mm) length to allow for dimensional movement.

a. All inside corners of cutouts must be radiused as large as possible to a minimum of 1/4" (6 mm) and reinforced with corner blocks to avoid stress cracking. The edges and corners should be sanded smooth and free of chips or nicks. Heart conductive aluminum tape must be used for drop-in stoves and around heat sources to protect form thermal stress.

5. Polishing: Consult the Fabrication Data Sheet-Polishing for detailed information.

2.08 FABRICATION-CASE CONFIGURATION:

A. Similar reveal (maximum 1/4 In) at all sides, top and bottom of doors on drawer fronts, and between doors and drawer fronts in same unit.

B. Double door units: Vertical rail or divider between doors over 36" wide.

C. Toe space: 4 Inch high by approximately 3 in deep; provide on front of each base unit unless otherwise noted.

D. Countertop: Overhand 3/4 in beyond doors and drawer fronts and exposed ends.

E. Hardware mounting:

1. Drawers: Center pulls in front, horizontally. 2. Drawers with 2 pulls: Set pulls at 1/4 points.

12102 Section 12300, Page 12 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

2.09 SCRIBE: Provide scribe to assure tight fitting against work.

2.10 GROUND AND NAILING STRIPS: Provide nailing strips and grounds wherever necessary for fastening finish work thereto.

2.11 ROUGH LUMBER AND BLOCKING: All blocking shall be accurately located so that finish pieces can be fastened thereof without shaving or small fillers.

PART 3 - WORKMANSHIP

3.01 JOB MEASUREMENTS: Wherever required to insure perfect fitting work, the Contractor shall take measurements at the job before beginning finished woodwork.

3.02 MISCELLANEOUS: Furnish and erect all miscellaneous items for Plastic Laminate Casework show, or reasonably implied as required on the Drawings and Specifications. Assist other trades; provide all centering, furring, ground blocks, etc., required by any trade. Do all cutting and fitting of Plastic Laminate Casework that may be required. Furnish scaffolding not done by other trades. Condition laminate clad casework to average prevailing humidity conditions prior to installation.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation.

B. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units.

C. Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of casework and tops from damage by other trades until acceptance of the work by the Owner.

D. This contractor shall furnish to the Owner cleaning and maintenance requirements.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 12300, Page 13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

2.09 SCRIBE: Provide scribe to assure tight fitting against work.

2.10 GROUND AND NAILING STRIPS: Provide nailing strips and grounds wherever necessary for fastening finish work thereto.

2.11 ROUGH LUMBER AND BLOCKING: All blocking shall be accurately located so that finish pieces can be fastened thereof without shaving or small fillers.

PART 3 - WORKMANSHIP

3.01 JOB MEASUREMENTS: Wherever required to insure perfect fitting work, the Contractor shall take measurements at the job before beginning finished woodwork.

3.02 MISCELLANEOUS: Furnish and erect all miscellaneous items for Plastic Laminate Casework show, or reasonably implied as required on the Drawings and Specifications. Assist other trades; provide all centering, furring, ground blocks, etc., required by any trade. Do all cutting and fitting of Plastic Laminate Casework that may be required. Furnish scaffolding not done by other trades. Condition laminate clad casework to average prevailing humidity conditions prior to installation.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation.

B. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units.

C. Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of casework and tops from damage by other trades until acceptance of the work by the Owner.

D. This contractor shall furnish to the Owner cleaning and maintenance requirements.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 12492, Page 1 BLINDS, SHADES & INTERIOR SHUTTERS

12492 BLINDS, SHADES & INTERIOR SHUTTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SCOPE: Under this section, the Contractor shall furnish and erect all blinds, shades, and interior shutters, and accessories.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for above ceiling blocking requirements B. Division 8, Section 08100 Steel Doors & Frames for metal frames and attachment C. Division 9, Section 09250 Drywall for wall attachment D. Division 9, Section 09500 Mineral Acoustical Tile for ceiling coordination and attachment

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data, product profile drawings, installation drawings, color charts, in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

PART 2 - MATERIALS:

2.01 FRAMED WINDOW WITH INTEGRAL BLIND (WIB):

A. Furnish and install framed window, double glazed glass view panels, with integral ½” gear driven louvers or blinds with in the dual glazed glass view panel, with gear drive operator located on corridor (or room) side, at the bottom left or right side. The framed window glass view panel shall be ¼” tempered glass both faces with 5/8” metal spacer between the glass faces; and fully sealed with inert gas fill or moisture-free air.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:

1. OEM Shades, Inc 700 First Avenue Ford City, PA 16226 Phone (724) 763-3600, Fax (724) 763-3601, email:[email protected]

B. Color: Color of blind and frame shall be as selected.

C. Metal Frames: Refer to Section 08100 Steel Doors and Frames, Paragraph 2.06 Borrowed Light Frames, when installing unit in borrowed light frames; and Paragraph 2.07 Vision Panels, when installing the unit in doors.

12102 Section 12492, Page 2 BLINDS, SHADES & INTERIOR SHUTTERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 All materials shall be assembled and installed, in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 12552, Page 1 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

12552 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The requirements as set forth under the headings of General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Division 1 shall apply to this section of the work.

1.02 SUMMARY: Project scope includes manual chain operated interior roller shades (single solar shade) system, with related hardware to complete the installation to the following locations: Roller shades shall be mounted: between the vertical window framing, or on the face of the window framing to the underside of the window framing/ ceiling or bulkhead, as may be required by field conditions.

The Contractor shall furnish and install manual chain operated shades. (Dave Schrader)

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:

A. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry B. Division 9, Section 09250 Gypsum Board C. Division 9, Section 09500 Mineral Acoustical Tile D. Division 16 Electrical

1.04 SUBMITTALS & TEST REPORTS

A. Submit fully detailed drawings prepared in AutoCAD 2004 format showing all components, finishes and perimeter construction conditions, installation, wiring and controls, and all applicable dimensions according to Section 01300 Submittals Procedures.

B. Submit duplicate samples of the specified fabric / shade cloth of each color and texture minimum size 8.5@ x 11@ (215mm x 280mm) for review.

C. Submit duplicate samples of the specified sections of fascia, closure, pocket, housing, trim, roller tube, hembar, operating hardware, brackets, and side channel for review as required.

D. Submit duplicate copies of compliance to the following tests

E. Fire tests: NFPA 701-89 SM, NFPA 701-89 LG Flat, NFPA 701-96 TM#1; ASTM E-84-90: Flame Spread 17, Smoke Density Index 118

F. Toxicity: UPITT

G. Fungal Resistance: ASTM G 21

H. Bacterial Resistance: ASTM G 22

I. Submit duplicate copies of operating and maintenance instructions including, name and telephone number of local service company.

12102 Section 12552, Page 2 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All bidders submitting bids on the work of this section shall meet or exceed the quality of materials, components and assemblies specified herein Bidders who do not comply with these performance specifications shall refrain from submitting a bid. B. Alternate Bids, Alternative Products shall be submitted to the Architect 10 days prior to tender closing. Alternative Bids can only be submitted as an alternate Bid to the specified base Bid Product. Manufacturers that meet the performance criteria and are approved, as an alternate by the Architect shall be listed in an addendum. C. All work specified under this section supplied and installed entirely by one Subcontractor using his own forces. D. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience in the manufacture of specified shading system. E. Shades to be installed by a firm, with a minimum of ten (10) years experience, specializing in the installation of shading systems. F. Conform to applicable Building Code and Local Authority having jurisdiction and all other standards noted. G. Install one complete operating sample with accessories on site. Review the installation before proceeding with the remainder of the work. Adjust sample installation to gain acceptance. Accepted work may form part of the final installation.

1.06 INSPECTION / PREPARATION

A. Verify that all blocking and framing necessary to carry shade assembly hardware is properly installed and secure. B. Notify Owner in writing of any deficiencies in the work of other trades that would affect the window treatment system. C. Make accurate measurements at the site before fabrication. Check layout of glazing framing sections, spans, and loading capabilities.

1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Do not deliver to site until areas to receive shades are completely finished, all walls and ceilings completed and painted. B. Deliver materials in original protective wrappings or containers, with manufacturer’s labels and sealed intact. C. Handle and store materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations protecting materials and finishes from damages, marring of finishes or soiling.

1.08 WARRANTEE Provide a limited manufacturer’s warrantee from the Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following minimum warrantee periods:

A. Shade Hardware: Ten (10) years B. Fabrics / Shade Cloth: Ten (10) Years C. Aluminum and steel coatings: Ten (10) Years D. Bed Chain: One (1) Year E. Provide a limited installation warranty from Date of Substantial Completion, covering a period of one (1) year.

12102 Section 12552, Page 3 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

PART 2 - MATERIALS:

2.01 MANUFACTURER: Subject to the compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:

A. Draper, Inc. 411 S. Pearl Street Spiceland, IND 47385 Phone: (765) 987-7999 / Fax: (765) 987-7147 www.draperinc.com

Alternative products can only be submitted as an alternate Bid to the specified base Bid Product. Manufacturers shall meet the performance criteria (Quality Assurance 1.3.1 and 1.3.2) to be approved as an alternate by the Architect in order to be listed in the addendum

2.02 HARDWARE:

A. Shade Mounting Brackets

B. Manual chain Operators and motorized operators

C. Unitized pre-moulded construction, on 71.5 mm x 76 mm (2.875" x 3"), 12 gauge, L shaped, coated steel mounting brackets

D. Operator assembly shall allow for continuous front or back-roll fascia across multiple shades (to a maximum length of 6.1m (20ft.) without exposed fasteners.

E. All shade brackets shall be shipped completely assembled from the factory.

F. A single manual chain operator as designed by the specified manufacturer shall be capable of operating a shade band up to 5.2m2 (56 ft2) in total fabric area, 2.13m (7 ft) in width, or 2.44m (8 ft) in height, and shall be manufactured with a precise inertia brake mechanism capable of locking the shade panel or band at any point of travel. Chain operator type, gear reduction operating hardware, manufactured with a precise inertia braking mechanism to stop shade at any desired point of travel

G. Drive chain to be #10 stainless steel, tested strength of 41 kg (90lb.), to eliminate breakage of chain under normal usage

H. Left hand or right hand operating systems. Contractor to verify operator placement before fabricating.

I. Mounting assembly shall allow for continuous front or back-roll fascia across multiple shades without exposed fasteners.

J. Shade roller tube shall be removable from mounting assembly without hardware removal.

K. All non-metal components shall be self-lubricating.

L. Shade hardware shall allow for a bottom-up or a sideways roller tube installation and removal without removing brackets

12102 Section 12552, Page 4 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

2.03 ROLLER TUBE ASSEMBLY:

A. Top roller tube of one piece extruded aluminium tube, with 10 micron thick clear anodized coating, at the manufacturers recommended engineered diameter and wall thickness for maximum allowable deflection of L/700; Mill finish tubes will not be acceptable

B. The roller tube shall be extruded with provision made for mechanical engagement with the operator and drive assembly.

C. The extrusion shall have various channels to accept fabric attachment spline. The spline and slot reinforces the tube and retains the fabric and operating system.

D. The spline will be an extruded vinyl profile, welded to the fabric band or panel, such that removal and re-installation of the fabric panels can occur without removing the roller tube and hardware. Fabric panels must be replaceable on site. Attachment of the fabric to the tube with double sided adhesive tapes, adhesives, staples, or rivets is not acceptable.

2.04 HEMBARS AND HEMBAR POCKETS:

A. Aesthetically designed exposed extruded aluminium alloy 6063-T5, round shaped, with matching end caps, pre-weighted, to maintain bottom of shade fabric straight and flat. Colour pre-finished to match adjacent window framing or as selected by Consultant. Underside of hembar available with Schlegel light seal. Hembar attached to fabric panel with welded fabric spline

2.05 FASTENERS:

A. Non-corrosive to manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.06 FABRICS: Shade cloth seconds or shade cloth manufactured from reprocessed materials are not acceptable.

A. B-1: Shade cloth shall be 5% openness. (2% if large south glass exposure)

2.07 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES:

A. Aluminum Fascia: The fascia shall depend upon the type of fabric used, roll direction, and site conditions. All other specifications shall remain applicable.

1. Back/Regular roll fascia: a Extruded aluminium alloy 6063-T5, prefinished, 105 mm x 45 mm x 1.6 mm wall thickness (4.13" x 1.77" x 0.063"), custom designed profile to fit onto remoulded end mounting brackets without exposed fasteners. Colour prefinished to match adjacent window framing or as selected by Consultant. b Fascia shall allow for continuous placement across multiple shades (to a maximum length of 6.1m (20ft.)) without exposed fasteners. c Fascia shall conceal the mounting hardware, power and control cables, drive mechanism, roller tube, and all fabric rolled on the tube d Fascia shall not fit snug against side channels to prevent thermal shock to the glazing system

12102 Section 12552, Page 5 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

2. Pockets and Closures: Pocket and closure selection shall depend upon type of fabric used, Roll Direction and site conditions (site conditions may require the use of custom pocket and closure other than those specified below)

a. Shade Pocket: Manufactured from 2.5 mm (0.098") thick aluminium or 1.5 mm (0.059") thick satin coat steel pocket engineered to meet site conditions. Design considerations include, but are not limited to, mounting conditions, wall/ceiling construction, type and quantity of shades in pocket, and shade length, as indicated on the drawings.

b. Aluminium Closure: i Extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T5, pre-finished, 82 mm wide x 1.5 mm thickness (3.23" x 0.059"). Colour shall be pre-finished to match the adjacent window framing or as selected by the Consultant. ii Designed for attachment to the corresponding pocket and/or hardware using an extruded aluminium clip and return angle, both made of 6063-T5 aluminium alloy, without exposed fasteners.

2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES:

A. All exposed aluminium shall be clear anodized oxide finish according to AA-M12C22A31 or coloured to match window framing.

B. Unexposed aluminium unless otherwise specified: mill finish.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION:

A. Shading system components manufactured and assembled allowing for installation techniques to suit project requirements.

B. Finished assemblies shall be, square, true to size and free from distortion, twist, or other defects that could affect their strength, operation or appearance. Factory applied finish shall be uniform, smooth and without blemishes.

C. The fabric shall be colourfast, retain its shape, not be affected by moisture or heat, and shall be non-flammable. Cut fabric to eliminate glare and reflection from shining surfaces while maintaining exterior view. The top of the fabric is retained in recessed spline of the shade roller and the bottom of the fabric is retained by the selected hem.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Install work by manufacturer’s skilled tradesmen and installed in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

B. All items installed, plumbed, squared, rigidly coupled and adequately anchored, maintaining uniformed clearances, accurate alignment levels, and parallel with the window plane. Fabric shall not travel more than 3 mm (0.125") in either direction within channels after installation.

C. The solar screen fabric shall be pre-measured and manufactured off-site

12102 Section 12552, Page 6 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Adjust shades and operating components as required to ensure smooth and trouble free operation without binding.

B. Adjust shade and shade-cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion.

C. Clean shades and exposed components.

D. Replace work, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, adjusted, or cleaned.

END OF SECTION

12102 Section 12552, Page 7 MANUAL CHAIN & MOTORIZED OPERATED SHADES

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Adjust shades and operating components as required to ensure smooth and trouble free operation without binding.

B. Adjust shade and shade-cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion.

C. Clean shades and exposed components.

D. Replace work, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, adjusted, or cleaned.

END OF SECTION

12102 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15A - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

15A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ...... 1 15A-2 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS ...... 1 15A-3 GENERAL EXTENT OF WORK ...... 1 15A-4 LOCAL CONDITIONS ...... 1 15A-5 CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, AND REGULATIONS ...... 2 15A-6 CONTRACT CHANGE ...... 2 15A-7 LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES ...... 3 15A-8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ...... 4 15A-9 WARRANTY ...... 4 15A-10 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND SUBSTITUTIONS ...... 4 15A-11 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION ...... 5 15A-12 CUTTING AND PATCHING ...... 6 15A-13 MUTILATION ...... 6 15A-14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ...... 6 15A-15 SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ...... 7 15A-16 START-UP, CHANGE-OVER, TRAINING, AND OPERATIONAL CHECK ...... 7 15A-17 OWNER'S FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW ...... 7 15A-18 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT...... 7 15A-19 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS ...... 8 15A-20 FILTERS ...... 8 15A-21 CLEANING OF SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT ...... 8 15A-22 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM ...... 8 15A-23 PIPING IDENTIFICATION ...... 8 15A-24 VALVE IDENTIFICATION ...... 9 15A-25 PIPE SLEEVES ...... 9 15A-26 WELDING ...... 10 15A-27 PIPING MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ...... 10 15A-28 PIPING FITTINGS ...... 11 15A-29 INSULATING UNIONS AND FLANGES ...... 12 15A-30 STRAINERS ...... 12 15A-31 UNIONS ...... 12 15A-32 PIPING INSTALLATION ...... 13 15A-33 VALVES AND INSTALLATION ...... 14 15A-34 VALVES ...... 15 15A-35 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ...... 16 15A-36 PRESSURE GAUGES ...... 18 15A-37 DIAL THERMOMETERS...... 18 15A-38 PRESSURE GAUGE AND THERMOMETER CONNECTOR PLUGS ...... 19 15A-39 TESTING PROCEDURES ...... 19 15A-40 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION ...... 20 15A-41 DUCTWORK INSULATION ...... 22 15A-42 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ...... 23 15A-43 RECORD DOCUMENTS ...... 23

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 15 p1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION 15B - PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

15B-1 PIPING SYSTEMS MATERIALS ...... 1 15B-2 PIPING SYSTEMS VALVES ...... 1 15B-3 PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION ...... 1 15B-4 DUCTWORK INSULATION ...... 2 15B-5 SCHEDULE OF FIXTURE BRANCHES ...... 2 15B-6 ADJUSTMENT AND BALANCING ...... 2 15B-7 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS, ROOF DRAINS, ETC...... 2 15B-8 CLEANOUTS ...... 3 15B-9 SHOCK ABSORBERS, HYDRANTS, HOSE BIBBS ...... 4 15B-10 PLUMBING FIXTURES...... 4 15B-11 WATER HEATER ...... 5 15B-12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ...... 5 15B-13 IN-LINE PUMPS ...... 5 15B-14 OPENINGS ...... 6 15B-15 ACCESS PANELS ...... 6 15B-16 SHEET METAL WORK ...... 7 15B-17 SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES ...... 8 15B-18 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS ...... 10 15B-19 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM EVAPORATORS & CONDENSING UNITS ...... 11 15B-20 REFRIGERANT LINES ...... 11 15B-21 EXHAUST FANS ...... 11 15B-22 ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS...... 12 15B-23 THERMOSTATS, CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ...... 14 15B-24 ELECTRIC CABINET UNIT HEATERS ...... 15 15B-25 TESTING AND BALANCING PREPARATION ...... 15 15B-26 AIR TESTING AND BALANCING ...... 17 15B-27 NATURAL GAS SERVICE ...... 17 15B-28 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE ...... 17

SECTION 15C - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

15C-1 GENERAL ...... 1 15C-2 SCOPE ...... 1 15C-3 FEES AND PERMITS ...... 1 15C-4 PROTECTION OF WORK ...... 1 15C-5 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS ...... 1 15C-6 CODES AND ORDINANCES ...... 2 15C-7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ...... 2 15C-8 QUALIFICATION OF SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR ...... 2 15C-9 WATER SERVICE ...... 2 15C-10 TESTING AND FLUSHING OF SYSTEM ...... 2 15C-11 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ...... 2 15C-12 SPRINKLER HEADS ...... 3 15C-13 DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS ...... 3 15C-14 MISCELLANEOUS EXECUTION ...... 3 15C-15 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING ...... 4 15C-16 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ...... 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 15 p2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION 15B – PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

15B-1 PIPING SYSTEMS MATERIALS: a) Refer to Section 15A of this specification for piping material specifications and installation instructions. b) See schedule for specific piping materials and joining methods for systems installed under this section.

PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE Service Letter Wording Marker Color Letter Color Domestic Cold Water Domestic Cold Water Green White Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black Domestic Hot Water Return Hot Water Return Yellow Black Fire Sprinkler Water Fire Sprinkler Water Red White Natural Gas Natural Gas Yellow Black

15B-2 PIPING SYSTEMS VALVES: a) Refer to Section 15A of this specification for valve type specifications and installation instructions. b) See schedule for valve types to be installed under this section.

VALVE SCHEDULE Service Size Stop Check Balance Domestic Water Up to 2” BLV-1 -- -- Domestic Water Up to 2” -- SCV-1 -- Domestic Water Up to 2” -- -- BAV-1 Natural Gas Up to 1” PLV-1 -- -- Natural Gas 1.25” to 2.5” PLV-2 -- --

15B-3 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: a) Refer to Section 15A for insulation type specifications and installation instructions. b) See schedule for insulation types and thickness for piping installed under this section.

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Service Size Type Thickness Domestic Cold Water All 1-PC 1/2” Domestic Cold Water below Grade All 1-PC 1/2” Domestic Hot Water below Grade All 1-PC 1” Domestic Hot Water All 1-PC 1” Tempered Water All 1-PC 1/2” Hot Water Return All 1-PC 1” Refrigerant Lines (Interior) All 1-PC 1/2" Refrigerant Lines (Exterior)* All 1-PC 1/2" Roof Drain and Overflow Roof Drain All 1-PC 1/2" piping ** A/C Condensate Drain (Interior) Up to 1” 1-PC 1/2"

* All exterior piping insulation shall be coated with ultraviolet-resistant paint. Color as selected by architect. ** All roof drains and overflow roof drain bodies shall be insulated with 0.5” thick Armaflex sheets.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

15B-4 DUCTWORK INSULATION: a) Refer to Section 15A for ductwork insulation specifications and installation instructions. b) See schedule for insulation for ductwork to be insulated under this section. c) Ductwork shall not contain internal lining

DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE System Type Thickness Supply Air – All 1-DEW 1-1/2” Return Air – All 1-DEW 1-1/2” Outside Air – All 1-DEW 2” Supply Diffuser backs – All 1-DEW 1-1/2” Exhaust Air from fan to 10’ inside bldg 1-DEW 1-1/2”

15B-5 SCHEDULE OF FIXTURE BRANCHES: a) Connection to individual plumbing fixtures shall be as follows:

Item Waste Vent Cold Hot Water Closet – Flush Tank 4” 2” 1/2” -- Lavatory 2” 1.25” 1/2” 1/2” Drinking Fountain 2” 1.25” 1/2” -- Janitor Basin 3” 1.5” 1/2” 1/2” Sink 2” 1.5” 1/2” 1/2”

15B-6 ADJUSTMENT AND BALANCING: a) Adjust flush valves to minimum volume and balance flow in hot water returns as required to maintain proper water temperature in all branches circulated.

15B-7 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS, ROOF DRAINS, ETC.: a) Floor Drains: Block out floor prior to pouring of concrete and then level floor drain after pour is set, remove forms, and grout level:

1. Type “A” floor drain shall be J.R. Smith Model 2010-A.

2. All Floor Drains in finished areas shall have chrome plated strainers.

3. Provide each drain that does not have an integral “P” trap with a cast iron “P” trap in connecting piping.

4. See Architectural plans for floor drain top elevations and floor drainage.

5. Floor drains shall be as manufactured by Wade, Josam, Watts, Zurn or Sioux Chief. b) Floor Sinks: Block out floor prior to pouring of concrete and then level floor sink after pour is set, remove forms and grout hole level.

1. Floor sink Type "A" shall be Sioux Chief model 861-#PW3 (the “#” in the model number represents the floor sink size called out on the plans) with 8.75-inch deep square PVC body with PVC socket outlet, anchor flange, stainless steel mesh debris screen, 12-inch by 12-inch square 3/4 top PVC grate strainer. See Architectural plans for floor sink top elevations and floor drainage.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

2. Floor sink Type "B" shall be Sioux Chief model 842-#PI (the “#” in the model number represents the floor sink size called out on the plans) with round PVC body with PVC socket outlet, anchor flange, stainless steel mesh debris screen, PVC top grate strainer. Provide with model 863-FN top funnel and screws. See Architectural plans for floor sink top elevations and floor drainage.

3. Floor sinks shall be as manufactured by Sioux Chief, Wade, Josam, Watts, or Zurn. c) Trench Drains: Block out floor prior to concrete pour and then level trench drain after pour is set, remove and grout hole level.

1. Trench drain Type “”A” shall be Hubbell Polycast 600 Series, with nominal clear opening of 4” with overall width of 6.25”. Pre-cast units shall be manufactured with an invert slope of 0.6% and have a wall thickness of at least 0.50”. Each unit shall feature a full radius in the trench bottom and male to female interconnecting end profile. Units shall have horizontal cast in anchoring features on the outside wall to ensure maximum mechanical bond to the surrounding bedding material and pavement surface.

2. Provide unit in length as specified on drawings.

3. Provide unit with end closing cap and 4” inlet/outlet cap.

4. Provide unit with Class C grate, ADA compliant, stainless steel, with quick locking device.

5. Equivalent Trench drains shall be by engineer approval only. d) Trap Seal Primers – Pressure Drop Type:

1. MIFAB Model M2-500 pressure drop activated brass trap seal primer, with inlet opening of 1/2-inch (13) male NPT and outlet opening of female 1/2-inch (13) NPT. Complete with four view holes and removable filter screen. Serves up to 3 floor drain traps and requires no adjustments and no air pre-charge.

15B-8 CLEANOUTS: a) Provide cleanouts full size of soil pipe up to and including 4-inch ID. Provide cleanouts at base of stacks, end of sewer main, and at elbows over 45 degrees and in any horizontal run of piping exceeding 100 feet at 50-foot intervals. Block out floor prior to pouring of concrete and then level cleanout after pour is set, remove forms, and grout level. Install cleanouts so they are accessible by extending them through walls, floors, and above or to outside of building, as required. Cleanouts shall be as follows:

1. Floor Type Hard Flooring Areas: J.R. Smith 4023 with round chrome plated scoriated cover.

2. Floor Type Carpet Areas: J.R. Smith 4023-Y with nickel bronze top and carpet marker.

3. Wall Type Finished Areas: J.R. Smith No. 4532 cast iron cleanout “T” with cleanout plug and stainless steel access cover.

4. Wall Type Unfinished Areas: J.R. Smith No. 4512 Cast iron cleanout “T” with countersunk plug.

5. Finish Grade Cleanout: J.R. Smith 4223 cast iron with extra duty cast iron top. b) Equivalent cleanouts by Wade, Watts, Zurn, Josam or Jonespec will be acceptable. c) Verify floor materials used from Architectural plans.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p3 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

15B-9 SHOCK ABSORBERS, HYDRANTS, HOSE BIBBS: a) Provide Josam Absorbotron shock absorbers, or approved equal, on all plumbing fixture batteries where shown on plans sized in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standards PDI WH201. Equivalent shock absorbers by Zurn, Wade, Sioux Chief, or J.R. Smith will be acceptable. b) Provide J.R. Smith Model 5060 “Hy-Duty” shock absorbers on each cold and hot water branch piping serving commercial washer/extractors. Equivalent shock absorbers by Zurn, Wade, Sioux Chief, or Josam will be acceptable. c) Wall Hydrants: Woodford No. 65 freeze proof with vacuum breaker equivalent by Prier, Wade, Zurn, or J.R. Smith will be acceptable. d) Hose Bibbs: Woodford Model 24P-3/4 or equal angle hose bibb with Midel Model 34HF vacuum breaker and loose tee handle.

15B-10 PLUMBING FIXTURES: a) Provide plumbing fixtures as shown on drawings as specified complete including piping and connections. China fixtures shall be of best grade vitreous ware, without pit holes or blemishes, and outlines shall be generally true. Architect reserves right to reject any piece which in his opinion is faulty. Fixtures fitting against walls shall have ground backs. Exposed piping and fitting shall be chrome plated. b) Set fixtures true and level with all necessary supports for fixtures installed before plastering is done. Nipples through wall to fixture connection shall be chrome plated brass. Contractor may use copper stub outs to stops under lavatories, provided deep escutcheons are used and no copper is visible in lieu of chrome nipples. c) Equivalent fixtures and accessories by the following manufacturers will be acceptable:

1. Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Kohler, Toto, Crane, or Zurn.

2. Toilet Seats: Church, Olsonite, Toto, Bemis, American Standard, Kohler or Beneke.

3. Fittings and Supports: Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn, or Wade.

4. Faucets: Sloan, Zurn, Toto, American Standard, Kohler, Delta, Chicago Faucets, or Moen.

5. Molded Fiberglass Sinks: Mustee. Equivalents by engineer approval only.

6. Traps, Supplies and Stops: Dearborn, Sanitary Dash or as specified under plumbing fixtures.

A. Supplies and Stops: Dearborn Figure No. 2407CW 1.5-inch compression inlet with angle compression stop and 0.375-inch OD risers in length required. Provide deep chrome plated brass escutcheons.

B. Traps for restroom lavatories and kitchen sinks: Dearborn No. FS510 (1.5-inch) and/or No. FS507 (1.25-inch) cast brass body with clean-out "P" trap. Provide deep chrome plated brass escutcheon with set screw.

C. Traps and tailpieces for all other fixtures: type DWV PVC “P” trap for sanitary waste and drainage systems; size of trap shall be as called out on plans.

7. See Schedule for fixture types to be installed under this section.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p4 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO b) Provide strainers for all sinks and lavatories. Strainers for bathroom lavatories and break room sinks shall be brass, chrome-plated steel, or stainless steel. Strainers for all other sinks and lavatories shall be white PVC equal to Dearborn Brass model 9WH or equal.

15B-11 WATER HEATER: a) Provide water heaters as specified below and as indicated on construction drawings. b) Water heaters shall meet ASHRAE 90A-1 980 and shall be ASME rated. c) Gas water heaters shall be AGA certified. d) Equivalent by National, Lochinvar, Bradford White, Ruud, Rheem, A.O. Smith, or State will be acceptable. e) Combustion air intake and flue exhaust pipe:

1. Install ASTM F-441 CPVC Schedule 40 piping with ASTM F-493 CPVC solvent joined fittings for combustion air intake piping and flue exhaust piping in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and UL listing. Maintain minimum clearances from combustibles specified in UL listing.

2. Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard concentric roof termination kit with pipe clamps and roof flashing.

3. Support piping at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight of the vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.

4. Assemble pipe and accessories as indicated for a complete installation. Provide manufacturer’s standard roof termination kit and terminate piping at a minimum of 24 inches above finished roof or distance required by the manufacturer or local codes.

5. Size combustion air intake and flue piping shall be dependent upon water heater size and shall be the responsibility of the contractor to size in accordance with the routing on the drawings and the manufacturer’s requirements.

15B-12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: a) Provide for Water Service, where indicated on plans, Watts Model 909 reduced-pressure, backflow preventer with strainer, drip cup, and ball valves (2 inches and smaller). Equal by Febco, Hershey, Ames, or Wilkins will be acceptable.

15B-13 IN-LINE PUMPS: a) Provide in-line pumps with capacities as shown on plans. Pumps shall be in-line type, close-coupled, single-stage design, for installation in vertical or horizontal position, and capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. b) Pump casing shall be of Class 30 cast iron or as specified. The impeller shall be of cast iron bronze, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft, and secure by a locking capscrew. c) The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring; suitable for continuous operation at 225 deg F. A bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal. d) Pumps shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. The pump case shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and will include vent and drain ports.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p5 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

e) Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be the size, voltage, and enclosure called for on the plans. It shall have heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load for which the pump is designed. f) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. g) Pumps shall be manufactured by ITT Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Peerless, Aurora or Taco.

15B-14 OPENINGS: a) This Contractor shall include the installation of all boxes and sleeves for openings required to install this work, excepting only structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings. Sleeves shall be installed for all pipes passing through structural slabs and walls. He shall set and verify the location of sleeves as shown on structural plans that pass through beams, only if so shown. b) Penetrations in walls for sheet metal ducts shall be sealed by the M/C by stuffing glass fiber into the cracks between the walls and floors, and the ducts. The exposed joints shall then be caulked on each side with non-hardening caulking such as “Tremco Acoustical Sealant.” This work applies to all walls in buildings.

15B-15 ACCESS PANELS: a) Access panels shall be provided wherever necessary to provide access to valves, traps, etc., located in concealed spaces. Each fire damper, automatic splitter damper, etc., shall have an access panel. Size shall be adequate for inspection and removal of equipment and none shall be less than 12-inch by 6-inch. b) Duct Access Doors: Doors shall be equivalent to CESCO Model HDD. Frame shall not be less than 22-gauge galvanized steel, with 24-gauge door panels. Doors shall have minimum 1-inch-thick insulation, PVC foam tape gaskets; zinc plated steel continuous type hinge and latches. Equivalent by American Warming and Ventilating, Cesco, Flexmaster, Greenheck, McGill Airflow, Milcor, Pottorff, Ward and Nailor will be acceptable. c) Wall and Ceiling Access Doors: Doors shall be equivalent to Milcor DW, concealed frame, access panels. Frame shall be 16-gauge steel with a 14-gauge door panel prime coated with electrostatic powder. Lock shall be a screwdriver operated unless a keyed lock is noted on plans. Equals by Acudor, Babcock-Davis, Cesco, Elmdor, Karp, MiFab and Nystrom. d) Fire Rated Wall/Ceiling Access Door: Doors shall be equivalent to Milcor UFR. Frame shall be 16- gauge galvanized bonderized steel and 20-gauge galvanized bonderized steel. Hinges shall be continuous, galvanized steel with stainless steel pin and a key operated latch. Provide automatic type door closure. Door shall have a UL rating to match rating of wall/ceiling rating. Equals by Acudor, Babcock-Davis, Cesco, Elmdor, Karp, MiFab and Nystrom.

15B-16 SHEET METAL WORK: a) Provide commercial G90 quality prime, bright spangled galvanized sheet steel on all ductwork. Sheet metal shall be manufactured in the United States of America. b) Construct ductwork as detailed on drawings and as detailed in the latest edition of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s Association (SMACNA) Duct Manual. Details shown on project plans shall indicate specific construction methods to be used on this project, and shall be used in lieu of any alternate methods shown in SMACNA Duct Manual.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p6 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO c) Construct and install ductwork to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Support and securely anchor ductwork and equipment from structural framing of building. Provide suitable intermediate metal framing where required between building structural framing. d) Each duct system shall be constructed for the specific duct pressure classifications shown on the contract documents or in equipment fan schedule listed as external total static pressure. If no pressure classification exists on the drawings, the following shall apply:

1. Low Velocity supply, return and exhaust: 2-inch SMACNA seal class B pressure class. e) Ductwork shall not contain internal liner. f) Construct ductwork system to conform to SMACNA Manual 15d H C Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. g) Where dimensions, sizes, and arrangements of elements of duct assembly and support systems are not provided herein, the Contractor shall select such to be suitable for the service. All methods and devices shall be subject to the review and approval from Engineer. h) Make ductwork transitions with sides sloped not to exceed a maximum of 20 degrees, 40 degrees included angle for diverging air flow and 30 degrees, 60 degrees included angle for converging air flow. Factory fabricated reduced fittings of ASME short flow nozzle design will be acceptable for round ductwork. i) Provide turning vanes in all rectangular ductwork elbows over 20 degrees unless otherwise noted. j) The Contractor shall follow the applications recommendations of the manufacturer of all hardware and accessory items and make selections of such consistent with the duct classification and services. k) Elbows for round ductwork shall be die formed though 8-inch diameter and 5 sections elbow 9 inches and above in diameter. l) Ducts shall be sealed in accordance with Table1-2 of SMACNA Manual 1 5d. The allowable air leakage shall be in compliance with SMACNA standards for each respective duct pressure class and duct seal class. m) All exposed round ductwork and fittings shall be double-wall, galvanized steel, spiral lock seam, with1- inch fiberglass insulation. Provide perforated inner liner instead of solid inner liner when noted on plans. Outer shell shall be “paint-grip” sheet metal. Provide double-wall round ductwork and fittings as manufactured by United McGill or approved equal. n) Low Velocity round ductwork shall be snap-lock type round ductwork with button-lock SMACNA RL-8 longitudinal seam. o) At Contractor’s option, ductwork may be joined with prefabricated galvanized “Ductmate” sections. The joint packing material and joint construction details using this method shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. p) All duct pressure classes shall be same as the external static pressure (ESP) of the equipment supplying the duct. The equipment ESP shall be the pressure class for the entire supply duct system.

15B-17 SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES: a) Specialties shall be factory fabricated items designed for low, medium, or high velocity systems as indicated on contract documents. Submit shop drawings on all specialties required with shop drawings of ductwork layout. Specialties shall be as follows:

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p7 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

1. Turning Vanes: Aero-Dyne or equal 26-gauge HEP high efficiency profile air foil vanes mounted 2.125 inches OC on 24-gauge runners. Equals by DuctMate and Duro Dyne.

2. Control Dampers and motorized dampers (Round – Velocities 4000 FPM and less): Provide Ruskin Model CDRS25 dampers suitable for use in temperatures from minus 50 deg F to 200 deg F. Damper shall be butterfly type consisting of circular blade mounted to axle. Frames shall be 20- gauge steel for dampers up to 24-inch diameter. Damper blades shall be two (2) layers, 14-gauge galvanized steel, and include a full-circumference neoprene seal. Leakage through damper in closed position shall not exceed 0.15 cfm per inch of blade circumference at a pressure differential of 4.0” W.G. Axle shall be 1/2-inch diameter plated steel with sleeve bearing pressed into frame. All parts not protected shall be given one coat of aluminum paint.

3. Control Dampers and motorized dampers (Rectangular – Velocities 1500 FPM and less): Provide Ruskin Model CD36 standard dampers suitable for use in temperatures from minus -25 deg F to 180 deg F. Frames shall be 5-inch by 1-inch x 16-gauge galvanized steel hat channel. Blades shall be roll formed, triple-V-groove 16-gauge galvanized steel, maximum of 6-inch wide. Axles shall be 1/2-inch plated steel hex. Bearings shall be molded synthetic and linkage concealed in frame. Maximum single section size shall be 48 inches wide and 72 inches high. Provide extended shaft with bracket and locking hand quadrant. When applications require more than one (1) damper section to fill opening, sections shall be interconnected by appropriate jack shafting. Blade edge seals shall be extruded dual durometer vinyl. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal, compression type. Leakage through damper in closed position shall not exceed 10 cfm per square foot of damper area at a pressure differential of 4.0” W.G.

4. Manual Volume Dampers (Round – Velocities 1500 FPM and less): Provide Ruskin Model MDRS25 dampers suitable for use in temperatures from minus 50 deg F to 250 deg F. Damper shall be butterfly type consisting of circular blade mounted to axle. Frames shall be 20-gauge steel. Damper blades shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel. Leakage through damper in closed position shall not exceed ratings published by Ruskin. Axle shall be 1/2-inch diameter plated steel with sleeve bearing pressed into frame. All parts not protected shall be given one coat of aluminum paint. Provide 2” extended stand-off bracket and locking hand quadrant.

5. Manual Volume Dampers (Rectangular – Velocities 1500 FPM and less): Provide Ruskin Model MD-15 standard dampers suitable for use in temperatures from minus 0 deg F to 240 deg F. Frames shall be 3-inch wide x 22-gauge or 5-inch by 1-inch x 18-gauge galvanized steel channel. Single blades shall be 22-gauge. Multiple blades shall be roll formed, triple-V-groove 18-gauge galvanized steel, maximum of 8-inch wide. Axles shall be 1/2-inch plated steel hex. Bearings shall be molded synthetic and linkage concealed in frame. Maximum single section size shall be 48 inches wide and 48 inches high. Provide 2” extended stand-off bracket and locking hand quadrant. When applications require more than one (1) damper section to fill opening, sections shall be interconnected by appropriate jack shafting.

6. Counterbalanced Backdraft Dampers: Unless backdraft dampers have been specified with a piece of equipment, provide Ruskin Model CBD2 counterbalanced backdraft dampers suitable for use in temperatures to 200 deg F and pressure differentials of 40-inch W.G. for 48-inch damper widths, 6-inch W.G. for 36-inch widths, 10-inch W.G. for 24-inch widths, and 16-inch W.G. for 12-inch widths. Damper frame shall be 0.125 wall thickness 6063T5 extruded aluminum with 12-gauge steel brace at each corner. Axles shall be 1/2-inch diameter plated steel supported by ball bearings pressed into frame. Counterbalance weights shall be adjustable and mounted outboard of frame. Finish shall be mill galvanized.

7. Flexible Connections: Ventfabrics Ventglas prefabricated flexible indoor connection of 3.25-inch- wide heat and fire resistant neoprene coated glass fabric complying with UL standard 214 with two (2) 3-inch-wide 24-gauge metal strips attached to each edge. Provide stainless steel strips on acid exhaust fans. Indoor connector fabric shall have a minimum tensile strength of 480 lbf/inch in the warp. Ventfabrics Ventlon prefabricated flexible outdoor connection of 3.25-inch-wide heat and UV resistant Hyphalon coated glass fabric complying with UL standard 214 with two (2) 3-inch- wide 24-gauge metal strips attached to each edge. Indoor connector fabric shall have a minimum

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p8 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

tensile strength of 530 lbf/inch in the warp and a weather-proof synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. Provide Ventfabrics Ventel glass fabric connection with stainless steel strips on acid exhaust fans. Duro-Dyne Corporation, Ductmate, Ward Industries or approved equal will be acceptable.

8. Access Doors: Provide access doors in ductwork for access to fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc., installed under this contract. Doors and frames shall be furnished in prime coat of gray rust inhibitive paint. Frames shall be seamless one-piece galvanized mild steel. The doors shall be outer and inner panels one-piece galvanized mild steel. The door insulation shall be a minimum of 1-inch-thick. Gasket shall be positive seal and fasteners progressive action cam locks type (zinc plated). Access doors shall be Nailor, Higgins, Milcor, CESCO, or equal.

9. Low-pressure, flexible duct for connection to diffusers shall be Flex Master Type 8M flexible duct in accordance with NFPA, BOA, NFPA 90B, and UL 181, Class I Air Duct. Duct shall be factory insulated with flexible fiberglass insulation with a minimum R-value of 5.0 at a mean temperature of 75 deg F. The insulation shall be covered with a reinforced aluminum pigmented vapor barrier jacket having a permeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A. Flexible duct shall be rated for a velocity of at least 4000 feet per minute and suitable for operating temperatures of at least 250 deg F. Internal working pressure rating shall be at least 6 inches W.C. positive and 4 inches W.C. negative. Equivalent flexible ducts by ATCO, McGill AirFlow, Ward Industries, or approved equal. Maximum flexible duct length of run shall be 5 feet unless shown otherwise. Connections shall be either stainless steel bands or nylon straps. Provide vertical flexible ductwork elbows at diffusers with external support: Thermaflex Flexflow Elbow or approved equivalent. Contractor shall submit acoustic performance factors for flexible duct. Performance factors shall be equivalent to the flexible duct specified.

10. Round take-off fittings without dampers from medium, high, and low pressure rectangular ductwork shall be made with Buckley BMD or equal bell mouth fittings. HET (High Efficiency Takeoffs), Buckley Model 3300-D or equal will be allowed, where rectangular duct depth noted on drawings is not 4 inches or greater than the round branch duct size. Tapered HET Ductmate Model HT or equal will be allowed, where rectangular duct depth noted on drawings is not 2” or greater than the round branch duct size. Round take-off fittings with dampers from medium, high, and low pressure rectangular ductwork shall be made with Buckley HD-BMD or equal bell mouth fittings. HET (High Efficiency Takeoffs), Buckley Model 3300-HD or equal will be allowed, where rectangular duct depth noted on drawings is not 4 inches or greater than the round branch duct size. Tapered HET Ductmate Model HT-D or equal will be allowed, where rectangular duct depth noted on drawings is not 2” or greater than the round branch duct size.All dampers shall be provided with extended stand-off bracket, locking handle, square damper bar, and a minimum of two U-bolts.

11. Fire Dampers (Wall/Floor): Provide at locations shown on plans, dynamic rated fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with UL 555. Each fire damper shall have a 1.5 hour fire protection rating, 212 deg F fusible links, and shall include a UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Damper manufacturer’s literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall include comprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA 500 and shall illustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers required at all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials, and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer’s instructions. Refer to plans for thin-line, out-of-wall, or grille access models are required. Equivalent manufacturers shall be CESCO, Prefco, Louvers & Dampers, Nailor, or Greenheck.

A. Low Velocity Round Dampers – Dampers for installation in round ducts shall be equal to area. Ruskin FDR25 dynamic rated to 2000 feet per minute velocity at 4.0” w.g. static pressure. At contractor’s option, a Ruskin DIBD2, rectangular damper with round transitions may be provided.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p9 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

B. Low Velocity Rectangular Dampers – Dampers for installation in low velocity rectangular ducts shall be equal to a Ruskin DIBD2 dynamic rated to 2000 feet per minute velocity at 4.0” w.g. static pressure with style B, folding type blade with 100 percent free area.

12. Ceiling Radiation Dampers: Provide at all ceiling penetrations in fire rated ceilings a UL listed fire resistance classified ceiling radiation damper. Fire dampers with 1.5 or 3 hour rating for walls or floors are not to be used in fire rated ceiling openings due to the fact they do not provide the necessary heat barrier. Dampers shall have passed UL test and be labeled such for use in any fire resisting floor or roof ceiling assembly with a restrained and/or unrestrained assembly rating of 3 hours or less. Dampers shall be supplied with 165 degree fusible links. Units installed in T-Bar ceilings or with openings larger than diffuser/grille neck size (flared out necks above ceiling) shall be complete with UL Classified thermal insulating blankets. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers published installation instructions and UL 555C. Dampers shall be Ruskin CFDR2 (Round) and CFD2 (Square/Rectangular) for installation in non-wood constructed ceilings and a Ruskin CFD7 (Square/Rectangular) for installation in wood constructed ceilings. Equivalent manufacturers shall be CESCO, Prefco, Louvers & Dampers, Nailor or Greenheck.

13. Louvers (Stationary): Provide American Warming and Ventilating Model LE-31, 6-inch deep weather louvers. Frame and blades shall be 0.081-inch thick 6063T5 alloy extruded aluminum. Blades shall be 35 deg drainable-type and spaced at 3.5-inch centers. Jambs shall be constructed with integral downspouts for carrying water from the blades to the louver sill. Screens shall be provided on the interior of the louver and shall consist of 1/2-inch mesh 0.063-inch diameter aluminum wire mounted in aluminum frame. Louvers shall pass 1000 FPM free area velocity with less than 0.15-inch water pressure drop and shall carry less than 0.1 oz/sf of water during a 15 minute period when tested in accordance with AMCA 500. Louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings. Louvers shall be Ruskin, Carnes, Louvers & Dampers, Cesco, Greenheck, Air Balance, Nailor, Prefco, Titus, United McGill and Vest Company or equal.

14. Dampers shall be Carnes, CESCO, Greenheck, Nailor, Prefco, Titus, United McGill, Louvers & Dampers Co., or equal.

15B-18 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS: a) Provide grilles, registers, and diffusers as shown on drawings and hereinafter specified. Set all units with rubber gaskets for air tight connection with mounting surface. Unless specified or noted otherwise, grilles and registers mounted on ducts shall have standard margins. See drawings for size and quantity. b) Install all registers with curve of louver away from line of sight to avoid seeing into space behind louver. c) Install all registers in masonry construction so that bottom of register starts with masonry construction joint. Support all grilles, registers, and diffusers from Tee bars or structure so as not to stress ceiling tile. Provide proper mounting supplied and arrangements for areas shown. Check Architectural drawings for ceiling and wall construction. d) All grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be submitted with the following information for Engineers approval prior to installation. Any submittal found delinquent of requested information shall be returned for re-submittal:

1. Airflow.

2. Static Pressure Drop (maximum of 0.08-inch allowed).

3. Noise Criteria Rating (maximum of 30 NC allowed).

4. Throw – 150 FPM, 100 FPM, and 50 FPM.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p10 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO e) All dimensions indicated on drawings for diffuser neck sizes, face sizes, etc., are generic in nature and should be verified with equipment manufacturer prior to bid letting. Contractor shall be held responsible for compliance with specification. Should a change be required to remain in compliance with specifications, all costs incurred shall be paid by M/C. f) All registers and grilles shall have angled blades. g) Equivalent by Titus, Kruger, Anemostat, Carnes, Price, Nailor, or Tuttle & Bailey will be acceptable. h) See grille, register, and diffuser schedule.

15B-19 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM EVAPORATORS AND CONDENSING UNITS: a) Provide evaporators, and condensing units as specified below and indicated on construction drawings. All equipment shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. b) Cooling coils and condensing units shall have matched ratings as indicated in schedules. c) M/C shall provide all refrigerant lines and accessories to allow for complete operating system. d) Minimum SEER shall be 13.0 as rated under standard AHRI conditions. e) Equivalent manufacturers for ductless systems are Mitsubishi, LG, Daikin, EMI, and Sanyo.

15B-20 REFRIGERANT LINES: a) Contractor shall provide all refrigerant lines. Sizing and installation of refrigerant lines shall be as recommended by E/M. All accessories required due to excessive lengths or heights shall be provided by M/C. Contractor shall submit refrigerant line sizing calculations and routing drawings/risers with equipment shop drawings. b) All refrigerant lines shall either by Type ACR copper or pre-charged lines. Pre-charged lines shall be supplied by Equipment manufacturer. c) All refrigerant lines shall be tested. Contractor shall evacuate piping system with vacuum pump, charge with refrigerant to a pressure of 10 psig, and then admit dry nitrogen until the pressure is 150 psig. Final pressure shall be left on system for a minimum of four (4) hours. After system is found to be leak free, double evacuate system the final evacuation on system a minimum of 12 hours prior to charging. Pre-charged lines need not be tested except where leaks are suspected.

15B-21 EXHAUST FANS: a) Provide exhaust fans as indicated on drawings and schedule. b) Provide accessories as indicated on schedule. c) Supply and return fans shall have 1.5 times the number of belts required for normal service with a minimum of 2 belts provided. d) All fans shall be AMCA certified for air and sound ratings. e) Equivalents by Carnes, Acme, Greenheck, Jenn Industries, Loren Cook, Twin City Fan & Blower, or Penn Ventilation. f) See exhaust fan schedule.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p11 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

15B-22 ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS: a) General: Units shall meet all capacities based on conditions scheduled. Include all noted accessories on plans and with the specification. Refer to schedules on drawings for additional requirements and accessories that are not listed in this specification. b) Quality Assurance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 23, “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.”

2. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

3. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this section that are listed and labeled:

A. The rooftop unit(s) shall be certified in accordance with UL 1995 and ANSI Z21.47.

B. The rooftop unit(s) shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory and the nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency. c) Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, one (1) year unit, five (5) year compressors, five (5) year heat exchanger, provided manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. Warranty period shall start at the date of substantial completion of the project. d) Controls:

1. All units shall be provided with a microprocessor based controller to control all functions of the unit. Additional controls shall be required if necessary as specified below or as scheduled on the drawings. Coordinate all requirements for interface with controls contractor as applicable. e) Rooftop Unit Curbs:

1. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel, be insulated, and a minimum of 14” high unless noted otherwise. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support, and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting on the rooftop unit. f) Rooftop Units:

1. Description:

A. Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressor, condenser, evaporator coil, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, gas heater, filters, and dampers.

2. Construction:

A. Unit shall be provided from the manufacturer with the supply and return air opening for connections as required on plans.

B. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weatherproof cabinet.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p12 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

C. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be constructed with G90 galvanized steel with the exterior construction 20-gauge or heavier painted:

D. The unit shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2-inch-thick, 1 pound density insulation.

E. Access to filters, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn latches. Door fastening screws are not acceptable.

F. Access doors shall have full perimeter gasketing.

G. The unit shall be furnished with a stainless steel or PVC drain pan, sloped to drain connection.

3. Supply Fan:

A. Blower shall be self contained for service and removal from cabinet.

B. Blower and motor shall be dynamically balanced.

C. The motor shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection.

D. Belt drives as provided shall be adjustable with orating of 140 percent of motor nameplate.

4. Condenser Coil:

A. The air cooled condenser coil shall be fabricated of copper tubes with aluminum fins. Hail guards shall be provided for all these units,

5. Filters: See Division 23 for filter requirements.

6. Refrigeration System:

A. Compressor shall be provided with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators.

B. System shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls.

C. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low pressure sides of the system.

D. Units shall be provided with Type 410A or 407 refrigerants.

E. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers as required.

F. Refrigeration system shall incorporate dehumidification capabilities using hot gas reheat to control humidity levels in the space as sensed by space humidistat.

7. Gas Heat Section:

A. Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel and with a minimum one stage of heat capacity with minimum of 80 percent efficiency.

B. Unit shall be provided with a gas heating furnace consisting of a heat exchanger, an induced draft blower, and an electric pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion air flow is established.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p13 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

C. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required.

8. Power Requirement:

A. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired internal disconnect switch with an access handle on the exterior of the cabinet. Provide convenience receptacle that retains power when disconnect to unit is switched off.

9. Provide economizer as scheduled. Outside air economizer shall be fully modulating economizer providing differential enthalpy control for free cooling. The outside air damper and return air damper assembly shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, blades with rubber edge seals, and aluminum end seals. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure.

10. Provide staged or modulating hot gas reheat coil for dehumidification. Provide hot gas reheat coil integral with unit. Bypass coils are NOT acceptable. Provide wall-mounted humidity sensor to control dehumidification sequence.

11. Equivalent units by Aaon, Lennox, Trane.

15B-23 THERMOSTATS, CONTROLS, AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION a) Provide new thermostat for rooftop units and/or sensor as necessary with controller to provide all functions as listed below. Temperature control shall be a programmable, electronic thermostat with the following functions and features:

1. Multi-stage heating/cooling with automatic or manual changeover.

2. Minimum seven (7) day, 5-1-1 programming capability.

3. Night heating setback/cooling setup.

4. Digital display of temperature in deg F or deg C.

5. Selection for heat-off-cool-auto.

6. Selection for fan auto-on.

7. Visual indicators of system on, heat, cool, fan failure, and dirty filters.

8. Temperature set-point adjustment with the capability to prevent unauthorized tampering.

9. Temporary occupancy override button, programmable up to a minimum of 120 minutes.

10. Utilize non-volatile memory to maintain programmed operating parameters in the event of a power loss without the use of battery backup. b) The electronic thermostat shall perform the following sequence of operation.

1. The supply fan shall run continuously during occupied and during morning warm-up/cooldown periods. During unoccupied periods, the fan shall cycle on as required in conjunction with the appropriate heating or cooling device. Switchover shall be automatic.

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p14 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

2. Units shall have a scheduled occupied mode from 6:00 am to 7:00 pm Monday through Saturday (adjustable) unless otherwise specified on plans. c) Install thermostats in single gang box in walls shown at 60” A.F.F. Provide conduit for wiring and route wiring in conduit from thermostat to unit. Provide lockable clear polycarbonate thermostat cover on each thermostat. d) Equivalent manufacturers for thermostats are Trane, Carrier, Honeywell, Lennox, White-Rodgers, York.

15B-24 ELECTRIC CABINET UNIT HEATERS a) Electric Cabinet Unit Heaters shall include 18 gage galvanized steel chasis, electric heating coil, fan wheel, fan casing, and a removable fan board assembly with quick-connect motor plug. The unit shall come equipped with single point power connection. Unit shall be provided with transformer to provide lower voltage power to the control systems. b) Unit shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with closed cell insulation. c) Fan wheels shall be centrifugal forward curve style fans made of aluminum construction. Fan wheel and housing shall be corrosion resistant. d) Electric heating coil shall be Nichrome heating elements with an open wire design. Electric heating coil shall be UL listed and shall be interlocked with the fan motor switch so that electric heat operation is only possible when the fan is running. Unit shall be provided with magnetic contactors. Unit shall be provided with high temperature cut-out with automatic reset to de-energize the electric heater in the event of an overheat condition. e) Units shall be wired for voltage, phase, and number of stages scheduled. f) Unit shall be provided with integral electrical disconnect switch. Built-in disconnect switch shall be snap action, industrial type, door interlocked to prevent opening of terminal box when switch is on. g) Unit shall be provided with filter rack to hold 1” pleated media throwaway filters equal to Farr 30/30. h) Electric cabinet unit heaters shall be by Trane or approved equal.

15B-25 TESTING AND BALANCING PREPARATION: a) The M/C shall prepare the system for test and balance as follows:

1. Install, start-up, check out, and adjust all HVAC systems per drawings and specifications and have fully operational with all deficiencies corrected on or before Owner’s substantial completion date.

2. Verify that M/C has installed new filters no more than one day prior to starting test and balance procedure.

3. Verify that all ductwork is clean and sealed tight against leaks.

4. Verify that all controls, dampers, and actuators are installed, adjusted, and calibrated.

5. Secure control dampers after test and balance. b) The following checks shall be performed on each system installed under this contract:

1. Air Handling Systems:

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p15 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

A. Clear system of all foreign objects and clean system.

B. Verify fan rotation.

C. Check bearing condition and lubrication.

D. Check fan wheel clearances and fan alignment.

E. Check motor security to mounting base.

F. Check alignment of drive.

G. Check vibration isolator adjustment.

H. Verify that proper filter media is installed.

I. Verify that all control dampers are installed and operable without binding or sticking.

J. Confirm that all fire, smoke, and volume dampers are installed and in full open position.

K. Verify that all air re-heat coils and fan coil units are installed.

L. Confirm that all air openings in walls above ceilings have been provided.

M. Check for and repair all excessive air leaks in duct systems, at equipment connections and at coils. Air leaks shall not exceed SMACNA parameters for system pressure.

N. Verify that all ductwork is constructed and installed in accordance with contract drawings and/or approved ductwork shop drawings. c) The M/C shall make changes in pulleys, belts, dampers, etc., as required by the balance contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. d) The M/C shall install new filters in the air handlers and clean all strainers in the water system just prior to the beginning of the test and balancing. e) The control manufacturer, or his representative, shall assist the balance contractor in setting automatic dampers, valves, etc., as required:

1. Bring all fans to design RPM.

2. Bring air volume in each air handling system to the design air volume using Pitot tube transverse method within a minimum of 16 traverse points.

3. Test and record fan motor data.

4. Test and record static pressure and air volume in high velocity duct extremities.

5. Bring air diffusers and registers to design CFM.

6. Make recommendations for system modifications and adjustments required to facilitate proper system balancing as determined by preceding test.

7. Retest and readjust all system segments affected by system modifications.

8. Adjust return air flows where dampers are provided.

15B-26 AIR TESTING AND BALANCING:

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p16 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

a) A third party (independent) test and balance agency shall perform final test and balance of the HVAC systems. Include in bid, the contract for a third party test and balance agency. b) All air supply, return and exhaust systems, and domestic hot water systems shall be balanced and adjusted to meet capacity and condition shown in construction documents. This work shall be performed by an independent testing and balancing agency certified by AABC or NEBB. c) M/C shall submit name of testing and balancing agency to A/E for approval prior to bid performance of work. d) Balancing shall be performed and report in accordance with latest specification for testing and balancing for air systems and hot water systems, as it pertains to systems installed on this project. e) Balancing and test reports shall be submitted on standard AABC or NEBB forms. f) Make all adjustments to RTU fans, motors, sheaves, etc. in order to meet required flow rates as listed on the drawings. Contact unit manufacturer if necessary to get instructions on how fan speed can be changed, to get new sheaves if required, and to inquire about any other adjustments as necessary to meet the requirements and intent of this project.

15B-27 NATURAL GAS SERVICE: a) Gas service piping main to the building is existing This contractor is responsible for the installation of a new utility meter, all valves, piping from main utility service, etc. shown on the drawings.

15B-28 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE: a) Water service piping main shall be provided to the building by this contractor. This contractor is responsible for the installation of all valves, backflow preventers, piping, etc. shown on the drawings on the building side of the point of connection to the water service piping. This contractor shall coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor for location of dual service water line coming into building.

END OF SECTION 15B

PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15B p17 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION 15A – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

15A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: a) All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda, and modifications preceding this Specification Division are applicable to Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors and material suppliers.

15A-2 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS: a) These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as “the Contractor shall,” “shall be,” “as noted on the drawings,” “according to the drawings,” “a,” “an,” “the,” and “all” are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. b) When a word such as “proper,” “satisfactory,” “equivalent,” and “as directed” is used, it requires Engineer’s review. c) “Provide” means furnish and install. d) “Working Day” wherever used in these Specifications, shall mean the normal working days Monday through Friday, exclusive of Saturday, Sunday, and federally observed holidays. e) Architect/Engineer hereinafter abbreviated A/E shall mean both the Design Architects and the Design Engineers. f) Design Engineer hereinafter abbreviated D/E shall mean the engineering firm, MALONE FINKLE ECKHARDT & COLLINS, INC., 8700 Indian Creek Parkway, Suite 180, Overland Park, KS 66210, Telephone (913) 322-1400. Contact Person: Brian Clark g) General Contractor hereinafter abbreviated G/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the Owner to perform the general division work. h) Electrical Contractor hereinafter abbreviated E/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the G/C to perform the electrical division work. i) Mechanical Contractor hereinafter abbreviated M/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the G/C to perform the mechanical division work. j) Equipment and/or materials manufacturer hereinafter abbreviated E/M shall mean the manufacturer of equipment or materials specified or referred to.

15A-3 GENERAL EXTENT OF WORK: a) Provide mechanical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and accessory for proper operation and completion of mechanical systems. In no case will claims for “Extra Work” be allowed for work about which M/C could have informed himself before bids were taken. b) M/C shall familiarize himself with equipment provided by other contractors, which require mechanical connections and controls.

15A-4 LOCAL CONDITIONS: a) Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO b) Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered a basis for granting additional compensation.

15A-5 CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, AND REGULATIONS: a) Provide work in accordance with applicable codes, rules, ordinances, and regulations of Local, State, and Federal Governments and other Authorities Having lawful Jurisdiction (AHJ). b) Conform to latest editions and supplements of the following codes, standards, or recommended practices as adopted by the AHJ.

1. CITY CODES:

A. 2006 International Building Code B. 2006 International Mechanical Code C. 2006 International Plumbing Code D. 2006 International Fire Code E. 2006 International Fuel Code F. 2005 National Electric Code

2. SAFETY CODES:

A. National Electric Safety Code Handbook H30 – National Bureau of Standards. B. Occupational Safety and Health Standards – Department of Labor. C. Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To, and Usable By, the Physically Handicapped – American Standards Institute ANSI A117.1.

3. NATIONAL FIRE CODES:

A. NFPA 54 Gas Appliance and Gas Piping Code. B. NFPA 70 National Electric Code – 2005 Edition. C. NFPA 89M Clearances, Heat Producing Appliances. D. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. E. NFPA 91 Blower and Exhaust Systems. F. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – Current Edition c) Where following standards are applicable to equipment specified, equipment shall conform to requirements of standard and shall display the appropriate seal or seals:

1. AGA – The American Gas Association Laboratories. 2. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 3. NSF – National Sanitation Foundation. 4. UL – Underwriters Laboratories Inc. d) Drawings and Specifications indicate minimum construction standards, but should any work indicated be sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules, or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall execute work in accordance with such ordinances, laws, codes, rules, or regulations without increased cost to Owner, but not until he has referred such variances to A/E for approval. e) M/C shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by governmental ordinances, laws, rules, or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection certificates and submit two (2) copies to A/E with request for final inspection.

15A-6 CONTRACT CHANGE: a) Changes or deviations from contract; including those for extra or additional work must be submitted in writing for review of A/E. No verbal orders will be recognized.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO b) Changes in the work shall be submitted in accordance with AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. c) All change proposals shall be itemized indicating separately the costs for materials, labor, restocking charges, freight, bonds, insurance, overhead, and profit. All materials shall be listed separately with quantities and individual unit prices. Labor factors shall be from a nationally recognized source with appropriate adjustment factors. If proposals are not itemized, they will be rejected and returned for proper submittal. d) The maximum allowable profit for any change order shall be ten percent (10%). e) See Example below:

PRICING SHEET Project: DaVita Clinton Date: Oct. 1, 2013 Location: Clinton, MO Estimator: Jane Doe Labor Rate: $22.00 Unit Material Man Total Material Measure Per Unit Hours Man Hours Total Material Units Per Unit 6” tee 1 ea. $45.00 2.000 2.0 $ 45.00 Less 6” ell 1 ea. $30.00 0.000 0.0 $ 30.00 6” sch 40 pipe 15 ft. $10.43 0.253 3.8 $ 56.46 6” cap 1 ea. $11.00 1.500 1.5 $ 11.00 6” hanger 1 ea. $12.00 0.400 0.4 $ 12.00 4” saddle weld 1 ea. $0.00 1.200 1.2 $ 0.00 4” sch 40 18 ft. $4.44 0.183 3.3 $ 79.92 4” ell 3 ea. $13.39 2.000 6.0 $ 40.17 4” hanger 3 ea. $8.00 0.300 0.9 $ 24.00 4” weld 1 ea. $3.00 1.000 1.0 $ 3.00 1.5” cond sch 80 21 ft. $1.63 0.080 1.7 $ 34.23 1.5” ell 3 ea. $4.00 0.400 1.2 $ 12.00 1.5” tee 1 ea. $5.00 0.600 0.6 $ 5.00 1.5” weld 1 ea. $3.00 0.400 0.4 $ 3.00 0.75” F & T trap 1 ea. $73.00 0.500 0.5 $ 73.00 0.75” strainer 1 ea. $12.00 0.500 0.5 $ 12.00 0.75” XH nipples 4 ea. $7.70 0.100 0.4 $ 30.80 0.75” unions 2 ea. $3.18 0.300 0.6 $ 6.36 0.75” cap 1 ea. $0.65 0.100 0.1 $ 0.65 0.75” pipe sch 80 10 ft. $0.72 0.400 0.4 $ 7.20 0.75” tee 1 ea. $1.50 0.300 0.3 $ 1.50 0.75” ell 3 ea. $0.95 0.200 0.6 $ 2.85 0.75” hanger 2 ea. $2.50 0.200 0.4 $ 5.00

SUBTOTAL 28.74 $618.47 SALES TAX 6.125% $37.88 LABOR 28.4 MH $22.00 $624.80 5% OVERHEAD $64.06 8% PROFIT $107.62 TOTAL $1,452.83

15A-7 LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES: a) Locations of equipment, piping, and other mechanical work are indicated diagrammatically by mechanical drawings. Determine exact locations on job, subject to structural conditions, work of other contractors, access requirements for installation and maintenance, and to approval of A/E.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p3 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO b) Study and become familiar with contract drawings of other trades and in particular the general construction plans and details to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workmen and install work to avoid interference with their work. Minor deviations not affecting design characteristics, performance, or space limitations may be permitted if reviewed by A/E prior to installation. c) Any pipe, apparatus, appliance, or other item interfering with proper placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required shall be removed and if so shown, relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other work caused by the Contractor, his subcontractor, or his workmen shall be restored as specified for new work. d) Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay out work from dimensions indicated on architectural drawings unless such is found in error.

15A-8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE: a) Final acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus, and appliances operate satisfactorily as designed and intended; work shall include required adjustment of systems and control equipment and all required programming installed under this Specification.

15A-9 WARRANTY: a) M/C warrants to Owner and Architect the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship, and operation of equipment provided under this Specification Division for a period of one (1) year from and after date of substantial completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner. b) Where manufacturers’ warranties expire during the one (1) year warranty period, one (1) year warranty period is defined as year after date of substantial completion. M/C shall include provisions for extending warranty for the full one (1) year period and shall cost for warranty extension in his base bid. c) M/C warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of written notice from either of them within one (1) year warranty period following date of acceptance, all defects that have appeared in materials and/or workmanship shall be promptly corrected to condition required by contract documents at M/C’s expense. d) The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements by law or by these Specifications. e) If the Architect’s specification includes a warranty that exceeds the above warranty requirements, the Architect’s warranty shall take precedence.

15A-10 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND SUBSTITUTIONS: a) The intent of these Specifications is to allow ample opportunity for M/C to use his ingenuity and abilities to perform the work to his and the Owner’s best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required. b) Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused, and without damage. c) In general, these Specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming first the manufacturer whose product was used as the basis for the project design and Specifications. The manufacturer’s product, series, model, catalog, and/or identification numbers shall set quality and capacity requirements for comparing the equivalency of other manufacturer’s products. Where other manufacturer’s names are listed, they are considered an approved manufacturer for the product specified; however, the listing of their names implies no prior approval of any product they may propose to furnish as equivalent to the first named product unless specific model or catalog numbers

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p4 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

are listed in these Specifications or in subsequent addenda. Where other than first named products are used for M/C’s base bid proposal, it shall be his responsibility to determine prior to bid time that his proposed materials and equipment selections are products of approved manufacturers, that will meet or exceed the Specifications and are acceptable to the D/E. d) Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to A/E for review prior to procurement. e) PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF BIDS, IF M/C WISHES TO INCORPORATE PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THOSE NAMED IN SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS IN HIS BASE BID, HE SHALL SUBMIT A WRITTEN REQUEST FOR REVIEW OF SUBSTITUTIONS TO D/E NOT LESS THAN SEVEN (7) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO BID TIME. D/E WILL REVIEW REQUESTS AND ACCEPTABLE ITEMS WILL BE LISTED IN AN ADDENDUM ISSUED TO PRINCIPAL BIDDERS. f) Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by A/E, whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance. Requests must be accompanied by two (2) copies of complete descriptive and technical data including E/M’s name, model, and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and any other information needed for comparison. g) In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such proposal cost of altering other elements of project, including adjustments in mechanical/electrical service requirements necessary to accommodate such substitution; whether such affected elements are under this contract or under separate contracts. h) Within seven (7) working days after bids are received, apparent lower bidder shall submit to A/E for approval three (3) copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 30 working days after award of contract, M/C shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work, for A/E review. Where 30 day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, M/C shall submit manufacturer’s descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer’s certification that order was placed within 30 working day limit. i) After execution of contract, substitution of product brands for those named in Specifications will be considered, only if; 1) request is received within 30 days after contract date and request includes statement showing credit due Owner, if any, if substitution products are used, or 2) Owner requests consideration be given to substitute brands.

15A-11 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION: a) Unless noted differently in the general requirements of the specifications, M/C shall furnish a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment, Engineer will retain one (1) set. b) Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment, capacities, controls, fittings, sizes, etc. that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these Specifications, or plan sheet number, when item does not appear in Specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base Specifications of specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order numbers, or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two (2) sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear E/M’s name and address. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal. c) M/C shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawing requirements before forwarding submittals to the A/E for their review. All shop drawings submitted to A/E shall bear

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p5 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

M/C approval stamp which shall indicate that M/C has reviewed submittals and that they meet Specification and/or drawing requirements. M/C’s submittal review shall specifically check for, but not limited to, the following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to space allowed; electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, return, and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting M/C’s approval shall be returned to his supplier for re-submittal. d) No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the A/E without M/C’s approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of Contractor’s review. All comments or minor notations on shop drawings shall be flagged as follows to indicate originator of comment or notation: 1 Contractor, 2 Construction Manager, 3 Architect, and 4 Engineer. e) A/E will not be responsible for the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that are submitted to them without M/C’s review and approval stamp. A letter will be sent to M/C by either the Architect or Engineer indicating receipt of an improper submittal. M//C shall acknowledge receipt of letter and indicate his plans for pick-up or resubmitting. A/E will hold improper submittals for pick-up by M/C or supplier for 15 working days after date of receipt. If not picked up by the 16th working day, submittals will be disposed of by A/E. f) A/E’s review of shop drawings will not relieve M/C of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing to Owner or his representative, nor shall it relieve M/C of responsibility for errors in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until A/E’s review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be M/C’s responsibility. g) Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1. Submit with shop drawings of equipment: copies of installation, operating, maintenance instructions, and parts list for equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by E/M.

2. Keep in safe place keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to Owner and obtain a receipt for same upon completion of project.

3. Contractor shall provide all final documents including drawings, shop drawings, etc. in PDF format on a single disk to Owner. A total of five (5) CD’s shall be provided, three (3) to the Owner and two (2) to A/E. No exceptions will be allowed to this requirement. Videotaping, as specified in other parts of this Specification, will also be required at closeout.

15A-12 CUTTING AND PATCHING: a) M/C shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein specified. Cut no structural members without Architect’s approval and in a manner approved by him. b) Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect. c) Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect’s review and approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Do not use star drill or air hammer for this work.

15A-13 MUTILATION: a) Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of mechanical equipment, fixtures, piping, and other mechanical devices shall be repaired at M/C’s expense to approval of Architect.

15A-14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL a) Perform necessary excavating to receive work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins, etc. as required and remove same at completion of work. Perform excavation in

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p6 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

accordance with appropriate section of these Specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards. b) Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and a minimum of 6”, and no deeper than necessary, for installation work. c) Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured. Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footings with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction required by A/E. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and paving in 6-inch layers to 95 percent standard density. d) Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance made for settlement. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moisten as required for specified compaction density. Dispose of excess earth, rubble, and debris as directed by Architect. e) When available, refer to test-hole information on Architectural drawings or specifications for types of soil to be encountered in excavation in base bid.

15A-15 SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: a) Work shall include mounting, alignment, and adjustment of systems and equipment. b) Set equipment level on adequate foundations and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown, specified, or required by E/M’s installation instructions. c) Provide concrete bases for all floor and slab mounted equipment. Refer to drawings for require base type and size. Provide 3.5-inch high base where base is not shown on drawings.

15A-16 START-UP, CHANGE-OVER, TRAINING, AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS: a) M/C shall perform initial start-up of systems and equipment and shall provide necessary supervision and labor to make first seasonal changeover of systems. Personnel qualified to start-up and service this equipment, including E/M‘s technicians, when specified, and Owner’s operating personnel shall be present during these operations.

15A-17 OWNER’S FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW: a) All necessary system adjustments including air and water systems balancing shall be completed and all specified records and reports submitted in sufficient time to be received by A/E at least ten (10) working days prior to date of final construction review. b) At final construction review, M/C and his major subcontractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by A/E, that his work complies with purpose and intent of plans and Specifications. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments, or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.

15A-18 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: a) Equipment and materials exposed to interior dry environment shall have a minimum of one (1) primer and one (1) finish coat. Equipment and materials mounted in exterior location shall have a minimum of one (1) primer and two (2) finish coats with total thickness of at least 5 mils. Finish coat colors in finish areas shall be as selected by A/E. b) After installation, damage to painted surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed with primers equal to factory materials. Finish coating shall be same color and type as factory finish. c) Where extensive refinishing of factory applied finishes are required, equipment shall be completely repainted. A/E will make final determination of extent of refinishing required.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p7 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO d) Paint all exterior natural gas piping with one (1) primer coat and two (2) finish coats.

15A-19 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS: a) M/C shall be responsible for operation, maintenance, and lubrication of equipment installed under his contract. b) M/C shall provide a contract for the maintenance of mechanical systems for a minimum period of one year from the date facility occupancy is obtained.

15A-20 FILTERS: a) Provide temporary throw-away filters in all permanent heating and air conditioning equipment systems being utilized during construction. Prior to testing and balancing systems, remove temporary filter media and install clean unused filters of the type specified. Clean filters shall be installed in equipment for final acceptance inspection by A/E. b) Unless shown or specified otherwise, provide Farr 30-30 filters. MERV 7 minimum filter efficiency.

15A-21 CLEANING OF SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT: a) After pressure testing of systems and equipment and before operational test, thoroughly clean interiors of ductwork and equipment. b) Clean equipment as recommended by manufacturers. Where specific instructions are not provided by equipment manufacturer, clean equipment systems as follows:

1. Air Handling System: Before starting any air system, clean all debris, foreign matter, and construction dirt from air system and fan. Provide equipment requiring filters, such as air handling units, fan coil units, blowers, etc. with throwaway filters specified under this Specification. After cleaning air system, install temporary filters and run continuously for eight (8) hours at full volume. Replace temporary filters with final filters immediately prior to testing and balancing.

15A-22 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM: a) After final pressure testing of distribution system, thoroughly flush entire system with water until free of dirt and construction debris. Fill system with solution of liquid chlorine or hypochlorite of not less than 50 ppm. Retain treated water in system until tests indicate non spore-forming bacteria have been destroyed or for 24 hours, whichever is greater. b) All points in system shall have at least 10 ppm of solution at end of retention period. Open and close each valve at least six (6) times in system during sterilization to sterilize valve parts. c) When time and concentration have been met, drain system and flush with fresh domestic water until residual cleaning solution is less than 1.0 ppm. Open and close each value in system six (6) times during flushing operation. d) Test samples taken from several points in system shall indicate absence of pollution for 48 hours. Repeat sterilization as required. Acceptance of system will not be given until satisfactory bacteriological results are obtained.

15A-23 PIPING IDENTIFICATION: a) Identify piping in mechanical rooms, above ceilings, open pipe chases, tunnels and other places where piping is accessible for operation and maintenance by painting with identification colors and with pressure sensitive pipe markers. b) Place piping markers so they can be easily read from operating position and floor.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p8 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

c) Mark piping with marker and a 3-inch-wide bank of identification color around circumference of pipe in lieu of painting complete pipe or pipe covering. d) Lettering on marker shall be at least 1-inch-high block type in contrasting color. An arrow indicating flow direction shall be painted next to each marker. Where markers occur on parallel groups of piping, they shall be neatly lined up. e) See Schedule.

15A-24 VALVE IDENTIFICATION: a) Mark all valves with Seaton No. 300-BL brass identification tags with system legend, valve number, and size stamped on tag. Lettering shall be black 0.5-inch high. Tags shall be 2-inch-diameter and attached to valve with Seaton No. 16 brass jack chain. Equals by Craftmark, Koby or MSI. b) Prepare four (4) copies of a type written list of valve tags. List shall be typed in upper case and contain tag number, valve size, type, function, and location. Frame one list under glass and mount near operating instructions in main equipment room.

15A-25 PIPE SLEEVES: a) Provide proper type and size pipe sleeves and install in walls or floors and where otherwise noted. Sleeves are not required for supply and waste piping through wall supporting plumbing fixtures or for cast iron soil pipe passing through concrete slab on grade except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. Sleeves shall not be provided in rated floors requiring fire seals. b) Each sleeve shall be continuous through wall, floor, or roof and shall be cut flush on each side except where indicated otherwise. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural member except where indicated or approved. Sleeves shall be required through floors subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, equipment rooms, and kitchens. The contractor shall have the option of:

1. Providing a cast iron sleeve with integral flanges extending 1-inch above finished floor. Sleeve shall be cast in concrete when floor is poured. Annular space between sleeve and pipe shall be filled with Kaowool.

or

2. Provide core-drilled opening in concrete with Thunderline Link-Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx between piping and opening. c) Sleeves passing through floors with waterproof membranes shall be core-drilled and sealed with Thunderline Link-Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx. d) Sleeves passing through walls with waterproof membranes shall be sealed with Thunderline Link- Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx. e) Pipe insulation shall run continuous through pipe sleeves with 0.25-inch minimum clearance between insulation and pipe sleeve. Provide metal jackets over insulated pipes passing through fire walls, floors, and smoke partitions. Jacket shall be 0.018 stainless steel extending 12 inches on either side of barrier and secured to insulation with 0.375-inch-wide band. Provide Kaowool fire master bulk packing between sleeve and metal jacket. Packing thickness shall be sized per manufacturer’s recommendation for maintaining the integrity of the fire wall/floor or smoke partition. Fire protection system shall be rated per ASTM E 119. Equivalents to Kaowool are 3M, Flame Stop, or Flame Safe. f) Where piping passes through walls serving as air plenums or chases, seal annular space between pipe and sleeve air tight with Kaowool Firemaster Bulk Packing.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p9 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

15A-26 WELDING: a) Contractor shall be responsible for quality of welding and suitability of welding procedures. All welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society AWS B3.0 and ANSI B31.1. b) Welding shall be done only be welders who have successfully passed welder qualification tests in previous 12 months for type of welding required. Each welder shall identify his work with a code marking before starting any welded pipe fabrication. Contract shall submit three (3) copies of a list of welders who will work on project listing welder’s code, date, and types of latest qualification tests passed by each welder. c) Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with Level AR3 of AWS D10.9 “Standard for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Pipe and Tubing.” Welders qualified under National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau will be acceptable. d) Bevel all piping and fittings in accordance with recognized standards by flame cutting or mechanical means. Align and position parts so that branches and fittings are set true. Make changes in direction of piping systems with factory made welding fittings. Make branch connections with welding tees or forged weldolets.

15A-27 PIPING MATERIALS AND FITTINGS: a) Piping used throughout project shall conform to the following specifications. Piping shall be plainly marked with manufacturer’s name and weight. All materials listed may not be required on this project. See piping material schedules, on drawings, for materials to be used for each piping system. Piping materials shall be as follows:

1. Carbon Steel Pipe (0.5 inches through 2.5 inches):

A. Provide continuous weld or electric resistance welded carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120 or A53, as scheduled.

B. Pipe joints shall be threaded conforming to ANSI B2.1, beveled for welding, or grooved for use with Victaulic couplings.

C. Pipe by Armco, Youngstown, United States Steel, or equal.

2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:

A. Provide Type 1, Grade 1 PVC pipe conforming to requirements of current ASTM D 1785 for pressure piping as scheduled. Pipe shall be approved by NSF for potable water.

B. Provide Type 1, Grade 1 PVC pipe conforming to requirements of current ASTM D 2665 for DWV piping as scheduled. Cellular core PVC piping will not be approved.

C. Piping for pressure piping shall have plain ends for socket type fittings.

D. Pipe by Chemtrol, Charlotte, Tyler, Pipelife, Cabot, or equal.

3. Copper Tube:

A. Provide hard temper copper water tube conforming to requirements of current ASTM B 88. Tubing shall be Type K, L, or M as listed in schedule.

B. Tubing joints shall be soldered or brazed. See schedule for joining method to be used.

C. Pipe by Cerro, Chase, Mueller, Revere Copper, or equal.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p10 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

4. Copper Tube Type ACR:

A. Provide hard temper nitrogenized copper refrigerant tube conforming to requirements of current ASTM B 88. Tube shall be Type L or K as listed in schedule.

B. Tubing joints shall be brazed or grooved joints shall be manufactured to copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring tubing ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not allowed.)

C. Pipe by Cerro, Mueller, or equal.

15A-28 PIPE FITTINGS: a) Pipe fittings used throughout project shall be proper type for installation method used and shall be compatible with piping system materials. Fittings listed in piping material schedule shall conform to the following specifications:

1. Carbon Steel Welding Fittings:

A. Provide carbon low alloy seamless steel welding fittings conforming to current ANSI B16.9 and ASTM A234.

B. Fittings by Grinnell, Midwest, or equal.

2. Branch Connection Welding Fittings:

A. Provide carbon steel weldolet fittings conforming to ANSI B16.9, B16.11, B31.1.0, and ASTM A105, Grade 11.

B. Fittings by Bonney Forge or equal.

3. Branch Connection Welding to Screwed Fitting:

A. Provide carbon steel threadolet fitting conforming to ANSI B16.9, B16.1.1, B31.1, and ASTM A105, Grade 11.

B. Fittings by Bonney Forge or equal.

4. Wrought Copper Fittings:

A. Provide wrought solder joint copper tube fitting conforming to ANSI B16.22.

B. Fittings by Chase, Nibco, or equal.

5. Cast Bronze Fittings:

A. Provide cast bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI B16.18.

B. Fittings by Chase, Nibco, or equal.

6. PVC, DWV Fittings:

A. Provide PVC, DWV socket fittings conforming to ASTM D 3311 and D 2661.

B. Solvent cement of socket fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2235.

C. Fittings by Chemtrol, Charlotte, Tyler, or equal.

7. PVC, Schedule 40 Pressure Fittings:

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p11 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

A. Provide NSF rated, Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings conforming to ASTM D 2466.

B. Solvent cement of socket fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2564.

C. Fittings by Tyler, Charlotte, or equal.

15A-29 INSULATING UNIONS AND FLANGES: a) Provide insulating unions and flanges conforming to following specifications and plainly and permanently marked with manufacturer’s name and pressure class rating. Unions and flanges shall be as follows:

1. Steel pipe to steel pipe screwed end:

A. Provide Stockham malleable iron No. 693-0.5 insulating union with high dielectric strength insulating sleeve and gasket.

2. Steel pipe to steel pipe flanged end:

A. Provide two (2) weld neck flanges of proper pressure rating insulated on both sides with Central or Klingerit Flange Insulation Kit.

3. Iron or steel pipe to copper pipe:

A. Provide Epco dielectric union or flange with screwed or solder joint as required. Union shall have 250 psi rating and flange 175 psi rating at 190 deg F. Equal by Capitol Manufacturing, Central Plastics and Watts Regulator.

B. Dielectric nipples shall not be used.

15A-30 STRAINERS: a) Install strainers upstream from automatic control valves, and pumps. Where strainers are an integral part of these items or incorporated in accessory equipment directly upstream, individual line strainers will not be required. Strainers shall be same size as piping. Provide strainers with proper isolation and blow down valves to allow basket removal for cleaning.

1. General: Provide Zurn “Y” Type with self-cleaning strainers with FIPT blow-off outlet, flanges or screwed end with pressure rating as required by piping system. Provide strainers with removable stainless steel or Monel screens with perforations as follows:

TYPE OF STRAINERS SIZE, INCHES SERVICE 0.25 to 2 2.5 to 6 8 to 24 Water 0.005 0.0625 0.125 b) Equivalent strainers by Armstrong, Metraflex, Trane, Nibco, Victaulic, Dunham Bush, Musseco, Paget, or Spirax Sarco.

15A-31 UNIONS: a) Provide unions or flanged joint in each line preceding connections to equipment or valves requiring maintenance. b) Provide Stockham brass seat unions of material and pressure rating required by piping system. c) Where piping systems of dissimilar materials are jointed together, provide proper insulating union as specified under this Specification.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p12 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

d) Equivalent by Metraflex, Grinnell, or equal.

15A-32 PIPING INSTALLATION: a) Piping systems materials and installation shall conform to the following standards and codes:

1. System: Plumbing System Piping Code: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials "Uniform Plumbing Code"

2. System: Refrigeration Piping. Code: ANSI B31.5 “Refrigeration Piping.”

3. System: Natural Gas Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.2 "Fuel Gas Piping" b) Pipe sizes indicated on plans and as specified refer to nominal size in inches for steel pipe, cast iron pipe, and copper tubing unless otherwise indicated. Pipes are sized to nearest half-inch. In no case shall piping smaller than size specified be used. c) Contractor shall provide and be responsible for proper location of pipe sleeves, hangers, supports, and inserts. Install hangers, supports, inserts, etc. as recommended by manufacturer and as specified and detailed on drawings. Verify construction types and provide proper hangers, inserts, and supports in accordance with manufacturer’s load ratings and provide for thermal expansion of piping without exceeding allowable stress on piping or supports. Provide solid type hangers and supports where pipe travel exceeds manufacturer’s recommendations for fixed hanger and supports. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for suspension of un-insulated copper tubing lines. d) Install all piping parallel with building lines and parallel with other piping to obtain a neat and orderly appearance of piping systems. All piping shall be concealed unless noted otherwise. Secure piping with approved anchors and provide guides where required to insure proper direction of piping expansion. Piping shall be installed so that allowable stress for piping, valves, and fittings used are not exceeded during normal operation or testing of piping system. e) Install piping so that systems can be completely drained. Provide piping systems with valved drain connections at all low points and ahead of all sectionalizing valves whether shown on plans or not. Drain lines shall be as follows:

PIPE SIZE DRAIN SIZE 0.75” THROUGH 2” 0.75” 2.5” thru 5” 1” f) Pitch all piping and where possible make connections from horizontal piping so that air can be properly vented from system. Provide air vents as specified at all system high points and at drops in piping in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers where necessary to avoid air pockets in horizontal piping. g) Provide piping materials and wall thickness for specific piping systems as listed in piping schedules in Section 15B. Steel piping systems 2.5 inches and under shall be threaded pipe fittings. Steel pipe systems 3 inches and above shall be welded end pipe and fittings unless required otherwise by Code. h) Where listed in piping schedules or noted on drawings, provide 2 inches and larger with Victaulic grooved couplings as specified. i) Provide unions or flanged joints in each pipe line preceding connections to equipment to allow removal for repair or replacement. Provide all screwed end valves with union adjacent to valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line. Provide unions on identical sizes of equipment for which one replacement item to be installed between unions without making any piping changes.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p13 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO j) Piping fitting materials for specific piping systems shall be as listed in piping schedule. Fittings shall be approved factory made type with threaded or weld ends as required. Fitting pressures and temperature ratings shall be equal to or exceed maximum operating temperature and working pressure of piping system. No mitered or field fabricated pipe fittings will be permitted. k) All pipe threads shall meet ANSI B2.1 for taper threads. Lubricate pipe threads with Astroseal Teflon thread sealant and lubricating compound applied full strength. Powdered or made up compound will not be permitted. Pipe thread compound shall be applied only to male pipe threads. l) Welded pipe joints shall be made by qualified welding procedures and welders. Welding electrodes shall be type and material recommended by electrode manufacturer for materials to be welded. All pipe fitting ends shall be beveled a minimum of 30 degrees prior to welding. m) Brazed socket type joints shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. Minimum socket depth shall be sufficient for intended service. Brazing alloy shall be end fed into socket and shall fill completely annular clearance between socket and pipe or tube. Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket type joint will not be acceptable. n) Soft soldered socket type joints shall be made with 95-5 tin-antimony solder as required by temperature and pressure rating of piping systems. Solder socket joints shall be limited to systems containing nonflammable and non-toxic fluids. Soldered socket-type joints shall not be used on piping systems subject to shock or vibration. Soldered joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket-type joint will not be acceptable. o) Make changes in piping size and direction with approved factory made fittings. Steel pipe and fittings suitable for at least 125 psi working pressure or of pressure rating required for maximum working pressure of system, whichever is greater. p) Where pipe sizes of header or branch water supply piping do not appear on drawings, size piping to plumbing fixtures as follows:

FIXTURE MAXIMUM QUANTITY TYPE OF FIXTURES PIPE CW SIZE HW Water Closet (Flush Tank) 1 0.5 -- Water Closet (Flush Tank) 2 0.75 -- Water Closet (Flush Tank) 5 1 -- Lavatory 1 0.5 0.5 Lavatory 3 0.75 0.75 Lavatory 6 1 1

15A-33 VALVES AND INSTALLATION: a) Install necessary valves within piping systems to provide required flow control and to allow isolation for inspection, maintenance, and repair of each piece of equipment or fixture, and on each main and branch service loop. For application of specific valve types see Section 15B of this Specification. b) Valves 2.5 inches and smaller have solder, socket weld, flanged, or screwed end connections as required by piping materials unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings. Install union connection in the line within 2 feet of each screw end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line. c) Each valve shall be installed so that it is easily accessible for operation, visual inspection, and maintenance. d) Non-rising stem valves shall not be installed at any point in the piping systems. With permission of A/E, non-rising stem valves may be installed at particular points where space is restricted.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p14 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO e) Valves installed in piping systems shall be compatible with system maximum test pressure, pipe materials, pipe joining method, and fluid or gas conveyed in system. f) Valves shall be the same size as piping shown on drawings. Do not reduce valve size. g) Equivalent gate, globe, and plug valves listed on current comparison charts of specified valve manufactured by Crane, Centerline, NIBCO, Kennedy, Keystone, Powell, or Victaulic will be acceptable. h) Equivalent balancing valves by Taco, Flowset, Thrush, or Illinois will be acceptable. i) Equivalent globe style silent check valves listed on current comparison charts of specified valve manufactured by NIBCO F-910-B or equal by Combination Pump Valve Co., Pagent, or Williams will be acceptable. j) Equivalent automatic flow control valves by Flow Design, Hays Fluid Control, Griswold and Siemens.

15A-34 VALVES: a) Ball valves shall be scheduled as Type “BLV” valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO SPECIFICATION

BLV-1 2-inch valves and smaller: bronze (ASTM B 584 Alloy 844, ASTM B 62, or ASTM B 61) (no brass containing more than 15 percent zinc) full port ball valve 600 psi-WOB, Teflon seats, stainless steel ball, stem with insulated handle NIBCO T-585-70-66, with screwed ends. b) Plug valves shall be scheduled as Type “PLV” valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION

PLV -1 1-inch valves and smaller: Hays 7400 Series iron body gas cock, 175 psi-WOG bronze plug washer and nut, screwed ends.

PLV-2 1.25-inch valves through 2.5-inch valves: Homestead Fig. 651, semi-steel lubricated plug valve, 200 psi-WOG, coated plug, short pattern screwed ends. Provide complete with standard pattern cast handle. c) Silent check valves shall be scheduled as Type “SCV” valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION

SCV-1 2-inch valves and smaller: NIBCO T-480-Y bronze check valve, 250 psi-WOG, stainless steel spring, stainless steel stem, Teflon disc and seat ring, screwed or solder ends. d) Balancing valves shall be scheduled as Type “BAV” valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION

BAV-1 4-inch valves and smaller: Bell and Gossett Model CB circuit setter balance valve, bronze body, 125 psi-WP at 250 deg F precision machined orifice

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p15 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

calibrated position indicator, meter connections with built-in check valves flanged. Provide complete with polyurethane insulation cover. e) Automatic flow control valves shall be scheduled as Type “AFV” valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION

AFV-1 2-inch valves and smaller: Flow Design Inc. AutoFlow, Model AC automatic flow control valve, brass body, 400 psi-WP at 250 deg F with electroless nickel and steel wear surfaces with stainless steel spring, built-in strainer, pressure/temperature ports, and shut-off valve with Teflon packing. Provide complete with polyurethane insulation cover.

15A-35 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: a) Provide and be responsible for location of piping hangers, supports, and inserts, etc. required for installation of piping under this contract. Design of hangers and supports shall conform to current issue of MSS SP-58. b) Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting piping in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into pipe or connected equipment. Support horizontal or vertical pipes at locations of least vertical movement. c) Factory made hangers, attachments and supports to be Tolco or Anvil and must be installed per manufacturer’s requirements. All other hangers, attachments and supports must be approved by A/E prior to installation. d) Where horizontal piping movements are such that hanger rod angularity from vertical is greater than 4 degrees from cold to hot position of pipe, offset hanger, pipe, and structural attachments so that rod is vertical in hot position. Hangers shall not become disengaged by movements of support pipe. e) Provide sufficient hangers to adequately support piping system at specified spacing at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. Hangers shall provide for vertical adjustments to maintain pitch required for proper drainage and for longitudinal travel due to expansion and contraction of piping. Fasten hangers to building structural members wherever practicable. f) Hangers in direct contact with copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated. g) Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, support horizontal steel piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING 0.5” to 0.75” 0.375” 6’ 1” to 1.25” 0.375” 8’ 1.5” 0.375” 9’ 2” 0.375” 10’ 2.5” to 3” 0.5” 12’ 4” 0.625” 14’ h) Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, support horizontal copper tubing as follows:

NOM. TUBING SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING Up to 1” 0.375” 6’ 1.25” And 1.5” 0.375” 6’ 2” 0.375” 9’

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p16 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO i) Support plastic piping as recommended by piping manufacturer. In the absence of specific requirements, support plastic piping with Clic-Clamps sized and selected for the specific application. j) Provide continuous thread hanger rods wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated straps shall be used. Hanger rods shall be subjected to tensile loading only, where lateral or axial pipe movement occurs provide suitable linkage to permit swing. Provide pipe support channels with galvanized finish for concealed locations and painted finish for exposed locations. Submit design for multiple pipe- supports indicating pipe sizes, service, and support details to A/E for review prior to fabrication. k) Provide Tolco or Anvil pipe hangers for vertical pipe risers per MSS Type 8 or 42:

Type 8: Tolco Fig. 6 or Anvil Fig. 261. Type 42: Tolco Fig. 14 or Anvil Fig 295. l) Provide Tolco Fig. 30 steel wall brackets for piping suspended or supported from walls. Brackets shall be carbon steel and selected to meet the load. Finish to be hot dip galvanized in outdoor applications and type 304 (316) stainless steel in corrosive areas. m) Mount hangers for insulated piping on outside of pipe, hangers sized to allow for full thickness of pipe insulation. Provide galvanized metal shields. Minimum 12” long per MSS-SP-58. Shield shall support lower 180 degrees of pipe insulation. Omit copper plating on hangers mounted outside insulation on copper piping/tubing. Where hangers are placed outside the jackets of pipe insulation, provide galvanized metal shields. Minimum 12” long per MSS-SP-58.

PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2" to 1-1/2" 12” 18 2" to 6" 12” 18 n) Where roller hangers are required and heat loss must be kept to minimum, use Tolco Fig. 260 – Fig. 265 as required by insulation thickness and pipe size. o) Structural attachments for pipe hangers shall be as follows:

1. For attachment to top flange of structural shape: Top beam C-clamps, MSS Type 19. Tolco Fig. 68 or Anvil Fig. 94

2. For attachment to bottom flange of structural shape: Side beam or channel clamps, MSS Type 27. Tolco Fig. 336 or Anvil Fig. 14.

3. Steel Beam Structure: Provide Anvil International, Inc Fig. No. 86 malleable iron C-clamp for piping size 2-inch and smaller and Anvil International, Inc Fig. 229 malleable iron beam clamp for pipe size 1.5-inch and larger.

4. Provide Tolco Fig. 506 vibration control hangers at locations on piping to prevent vibrations from being transmitted to building structure by conventional hangers. Apply hangers within their load supporting range and per the following:

A. All pipe supports on lines that are connected directly to rotating equipment that have no flexible connection between equipment and piping.

B. All pipe supports within the first 50 lineal feet after a flexible connection to rotating equipment. All supports between the flexible connection and the rotating equipment.

C. All pipe supports that are attached to piping that is not connected to rotating equipment is exempt from vibration isolation.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p17 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO p) Provide Anvil International, Inc. Fig. 45 channel trapeze pipe hangers for horizontal multiple pipe runs with pipe clamps or pipe rollers as follows:

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE CLAMP NO. ROLLER NO. Copper 0.375” though 4” PS1100 PS1901 Steel 0.375” through 6” PS1100 PS1902 q) Pipe supports for horizontal piping mounted on pipe racks or stanchions shall be Anvil International, Inc. Fig. 259 or equivalent by Advanced Thermal Systems. Where racks and supports are not detailed on drawings, submit detailed support drawings to A/E for review prior to fabrication. r) Provide Control Devices HGR Series vibration control hangers at locations where piping vibrations would be transmitted to building structure by conventional hangers. Apply hangers within their load supporting range. s) Provide TOLCO fig 318A and 316T combination pipe saddle with adjuster to support piping from floor. Provide complete with pedestal type floor stand. t) All piping installed on roofs (except metal roofs) shall be supported by MIRO Industries “Pillow Block Pipe stands.” The base of the stand shall be designed to prevent gouging and ripping the roof membrane. The pipe stands shall be designed to absorb shock and thermal expansion and contraction reducing the friction from pipe movement. u) Provide necessary structural steel and attachment accessories for installation of pipe hangers and supports. Where heavy piping loads are to be attached to building structure, verify structural loading with A/E prior to installation. v) Equivalent hangers and supports by Tolco, PHD, Anvil International, Inc., or Fluorcarbon Company.

15A-36 PRESSURE GAUGES: a) Provide Marsh/Marshalltown quality gauges of type and dial range listed in schedule. b) Gauge bourdon tube construction shall be as follows for listed service:

1. Water – Copper alloy with brass tip. c) Provide gauges with 0.24-inch NPT male bottom or back connection as required with Marsh/Marshalltown 0.25-inch Type 1900 FFG alloy steel needle valves. d) Provide gauges with pattern MT Turret case and 4.5-imch dial except air and natural gas gauges which shall have brass case with chrome plated finish. e) Provide each gauge with 0.125-inch OD probe assembly suitable for inserting into a Peterson Equipment Company connector plug. Probes shall be 6 inches long. f) Gauges shall have recalibrator for zero adjustment of gauge pointer. g) Equivalent gauges by Mueller, Rochester, Taylor, Trerice, Weksler, Weiss, or Weston. h) For gauge locations see Section 15B and the drawings.

15A-37 DIAL THERMOMETERS: a) Provide Marsh/Marshalltown Master Therm Bimetal Dial Thermometers with 5-inch dial and recalibrator.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p18 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO b) Provide thermometers with polished 304 stainless steel cases and stem, 0.5-inch NPT male back or bottom connections. Accuracy shall be within one (1) percent of range. c) Provide each thermometer with separable well for installation in 0.75-inch FPT pipe connections. d) Provide each thermometer with Peterson Equipment Company 0.125-inch OD 6-inch long probe for insertion into a gauge connector plug. e) Equivalent thermometers by Mueller, Rochester, Taylor, Trerice, Weksler, Weiss, or Weston. f) For thermometer locations see Section 15B of this Specification and the drawings.

15A-38 PRESSURE GAUGE AND THERMOMETER CONNECTOR PLUGS: a) Provide pressure gauge and thermometer connector plugs rated for 500 psi and 200 deg F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate. Equip with 0.5-inch NPT fitting with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 0.125 inches OD probe assembly from thermometer or pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension length equal to insulation thickness for insulated pipe. b) Connector plugs shall be as manufactured by Peterson Equipment Company or approved equal.

15A-39 TESTING PROCEDURES: a) Test all lines and systems before they are insulated, painted, or concealed by construction or backfilling. Provide fuel, water, electricity, materials, labor, and equipment required for tests. b) Where entire system cannot be tested before concealment, test system in sections. Upon completion, each system shall be tested as entire system. c) Repair or replace defects, leaks, and materials failures revealed by tests and then retested until satisfactory. Make repairs with new materials. d) Verify that system components are rated for maximum test pressures to be applied. Where specified test pressures exceed component ratings, remove or isolate components from system during tests. e) Test methods are pressures shall be as follows:

1. Hydrostatic Test (Closed System):

A. Hydrostatic test shall be performed using clean unused domestic water. Test pressures shall be as scheduled for systems or 150 percent of operating pressure where not specified.

2. Hydrostatic Test (Open System):

A. Test entire system with 10 feet of head water. Where system is tested in sections, each joint in building except uppermost 10 feet of system shall be submitted to at least 10 feet head of head water. Water shall be held in system for 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall hold test pressure without leaks.

3. Pneumatic Test:

A. Test entire system with compressed air. Systems operating above 2 psi shall be tested at 75 psi or 150 percent of operating pressure, whichever is greater.

B. Allow at least 1 hour after test pressure has been applied before making initial test.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p19 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

C. During test, completely isolate entire system from compressor or other sources of air pressure.

4. Refrigerant Piping:

A. Test piping by pneumatic test using carbon dioxide or dry nitrogen. Test high and low side of refrigerant system for minimum leakage as specified in ANSI B9.1 for refrigerant used.

B. System shall successfully hold test pressure for 24 hours without pressure drop. Following pressure test, evacuate entire system to an absolute pressure of 5,000 microns at ambient temperature of not less than 55 deg F. System shall hold vacuum for two (2) hours with absolute pressure increase of not more than 25 microns.

C. Following successful completion of vacuum test, immediately charge system with refrigerant.

5. Pressure Relief and Safety Valve:

A. Before installation test pressure temperature and safety relief valves to confirm relief settings comply with Specifications.

B. Tag items that pass test with date of test, observed relief pressure setting, and inspector’s signature.

C. Items installed in systems without test tag attached will be rejected. f) All systems shall hold scheduled test pressures for specified time without loss of initial test pressure. g) Upon completion of testing submit five (5) copies of typewritten report to A/E. Report shall list systems tested, test methods, test pressures, holding time, and all failures with corrective action taken. h) For test pressures see piping material schedule.

15A-40 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION: a) Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of insulation for plumbing and mechanical systems as specified and/or detailed on drawings. Insulation type, jacket, and thickness for specific piping systems or equipment shall be as listed in insulation schedule. b) Provide insulation materials manufactured by Certain Teed, Knauf, Dow Chemical Company, Johns Manville, or Owen/Corning Fiberglas. c) Insulation, except where specified otherwise, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 procedures not exceeding:

FLAME SPREAD 25 SMOKE DEVELOPED 50 FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50

1. Provide insulation accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tape, and glass fabric with same component ratings as listed above. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear label indicating their flame and smoke ratings. Treatments of jackets or facings for impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. Use of water soluble treatments such as corn paste or wheat paste is prohibited. This does not exclude approved lagging adhesives. d) Install insulation over clean dry surfaces with joints firmly butted together. Insulation at equipment, flanges, fittings, etc. shall have straight edges with box type joints with corner beads as required. Where plumbing and heating insulation terminates at equipment or unions, taper insulation at 30

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p20 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

degree angle to pipe with one coat finishing cement and finish same as fittings. Total insulation system shall have neat smooth appearance with no wrinkles, or folds in jackets, joint strips, or fitting covers. Seal butt joints at maximum intervals of 45 feet to prevent vapor barrier failures from being transmitted to adjoining insulations sections. e) Undamaged insulation systems on cold surface piping and equipment shall perform their intended functions as vapor barriers and thermal insulation without premature deterioration or vapor barrier. Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to provide insulation systems with continuous unbroken vapor barriers. f) Where glass is specified in the following insulation methods, provide resin impregnated with open weave glass fabric with 10/20 thread count. g) Abbreviations for manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and coating specified shall be C.M. for Chicago Mastic Company and B.F. for Benjamin Foster Company. h) Provide piping systems scheduled for metal insulation jacket with insulation system type specified except omit factory applied jackets on plastic foam or calcium silicate insulation unless indicated otherwise in schedule. Secure insulation with 1.5-inch-wide pressure sensitive type bands on plastic foam insulation and with galvanized tie wire on calcium silicate insulation system with stucco embossed aluminum vapor barrier metal jacket and matching aluminum fitting covers by Childers Products Co., Harren Metals Inc., or Premetco International. Lay fitting covers 2 inches over adjacent insulation jacket and apply 4-inch butt joint strips secured with stainless steel bands Jacket thickness shall be as scheduled with interior surfaces of metal fitting covers factory or field coated with not less than 10 mil thickness of C.M. No. 16-110 or B.F. No. 30-36 mastic coating. Jacket length shall be 3 or 4 feet applied with longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with 0.125-inch bead of butyl or elastomeric sealant and lapped 2 inches over adjacent cover. Secure cover on piping 12 inches OD and smaller on 2-inch OD and above piping. Bands shall have thumb seals and be coated on 6-inch centers on piping 6-inches OD and smaller and on 12-inch centers on piping 8 inches and larger. Attach bands on aluminum jackets that cover insulation without vapor barrier jacket with one pop rivet, secure bands on aluminum jackets that cover insulation with vapor barrier jackets by cutting diagonal cut in longitudinal lap adjacent on piping within 6 feet of floor shall be 0.020-inch-thick or double jacket of 0.016-inch thickness. i) Piping insulation materials and application methods by type shall be as follows:

1. TYPE 1-PC: Insulation for cold surface piping system with minus 50 deg F to plus 220 deg F operating temperature range shall be Armstrong AP Armaflex Elastomeric pipe insulation average thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 BTU/Hr. at 75 deg F mean temperature. To greatest extent possible apply insulation without longitudinal joint by slipping insulation over piping. Seal all seams and butt joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Thickness shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations using a maximum severity of 90 deg F and 80 percent RA. Insulate fittings as follows:

A. Insulate exposed and concealed valves fittings with miter-cut pieces of AP/Armaflex pipe insulation equal to thickness of adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate fittings too large to cover with pipe insulation with insulation from fabricated/Armaflex sheet insulation using Armstrong templates. Join and seal all fittings joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Finish insulation as soon as possible with two coats of Armstrong Armaflex vinyl-lacquer finish in color selected by Architect. All insulation used outdoors shall be painted to prevent ultra violet deterioration of insulation. j) Insulation materials and application methods for piping hangers supports, anchors, guides, expansion joints, etc. shall be as follows:

1. Insulate hangers and supports from direct contact with cold surfaces with Styrofoam HD-300 plastic foam inserts of half or full sections of pre-molded pipe insulation equal in thickness to adjoining insulation. Provide inserts with vapor barrier jacket for lapping 2 inches over adjacent

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p21 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

pipe insulation jacket. Protect insulation with insulation shields supporting lower 180 degree of pipe insulation sized so that pipe compressive load does not exceed one-third of insulation insert compressive strength. Seal joints with vapor barrier sealer specified for insulation type used.

2. Insulate pipe expansion joints on cold surface piping with over-sized section of pre-molded pipe insulation equal in thickness to adjoining pipe insulation. Cover shall float free one end with expansion and contraction of piping system. Seal free end with 4 mil thick PVC vinyl sheet attached to adjoining insulation. Provide sufficient slack in vinyl material to allow for maximum pipe movement.

3. Where piping hanger cannot be isolated from cold pipe surfaces, insulate piping at hanger locations with extra thickness of pipe insulation. Insulate hanger rod to a point 12 inches above pipe with minimum insulation thickness equal to one-half thickness of pipe insulation. Seal and finish joints with vapor barrier sealer specified for insulation type used.

4. Insulate floor supports in direct contact with cold surface piping with Armstrong 0.5-inch-thick Armstrong FR/Armaflex pipe or sheet insulation as required by surface. Insulate supports from pipe to floor plate and seal insulation joints with Armstrong No. 520. Finish insulation with Armstrong Armaflex vinyl-lacquer finish.

5. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling, or floor openings or sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required. k) Insulation of removable heads and valves, manhole access covers, HVAC and plumbing pumps, etc. shall be fabricated to allow removal without damage to insulation. Provide removable units with vapor-proof cover fabricated to be sealed to equipment vapor barrier. l) Insulation failing to meet workmanship and appearance standards shall be replaced with an acceptable installation before final acceptance of project will be given. Insulation failing to meet performance requirements of this Specification for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance or through one (1) heating season and one (1) cooling season, whichever is longer, shall be replaced with an acceptable installation. All costs to correct insulation deficiencies and costs to repair damages to other work shall be at M/C’s expense at no cost to Owner.

15A-41 DUCTWORK INSULATION: a) Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of interior and exterior ductwork insulation as specified and/or details on drawings. Insulation type and thickness for specific ductwork systems shall be as listed in insulation schedule in Section 15B of this Specification. b) Provide insulation materials manufactured by Owens-Corning, John Manville, CertainTeed, or Knauf. c) Insulation and application adhesives, except where specified otherwise, shall have fire and smoke hazard rating as tested by ASTM E 84 procedure not exceeding:

FLAME SPREAD 25 SMOKE DEVELOPED 50 FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50 d) Abbreviations for manufacturers of adhesives, insulating cements, and coating specified shall be C.M. for Chicago Mastic Company, B.F. for Benjamin Foster Company and 3M for 3M Company. Average thermal conductivity is expressed in BTU/hr./sq.ft./deg F/in. e) Provide concealed rectangular or round ductwork with exterior thermal insulation of type and thickness listed in schedule. Apply insulation to duct with C.M. No 17-477 or B.F. No. 85-20 adhesive. Provide mechanical fasteners 18 inches OC on duct width 30 inches and greater. Butt insulation joints tightly together and lap facing 2 inches over adjacent insulation and seal with vapor barrier

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p22 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

adhesive. Seal all breaks with vapor barrier adhesive and vapor barrier tape matching insulation facing. f) Provide exposed rectangular ductwork with exterior thermal insulation of type and thickness listed in insulation schedule. Apply with mechanical fasteners spaced 12 inches OC with minimum of two (2) rows per duct side. Seal fasteners, joint breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier adhesive reinforced with 3-inch-wide vapor barrier tape matching insulation facing. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted together with vapor barrier adhesive. Insulate fittings with insulation thickness to equal adjoining insulation with cover overlapping 2 inches onto adjacent covering. g) Duct insulation materials by type shall be as follows:

1. TYPE 1-DEW: External thermal insulation for rectangular or round duct shall be CertainTeed, type 100, 1.0-pound per cubic foot density standard duct insulation complying with ASTM C 1290 and ASTM C 553 and 0.26 BTUH thermal conductivity at 75 deg F mean temperature. Provide foilscrim-kraft facing, FSK, meeting the requirements of ASTM C1136 with a maximum vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perms.

15A-42 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: a) Consult Section 16B of electrical Specifications for work to be provided by E/C in conjunction with installation of mechanical equipment. b) Electrical work required to install and control mechanical equipment which is not shown on plans or specified under Section 16B shall be included in M/C’s base bid proposal. c) The cost of larger wiring, conduit, control, and protective devices resulting from installation of equipment which was not used for basis of design as outlined in Section 15-A-10g of Specifications shall be paid by M/C at no cost to owner or A/E. d) M/C shall be responsible for providing supervision to E/C to insure that required connections, interlocking, and interconnection of mechanical and electrical equipment are made to attain intended control sequences and system operation. e) Furnish six (6) complete sets of electrical wiring diagrams to A/E and three (3) complete sets to E/C. Diagrams shall show factory and field wiring of components and controls. Control devices and field wiring to be provided by E/C shall be clearly indicated by notation and drawing symbols on wiring diagrams. f) M/C shall obtain complete electrical data on mechanical shop drawings and shall list this data on approval form which shall be presented monthly, or on request, to E/C. Data shall be complete with wiring diagrams received to date and shall contain necessary data on electrical components of mechanical equipment such as HP, voltage, amperes, watts, and locked current to allow E/C to order electrical equipment required in his contract. g) Safety disconnect switches and manual and magnetic motor starters shall be provided by E/C. Exceptions will be allowed where mechanical equipment is specified with these devices installed as part of factory built control systems.

15A-43 RECORD DOCUMENTS: a) Record Drawings: Maintain a reproducible set of contract drawings and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which vary substantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing “field” condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable red pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance to Owner, but was for some reason not shown on

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p23 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on cover of each sheet. b) Record Specifications: Maintain one (1) copy of Specifications, including addenda, change orders, and similar modifications issued in print form during construction and mark-up variations (of substance) in actual work in comparison with text of Specifications and modifications, as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection option, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable. Upon completion of mark-up, submit to A/E for Owner’s records. c) The Contractor shall provide a full set of photographs showing the entire underground equipment. The photographs shall be taken prior to any concrete being poured. The underground equipment shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Piping. 2. Conduits. 3. Ductwork. d) The Contractor shall provide the photographs in an 8.5-inch by 11-inch format for record keeping purposes with the maintenance manuals. The photos shall all be digital and a disk or CD shall be provided to the Owner as a permanent record. e) As-built documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final payment. Copies of “in-progress” as- built drawings shall be submitted at each pay request.

END OF SECTION 15A

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - 15A p24 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION 15C - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

15C-1 GENERAL: a) Hereinafter, all reference to "this contractor", "the contractor", etc., unless specifically preceded by a trade category, shall apply to the Sprinkler Contractor.

15C-2 SCOPE: a) Furnish all design, labor, materials, fabrication, equipment, and services necessary to provide a complete and operational automatic fire sprinkler system as specified herein and as required for satisfactory operation of the system. b) All areas within the limits of construction (including attics and canopies if applicable) shall be provided with an NFPA compliant fire sprinkler system installed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA. This requirement does not relieve the contractor from meeting the requirements set by Owner’s insurance company. c) The scope of work for this project is to provide a completely new fire sprinkler system in this existing building with all required components, valves, alarms, piping, etc. for a complete and code compliant installation with regards to NFPA and local authority having jurisdiction. d) All areas subject to freezing (including attics and canopies if applicable) shall be provided with a dry- pipe system in accordance with NFPA dry-pipe sprinkler design requirements.

15C-3 FEES AND PERMITS: a) The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary in conjunction with this work. In addition, the contractor shall pay for all tap fees and equipment costs associated with the fire sprinkler system.

15C-4 PROTECTION OF WORK: a) Sprinkler Contractor shall take the necessary precautions required to protect his work as well as the work of other trades against any damages.

15C-5 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS: a) All material submitted shall be contained in brochure type binders, clearly labeled, and identified. Each submittal shall be complete, with all items listed in schedule form showing type, manufacturer, catalog number, finish shop drawings or descriptive literature for the purpose of identifying the equipment, and Engineer's reference number. Failure to comply with these requirements will result in return of submittal for resubmission. b) Contractor shall submit scaled layout drawings including, but not limited to, head locations, pipe sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate interface and spatial relationships between piping and proximate equipment. Shop hanger locations. Plans shall be submitted to A/E prior to installation for head locations approval. c) At project closeout, submit three (3), 0.125 inch scaled, dimensioned, record drawings to the A/E of installed fire protection piping and equipment. d) The sprinkler system shall be a complete system as required by local authorities. All wiring required for the system shall be provided by the sprinkler contractor and shall be included in the submittal

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - 15C p1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

package. Submit to Agency having jurisdiction (AHJ) for approval. Submit one approved copy, bearing stamp and/or signature of AHJ, before proceeding with installation. e) Submit certification upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

15C-6 CODES AND ORDINANCES: a) The Contractor shall comply with all requirements, regulations, code, ordinance, ruling or Fire Underwriters' requirements, NFPA, and Owner’s insurance company applicable to this class of work. Furthermore, they shall include but shall not be limited to codes listed in other sections of these specifications. b) Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards: provide UL label on each product. c) Install fire protection systems in accordance with local regulations of fire department or fire marshal. Comply with local Fire Department/Marshal regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to standpipe systems.

15C-7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: a) Viking, Reliable, Tyco, or equal.

15C-8 QUALIFICATION OF SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR: a) Fire protection work shall be installed by a firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with the fire protection work similar to that required for project by a qualified Contractor (sprinkler fitter or per jurisdictional dictates). The Sprinkler Contractor's design shall be stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of the project.

15C-9 WATER SERVICE: a) This contractor shall be responsible for bringing the fire sprinkler water service main into the building. This contractor shall install a complete fire protection system including the fire sprinkler riser, all riser valves backflow prevention, flow and tamper switches, drain lines, interior fire sprinkler mains, fire department connection, all sub-mains, branch piping, arm-overs, sprinkler heads, and all finish materials including items such as escutcheon plates for ceiling tiles. b) This Contractor shall perform necessary hydraulic calculations required to size the line in accordance with applicable provisions of NFPA including NFPA 13, 14 and 20.

15C-10 TESTING AND FLUSHING OF SYSTEM: a) All piping shall be hydrostatically tested for a period of two (2) hours at not less than 200 psi pressure. If leaks appear, lines shall be drained, leaks repaired and test repeated. No piping shall be concealed in any manner before being tested and approved. b) Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector from the authorities having jurisdiction. The Owner shall be notified of time of all tests in advance of the date.

15C-11 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: a) All materials and equipment furnished as part of this contract shall be UL listed, Owner’s insurance company approved and in compliance with applicable provisions of the NFPA. b) No plastic piping will be allowed.

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - 15C p2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

15C-12 SPRINKLER HEADS: a) Unless indicated otherwise, sprinkler heads shall be as follows:

1. Exposed Areas Without Ceiling Brass, Unplated Sprinklers.

2. Finished Ceiling Areas – Recessed concealed type with white cover plate and trim as required. b) Temperature rating of fusible plug or link of sprinklers shall be appropriate for the ambient conditions in the immediate areas. c) Contractor shall furnish spare sprinkler heads identical to each type installed in accordance with the following schedule:

# Installed # of Spares Less than 300 6 More than 300 12 d) Spare sprinkler heads shall be mounted in emergency sprinkler cabinet. Cabinet shall be located in Janitor room. See drawings for room location. e) Flexible stainless steel hose with fittings for fire protection service that connect sprinkler heads to the branch lines in suspended ceilings shall be as allowed by the local jurisdiction and manufactured by FlexHead Industries.

1. Straight and angled hoses be 100%, type 304 stainless steel and shall be fully welded non- mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1 inch (25.4 mm) true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter and limited to a maximum length of 3 feet and rated for 175 psi maximum pressure.

2. Shall attach to lay-in and hard ceilings with a multi-port style, galvanized ceiling bracket having self-securing integrated snap-on clip ends that attach directly to the ceiling with tamper-resistant screws.

3. Flexible hose and fittings shall comply with NFPA-13 and perform in accordance with FM 1637 and UL 2443.

4. Equal by prior approval only.

15C-13 DESIGN AND CALCULATION: a) Contractor shall perform necessary calculations required for proper design and modification of the sprinkler system for the area of the building being occupied by DaVita. All design calculations and layout of the sprinkler system network shall be based on the Specifications and accompanying drawings. Request for HVAC duct and equipment relocations shall be submitted to the Engineer one (1) week before the bid opening date. No sprinkler pipe penetration will be allowed through HVAC duct system.

15C-14 MISCELLANEOUS EXECUTION: a) All sprinkler heads shall be positioned approximately half way between rows of lights and at approximately center of ceiling tile. It shall be the responsibility of the sprinkler designing engineer to accommodate this requirement. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in return of submitted design for resubmission. Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of ceiling tiles. b) All piping shall be installed within 6 inches of the structure. Offset around obstacles as necessary and

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - 15C p3 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

return piping to within 6 inches of structure as close to offset as possible. Branch piping shall be run between steel joists in rooms without ceilings.

15C-15 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING: a) The fire sprinkler system Engineer of Record (EOR) shall inspect the sprinkler system installation for conformance with the sprinkler system design documents, the requirements of NFPA 13 and all codes applicable to the design and installation. Upon completion of the inspection, the EOR shall submit to the Contractor, Architect, and Engineer a report listing all deficiencies, conflicts, errors, etc., found during the inspection. The report shall be submitted no less than two weeks prior to the scheduled date of substantial completion, and shall bear the seal and signature of the Design Engineer. Work required addressing deficiencies, conflicts, errors, etc., listed in the fire sprinkler EOR’s inspection report shall be performed by the fire sprinkler contractor at his/her own expense. As-built record drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be revised to include any and all additions and modification, and shall bear the seal and signature of the EOR. b) Upon completion of the fire sprinkler system installation, the EOR shall inspect and test the system in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements for systems acceptance and system operational tests in the presence of the sprinkler system design engineer and a representative of the AHJ. The “Contractors Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and a report of systems operational tests shall be submitted with the fire sprinkler as-built record documents. The acceptance test certificates and operational test reports shall indicate the date of the tests and bear the signatures of the installing contractors performing the tests, and the design engineer and the AHJ witnessing the tests.

15C-16 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: a) Electric tamper switches are not shown but are required wherever a shutoff valve is installed in the sprinkler system. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the tamper switch and associated wiring to connect the fire alarm system. All wiring shall be in accordance with Division 16. b) Electric flow switches are not shown but are required. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the flow switch and associated wiring to connect to the fire alarm system (or alarm communicator). All wiring shall be in accordance with Division 16. c) The sprinkler contractor shall provide written verification and owner observance of operation of the notification system contacting the owner’s monitoring service. d) All flow switches, gongs, horns, etc., required by the local code officials or authority with jurisdiction shall be included. All wiring shall be in accordance with Division 16.

END OF SECTION 15C

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - 15C p4 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16A - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

16A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ...... 1 16A-2 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS ...... 1 16A-3 GENERAL EXTENT OF WORK ...... 1 16A-4 LOCAL CONDITIONS ...... 2 16A-5 CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, AND REGULATIONS ...... 2 16A-6 CONTRACT CHANGES ...... 3 16A-7 LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES ...... 4 16A-8 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE ...... 4 16A-9 WARRANTY ...... 4 16A-10 MATERIALS EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS ...... 5 16A-11 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATING, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ...... 6 16A-12 CUTTING AND PATCHING ...... 7 16A-13 MUTILATION ...... 7 16A-14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ...... 7 16A-15 SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ...... 8 16A-16 START-UP, CHANGE-OVER, TRAINING, AND OPERATING CHECK ...... 8 16A-17 OWNER'S FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW ...... 8 16A-18 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS ...... 9 16A-19 PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ...... 9 16A-20 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT...... 9 16A-21 RECORDING AND REPORTING TESTS AND DATA ...... 10 16A-22 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRING AND EQUIPMENT ...... 10 16A-23 SLEEVES ...... 11 16A-24 RECORD DOCUMENTS ...... 12

TABLE OF CONTENTS 16 pg1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16B - GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING

16B-1 CIRCUITING ...... 1 16B-2 CONDUIT APPLICATION ...... 1 16B-3 STEEL CONDUIT ...... 2 16B-4 PLASTIC CONDUIT ...... 2 16B-5 MC CABLE ...... 3 16B-6 CONDUIT INSTALLATION ...... 5 16B-7 INSERTS AND HANGERS ...... 6 16B-8 BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS ...... 7 16B-9 OUTLET BOXES ...... 7 16B-10 LOCATION OF OUTLET BOXES ...... 8 16B-11 PULL BOXES, WIREWAYS, AND GUTTERS ...... 9 16B-12 CONDUCTORS ...... 9 16B-13 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION ...... 10 16B-14 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING ...... 10 16B-15 FUSES ...... 11 16B-16 SAFETY SWITCHES ...... 11 16B-17 LIGHTING CONTACTORS ...... 12 16B-18 WALL SWITCHES ...... 12 16B-19 RECEPTACLES ...... 13 16B-20 FLUSH WALL PLATES ...... 13 16B-21 LIGHTING FIXTURES ...... 14 16B-22 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS ...... 15 16B-23 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS ...... 15 16B-24 GROUNDING ...... 16 16B-25 PLENUM CABLE FIRE RATED PATHWAY DEVICE ...... 18 16B-26 OCCUPANCY SENSOR ...... 19 16B-27 TIME SWITCHES ...... 20 16B-28 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATION ...... 20

TABLE OF CONTENTS 16 pg2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16A – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

16A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: a) All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda, and modifications preceding this Specification Division are applicable to Electrical Contractor and his subcontractors and material suppliers.

16A-2 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS: a) These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as “the Contractor shall,” “shall be,” “as noted on the drawings,” “according to the drawings,” “a,” “an,” “the,” and “all” are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. b) When a word such as “proper,” “satisfactory,” “equivalent,” and “as directed” is used, it requires Engineer’s review. c) “Provide” means furnish and install. d) “Working Day” wherever used in these Specifications, shall mean the normal working days Monday through Friday, exclusive of Saturday, Sunday, and federally observed holidays. e) Architect/Engineer hereinafter abbreviated A/E shall mean both the Design Architects and the Design Engineers. f) Design Engineer hereinafter abbreviated D/E shall mean the engineering firm, MALONE FINKLE ECKHARDT & COLLINS, INC., 8700 Indian Creek Parkway, Suite 180, Overland Park, KS 66210, Telephone (913) 322-1400. Contact Person: Darin Seidel. g) General Contractor hereinafter abbreviated G/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the Owner to perform the general division work. h) Electrical Contractor hereinafter abbreviated E/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the G/C to perform the electrical division work. i) Mechanical Contractor hereinafter abbreviated M/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the G/C to perform the mechanical division work. j) Equipment and/or materials manufacturer hereinafter abbreviated E/M shall mean the manufacturer of equipment or materials specified or referred to.

16A-3 GENERAL EXTENT OF WORK: a) Provide electrical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and accessory for proper operation and completion of mechanical systems. In no case will claims for “Extra Work” be allowed for work about which E/C could have informed himself before bids were taken. b) E/C shall familiarize himself with equipment provided by other contractors, which require electrical connections and controls. c) Make required electrical connections to equipment provided under Architectural and mechanical divisions of this project, except where shown or specified otherwise. Make required internal field wiring modifications indicated on wiring diagrams of factory installed control system for control sequence specified. These field modifications shall be limited to jumper connections and connection

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p1 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

of internal wiring to alternate terminal block lugs. Cost for field modifications requiring re-wiring of factory installed control systems for equipment provided by G/C or M/C shall be included in base bid of each respective contractor. d) Check electrical data and wiring diagrams received from M/C for compliance with project voltages, wiring, controls, and protective devices on electrical drawings. Promptly bring discrepancies found to attention of A/E for a decision. e) Provide safety disconnect switches, contactors, and manual and magnetic motor starters for all mechanical and electrical equipment requiring such devices, whether specifically scheduled or shown on the drawings or not – no adds shall be paid for this equipment required for proper operation of the equipment, after the bid. Coordinate with the M/C and omit these devices only where they are included as part of the equipment, unless scheduled otherwise on the drawings, and where approved by the A/E. Where approval has not been obtained from the A/E prior, include all costs for this equipment in the base bid. With exception of factory installed devices, provide safety disconnect switches, contactors, and motor starters by one manufacturer to allow maximum interchangeability of repair parts and accessories for these devices. f) Coordinate closely with M/C for all mechanical and/or HVAC equipment overcurrent protection. Where the provided equipment is listed with a ‘Maximum Fuse Size’, a fused disconnect switch shall be provided with fuses sized per the manufacturer’s listing, regardless of what is shown on the drawings. Where the equipment is listed with a ‘Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP)’, a fused or non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided as indicated and scheduled on the drawings. g) Electrical controls in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, and control rooms shall be grouped in accessible locations and arranged according to function. Where possible use group control panels and combination starters in lieu of individually enclosed devices. h) All electrical work as required to provide temporary power for construction shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. Include all costs as required in the base bid. Coordinate and verify all requirements with the general contractor.

16A-4 LOCAL CONDITIONS: a) Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract. b) Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered a basis for granting additional compensation.

16A-5 CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, AND REGULATIONS: a) Provide work in accordance with applicable codes, rules, ordinances, and regulations of Local, State, and Federal Governments and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction. b) Conform to latest editions and supplements of the following codes, standards, or recommended practices.

1. CITY CODES:

A. 2003 International Building Code B. 2003 International Fire Code

2. SAFETY CODES:

A. National Electric Safety Code Handbook H30 – National Bureau of Standards. B. Occupational Safety and Health Standards – Department of Labor. C. Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To, and Usable By, the Physically Handicapped – American Standards Institute ANSI A117.1.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p2 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

3. NATIONAL FIRE CODES:

A. NFPA No. 70 – National Electric Code – 2002 Edition. B. NFPA No. 76A – Essential Electric Systems, 2002 Edition. C. NFPA No. 101 – Life Safety Code – 2006 Edition.

4. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC.:

A. All materials, equipment and component parts of equipment shall bear UL labels whenever such devices are listed by UL. c) Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standards, but should any work indicated be sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules, or regulations bearing on work, E/C shall promptly notify A/E in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes can be made. However, if E/C proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any ordinances, laws, rules, and regulations, he shall thereby have assumed full responsibility for and shall bear all costs required to correct non-complying work. d) E/C shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by governmental ordinances, laws, rules, or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection certificates and submit two (2) copies to A/E with request for final inspection.

16A-6 CONTRACT CHANGE: a) Changes or deviations from contract; including those for extra or additional work must be submitted in writing for review of A/E. No verbal orders will be recognized. b) Changes in the work shall be submitted in accordance with AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. c) All change proposals shall be itemized indicating separately the costs for materials, labor, restocking charges, freight, bonds, insurance, overhead, and profit. All materials shall be listed separately with quantities and individual unit prices. Labor factors shall be from a nationally recognized source with appropriate adjustments. d) All submitted breakdowns shall be broken out individually for labor and material for each separate line item in the respective supplemental instruction, contract change directive, or proposal request. Items submitted with lump sums will be returned un-reviewed. e) The maximum allowable profit for any change order shall be ten percent (10%). f) See Example below:

PRICING SHEET Project: DaVita Dialysis Clinic Location: CLINTON, MO Date: August 29, 2013 Labor Rate: $22.00 Estimator: Jane Doe Unit Material Man Hours Total Materials Material Units Measure Per Unit Per Unit Man Hours Total Add Drill & Patch Holes 1 lot $1,285.00 3.000 3.00 $1,285.00 4” LB w/cover 6 ea $105.23 2.750 16.50 $631.38 4” Compr. Conn 6 ea $87.70 1.000 6.00 $526.20 4” GRC 40 ea $9.04 0.280 11.20 $361.57 4” cut & thread labor 4 ea $0.00 1.600 6.40 $0.00 4” GRC-PVC Adptr. 16 ea $4.70 0.675 10.72 $75.20 4” GRC 90 Ell 4 ea $56.34 1.500 6.00 $225.36 4” Sch 40 PVC 460 ea $2.25 0.600 27.60 $1,034.03 Resocking Fee 20% 1 lot $212.26 0.00 0.00 $212.26 Return Freight 1 lot $26.40 0.000 0.000 $26.40

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p3 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

Unit Material Man Hours Total Materials Material Units Measure Per Unit Per Unit Man Hours Total

Deduct 4” EMT -330 ea $2.46 0.045 (14.85) ($812.79) 4” EMT 90 Ell -6 ea $26.64 1.100 (6.60) ($159.84) 4” EMT Cplg --39 ea $2.27 0.270 (10.53) ($88.66)

SUBTOTAL 55.44 $3316.12 SALES TAX 6.125% $203.11 LABOR 55.4 MH $21.74 $1,205.27 5% OVERHEAD $236.23 8% PROFIT 396.86 TOTAL $5357.59

16A-7 LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES: a) Locations of equipment, piping, and other mechanical work are indicated diagrammatically by electrical drawings. Lay out work from dimensions on Architectural and Structural Drawings. Verify equipment size from manufacturer’s shop drawings. b) Study and become familiar with contract drawings of other trades and in particular the general construction drawings and details to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workmen and install work to avoid interference with their work. Minor deviations not affecting design characteristics, performance, or space limitations may be permitted if reviewed by A/E prior to installation. c) Any conduit, apparatus, appliance, or other electrical item interfering with proper placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required shall be removed and if so shown, relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other work caused by the E/C, his subcontractor, his workmen, or by any cause whatsoever, shall be restored as specified for new work. d) Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay out work from dimensions indicated on architectural drawings unless such is found in error.

16A-8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE: a) Final acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus, and appliances operate satisfactorily as designed and intended; work shall include required adjustment of systems and control equipment installed under this specification.

16A-9 WARRANTY: a) E/C warrants to Owner and Architect the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship, and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one (1) year from and after date of substantial completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner. b) Where manufacturers’ warranties expire during the one (1) year warranty period, one (1) year warranty period is defined as year after date of substantial completion. E/C shall include provisions for extending warranty for the full one (1) year period and shall cost for warranty extension in his base bid. c) E/C warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of written notice from either of them within one (1) year warranty period following date of acceptance, all defects that have appeared in materials and/or workmanship shall be promptly corrected to condition required by contract documents at E/C’s expense. d) The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements by law or by these specifications.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p4 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO e) Keep an itemized list of all equipment warranties listing equipment by name, mark, and type along with length and expiration date of each warranty. Submit two (2) copies to A/E with request for final inspection. f) If the Architect’s specification includes a warranty that exceeds the above warranty requirements, the Architect’s warranty shall take precedence.

16A-10 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND SUBSTITUTIONS: a) The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for E/C to use his ingenuity and abilities to perform the work to his and the Owner’s best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required. b) Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused, and without damage. c) In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming first the manufacturer whose product was used as the basis for the project design and specifications. The manufacturer’s product, series, model, catalog, and/or identification numbers shall set quality and capacity requirements for comparing the equivalency of other manufacturer’s products in general. Where models are listed or scheduled with information that does not match specified manufacturer’s data, the larger, more expensive and/or restrictive requirement between the schedule and the manufacturer’s data shall be met and included. Where other manufacturer’s names are listed, they are considered an approved manufacturer for the product specified; however, the listing of their names implies no prior approval of any product unless specific model or catalog numbers are listed in these specifications or in subsequent addenda. The naming of a manufacturer, or even a model number, does not alleviate the contractor from being required to meet or submit equipment which meets all of the criteria and items listed in the specifications or shown on the plans even if the specified model and/or manufacturer does not. All requirements on the drawings must be met, not just the specific model number or manufacturer. Where other than first named products are used for E/C’s base bid proposal, it shall be his responsibility to determine prior to bid time that his proposed materials and equipment selections are products of approved manufacturers, which meet or exceed the specifications, fit physically in the spaces provided, are compatible with all other systems and are acceptable to the D/E. d) Where varying or conflicting information, notes or specifications may be shown in different locations on the drawings, schedules, or specifications, all requirements are required to be met and the worst case or more expensive and/or restrictive option should be included where duplicate information is not the same. Notify A/E for clarification. e) Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to A/E for review prior to procurement. f) PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF BIDS, IF E/C WISHES TO INCORPORATE PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THOSE NAMED IN SPECIFICATIONS IN HIS BASE BID, HE SHALL SUBMIT A WRITTEN REQUEST FOR REVIEW OF SUBSTITUTIONS TO D/E NOT LESS THAN SEVEN (7) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO BID TIME. D/E WILL REVIEW REQUESTS AND ACCEPTABLE ITEMS WILL BE LISTED IN AN ADDENDUM ISSUED TO PRINCIPAL BIDDERS. g) Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by A/E, whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance. Requests must be accompanied by two (2) copies of complete descriptive and technical data including E/M’s name, model, and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and any other information needed for comparison.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p5 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO h) In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such proposal cost of altering other elements of project, including adjustments in mechanical/electrical service requirements necessary to accommodate such substitution; whether such affected elements are under this contract or under separate contracts. i) Within seven (7) working days after bids are received, apparent lower bidder shall submit to A/E for approval three (3) copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 30 working days after award of contract, E/C shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work, for A/E review. Where 30 day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, E/C shall submit manufacturer’s descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer’s certification that order was placed within 30 working day limit. j) After execution of contract, substitution of product brands for those named in Specifications will be considered, only if:

1. Request is received within 30 days after contract date and request includes statement showing credit due Owner, if any, if substitution products are used, or

2. Owner requests consideration be given to substitute brands.

16A-11 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION: a) Unless noted differently in the general requirements of the specifications, E/C shall furnish one of the following options, whichever format is preferred:

1. Electronic PDF submittals to the Architect. Shop drawings submitted electronically shall be returned electronically via the same path.

2. A minimum of six (6) paper copy sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment, A/E will retain two (2) sets. b) Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment, capacities, controls, fittings, sizes, etc., that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these specifications, or plan sheet number, when item does not appear in specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base specifications or specified equivalent, submittals shall be marked with applicable alternate numbers, change order numbers, or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two (2) sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear E/M’s name and address. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal. c) E/C shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawing requirements before forwarding submittals to the A/E for their review. All shop drawings submitted to A/E shall bear E/C approval stamp which shall indicate that E/C has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing requirements. E/C’s submittal review shall specifically check for, but not be limited to, the following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to space allowed; electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, return, and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting E/C’s approval shall be returned to his supplier for resubmittal. d) No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the A/E without E/C’s approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of E/C’s review. e) A/E will not be responsible for the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that are submitted to them without E/C’s review and approval stamp. A letter will be sent to E/C by either the Architect or Engineer indicating receipt of an improper submittal. E/C shall acknowledge receipt of letter and indicate his plans for pick-up or resubmitting. A/E will hold improper submittals for pick-up by E/C or

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p6 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

supplier for 15 working days after date of receipt. If not picked up by the 16th working day, submittals will be disposed of by A/E. f) A/E’s review of shop drawings will not relieve E/C of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing by Owner or his representative, nor shall it relieve E/C of responsibility for errors in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until A/E’s review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be E/C’s responsibility. g) Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1. Submit with shop drawings of equipment: copies of installation, operating, maintenance instructions, and parts list for equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by E/M.

2. Keep in safe place keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to Owner and obtain a receipt for same upon completion of project.

3. Contractor shall provide all final documents including drawings, shop drawings, etc., in PDF format on a single disk to Owner. A total of five (5) CD’s shall be provided, three (3) to the Owner and two (2) to A/E. No exceptions will be allowed to this requirement. Videotaping, as specified in other parts of this specification, will also be required at closeout.

16A-12 CUTTING AND PATCHING: a) Contractor shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein specified. Cut no structural members without Architect’s approval and in a manner approved by him. b) Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect. c) Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect’s review and approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Do not use star drill or air hammer for this work.

16A-13 MUTILATION: a) Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of electrical equipment, fixtures, outlets, and other electrical devices shall be repaired at E/C’s expense to approval of Architect.

16A-14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: a) Perform necessary excavating to receive work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins, etc., as required and remove same at completion of work. Perform excavation in accordance with appropriate section of these specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards. b) Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and no deeper than necessary for installation work. c) Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured. Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footings with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction required by A/E. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and paving in 6-inch layers to 95 percent standard density. d) Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance made for settlement. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moisten as required for specified compaction density. Dispose of excess earth, rubble, and debris as directed by Architect.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p7 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO e) When available, refer to test-hole information on Architectural drawings or specifications for types of soil to be encountered in excavation.Where rock is indicated, list unit cost for rock excavation in base bid.

16A-15 SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: a) Work shall include mounting, alignment, and adjustment of systems and equipment.Set equipment level on adequate foundations and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown, specified.Level, shim, and grout equipment bases as recommended by E/M. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and belts according to E/M’s instructions. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field alignment shall be repaired or replaced by E/C at no cost to Owner. b) Provide concrete bases for all floor and slab mounted equipment. Refer to drawings for require base type and size. Provide 3.5-inch high base where base is not shown on drawings. c) Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level with suitable structural support, platform, or carrier in accordance with best recognized practice. E/C shall arrange for attachment to building structure, unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified. Provide hangers with vibration eliminators. Contractor shall verify with structural engineer that structural members of buildings are adequate to support equipment. Submit details of hangers, platforms, and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment to structural engineer and A/E for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation. d) Supports and/or support wires for electrical equipment, raceways, light fixtures, etc. shall be designated (painting is acceptable) separately from supports and/or support wires for other building systems. All supports and/or support wires shall be designated the same throughout the project.

16A-16 START-UP, CHANGE-OVER, TRAINING, AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS: a) E/C shall perform initial start-up of systems and equipment. Personnel qualified to start-up and service this equipment, including E/M‘s technicians, when specified, and Owner’s operating personnel shall be present during these operations. b) E/C shall be responsible for training Owner’s operating personnel to operate and maintain systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner’s personnel listing the date, subject covered, instructor’s name, names of Owner’s personnel attending, and the total hours given each individual. c) E/C shall report in person to Owner’s operating engineer at end of first month of operation and thereafter at end of sixth and 12th months after date of substantial completion of building to check operation of equipment that was installed under contract. Contractor shall answer operating personnel’s questions regarding system operation and shall ascertain that systems are operating normally and are being properly maintained by Owner. If E/C finds that systems are not being operated and maintained as designed, he shall inform the building engineer/Owner and A/E in writing. d) After each inspection, E/C shall submit written report to A/E indicating condition of equipment and including any recommended changes in operation of system or other information which will be helpful to Owner.

16A-17 OWNER’S FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW: a) All necessary system adjustments including air and water systems balancing shall be completed and all specified records and reports submitted in sufficient time to be received by A/E at least ten (10) working days prior to date of final construction review. b) At final construction review, M/C and his major subcontractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by A/E, that his

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p8 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

work complies with purpose and intent of plans and Specifications. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments, or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.

16A-18 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS: a) E/C shall be responsible for operation, maintenance, and lubrication of equipment installed under his contract.

16A-19 PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: a) It shall be E/C’s responsibility to protect and prevent damage to all electrical materials and equipment stored and/or installed under this contract. All work, materials, and equipment shall be adequately protected by any and all means necessary to prevent damage by weather, flooding, condensation, construction debris, fire, and construction equipment and vehicles. b) Equipment not rated for outdoor use shall beprotected from moisture damage before and during construction. Covering equipment with a tarp on site is not considered a means of providing protection from moisture. Any equipment not rated for outdoor use exposed to moisture for any duration shall be replaced with new equipment at the contractor’s expense. c) Where job conditions, or work of other contractors produce the potential for damage to electrical systems and equipment, E/C shall immediately notify the G/C so that corrective action can be taken. d) E/C shall take extra precautions to protect electrical equipment containing solid state electronics, open relays, and contacts from damage by water, dust, dirt, construction debris, and the formation of condensate. All equipment so damaged shall be replaced by E/C with new equipment at no cost to Owner. e) E/C shall periodically inspect and clean all systems and equipment to ensure all systems and equipment remain in like new condition during construction. All cleaning shall be done in accordance with E/M’s recommendation where available and applicable. f) Before request for final inspection, all systems and equipment shall be properly cleaned, vacuumed, polished, painted, etc., as required to return equipment to like new appearance. g) All equipment requiring painting or touch-up shall be properly prepared and painted in accordance with this specification. h) E/C shall keep a written record listing systems and equipment cleaned. Where special procedures or chemicals were used or where partial or complete disassembly of factory assembled equipment was necessary, E/C shall list special procedures and/or disassembly required and equipment components affected. Prior to final inspection, E/C shall submit two (2) copies of cleaning record to A/E for their records.

16A-20 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: a) Equipment and materials exposed to interior dry environment shall have a minimum of one (1) primer and one (1) finish coat. Equipment and materials mounted in exterior location shall have a minimum of one (1) primer and two (2) coat colors in finish areas shall be selected by A/E. b) After installation, damage to painted surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed with primers equal to factory materials. Finish coating shall be same color and type as factory finish. c) Where extensive refinishing of factory applied finishes is required, equipment shall be completely repainted. A/E will make final determination of extent of refinishing required.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p9 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

16A-21 RECORDING AND REPORTING TESTS AND DATA: a) Record nameplate horsepower, amperes, volts, phase service factor, and other necessary data on motors and other electrical equipment furnished and/or connected under this contract. b) Record motor starter catalog number, size, rating, and/or catalog number of thermal-overload units installed in all motor starters furnished and/or connected under this contract. See motor starter specification instructions for proper sizing of thermal-overload units. c) Record amperes-per-phase at normal or near-normal loading of each item of equipment furnished and/or connected. d) Record current readings of each feeder conductor after energized and normally loaded, and again after balancing of feeder loads as required by current readings. e) Record voltage and amperes-per-phase readings taken at service entrance equipment after completion of project with building operating at normal electrical load. This reading shall be taken continuously for a 24-hour period and recorded on permanent tape and submitted to A/E. f) Record voltage and amperes at transformer secondary and primary stations, at normal loading. Record transformer percentage “taps” finally selected. Transformers shall be connected to produce voltage at building service entrance equipment as follows:

Nominal System Voltage Service Entrance Voltage 200 208 g) Submit at least two (2) copies of data noted above to A/E for review prior to final inspection. h) Keep a record of all deviations made from routes, locations, circuiting, etc., shown on contract drawings. Prior to final inspection, submit one (1) new set of project drawings with all deviations and changes clearly indicated.

16A-22 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRING AND EQUIPMENT: a) Provide identification and warning signs to wiring and equipment as listed in schedule. Signs and tags shall be as follows:

TYPE 1 Laminated phenolic plastic with black Gothic-condensed lettering by Seaton or Wilco. Signs shall be weatherproof and securely attached to equipment. TYPE 2 Self-sticking 0.5-inch-wide flexible nylon tape with high gloss surface and typed smear proof, chemical/solvent resistant lettering by Brady or Dymo. TYPE 3 Self-sticking polyester sign with wording and size conforming to ANSI Z35.1 – 1964 and OSHA 19.0.144iii (2) specifications, by Brady or as approved. TYPE 4 Self-sticking flexible vinyl with oil resistant adhesive for minus 20 deg F to 300 deg F temperatures by Brady or as approved. b) Provide distribution panelboards with Type 1 signs 2 inches by 8 inches indicating panel designation, electrical characteristics and source of power. Source of power indication shall indicate source panel designation and switch or breaker number. Provide branch devices with Type 1 sign 1 inch by 4 inches indicating load served. c) Provide lighting and power panelboards with Type 1 sign 1.25 inches by 6 inches indicating panel designation, electrical characteristics, and source of power. Source of power indication shall indicate source panel designation and switch or breaker number.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p10 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO d) Provide disconnect switches, time switches, lighting contactors and controllers with Type 1 sign 1.25 inches by 6 inches indicating equipment served, electrical characteristics, and source of power.Source of power indication shall indicate source panel designation and switch or breaker number. e) Provide electrical equipment and accessible wiring enclosures (junction boxes included) operating at voltage above 240 volts with Type 3 Brady No. AE-461 25 warning sign and Brady Style B, 1.125 inches by 4.5 inches voltage marker applied to front door or cover of device or enclosure. Provide large equipment such as transformers and main distribution equipment with Type 3 sign Brady No. AE-46639. f) Provide feeders and branch circuit home runs with Type 4 wire marker indicating circuit number and power source. Provide feeders phase identification letter at each terminal point in addition to its circuit number. g) Provide Type 2 tape at feeder terminal lugs to panelboards. Tape shall indicate conduit size, conductor type, and AWG size. Tape shall be located to be easily read with conductors installed. h) All electrical equipment, such as panelboards, distribution panelboards, load centers , meter socket enclosures and C/T cabinets shall be provided with a Type 1 sign warning persons of potential electric arc fault hazards. The sign shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance of the equipment. Sign shall include at a minimum the orange ‘WARNING’ label with exclamation point symbol, and the wording “ARC FAULT HAZARD. APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DEATH OR INJURY. REFER TO NFPA 70E.” i) All electrical equipment, such as panelboards, distribution panelboards, load centers, meter socket enclosures, C/T cabinets and disconnect switches shall be provided with a Type 1 sign indicating the maximum available fault current. The sign shall include the date at which the calculation was performed. This sign shall be separate from other required signs so that it is more easily replaced in the future when changes are made.

16A-23 SLEEVES: a) Provide proper type and size sleeves for electrical ducts, busses, conduits, etc., passing through building construction. Where sleeves are installed by others, supervise installation to ensure proper sleeve location. Unless indicated or approved, install no sleeves in structural members. Sleeves shall be installed in concrete or masonry walls or floors and where otherwise noted. b) Each sleeve shall be continuous through wall floor or roof and shall be cut flush on each side except where indicated otherwise. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural member except where indicated or approved. Sleeves shall be required through floors subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, equipment rooms, and kitchens. The contractor shall have the option of:

1. Providing a PVC sleeve with integral flanges extending 1-inch above finished floor. Sleeve shall be cast in concrete when floor is poured. Annular space between sleeve and pipe shall be filled with Kawool.

or

2. Provide core-drilled opening in concrete with Thunderline Link-Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx between piping and opening. c) Sleeves passing through floors and exterior walls with waterproof membranes shall be core-drilled (floors only) and sealed with Thunderline Link-Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx. d) Where electrical ducts, busses, conduits, wiring, etc., pass through fire walls, floors, and smoke partitions, seal annular space between sleeve and item passing through with Kaowool Fire Master

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p11 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

Bulk Packing. Packing thickness shall be sized per manufacturer’s recommendation for maintaining the integrity of the fire wall/floor or smoke partition. Fire protection system shall be rated per ASTM E 119. Equivalents to Kaowool are 3M, Flame stop, or Flame Safe. e) Where piping passes through walls serving as supply or exhaust air plenums or chases, seal annular space between pipe and sleeve air tight with Thunderline Link-Seal or Calpico Sealing Linx.

16A-24 RECORD DOCUMENTS: a) Record Drawings: Maintain a reproducible set of contract drawings and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which vary substantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing “field” condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable red pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance to Owner, but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on cover of each sheet. b) Record Specifications: Maintain one (1) copy of specifications, including addenda, change orders, and similar modifications issued in print form during construction and mark-up variations (of substance) in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications, as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection option, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable. Upon completion of mark-up, submit to A/E for Owner’s records. c) The Contractor shall provide a full set of photographs showing the entire underground equipment. The photographs shall be taken prior to any concrete being poured. The underground equipment shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Piping 2. Conduits 3. Ductwork d) The Contractor shall provide the photographs in an 8.5-inch by 11-inch format for record keeping purposes with the maintenance manuals. The photos shall all be digital and a disk or CD shall be provided to the Owner as a permanent record. e) As-built documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final payment. Copies of “in-progress” as- built drawings shall be submitted at each pay request.

END OF SECTION 16A

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16A p12 DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16B – GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING

16B-1 CIRCUITING: a) Follow circuiting shown on drawings for lighting, power, and equipment connections. b) Shared neutrals are not allowed for any branch circuits or feeders. c) Shared grounds are not allowed for any lighting circuits on dimming system.

16B-2 CONDUIT APPLICATION: a) All wiring shall be in steel conduit unless otherwise noted in this section. b) Provide EMT conduit for the following applications:

1. All panelboard feeders above grade.

2. All branch circuit homeruns. c) Non-metallic conduit shall be allowed only for the following applications:

1. Electrical service feeders below grade. Transition to steel conduit shall be made prior to coming up from below grade.

2. Branch circuits below grade. Transition to steel conduit shall be made prior to coming up from inside the concrete.

3. Underground telephone service.

4. Underground cable television service. d) MC Cable shall be allowed for the following applications only (all homeruns shall be in EMT conduit):

1. Light fixture whips (maximum of 6’).

2. Branch circuits downstream of the first junction box or device back box located in wall.

3. EMT conduit shall be run from above ceiling down to junction or device back box located in wall. e) Where MC cable is noted above as allowed, it shall be installed as follows:

1. MC cable is allowed within stud walls from the first receptacle or device box fed with EMT to downstream receptacles or devices fed in the same or adjacent wall. EMT is required from the panelboard to the first wiring device back box.

2. MC cable shall be allowed for light fixture whips (maximum of 6’ for fixture whips) EMT is required from the panelboard to the first junction box located at the light fixture locations. EMT shall be used from light switches to first light fixture controlled. f) Minimum conduit size shall be 0.75” g) All low voltage wiring systems (including, but not limited to temperature controls, security, access control, telephone/data, television, audio/video, fire alarm, lighting control, etc.) shall be provided with junction boxes and conduit up to above accessible lay-in ceilings, where open, plenum-rated wiring is allowed only above lay-in ceilings where wiring will be concealed from view. Where there is no ceiling GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p1

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

(exposed structure), conduits shall be provided to conceal all wiring and all conduits shall be concealed in the building construction – exposed conduits are not allowed anywhere on the project. Temperature control wiring, security, access control, telephone/data, television, audio/video, fire alarm, lighting control, etc. wiring shall be bundled together by system and supported from the structure at regular intervals with J-hooks/straps and additionally as required by code and the manufacturer where routed as open wiring above ceilings. Wiring shall not be routed unsupported. Fire alarm wiring shall be allowed to be open wiring as allowed by the National Electric Code above areas with lay-in or sheetrock ceilings. Provide conduit for all fire alarm wiring in all mechanical/electrical rooms and storage/electrical rooms.

16B-3 STEEL CONDUIT: a) Rigid Conduit: Provide steel conduit meeting current ANSI C80.1 with hot-dipped galvanized and cle4ar lacquer finish. b) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide thinwall conduit meeting current ANSI C80.3 with electro- galvanized and clear lacquer finish. c) Rigid Conduit and EMT Fittings: Provide Appleton Form 35 non-thread malleable iron unilets. d) Rigid Conduit Connectors and Couplings: Provide Appleton steel NO-THREAD-TYPE, rain and concrete tight. e) EMT Connectors and Couplings: Provide Regal COMPRESSION EMT TYPE, concrete tight. f) Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Appleton “STB” series insulated connectors.. g) Provide insulated throat fittings when Type THHN/THWN conductors are installed. h) Short runs of flexible galvanized steel conduit may be used where permitted by code. Lengths greater than 6 feet require review by Engineer. i) Make conduit connections to motors and equipment mounted on resilient mounts or vibration isolators with Type U.A. liquid-tight flexible conduit manufactured by Anaconda, or “Liquatite” by Electric-Flex Company. j) Where conduits cross building expansion joints, provide O-Z expansion fitting Type “AX,” “TE,” “EX,” or “EXE” as required. k) Conduit manufacturer shall be Republic Conduit, Allied Tube, Wheatland Conduit, and Western Tube and Conduit or approved equivalent. l) Set screw type conduit fittings will not be allowed.

16B-4 PLASTIC CONDUIT: a) The following are general requirements for installation of plastic conduit which apply only where such plastic conduit is specifically allowed by Section 16B-2. b) Normal duty applications in concrete slabs or underground without concrete encasement. Conduit shall be Carlon Plus 40 or Carlon Plus 80, rated for use with 90 deg C conductors, UL Listed or approved equal. Material shall comply to NEMA TC-2 (conduit), TC-3 (fittings) and UL 651 (conduit) and 514b (fittings). Conduit shall be listed UL 651 for underground and exposed use. c) All conduit and fittings shall be solvent cemented in applications in accordance with instructions from the manufacturer.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p2

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO d) Normal duty exterior underground applications direct burial: Provide semi-rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Type DB plastic duct meeting current NEMA TC-6 and Western Underground Committee Specifications. e) Normal exterior underground applications encased burial: Provide semi-rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Type A plastic conduit meeting current NEMA and Western Underground Committee Specifications. f) Provide matching plastic conduit fittings by E/M. Fittings shall meet the same standards and specifications as the conduit on which it is installed. g) Joining and bending of conduit and installation of fittings shall be done only by methods recommended by E/M. h) Provide conduit support spacing as recommended by E/M for the highest ambient temperature expected. i) Provide interlocking conduit spacers by E/M or multiple runs of underground conduits installed in the same trench. j) Ends of feeder conduit terminating at transformers, switchgear, manholes, etc., shall be terminated with bell ends to protect conductor insulation. k) Install no plastic conduit in areas where ambient temperature may exceed 150 deg F under normal conditions nor on heat producing equipment such as boilers, incinerators, etc. Install no plastic conduit in a return air or supply air plenum for the HVAC systems. l) Provide expansion couplings on conduits located in areas where ambient temperatures are constantly changing and on long runs regardless of ambient temperatures. Determine amount of conduit expansion and contraction from E/M’s published charts or tables. m) All below grade PVC conduit shall be provided with tracer wire. n) Plastic conduit and fittings shall be by Carlon Products Divison of Continental Oil Company. o) Plastic conduit shall not be used above grade for any purpose. All transitions from PVC to steel shall be made below grade.

16B-5 MC CABLE: a) The following are general requirements for MC Cable which apply only where such is specifically allowed and described by section 16B-2. b) Provide metal clad cable with continuous interlocked armor meeting or exceeding all of the following references and ratings:

1. UL 1569 Standard for Metal-Clad Cables including the provisions of Section 6.1.5A. 2. UL Standard 83 for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables or UL Standard 44 for Thermoset- Insulated Wires and Cables. 3. UL Standard 1479 Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL Classified 1, 2, and 3 Hour Through-Penetration Firestop Systems. c) MC Cable Fittings: Type MC Cable connectors shall comply with UL 514B Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings, specifically section 7.12.3(b). d) MC Cable shall meet the following NEC requirements.

1. NEC Articles 230, 250, 300, 330, 517. GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p3

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

2. NEC Class I Div. 2, Class II Div. 2, & Class III Div. 1 Hazardous Locations. e) MC Cable shall meet Federal Specification A-A59544. f) MC Cable shall pass IEEE 1202 (70,000 BTU/hr) Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test. g) Approved Manufacturers:

1. Southwire Company. 2. Senator Wire and Cable. h) Product: HCF MCAP Cable, Interlocked Armor Ground Type MC Cable.

1. Circuit Conductors

A. Conductors: Soft-drawn solid copper conductors shall be permitted for 14, 12, and 10 AWG conductor sizes. Stranded copper conductors shall be class B stranded or equivalent.

B. Insulation: The conductors shall be constructed with THHN insulation rated for 90°C dry and rated for 600 volts.

2. Equipment Grounding Conductors

A. Insulated Copper Conductor: A green insulated grounding conductor shall be cabled with copper circuit conductors and located under the nonmetallic tape covering.

B. Interlocked Armor: Interlocked armor shall be listed and identified as being suitable for grounding. Armor ground path performance shall be equivalent in performance to an NEC 250.122 sized equipment grounding conductor.

3. Cable Assembly

A. All insulated circuit conductors and any insulated grounding conductors shall be cabled together and contained under an overall nonmetallic tape covering.

B. A single bare aluminum grounding/bonding conductor shall be placed outside of the nonmetallic tape covering and have the same lay (twist) as the insulated conductor assembly.

4. Grounding/Bonding Conductor: Grounding/bonding conductor shall be 8000 series aluminum- alloy conductor material, and shall be sized based on NEC table 250.122 and Table 6.1 in UL 1569.

5. Metal-Clad Sheath / Armor Assembly

A. Interlocked Armor: The interlocking metal tape armor shall be aluminum and shall be green.

B. Aluminum interlocking metal tape shall be formed and helically wrapped around the cable assembly such that the interlocked armor and aluminum grounding/bonding conductor are in intimate contact throughout the entire cable.

C. Interlocked armor shall be listed as being suitable for grounding. i) Installation:

1. Neat and Workmanlike Installation: HCF MC Cable shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls. No diagonal runs shall be permitted.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p4

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: HCF Type MC Cable shall be installed per the manufacturers written installation instructions. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Manufacturer: HCF Type MC Cables for circuits shall be supplied from a single manufacturer.

4. Securing and Supporting: HCF Type MC Cable shall be secured and supported at intervals not exceeding six feet unless otherwise permitted in the National Electrical Code.

5. Minimum Bending Radius: Bends in HCF Type MC Cable shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend should not be less than seven times the cable diameter.

6. Firestop Systems: HCF Type MC Cable shall be installed per the cable manufacturer’s Through- Penetration Firestop Systems listing by Underwriter Laboratory. j) Electrical Continuity of metal raceways, cable armor and enclosures:

1. General: Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electric conductor and shall be connected to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets or enclosures so as to provide an effective ground fault current path per Section 250.4 of the NEC.

2. Circuits Under 250 Volts: HCF Type MC Cable shall be terminated per manufacturer’s written installation instructions

3. Circuits Over 250 Volts: not allowed. k) Specific Uses:

1. HCF Type MC Cable may be used in the following applications: A. For branch circuits for general purpose, non-essential electrical systems in patient care areas of hospitals, medical and other types of health care facilities per NEC 517 only as allowed by the previous sections of this specification. B. HCF Type MC Cable shall be permitted to be installed in compliance with Parts II and III of Article 725. C. Environmental air-handling spaces per 2008 NEC 300.22(C).

2. HCF Type MC Cable should not be used in wet locations, either direct burial, in underground conduit, or overhead.

3. HCF Type MC cable should not be used for emergency and critical branch circuits in healthcare facilities except as permitted 517.30(C)(3)(3). l) Where isolated ground receptacles are indicated in a location approved for MC cable as specified previously, use MC cable including a separate isolated ground conductor.

16B-6 CONDUIT INSTALLATION: a) In general conceal conduit within walls, floors, roof construction, or furred spaces. Expose only feeders and short connections to equipment in equipment rooms unless noted otherwise. Install exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to building lines. b) Install conduit to requirements of structure, other work on project and clear of openings, depressions, pipes, ducts, reinforcing steel, etc. Install conduit in concrete forms so that strength of structure will not be affected.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p5

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO c) Align conduit terminations at panelboard, switchboards, motor control equipment, junction boxes, etc., and install true and plumb. Provide supports or templates to hold conduit alignment during rough-in stage of work. d) Install conduit continuous between outlet boxes, cabinets, and equipment. Make bends smooth and even without flattening or flaking conduits. Radius of bends shall not be shorter than radius listed in NEC chapter 9, table 2. Long radius elbows may be used where necessary. e) Ream and clean conduit before installation, and plug or cover openings and boxes to keep conduit clean during construction. f) Install no conduits or other raceways sized smaller than permitted in applicable NEC tables. Where conduit sizes shown on drawings are smaller than permitted by code, E/C shall include cost for proper size conduit in his base bid. In no case reduce conduit sizes indicated on drawings or specified without written approval of A/E. Fasten conduit securely in place with approved straps, hangers, and steel supports. Provide O-Z cable support to support conductors in vertical raceways as required by NEC Table 300-1 9(a). Where special hangers are required, submit hanger details to A/E for review before installation. g) Where conduits cross expansion joints in building construction, the conduit system shall be provided with a means of allowing expansion/contraction in the conduit system. h) Where a conduit or conduits enter a building from underground or from the exterior, they shall be sealed in accordance with the NEC section 300.5(G). Spare or unused conduits shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, shield or other components. Conduits (or sleeves) which will be subjected to different temperatures (such as where passing from interior to exterior, or at coolers/freezers, etc.), the conduit (or sleeve) shall be filled with an approved material to prevent the circulation of warm air to a colder section.

16B-7 INSERTS AND HANGERS: a) Support vertical and horizontal conduit runs at intervals not greater than 10 feet, within 3 feet of any bend and at every outlet or junction box, where plastic conduit is used follow E/M’s recommended hanger spacing. b) Insert multiple runs of conduits as follows:

1. Where a number of conduits are to be run exposed and parallel, group and support trapeze hangers.

2. Fasten hanger rods to structural steel members with suitable beam clamps and to concrete structures with inserts set flush with surface. Install concrete inserts with reinforced rod through opening provided in inserts.

3. Inserts shall be Grinnel Figure 279, 281, 282, or 285 or equivalent as required by load and concrete thickness.

4. Provide beam clamps suitable for structural members and conditions.

5. Provide 0.375-inch minimum diameter steel hanger rods galvanized or cadmium-plated finish.

6. Trapeze hangers shall be Kindorf Series 90 channel with fittings and accessories as required.

7. Attach each conduit to trapeze hanger with Steel City No. C01 05 clamps for rigid conduit and Steel City No. C-1 06 clamps for EMT.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p6

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO c) Install clamps for single conduit runs as follows:

1. Support individual runs by approved pipe straps, secured by approved pipe straps, secured by toggle bolts on hollow masonry; expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces; and wood screws on wood construction. Use of perforated strap not permitted.

2. Install exposed conduits in damp locations with clamp backs under each conduit clamp to prevent accumulation of moisture around conduits.

3. Individual conduits suspended from ceiling shall be supported by Steel City No. C-1 49 hangers. d) Provide inserts, hangers, and accessories with finish as follows:

1. Galvanized: Concrete inserts and pipe straps.

2. Galvanized or Cadmium Plated: Steel bolts, nuts, washers, and screws.

3. Painted with Prime Coat: Individual hangers, trapeze hangers, and rods. e) Equivalent hanger and support systems by Binkley, Fee and Mason, Kin-Line, or Unistrut. f) Supports and/or support wires for electrical equipment, raceways, light fixtures, etc. shall be designated (painting is acceptable) separately from supports and/or support wires for other building systems. All supports and/or support wires shall be designated the same throughout the project.

16B-8 BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS: a) Enter outlet boxes squarely and securely clamp conduit to outlet box with bushing on inside and locknut on outside. Provide Steel City BG series or equivalent threaded die-cast zinc insulated throat grounding bushings. b) Terminate metallic conduits at switchboards, panelboards, control cabinet, etc., with Steel City BG series or equivalent malleable iron grounding type insulation bushings. Ground bushings to equipment grounding bus.

16B-9 OUTLET BOXES: a) Provide electrical service outlets, including plug receptacles, lamp receptacles, lighting fixtures, and switches with Steel City, Raco, or equivalent 4-inch code gauge steel knockout boxes galvanized or sherardized of required depth for service or device. b) Provide code gauge galvanized steel raised covers on outlet boxes installed in plaster finish. Set to plaster grounds with outside edge of cover flush with plaster finish. c) Provide 0.375-inch or larger fixture stud in each outlet box scheduled to receive lighting fixture. Select covers with proper opening for device installed in outlet box. d) Use of utility or “Handy” boxes acceptable only where single gang flush outlet box in masonry is “dead-end” with only one conduit entering box from end or back. e) Use no sectional outlet boxes. f) Provide Appleton FS or FD unilets for surface mounted exterior work. Provide complete with proper device cover and gasket. Provide blank cover and gasket when used as junction box. g) Install boxes to maintain all fire ratings, as required by the building code and NEC. At all boxes installed in fire walls throughout the project, provide fire-rated sealing assembly(refer to the other GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p7

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

specification sections for additional locations – refer to the architectural specifications for specification of all fire rated penetration sealing materials). Putty pads and/or other fire-rated sealing assemblies, where provided, shall fully seal all boxes and conduit entries (including at the penetration into the top of the wall) and shall be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions (including minimum/maximum ambient temperatures at time of install and after installation). Submit fire penetration materials and information with the shop drawings to the architect. Refer to the other specification sections for additional requirements. Putty pads and/or fire-rated sealing assemblies shall have a minimum STC rating per the architectural specifications.

16B-10 LOCATION OF OUTLET BOXES: a) Locate outlet boxes generally from column centers and finished wall lines. Install ceiling outlet boxes at suspended ceiling elevations. b) Accurately locate lighting fixtures and appliance outlet boxes mounted in concrete or in plaster finish on concrete. Install outlet boxes in forms to dimensions taken from bench marks, columns, walls, or floors. Rough-in lighting fixtures and appliance outlet boxes to general locations before installation of walls and furring, and reset to exact dimensions as walls and furring are constructed. Set outlet boxes true to horizontal and vertical finish lines of building. c) Install outlet boxes accessible. Provide outlet boxes above piping or ductwork with extension stems or offsets as required to clear piping and ductwork. d) Install centerline of light switch or lighting control outlet boxes at 48 inches above floor (to the top) unless otherwise called for or required by Wainscot, counter, moulding, etc – coordinate with millwork contractor and G/C prior to any rough-in. All electrical light switches shall be located as close to door frame as possible. Under no circumstances should switches be located more than 12 inches from the edge of door frames. e) Install centerline of receptacle outlet boxes 18 inches above floor unless otherwise called for on drawings. f) All thermostats, temperature sensors and HVAC controls shall be located directly adjacent to light switches wherever possible, at 60” above finish floor. g) Maintain minimum clearances for all boxes for proper operation of equipment (including, but not limited to, switches, fire alarm devices, temperature controls, lighting controls, receptacles, television outlets, telephone/data outlets, volume controls, A/V controls, screen switches, etc.) after they are installed – coordinate installation requirements with M/C, temperature controls contractor, owner’s A/V contractor, lighting control manufacturer and owner’s telephone/data and television system contractors prior to any rough-in to allow adequate space for all equipment. Where conflicts occur with other building components (or with light switches below these devices), notify A/E of conflict and get approval to modify box location, height or rotation prior to any rough-in. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to relocate any boxes, conduits, wiring, etc. installed prior to coordination with any other building system. h) If a wiring device (including, but not limited to, switches, fire alarm devices, temperature controls, lighting controls, receptacles, television outlets, telephone/data outlets, volume controls, A/V controls, screen switches, etc.) is shown to be installed in or on a column, it shall be centered on the column unless noted otherwise. i) Locate associated data, telephone and television outlets at the same height as adjacent, associated receptacles, within 6 inches of the associated receptacles, where shown side-by-side on the plans and not noted otherwise. j) Where wall-mounted telephone outlets are shown on the drawings in the same location as light switches, the telephone outlet shall be installed to the room side of the light switches at 54” above

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p8

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

finish floor. Coordinate phone requirements with the owner prior to any rough-in). Do not locate phone outlet above the switches – locate 8” from the end of the light switches to allow clearance of the phone. k) Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all box locations with millwork, wall treatments (mats, chair rails, paneling, special systems, etc…), finishes and architectural elements to maintain full accessibility per NEC and to facilitate installation and operation of all systems. Where conflicts occur with other building components, notify A/E of conflict and get approval to modify box location or rotation prior to any rough-in. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to relocate any boxes, conduits, wiring, etc. installed prior to coordination with any other building system. l) Provide Alwalt, Keystone, Universal, or equivalent code gauge pull boxes, wireways, and gutters indicated or required for installation, sized to conform to NEC rules. Provide complete with necessary fittings, interconnecting nipples, insulating bushings, conductor supports, covers, gaskets, partitions, etc., as required. m) Special items may be fabricated locally to same general design and specifications as those listed in specified manufacturer’s catalogs. Provide free of burrs, sharp edges, unreamed holes, sharp pointed screws or bolts, and finished with one coat of suitable enamel inside and out, prior to mounting. n) Where devices are installed in masonry, coordinate with A/E prior to any rough-in to allow adjustments for masonry joint locations.

16B-11 PULL BOXES, WIREWAYS, AND GUTTERS: a) Provide Alwalt, Keystone, Universal, or equivalent code gauge pull boxes, wireways, and gutters indicated or required for installation, sized to conform with NEC rules. Provide complete with necessary fittings, interconnecting nipples, insulating bushings, conductor supports, covers, gaskets, partitions, etc., as required. b) Special items may be fabricated locally to same general design and specifications as those listed in specified manufacturer’s catalogs. Provide free of burrs, sharp edges, undreamed holes, sharp pointed screws or bolts, and finished with one coat of suitable enamel inside and out, prior to mounting. c) Provide sectional covers for easy removal.

16B-12 CONDUCTORS: a) Unless noted otherwise conductors referred to are wires and cable. Provide code grade soft annealed copper conductors with specified insulation type in proper colors to conform to color coding specified. Provide conductors No. 8 gauge and larger stranded and conductors No. 10 gauge and smaller may be solid or stranded. b) Use no conductors smaller than No. 12 gauge unless specifically called for or approved by D/E. Size wire for 120 volt branch circuits for 3 percent maximum voltage drop. Size feeder circuits for 2 percent maximum voltage drop. Combined voltage drop of feeders and branch circuits shall not exceed 5 percent maximum. c) Provide conductors for listed applications as follows:

1. Lighting and Receptacle Circuits: Type THHN, 600 volt, 90 deg C (194 deg F) thermoplastic insulated building conductor.

2. Power Circuits and Feeders: Type THHN, 600 volt, 90 deg C (194 deg F) thermoplastic insulated building conductor.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p9

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

3. Low Voltage and Line Voltage Conductors Sizes No. 16 and No. 18 AWG: Type TFFN, 600 volt, 90 deg C (194 deg F) thermoplastic insulated building conductor.

4. Underground Circuits and Feeders: Type THHN/TWHN, 600 volt, 75 deg C (167 deg F) wet rating and 90 deg C (194 deg F) dry rated thermosetting filled insulating cable. d) Provide conductors by Encore Wire and Cable, Southwire, Senator Wire and Cable, and Cerro Wire or equivalent.

16B-13 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION: a) Run conductors in conduit continuous between outlets and junction boxes with no splices or taps pulled into conduits. b) Neatly route, tie, and support conductors terminating at switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, sound equipment, etc., with Thomas & Betts Ty-Rap cable ties and clamps or equivalent by Electrovert or Panduit. c) Make circuit conductor splices with Buchanan B- Cap nylon insulated connectors or equivalent by Ideal or 3M. d) Make fixture and device taps with Scotchlock self-stripping electrical tap connectors. e) Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal strips and other similar terminal points with insulated solderless terminal connectors. Terminate all stranded conductor terminal points with insulated solderless terminal connectors. Provide Thomas & Betts Sa-Kon insulated terminals and connectors or equivalent by API/AMP Blackburn, Buchanan, or Scotchlock. f) Where a total of six (6) or more control and feeder conductors terminate in a multiple device panel or enclosure that has no built-in terminal blocks, provide mounting channel and see-through covers. Equivalent terminal blocks by General Electric, Square D, or approved equal. g) Wrap conductor taps and connections requiring additional insulation with a minimum of three (3) overlapped layers of 3M Scotch vinyl plastic electrical tape No. 88 or equivalent.

16B-14 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: a) Provide continuous color coding for feeder, branch, and control circuits. Insulation or identification tape color shall be same color for like circuits throughout. Where specified insulation colors are not available in larger wire sizes, color code conductor at all accessible locations with Scotch 35 all- weather color code tape. b) Identify the same phase conductor with same color throughout. c) Provide conductors with color coding indicated. Where more than one standard voltage system is installed, provide same colored conductors with indicated tape or stripe to indicate system voltage.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p10

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

SYSTEM INSULATION VOLTAGE CIRCUIT COLOR 120/208 Neutral White 120/208 Phase A Black 120/208 Phase B Blue 120/208 Phase C Red 120/208 Phase A Switch Brown 120/208 Phase C Switch Yellow 120/208 Control Pink 120/208 3-Way Sw Runner Purple 120/208 Control Pink 120/208 Equip. Ground Green

16B-15 FUSES: a) Provide fuses of same manufacturer and characteristics as scheduled to insure selective coordination of power system. Fuses shall be Bussmann or equivalent by Gould Shawmut or Brush. b) Install fuses only after installation is complete and final tests and inspections have been made. Label fuses, switches, and other fused devices with warning labels affixed in prominent location indicating type and size of fuse installed and fuse manufacturer’s catalog number. Labels are supplied in fuse cartons. c) Furnish Owner with spare fuses of each size and type installed on job as follows:

601 Amps or larger Three (3) of each size and type. 600 Amps or less 10% with minimum of three (3) of each size and type. d) Obtain receipt from Owner’s representative showing date, quantity, and size of spare fuses delivered to Owner. Submit two (2) copies of receipt to A/E and bind one (1) copy in Owner’s shop drawing manual. e) Provide fuses with casings to match fuse holder dimensions. Fuse reducers shall not be used without prior approval of D/E. f) Fuse shop drawings shall contain a schedule listing fuse type and size to be provided in each switch or fuse block. Also, provide a list indicating type, size, and quantity of spare fuses to be provided to Owner. g) Fuse types shown in equipment schedules are Bussmann type designations unless otherwise indicated.

16B-16 SAFETY SWITCHES: a) Provide heavy duty and general duty horsepower rated safety switches rated in accordance with NEMA enclosed Switch Standard KS-1 – 1975 and UL 98 and as scheduled. b) Enclosure shall be NEMA type required by switch location and environment. Enclosure door shall have latch with means for padlocking and cover interlock with defeater to prevent opening door when switch is energized or closing switch with door open. Switch shall have an embossed nameplate permanently attached to door front with switch rating, short circuit interrupting capacity, and application information. c) Line terminals shall be permanently marked and shielded. Contacts shall be tin plated, equipped with arc chutes, and have moving contacts visible in off-position with door open. Wiring terminals shall be pressure type suitable for copper or aluminum wire. Switching mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break, spring driven, anti-tease mechanism, and be integral part of box. All current carrying parts shall be plated. GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p11

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

d) Fuse holders for 1 to 600 amperes shall be high pressure type for use with Class R current limiting fuses. Fuse holders shall be completely accessible from front of switch. e) Provide switches by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, ITE/Siemens,or Square D. f) See schedule.

16B-17 LIGHTING CONTACTORS: a) Provide 600 volt, 60 cycle mechanically or electrically held lighting contactors with proper NEMA enclosure required by contactor location and environment. b) Contactors shall have silver alloy, double break power contacts replaceable without removing power wiring or contactor from enclosure. c) Coils shall be molded case construction permanently marked with coil voltage and frequency and be replaceable without removing contactor from enclosure. d) Provide contactor with internal wiring and control circuits prewired with only line, load, and external control circuits wiring connections required. Provide contactor with built-in clearing interlocks to allow control from either momentary or maintained pilot devices. e) Contactor shall be suitable for addition of at least two (2) electrical interlocks of any arrangement of normally open or closed contacts. f) Provide contactor with accessories such as auxiliary contacts, pilot lights, on-off, or HOA switches required to obtain control sequence shown on plans or specified. Accessories shall be available as kits for field installation or modification. g) Where three (3) or more contactors are installed at one location, contactors may be installed in group control panel in lieu of separate devices. h) Contactors by Allen-Bradley, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Furnas, ITE, Challenger, Square D, or General Electric. i) See schedule.

16B-18 WALL SWITCHES: a) Provide Leviton NEMA WD-1 – 1974 switches with compound handles. Install groups of switches under one (1) coverplate. b) Provide switches White in color. c) Switches controlling loads of 1800 watts or less shall be as follows unless specified otherwise:

TYPE CATALOG # AMP VOLTAGE Single Pole LE 1221-2 20 120/277 Three Way LE 1223-2 20 120/277 Four Way LE 1224-2 20 120/277 Pilot Light LE 1221-PL 20 120/277 Momentary Contact LE 1257 20 120/277 Double Pole LE 1222-2 20 120/277 Single Pole, Key Op. LE 1221-2L 20 120/277 Three Way, Key Op. LE 1223-2L 20 120/277

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p12

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO d) Where switches are shown side-by-side in the same location, or shown in the same location on the lighting and power plans separately, gang all switches together in the same box with a single cover- plate (whether detailed specifically on the drawings, or not). e) Where wall dimmers are indicated, provide slide with on/off type rated for the full load and type it serves. Include all power extenders as required. Follow manufacturer’s requirements for de-rating switches in ganged installations. Provide back-box installation per the manufacturer’s requirements. Color of switch and coverplate shall match other wiring devices. f) Equivalent switches by Cooper Wiring, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour, Bryant, or Leviton. g) Electric timer switches shall be Leviton Model 6230M or Watt Stopper Model TS-200 in color to match other wiring devices.

16B-19 RECEPTACLES: a) Standard receptacles shall be heavy duty, hospital grade, duplex, white, grounding, three-wire type with parallel slots rated 20 amperes and 120 volts, Hubbell HBL 8300W or equivalent. Plates shall be smooth as required for groups of receptacles under one (1) wall plate. Plates shall be set plumb and parallel with wall. Wall plates shall be labeled with typed adhesive to indicated panelboard and circuit number serving device. Provide White hospital grade receptacles for where indicated on plans for non-dedicated circuits. b) Dedicated circuit receptacles shall be heavy duty, hospital grade, duplex, Grey, grounding, three-wire type with parallel slots rated 20 amperes and 120 volts, Hubbell HBL 8300GY or equivalent. Plates shall be smooth as required for groups of receptacles under one (1) wall plate. Plates shall be set plumb and parallel with wall. Wall plates shall be labeled with typed adhesive to indicated panelboard and circuit number serving device and with label denoting ‘dedicated’ status. Provide gray hospital grade dedicated GFCI receptacles where indicated on plans. c) GFCI receptacles, where indicated or required by code, shall be installed in accessible locations. They shall not be installed concealed behind equipment, in attics, above ceilings, inside electric water cooler housings, etc. Where a GFCI receptacle is shown on the drawings where it may be concealed, the contractor shall provide a GFCI circuit breaker in the panel. d) Equivalent receptacles by Cooper Wiring, GE, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, or approved equivalent manufacturer.

16B-20 FLUSH WALLPLATES: a) Provide Leviton high-impact nylon wallplates conforming to UL, NEMA and Federal Specification WP- 455A, color to match device. b) Provide wallplates for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone, computer, and special purpose outlets. c) Plates shall be modern design, having rounded edges and corners complete with finish-matching mounting screws. d) Provide flush wallplates on wiremold switch and receptacle boxes. e) Provide factory engraved wallplates where indicated. Where engraved text is not outlined, submit two (2) copies of proposed text to A/E for review and approval prior to engraving. f) Wallplates shall not support wiring devices. Provide wiring device accessories as required to properly install devices and wallplates.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p13

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO g) Provide wallplates of one design throughout the building. h) Provide designs and finishes equivalent to above specification where wallplates for special devices are available only from manufacturer of device. i) Verify with A/E finish of any plate where is may be apparent a special finish or color should have been specified. j) Provide narrow wallplates as indicated. k) Ganged wiring devices shall have a single wallplate. l) Provide wallplates manufactured by same company as wiring devices.

16B-21 LIGHTING FIXTURES: a) Provide fixtures complete with lamps and accessories required for hanging. E/C shall ensure that lamps, reflectors, lens, and trim are clean at time of final inspection. Mount recessed fixtures with trim flush to ceilings, free of gaps or cracks. b) Coordinate mounting of ceiling mounted lighting fixtures with G/C. Where additional ceiling or fixture supports are required due to fixture location or weight they shall be provided by E/C, unless otherwise specified under ceiling specifications. c) Provide inside frosted (IF) incandescent lamps unless otherwise called for in fixture schedule. d) Provide General Electric F32T8/SPX35/ECO fluorescent lamps, 2650 approximate initial lumens, 32 watts maximum. Equal by Sylvania or Phillips. e) Fixture lamps shall be lamp type recommended by E/M. Lamp no fixtures above E/M’s recommended maximum wattages. f) Fluorescent fixture ballast shall be Class “P” high power factor type (over 90 percent). Ballast shall comply with ANSI C82.11, certified and labeled by “CMB/ETL”, and shall be UL listed. Ballast shall have sound rating indicated on ballast case and rated as follows:

BALLAST TYPE SOUND RATING Pre-Heat – Rapid Start A Trigger Start A Instant Start B High Output C g) Provide metal halide fixtures with peak-lead auto-transformer type ballast. h) Consult Architectural plans for ceiling types and provide recessed fixtures and mounting components accordingly. All light fixture installation in fire rated ceilings shall comply with UL listing for rated assembly. i) Fixture supports shall comply with NEC 410-15 and 410-16. Provide fixture securing clips as required. j) The light fixture manufacturer shall provide a linear disconnecting means complying with NEC 410.73 for all fluorescent and double ended lamp fixtures. k) The contractor shall replace any lamps that are not operational or burn out within first 30 days after substantial completion. l) See fixture schedule.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p14

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

16B-22 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS: a) Provide dead-front panelboards with bolt-in or plug-on molded case circuit breakers and NEMA Publication PB-1 957 and UL 67 for panelboards. b) Boxes shall be galvanized steel standard width and depth except where scheduled otherwise. Fronts shall be code gauge steel finish with rust inhibiting primer and based enamel finish. Fronts shall have flush doors with flush cylinder tumbler-type locks, spring loaded door pulls, and concealed door hinges. Provide doors higher than 48 inches with three (3) point catch. Panel door locks shall be keyed alike. Provide fronts designed for flush or surface mounting as indicated and attached to box by adjustable trim clamps. c) Provide tin-finished copper bars full length of panel with rating listed in schedule. Bus bar connections to branch circuit breakers shall be “Phase Sequence” type designed and assembled so circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent breakers or without removing main bus or branch circuit connectors. Provide bus bars with wire lugs suitable or copper or aluminum conductors. Provide each panel with equipment grounding bus grounded to box and neutral bus insulated from box. d) Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break with trip indication. Circuit breakers shall operate both manually for normal switch functions and automatically under overload and short circuit conditions. They shall provide circuit and self protection when applied within their rating. Operating mechanisms shall be entirely trip free so that contacts cannot be held closed against a short circuit. Operating handle of circuit breaker shall simultaneously open and close all poles of a multiple breaker. Circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA P1311-11 964 and be approved by UL. Circuit breaker shall have a thermal magnetic trip unit for each pole for inverse time delayed overload protection and an instantaneous magnetic element for short circuit protection. Trip elements shall operate a common internally connected trip bar to open all poles in case of overload or short circuit through any one (1) pole. Panel shall provide for branch circuit breakers up to 100 amperes, and unless indicated otherwise, shall have 10,000 RMS short circuit amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity. Breakers shall be one, two, or three pole types as indicated in panel schedule. e) Panels shall have branch circuit directory holders with clear plastic cover. Provide neatly typed circuit directory listing loads corresponding to branch circuit numbers. f) Provide one spare 0.75 inch conduit for every three (3) spaces and/or blank spaces with a minimum of three (3) spare conduits per panel. Terminate conduit above ceilings unless indicated otherwise. g) Panelboard shall be General Electric, ITE/Siemens or Square D. h) See schedule.

16B-23 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: a) Panelboards shall be the I-Line distribution panelboards as manufactured by Square-D. b) Provide distribution and power panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. Panelboard shall conform to NEMA PB1-1957 and UL 67 for panelboards. c) Panelboard bus structure and main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50 deg C rise above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p15

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO d) Branch circuit breakers shall be Square D FA, KA, LA, MA, NH, PA and/or PC 1-, 2-, or 3-pole molded case circuit breakers rated 15 through 2500 amperes, (120 V ac) (240 V ac) (277 v ac) (480 C ac), as specified on the drawings. Breakers shall be standard construction. All circuit breakers shall be UL and CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated, meet NEMA AB1-1975, and Federal Specification W-C 375B/GEN, when applicable. Molded case circuit breakers shall have over center toggle-type mechanisms, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. 2- and 3-pole breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 100 amperes shall have variable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment (to assure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole). A push-to-trip button shall be provided on the cover from mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Unless otherwise indicated, branch circuit breakers up to 100 amperes shall have 10,000 RMS short circuit amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity. Circuit breakers above 100 ampere shall have 42,000 RMS capacities. e) Each panelboard, a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. f) Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler-type lock on door of trim. Doors over 48 inches long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. Endwalls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. Gray baked enamel finish electro-deposited over clean phosphatized steel. g) The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers. h) Equivalent manufacturers shall be General Electric, ITE/Siemens or Square D.

16B-24 GROUNDING: a) Electrical service provided as part of shell building contract. Coordinate grounding of facility with shell building electrical service and verify the following requirements are met per the NEC. b) Supplement grounded neutral of secondary distribution system with equipment grounding system, installed so that metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment, and other conductive items operate continuously at ground potential and provide low impedance path for ground fault currents. System shall comply with NEC, modified as indicated on drawings as specified. c) Ground all metallic water piping systems (domestic water, etc.) in the building to electrical service ground with a minimum 3/0 or as required green insulated copper ground conductor, in conduit. Where a dielectric fitting is installed anywhere in the system, or where a non-conductive fitting is installed, the piping system on each side of the fitting shall be separately bonded. On the main water service, connect ground conductor to building side of dielectric water fittings. Do not install jumpers around dielectric water fittings. Bond piping to ground conductor at each end. Provide 3/0 jumper with GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p16

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

ground clamps around water meter. Coordinate with mechanical contractor and include all associated costs in the base bid. d) Provide grounding electrode system as required by the applicable National Electrical Code Section 250. e) Connect system neutral ground and equipment ground system to common ground bus. f) Ground secondary services at supply side of each individual secondary disconnecting means and at related transformers in accordance with NEC. Provide each service disconnect enclosure with neutral disconnecting means which interconnect with insulated neutral and uninsulated equipment ground sub to establish system common ground point. Neutral disconnecting links shall be located so that low voltage neutral bar with interior secondary neutrals can be isolated from common ground bus and service entrance conductors. g) Required equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in compliance with NEC Table 250-66. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided with green Type TW 600 volt insulation. Related feeder and branch circuit grounding conductors shall be connected to ground bus with approved pressure connectors. Provide feeder servicing several panelboards with a continuous grounding conductor connected to each related panelboard ground bus. h) Aluminum conductors, straps, or bars may be substituted for copper items of consistent with materials used for phase conductors. Substitute materials shall be comparable in current carrying capacity, temperature rise, and mechanical strength. Installation shall include necessary precautions regarding terminations with dissimilar metals. i) Provide low voltage distribution system with a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single or 3-phase feeder and each branch circuit except as specified herein. Where more than one branch circuit is installed in a common raceway only one grounding conductor is required. Grounding conductor shall be sized for largest branch circuit overcurrent device serving common raceway. j) Single phase 120 volt branch circuits for lighting shall consist of phase and neutral conductors installed in common metallic conduit which shall serve as grounding conductor. Provide flexible metallic conduit utilized in conjunction with above singe phase branch circuits with suitable green insulated grounding conductors. Single phase branch circuits required for special equipment, such as X-ray, etc., feeders and branch circuits in non-metallic conduits shall be provided with separate grounding conductor. Install grounding conductor in common conduit with related phase and/or neutral conductors. Where parallel feeders are installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment grounding conductor. k) E/C shall provide equipment grounding bars for termination of equipment grounding conductors in panelboards and other electrical equipment. In addition to active circuits, provide pressure connectors for panel spares and blank spaces. E/C/ responsible for grounding of all CATV, phone, and telecommunication systems per NEC. Coordinate with system provider. l) Provide electrical expansion fitting with an external flexible copper ground securely bonded by approved grounding straps on each end of fitting except where UL approved built-in copper grounding device is provided. m) Provide non-metallic conduits or ducts with equipment grounding conductors except for conditions as follows:

1. Where ducts are for telephone or communication uses only. n) Connect each cable rack system to equipment grounding system with insulated conductor with size determined by largest power conductor in rack. Minimum size shall be No. 6 and maximum size shall

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p17

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

not exceed equivalent capacity of number 4/0 copper conductor. Ground conductor shall be bonded to rack system, enclosed in conduit, and connected to common ground bus. o) Provide electric devices such as air cleaners or heater control switches, etc., installed in air ducts with insulated equipment ground conductor sized on rating of overcurrent device supplying unit. Bond conductor to each unit, air duct, and to ground in panelboard. p) Provide steel and aluminum conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to metallic housing of electrical equipment with ground bushing and connect each bushing with bare copper conductor to ground bus in electrical equipment. Electrically non-continuous metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. q) Ground and bond exterior mounted light poles, radio and television masts and flag poles with No. 6 or larger bare copper wire connected to 96-inch long, 0.75-inch copper clad ground rod driven in ground. r) At the Contractor’s option brazing connections may be substituted with Burndy HyGround Irreversible Compression Grounding Connector system. No other alternative methods or manufacturers will be allowed without written approval by Engineer. If Burndy system is used, compression die index number must be permanently marked on connectors during crimping so that the use of the correct dies can be verified. Closed barrel connectors must have inspection holes at the appropriate location to verify proper cable insertion. s) Test complete equipment grounding system to each service disconnect enclosure ground bar with Vibroground test unit manufactured by Associated Research Inc. Resistance, without chemical treatment or other artificial means, shall not exceed 5 ohms to ground. Submit certified test reports of compliance with 5 ohm value. t) Provide a No. 6 ground conductor to all telephone/computer/television/audio/visual racks in all telephone equipment rooms (and where indicated in the contract documents) whether specifically shown or noted on the drawings. Provide a minimum of 60 inches of free wire at the termination for connection to owner-provided racks. Coordinate exact location and requirements with the owner prior to any rough-in. u) All equipment and panel grounds shall be bonded to a common building ground system per the national electric code, whether specifically shown on the electrical riser diagram or not. This includes all of the separately derived systems in the building (transformers) that are required to bond to the nearest grounding electrode. This shall be provided per section 250.30 of the NEC, by the electrical contractor and included in the base bid. Comply with all requirements by local authority having jurisdiction.

16B-25 PLENUM CABLE FIRE RATED PATHWAY DEVICE: a) General:

1. Furnish and install EZ-Path fire rated wiring devices and associated hardware as shown on the Contract Drawings or as required in all corridor/hallway fire rated walls and as hereinafter specified as manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. or equal. All devices shall be UL listed and tested in accordance with ASTME814. Equivalent by Wiremold Flamestopper or by prior approval only.

2. All devices shall be heavy-duty specification grade with an intumescent insert material allowing for 0 to 100-percent visual fill of conductors. b) Wiring devices:

1. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated wiring devices which contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions. GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p18

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

2. The device shall have an F Rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed. 3. Wiring devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100-percent visual fill of cables.

4. Wire devices shall be of a sufficient size to accommodate the quantity and size of electrical wires and data cables required.

5. Wire devices to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together. c) Installation:

1. Wiring devices shall be installed in locations as required on the Contract Drawings, arranged singly or in gangs at the height specified.

2. Install the devices in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Apply the factory supplied gasketing material prior to the installation of the wall plates.

4. Secure wall plates to devices per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

16B-26 OCCUPANCY SENSORS: a) Work Included:

1. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. b) System:

1. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

2. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

3. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. c) Products:

1. Wall switch sensors: Wall switch sensors shall be dual technology or infrared or ultrasonic sensors as indicated, color to match other light switch devices.

2. Ceiling mount sensors: Ceiling mount sensors shall be dual technology or ultrasonic or passive infrared technology for motion detection as indicated.. Sensors shall be located to minimize coverage in unwanted areas. Provide circuit control hardware to interface sensors between lighting circuits and low voltage ceiling occupancy sensor. Where (2) sensors are shown in one room sensors shall be wired so that motion detected by any sensor in that room energizes all light fixtures in the room.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p19

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

3. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads.

4. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

5. Sensors shall be equipped with adjustable time delay and sensitivity sensors. Contractor shall adjust setting per owner requirements after installation and before occupancy.

6. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

7. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures. d) Installation:

1. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

2. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. Locations shown on plans are schematic and shall be modified as required in field to accommodate obstructions and undesired exposures.

3. Equivalent manufacturer by Wattstopper, Leviton, Greengate, and Hubbell or by prior approval only.

16B-27 TIME SWITCHES: a) Provide time switches as indicated on drawings and in schedule. b) Equivalent by Intermatic, Tork, or Rainbird. c) See time switch schedule.

16B-28 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATION: a) Summary:

1. This section includes fire alarm systems, including manual stations, detectors, notification appliances, signal equipment, controls, smoke control and devices.

2. Work covered by this specification section includes the furnishing of labor, equipment, materials, and complete operational performance required for installation of the fire alarm system as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as directed by the A/E.

3. The work covered by this section of the specification is to be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p20

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

4. The fire alarm system shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software programming to perform the following functions:

A. Fire alarm and detection operations.

B. Remote manual and automatic control of elevators, door hold-open devices, fire suppression appliances, and/or off-premise notification.

C. Dual line DACT communicator with modem for external, remote supervision monitoring coordinated with owner’s current supervision system. b) System Descriptions:

1. General: Complete, non-coded, addressable, microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation.

2. The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.

3. The system shall have the capability of loading software operations from a single node to all other nodes on the network.

4. New fire alarm system shall integrate with existing fire alarm system that feeds adjacent tenant spaces to monitor systems.

5. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall be provided.

6. Audible Alarm Notification: Transmission shall be addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.

7. System connections for alarm-initiation and alarm-notification circuits shall be Class B.

8. Remote Access:

A. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall have the capability to provide remote access through a dial-up service modem using the public switched telephone system of a private switched telephone system.

B. A personal computer or technician’s laptop, configured with terminal emulation software shall have the ability to access the FACP for diagnostics, maintenance reporting, and information gathering.

9. Functional Description: The following are required system functions and operating features:

A. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Priority two (2) supervisory service and trouble signals have second-, third-, and fourth-level priority. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p21

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

B. Non-interfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one (1) zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal.

C. Signal Initiation: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm–initiating or supervisory- operating device shall cause the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including:

i. General alarm.

ii. Fire-suppression alarm.

iii. Manual station alarm.

iv. Smoke detector alarm.

v. Heat detector alarm.

vi. Fan shutdown.

vii. Door release.

viii. System trouble.

D. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station service transmitter using a digital communication unit provided in this system.

E. Loss of primary power at the FACP shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP and shall indicate at the FACP when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.

F. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated both on the FACP and on the remote annunciator.

G. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Shall display plain-language description of alarms, trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands.

H. General Alarm: A system general alarm shall include:

i. Indicating the general alarm condition at the FACP and the remote annunciator.

ii. Identifying the device at the FACP and annunciator.

iii. All audible alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously until the alarm silence switch is operated.

iv. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders.

v. Shut down of RTU supply/return fans.

vi. Notification at local fire department.

vii. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm notification appliances.

I. Smoke Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment:

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p22

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

i. Authorized operation of controls at the FACP shall cause the selection of specific addressable smoke sensors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings.

J. Remote Controllability: Individually monitor sensors at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition; and individually adjust for sensitivity from the FACP. The alarm decision for each sensor shall be determined by the control unit. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.

K. The sensitivity of each sensor will be as high as it can possibly be for its location without being so sensitive that it will be nuisance alarm-prone.

L. Smoke Sensor Sensitivity: Between 0.2 and 3.7 percent-per-foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268.

M. The control unit shall maintain a moving average of the sensors smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust, dirt, and component degradation conditions that could affect detection operations. The control unit shall automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors.

N. The control unit shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor’s average value reaches a predetermined value, a “DIRTY SENSOR” trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control unit for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a “DIRTY SENSOR” is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an “EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR” trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these “DIRTY” conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation.

O. The control unit shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values transmitted to the control unit. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a “SELF TEST ABNORMAL” trouble condition.

10. Alarm Silencing:

A. If the “Alarm Silence” button is pressed, all audio alarm signals shall cease operation.

B. Signals shall not be silenced during the 90 second alarm silence inhibit mode.

11. System Reset:

A. The “System Reset” button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. Display message shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (“IN PROGRESS,” RESET COMPLETED”) as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared.

B. Should an alarm condition continue, the system shall remain in an alarmed state. Systems control relays shall not reset. The control unit alarm LED shall remain on. The alarmed points will not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged.

12. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should an actual alarm occur, all alarm functions would occur as described previously.

13. Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the selected automatic functions. GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p23

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

14. The system shall have a single key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions including the time of each occurrence.

15. The actuation of the “enable one person test” program at the control unit shall activate the “One Person Testing” mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur:

A. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed.

B. Control relay functions shall be bypassed.

C. The control unit shall show a trouble condition.

D. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible notification appliances to sound a code to identify the device.

E. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete.

F. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for four (4) seconds indicating the trouble condition.

G. The system shall have the capacity of eight (8) programmable passcode protected “One Person” testing groups.

16. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an “OFF NORMAL” position of any switch shall cause an “OFF NORMAL” system trouble. The “OFF NORMAL” status shall be clearly identified in plain-language on the FACP alphanumeric display.

17. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.

18. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound.

19. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes.

20. Power Requirements:

A. The control unit shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated circuit. Provide with a lockable handle or cover on circuit breaker serving fire alarm control panel, breaker shall be painted red and labeled “FIRE ALARM”.

B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with five (5) minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

C. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control unit. A green “Power On” LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

D. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the control unit. A green “power on” LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p24

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

E. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit.

F. The system shall support 100 percent of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.

G. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. FACP shall indicate when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. c) Submittals:

1. General: Submit the following according to conditions of contract and Division 16 specification sections.

2. Product Data for System Components: Include dimensioned plans and elevations showing minimum clearances and installed feature and devices. Include list of materials and NRTL-listing data.

3. Submissions to Authority Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submissions of the above material, make an identical submission to the authority having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated contract drawings as required to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from the authority, submit them for review. Make resubmissions if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval.

4. The submittal shall also include one set of plans with all devices located on the plans and numbered individually. It shall also include a detailed riser diagram with all devices and wiring requirements indicated on the plans. The fire alarm shop drawings shall not be approved without this submittal.

5. Submittals shall include documentation on UV protection for all detector housings. Detectors of any kind which discolor (turn yellow) when subjected to fluorescent lighting shall not be accepted. The manufacturer shall warrant that all detectors which discolor shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. d) Quality Assurance:

1. Installer Qualifications: A factory-authorized installer is to perform the work of this section.

2. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances and regulations, and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

3. All items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single manufacturer under the appropriate category of UL shall be the UL label. e) Manufacturers:

1. Base design shall be Simplex.

2. Equivalent Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

A. Firelite. B. EST C. Gamewell FCI D. Notifier.

3. Request for substitutions shall be in accordance with Section 16A.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p25

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO f) Manual Pull Stations:

1. Description: addressable, double-action, Simplex 4099 to 9003 with Flush Mounting Plate 2099 to 9819. g) Smoke Sensors:

1. General: Comply with UL 268, “Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.” Include the following features:

A. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.

B. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.

C. Addressability: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in the mounting base having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. Detectors that store the device address in the head shall be acceptable. Sensors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore normal operation.

D. Each sensor base shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control unit (once every 4 seconds). In alarm condition, the sensor base LED shall be on steady.

E. Each sensor base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for an easy alarm testing at the sensor location.

F. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control unit for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. Upon detection of a “wrong device,” the control unit shall operate with the installed device at the default alarm settings for that sensor; 2.5 percent obscuration for photoelectric sensor, 135 deg F and 15 deg F rate-of-rise for heat sensor, but shall indicate a “wrong device” trouble condition.

G. The sensor’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.

H. Removal of the sensor head for cleaning shall not require the setting of addresses.

2. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features and characteristics:

A. An infrared detector light with matching silicon cell receiver and actuated by the presence of visible products of combustion. Must have seven sensitivity settings and transmit actual values to the FACP. Simplex 4098 series.

3. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applicable.

A. The addressable duct smoke sensors shall operate on the light scattering, photo-diode principle, and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control. The sensors shall not have a self contained smoke sensitivity setting and shall automatically communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control unit. The sensor’s electronics shall be shielded to protect against nuisance alarms from EMI and RFI.

B. The duct housing shall provide a supervised relay driver circuit for driving up to 15 relays with a single “Form C” contact rated at 7A at 28 VDC or 120 VAC resistive. This auxiliary relay output shall be fully programmable.

C. Duct housing shall have a relay control trouble indicator yellow LED, and a magnetic test area and red sensor status LED.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p26

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

D. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover.

E. Each duct detector shall have a remote test station with an alarm LED and test switch located in an accessible location. Coordinate with electrical and mechanical contractor.

F. Simplex 4098 series.

4. All detector housing shall be UV protected for use with indirect fluorescent lighting. h) Alarm Notification Appliances:

1. Notification Appliances: The Contractor shall furnish and install non-addressable notification appliances and accessories to operate on compatible signaling line circuits (SLC).

2. Addressable notification appliance operation shall provide power, separate control, and supervision of horns and strobes over a single pair of wires. The controlling channel (SLC) digitally communicates with each appliance and receives a response to verify the appliance’s presence on the channel. The channel provides a digital command to control appliance operation.

3. SLC channel wiring shall be unshielded twisted pair (UTP), with capacitance rate of less than 60 pf/ft and a minimum of three (3) twists per foot.

4. Class B (Style 4) notification appliances shall be wired without requiring in/out wiring methods; addressable “T” tapping shall be used. Up to 63 appliances can be supported on a single channel.

5. Visible/Only (V/O): Strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The V/O enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang, or 4-inch square electrical box without the use of special adapters or trim rings. Appliances shall be wired with UTP conductors, having a minimum of three (3) twists per foot. V/O appliances shall be provided with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 75cd, and 100cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific V/O appliance.

6. Audible/Visible (A/V): Combination A/V notification appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 80 dBA at 24 VDC. The A/V enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang, or 4-inch square electrical box without the use of special adapters or trim rings.

7. Appliances shall be wired with UTP conductors, having a minimum of three (3) twists per foot. The appliance shall be capable of 2-wire synchronization to provide synchronized strobe with steady or coded pattern on horn. Simplex 4903 series. i) Addressable Circuit Interface Modules:

1. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules: Arrange to monitor one (1) or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, non-addressable devices, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems. Provide connection for all devices provided by sprinkler contractor whether indicated on drawings or not.

2. Addressable circuit interface modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Modules will include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Modules will receive their operating power from the signaling line or separate 2-wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as required. GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p27

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

3. The circuit interface module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing according to the program instructions. Modules shall have an on-board LED to provide an indication that the module is powered and communicating with the FACP. The LEDs shall provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on poll whenever the peripheral is powered and communicating. j) Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Simplex 4010 Series:

1. General: Comply with UL 864, “Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.”

2. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red-laminated, phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1-inch high.

3. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm- initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug-in modules. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is not acceptable.

4. Control Modules: Types and capacities required to perform all functions of the fire alarm systems. Local, visible, and audible signals notify of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions.

5. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arrange to provide the basic interface between human operator at FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. A display with a minimum of 80 characters displays alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and indicates control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. Arrange keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.

6. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a LEXAN plastic or glass cover in a painted steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals; and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

7. Addressable Network:

A. Communication with Addressable Devices: The system must provide communication with initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices will be individually annunciated at the control panel.

B. All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually.

C. A minimum of 10,000 total feet of twisted, shielded 18 AWG wire may be connected to channel. Maximum distance from the panel to the farthest device shall be 2,500 feet.

8. Historical event logs shall be available from the LCD display or shall be capable of being printed.

9. Minimum panel capacity shall be 99 addressable devices with the ability to support 198 addressable devices. Panel shall include provisions for expansion modules to support future additions. k) Remote Annunciator(s):

1. Provide LCD remote annunciator(s) in location as indicated on the plans.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p28

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO l) Installation – General:

1. Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this section. m) Equipment Installation:

1. Break Rods for Minimum Stations: Furnish quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of manual stations installed: minimum of 6 rods.

A. Pluggable LED’s for Remote Indicating Panels: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed; but not less than one.

B. Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than one.

C. Smoke Sensors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type.

D. Sensor Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type. n) Wiring Installation:

1. Wiring Method: Install wiring as indicated in the division 16 specifications.

2. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plugs connectors.

3. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made.

4. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color-code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

5. Fan Shutdown: Air handling equipment shall be connected to relays in its respective duct smoke detector. Interlock wiring shall be provided by this contractor. o) Grounding:

1. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields as specified by the equipment manufacturer. For audio circuits minimize to the greatest extent possible ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. p) Field Quality Control:

1. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

2. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p29

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

3. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests.

4. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

5. Minimum Systems Tests: Test the systems according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows:

A. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.

B. Megger test all conductors other than those intentionally and permanently grounded with electronic components disconnected. Test for resistance to ground. Report readings less than 1 megohm for evaluation.

C. Test all conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation-testing device.

D. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings.

E. Verify the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manual.

F. Test initiating, notification, and signaling circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating and notification devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.

G. Test each initiating device and notification appliance for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.

H. Measure and record the actual current draw of each notification appliance circuit.

I. Test the system for all specified functions according to the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified function performance items at each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communication options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications.

J. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.

6. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and complete retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the specifications and complies with applicable standards.

7. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.

8. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. Final test, certificate of completion, and certificate of occupancy.

9. Test the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of occupancy. Demonstrate that the system meets the specifications and complies with applicable

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p30

DAVITA DIALYSIS CLINIC CLINTON, MO

standards. This final test shall be witnessed by a representative of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and a factory authorized service representative. q) Cleaning and Adjusting:

1. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

2. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one-year of date of substantial completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three (3) visits to the site for this purpose.

END OF SECTION 16B

GENERAL POWER AND LIGHTING 16B p31